Position Vacant GIS Engineer (Walk-In Interview on 22nd August to 25th August 2007)
Company NameRamtech Software Solutions Pvt. Ltd.
Company Profile ISO 9001:2000 certified software services company with State-of-the-Art development centers at Delhi , Hyderabad,Chennai,Bhubneswar and subsidiaries in US & Middle East.
Job Description
Walk-In Interview on 22nd August to 25th August for GIS Engineer.
TIMING:- Between 0900hrs to 1600hrs
VENUE:- RAMTECH SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS PVT. LTD.
D-4,Phase-I,Okhla,
New Delhi.
Desired Profile
-Diploma / Degree in Engg. with minimum 1 year experience in conversion of Mechanical Cad Drafting projects / Digitizing.
-Fresher also can apply but must have undergone formal training on AutoCAD.
Maximum Experience 5 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area Other
Annual Salary Best In Industry
Location Delhi
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Keywords Autocad , GIS , Cad Operator , Designing , GIS Engineer , Drafting , Draftsman
Reference RSSPL/GISEG/07/08/22
Contact Information
Telephone 91-011-26815840,26815841
Website http://www.ramtech-corp.com
Address Ramtech Corporation
D-4, okhla industrial area
Phase-I,
New Delhi
Delhi - New Delhi ,INDIA 110021
Friday, August 24, 2007
iGate forB.Sc/BCA Freshers on 25th August
Scheduled Walkin event for B.Sc/BCA Freshers on 25th August
Job Description
iGATE is looking for B.Sc/BCA Freshers to be part of our IMS team. We are looking for Systems Associates who would be part of iGate Global IMS (Infrastructure Management Services) team
Initial posting would be based out of our Bangalore campus.
Will be trained for monitoring, administration and production support tasks on Windows/Unix/AS 400, Oracle, SQL and other technologies
Will be responsible to provide services to IMS global customers
Pre-requisites:
BSC/BCA (CS or Electronics), completed in 2006/2007 batch only
Must have a minimum of 60% score in 10th, 12th and Graduation exams
Good communication skills
Must be willing to work in 24/7 shifts.
ONLY CANDIDATES HAVING A MINIMUM OF 60% SCORE IN 10th,12th & GRADUATION NEED APPLY.
If you fulfil the above criteria, please send us your updated CV and we will reach out to you with a interview schedule.
Job Description
iGATE is looking for B.Sc/BCA Freshers to be part of our IMS team. We are looking for Systems Associates who would be part of iGate Global IMS (Infrastructure Management Services) team
Initial posting would be based out of our Bangalore campus.
Will be trained for monitoring, administration and production support tasks on Windows/Unix/AS 400, Oracle, SQL and other technologies
Will be responsible to provide services to IMS global customers
Pre-requisites:
BSC/BCA (CS or Electronics), completed in 2006/2007 batch only
Must have a minimum of 60% score in 10th, 12th and Graduation exams
Good communication skills
Must be willing to work in 24/7 shifts.
ONLY CANDIDATES HAVING A MINIMUM OF 60% SCORE IN 10th,12th & GRADUATION NEED APPLY.
If you fulfil the above criteria, please send us your updated CV and we will reach out to you with a interview schedule.
Infotech freshers walkin
Founded in 1991, Infotech is a $120million(Estimate) Global IT services company with over 5500 people specializing in Engineering Design Services (EDS), Geographic Information Systems (GIS), and IT services. We provide services to a wide range of industries - Aerospace, Rail, Marine, Automotive, Oil and Gas, Energy, Telecommunications, Government, Other Utilies, Retail, Banking Sevices, Finance and Insurance.
Infotech has a distinctive business model:
Designation Walk -in for BSC Freshers 2004/05/06/07 Passouts 26th August 2007
Job Description BSC Freshers 2004/05/06/07 Passouts with 60 % aggregate
Candidates should have good communication and should be computer savvy
Aptitude Test will be on: 26th Aug'07 (Sunday), 1 PM
Venue:
Infotech Enterprises Limited
Plot No.11, Software Units Layout
Infocity, Madhapur
Hyderabad.
Desired Profile The Selected candidates would be working on:
1.Map Creation
2.Should be interested in Map creating field (GIS) mainly road network creation.
3.The candidates would be trained on the above.
Selected candidates should be willing to work in shifts
Experience 0
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area Engineering Design / R&D
Education UG - B.Sc - Any Specialization
PG - Post Graduation Not Required
Location Hyderabad / Secunderabad
Keywords BSC , B.Sc , BSc
Contact Infotech Enterprises Ltd
Infotech Enterprises Ltd.,
Plot No.11, Software Units Layout
Infocity, Madhapur, Hyderabad
Hyderabad - Andhrapradesh 500081
Website http://www.infotech-enterprises.com
Infotech has a distinctive business model:
Designation Walk -in for BSC Freshers 2004/05/06/07 Passouts 26th August 2007
Job Description BSC Freshers 2004/05/06/07 Passouts with 60 % aggregate
Candidates should have good communication and should be computer savvy
Aptitude Test will be on: 26th Aug'07 (Sunday), 1 PM
Venue:
Infotech Enterprises Limited
Plot No.11, Software Units Layout
Infocity, Madhapur
Hyderabad.
Desired Profile The Selected candidates would be working on:
1.Map Creation
2.Should be interested in Map creating field (GIS) mainly road network creation.
3.The candidates would be trained on the above.
Selected candidates should be willing to work in shifts
Experience 0
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area Engineering Design / R&D
Education UG - B.Sc - Any Specialization
PG - Post Graduation Not Required
Location Hyderabad / Secunderabad
Keywords BSC , B.Sc , BSc
Contact Infotech Enterprises Ltd
Infotech Enterprises Ltd.,
Plot No.11, Software Units Layout
Infocity, Madhapur, Hyderabad
Hyderabad - Andhrapradesh 500081
Website http://www.infotech-enterprises.com
Bajaj Capital Limited
Walk in interview for Executive/Manager post :24/25th Aug07
Location: dehradun
Experience 0 - 3 years
Industry Type Banking / Financial Services / Stock Broking
Functional Area Sales / BD
Keyword executive , manager , financial services , financial company , insurance , mutual funds , financial advisory , indore , finance,
Location Dehradun
Job Description
1) Advisory services to the clients about various financial services of company.
2)To achieve branch targets through selling of mutual funds,life insurance,general insurance ,fixed imcome.
3)To initate marketing activities in coordination with marketing team at HO to build brand presence.
4)main focus is to acquire new clients,activating inactive clients
Desired Profile
Candidate should have relevant exp in financial advisory and sales.Good communication and presentaton skills.
Local canidates of dehradun will be given preference
Contact Information Name Mr.Satyendra Negi
Address
Bajaj Capital Limited
pokhrial house,67/3
Rajpur road
Opp Meedo Plaza
Dehradun - uttaranchal ,I 248001
Location: dehradun
Experience 0 - 3 years
Industry Type Banking / Financial Services / Stock Broking
Functional Area Sales / BD
Keyword executive , manager , financial services , financial company , insurance , mutual funds , financial advisory , indore , finance,
Location Dehradun
Job Description
1) Advisory services to the clients about various financial services of company.
2)To achieve branch targets through selling of mutual funds,life insurance,general insurance ,fixed imcome.
3)To initate marketing activities in coordination with marketing team at HO to build brand presence.
4)main focus is to acquire new clients,activating inactive clients
Desired Profile
Candidate should have relevant exp in financial advisory and sales.Good communication and presentaton skills.
Local canidates of dehradun will be given preference
Contact Information Name Mr.Satyendra Negi
Address
Bajaj Capital Limited
pokhrial house,67/3
Rajpur road
Opp Meedo Plaza
Dehradun - uttaranchal ,I 248001
wipro recruties HR Executive
Designation HR Executive
Experience 0 - 5 years
Keyword HR Executive
Location Bangalore
Job Description
Role and Responsibilities: Coordination between teams, Report generation
Skills & Requirements:
Good communication skills, good in MS Excel, co-ordination skills. The candidate should have minimum of 6 months - 2 years of experience in recruitment related activities. Should have good knowledge of MS Office utilities. Candidates with any ERP application knowledge will be given preference. Should have good communication and interpersonal skills. Must be a quick learner and good team player. Should be able to interact with various teams and operate independently. Should be willing to stretch beyond normal working hours, if required.
Apply If you have 6 Months exp in Recruitment.
Reference: HR
Email suchin.bhat@wipro.com
Experience 0 - 5 years
Keyword HR Executive
Location Bangalore
Job Description
Role and Responsibilities: Coordination between teams, Report generation
Skills & Requirements:
Good communication skills, good in MS Excel, co-ordination skills. The candidate should have minimum of 6 months - 2 years of experience in recruitment related activities. Should have good knowledge of MS Office utilities. Candidates with any ERP application knowledge will be given preference. Should have good communication and interpersonal skills. Must be a quick learner and good team player. Should be able to interact with various teams and operate independently. Should be willing to stretch beyond normal working hours, if required.
Apply If you have 6 Months exp in Recruitment.
Reference: HR
Email suchin.bhat@wipro.com
SAP labs India is Hiring
Job Description
SAP labs India is Hiring. We are looking for Freshers. This is for one of our team-RSD, Bangalore.
Job Description:
This is for the service delivery requirement.
It is IT support role (more of a analytical role giving recommendation to the clients) involving shifts including night shift after 1yr
We would require Competent communicator (both written and verbal skills in English) with strong customer focus.
Aspirants, who have taken an interview with us in the past six months /have received this invitation earlier, please ignore this mail/need not apply.
Job location will be in Bangalore
Education: B.E/B.Tech, MCA, M.E/M.Tech/MS
Job Location: Bangalore
Key Skills: Freshers
SAP labs India is Hiring. We are looking for Freshers. This is for one of our team-RSD, Bangalore.
Job Description:
This is for the service delivery requirement.
It is IT support role (more of a analytical role giving recommendation to the clients) involving shifts including night shift after 1yr
We would require Competent communicator (both written and verbal skills in English) with strong customer focus.
Aspirants, who have taken an interview with us in the past six months /have received this invitation earlier, please ignore this mail/need not apply.
Job location will be in Bangalore
Education: B.E/B.Tech, MCA, M.E/M.Tech/MS
Job Location: Bangalore
Key Skills: Freshers
Tuesday, August 21, 2007
Interviews in Patni,Mumbai on 25th August for Testing Professionals
Designation Software Specialist(test Lead)/Sr.Software Specialist
Skills Required
Test case creation
Ability to lead a team of 10-15(For test lead)
Test planning, estimation, status reporting
Automation skills
Experience in Years: 3yrs to 8yrs
Qualification: B.E& Equivalent
Desired Profile Reporting Manager: For Test Lead--- To Project / Test Manager
Prepare test plans, test strategies
Prepare estimations
Create & Execute test cases
Handle customer communications
Good Exp in any functional testing tool QTP, Silktest, etester, test partner, winrunner, QArun, rational robo, rational functional tester
Experience 3 - 8
Location Mumbai
Keywords test lead, loadrunner, winrunner, silktest, QTP, rational robo, silk test
IF YOU ARE ELIGIBLE, PLEASE SEND YOUR PROFILE IN WORD FORMAT TO anis.mankar@patni.com
Skills Required
Test case creation
Ability to lead a team of 10-15(For test lead)
Test planning, estimation, status reporting
Automation skills
Experience in Years: 3yrs to 8yrs
Qualification: B.E& Equivalent
Desired Profile Reporting Manager: For Test Lead--- To Project / Test Manager
Prepare test plans, test strategies
Prepare estimations
Create & Execute test cases
Handle customer communications
Good Exp in any functional testing tool QTP, Silktest, etester, test partner, winrunner, QArun, rational robo, rational functional tester
Experience 3 - 8
Location Mumbai
Keywords test lead, loadrunner, winrunner, silktest, QTP, rational robo, silk test
IF YOU ARE ELIGIBLE, PLEASE SEND YOUR PROFILE IN WORD FORMAT TO anis.mankar@patni.com
Interview's - C#.Net on Saturday(25th August) (Location Based Pune)
Job Description We are looking for C#.net professionals with 3+yrs exp in software industry...
Desired Profile -BE/MCA/MS/MSC
- Good reputed university (Candidates from Nagarjuna University and Osmania University will not be considered)
-Personal:
-Good communication skills
Requirements:
. 3 to 6 years experience with .NET web technologies also ADO.NET/SQL experience is must
. Strong web application design skills and interface design with good usability analysis
. Good C# with strong OO fundamentals is must
. XML, XSLT, Java script, CSS, HTML
Major Responsibilities/Activities:
. Study current UI, understand existing UI library and the plug ability, come up with ideas and create HTML prototypes.
. Create a reusable, customizable and pluggable UI framework
. Change the existing UI to use this framework
Interview will be conducted on 25th August at Pune..
Keywords C# .Net, ADO, ASP .NET, AJAX, Web based
Location Pune
Contact Shilpa Khade - Patni Computer Systems Ltd
Desired Profile -BE/MCA/MS/MSC
- Good reputed university (Candidates from Nagarjuna University and Osmania University will not be considered)
-Personal:
-Good communication skills
Requirements:
. 3 to 6 years experience with .NET web technologies also ADO.NET/SQL experience is must
. Strong web application design skills and interface design with good usability analysis
. Good C# with strong OO fundamentals is must
. XML, XSLT, Java script, CSS, HTML
Major Responsibilities/Activities:
. Study current UI, understand existing UI library and the plug ability, come up with ideas and create HTML prototypes.
. Create a reusable, customizable and pluggable UI framework
. Change the existing UI to use this framework
Interview will be conducted on 25th August at Pune..
Keywords C# .Net, ADO, ASP .NET, AJAX, Web based
Location Pune
Contact Shilpa Khade - Patni Computer Systems Ltd
DE SHAW
Company DE Shaw
Location Hyderabad
Eligibility MBA (Finance)
Details
Company Profile
Since 1997, D. E. Shaw India Software has been collaborating with the US-based D. E. Shaw group of companies to produce innovative technology and outsourcing solutions. The D. E. Shaw group is a specialized investment and technology development firm whose activities center on various aspects of the fusion between technology and finance. Headquartered in New York, the D. E. Shaw group encompasses a number of closely related entities with approximately US $19 billion in aggregate capital. Activities range from computer-based quantitative investment management to the development and financing of technology-oriented business ventures, but are tied together by a common focus on the economic implications of technological innovation. Since its organization in 1988, the firm has earned an international reputation for financial innovation and technological leadership, and has been described as 'the most intriguing and mysterious force on Wall Street.'
Designation Analyst Financial Operations
Experience 0 - 1 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area Accounts / Finance / Tax / CS / Audit
Keyword Analyst Finance Finances Financial
Location Hyderabad / Secunderabad
Annual Salary Best in the industry
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Job Description
We are seeking an Analyst to join our Financial Operations team. D.E.Shaw India's Hyderabad-based Financial Operations group works with our Proprietary Trading, Accounting, Operations, Tax, and Treasury groups based in New York. Responsibilities of the group include account analysis, capital allocation and optimization, management reporting, money movement, front-office vs. back-office reconciliation, investigation of breaks/issues, and special projects.
The ideal candidate will be a motivated and organized individual with strong communication, problem-solving, interpersonal, and quantitative skills, a rigorous work ethic, and a genuine interest in finance. A degree in accounting, finance, business, or a related field is a prerequisite.
Desired Profile MBA Finance
Telephone 040 - 66390000
Website http://www.deshawindia.com
Address DE Shaw India
Email recruit-india@hyd.deshaw.com
Location Hyderabad
Eligibility MBA (Finance)
Details
Company Profile
Since 1997, D. E. Shaw India Software has been collaborating with the US-based D. E. Shaw group of companies to produce innovative technology and outsourcing solutions. The D. E. Shaw group is a specialized investment and technology development firm whose activities center on various aspects of the fusion between technology and finance. Headquartered in New York, the D. E. Shaw group encompasses a number of closely related entities with approximately US $19 billion in aggregate capital. Activities range from computer-based quantitative investment management to the development and financing of technology-oriented business ventures, but are tied together by a common focus on the economic implications of technological innovation. Since its organization in 1988, the firm has earned an international reputation for financial innovation and technological leadership, and has been described as 'the most intriguing and mysterious force on Wall Street.'
Designation Analyst Financial Operations
Experience 0 - 1 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area Accounts / Finance / Tax / CS / Audit
Keyword Analyst Finance Finances Financial
Location Hyderabad / Secunderabad
Annual Salary Best in the industry
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Job Description
We are seeking an Analyst to join our Financial Operations team. D.E.Shaw India's Hyderabad-based Financial Operations group works with our Proprietary Trading, Accounting, Operations, Tax, and Treasury groups based in New York. Responsibilities of the group include account analysis, capital allocation and optimization, management reporting, money movement, front-office vs. back-office reconciliation, investigation of breaks/issues, and special projects.
The ideal candidate will be a motivated and organized individual with strong communication, problem-solving, interpersonal, and quantitative skills, a rigorous work ethic, and a genuine interest in finance. A degree in accounting, finance, business, or a related field is a prerequisite.
Desired Profile MBA Finance
Telephone 040 - 66390000
Website http://www.deshawindia.com
Address DE Shaw India
Email recruit-india@hyd.deshaw.com
HP OPENINGS IN BANGALORE
Windows System Administrator - L3
Ref : 153814
To provide L3 support on Microsoft Windows OS platforms [servers] and Vmware, minimum 5 years of working experience [At least 3+ years on server support],microsoft certified, Microsoft Certification can be compromised provided candidate is having good technical knowledge, extensively worked on Active Directory, DNS, DHCP & Disaster Recovery, working knowledge of Web Servers, Clusters and Storage, knowledge of ITSM processes, the person should be supporting minimum 15 servers in current job, working experience or knowledge on SAN/Backup Systems, Documentation knowledge, Creating Incident Reports, Root Cause Analysis etc. Incident/problem/change management, analysis of the environment and perform root cause analysis for identified problems, relevant certifications highly desirable, multiple customers across the globe with differing shift timings and support processes, excellent communication and technical skills, need to be flexible in terms of work timings, location etc.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 5+ Years
Location : Chennai / Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
Windows System Administrator - L2
Ref : 155351
Interpersonal sensitivity and customer responsiveness excellent spoken and written communication skills. Ability to communicate complex technical contents. Strong working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows Server Operating systems (WinNT/2k/2k3). Terminal Service familiarity (remote console). Enterprise Level Security patch management--Working knowledge of technical patching. Enterprise Level knowledge of Active Directory, WINS, DNS. Server Hardware knowledge. Working knowledge and experience with Microsoft Resource Kit tools. Experience in Server Monitoring & Administration. Microsoft certified.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 3 to 5 Years
Work Location : Chennai
BU : ITO GCI
Microsoft Exchange Administrator - L2
Ref : 153763
Technical knowledge of messaging servers support like MS Exchange 5.5,2K and 2K3. At least 2 years of working experience on Windows NT, Win 2K, Win 2K3 knowledge. Understanding and support experience of SMTP and POP3. Knowledge of Back up software products like DataProtector, Veritas, Backup Exec. TetraPak and Ericsson Corporate Id. Ability and willingness to motivate and support others. Excellent in Interacting with the customer and in presentation. Good in Analytical, troubleshooting and Documentation and User Id's.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 3 to 5 Years
Work Location : Chennai
BU : ITO GCI
Microsoft Exchange Administrator - L3
Ref : 153810
Good knowledge of Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and 2003 and Exchange 5.5, Exchange 2000 and 2003. Migrations of Exchange infrastructure from Exchange 5.5 to Exchange 2000/2003 /2007, troubleshooting skills. Understanding and support experience of SMTP and POP3. Knowledge of MS LCS and Blackberry will be an added advantage. Knowledge of Active directory will be an added advantage. Migration of Exchange infrastructure using Quests EMW will be an added advantage.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 5+ Years
Location : Chennai / Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
Citrix Administrator - L2/L3
Ref : 155810
Hands on experience on Citrix Platform like XP, MPS3.0 or 4.0 and Farm Configuration. Good experience of hosting applications in Citrix, Load Balancing, Types of license, Administration, Installing Citrix and configuring ICA client software. Data store, Data Collector, and Zones. Citrix Management Console (CMC) and Administration. Good experience in Citrix Presentation server components installation manager/ Application Manager/ resource manager/ Load manager/ Printing/ Citrix Policy handler/ Web Interface/ PN agent/ PN client/ Pass through/ Citrix Secure Gateway, Should have a good trouble shooting skill
Good Knowledge in Windows NT, 2000 and 2003 including Active Directory
Non Technical: Knowledge in Ticketing tools like HP OVSD, Remedy knowledge in ITIL Concepts, Good in Written and Verbal skills.
Preferred certificates in Citrix Platform (CCA/CCEA).
Preferred certificated in Microsoft Platform (MCP/MCSA).
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 2 to 10 Years
Work Location : Chennai/Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
HP-UX System Administrator - L2
Ref: 155356
UNIX as part of their curriculum , UNIX knowledge , Good communication skills , Good learning skills , HP-UX system administrator, Server OS install/recovery/decommissioning experience, NPAR/VPAR console administration, Patch install/remove experience, Security hardening/patching experience, Performance tools experience, scripting experience.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 3 to 5 Years
Work Location : Chennai/Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
Walkin held for the above positions at our Khanija Bhavan office on Saturday , 25th Aug’07.
Venue:
Hewlett Packard
#49
Khanija Bhavan, 3rd Floor,
Race Cource Road,
Bangalore - 01
(Land Mark: Opp Taj West End)
Ph: 080 22268003
Saturday Timings: 9:00 am to 4:00pm
Contact Person - Roshini
Ref : 153814
To provide L3 support on Microsoft Windows OS platforms [servers] and Vmware, minimum 5 years of working experience [At least 3+ years on server support],microsoft certified, Microsoft Certification can be compromised provided candidate is having good technical knowledge, extensively worked on Active Directory, DNS, DHCP & Disaster Recovery, working knowledge of Web Servers, Clusters and Storage, knowledge of ITSM processes, the person should be supporting minimum 15 servers in current job, working experience or knowledge on SAN/Backup Systems, Documentation knowledge, Creating Incident Reports, Root Cause Analysis etc. Incident/problem/change management, analysis of the environment and perform root cause analysis for identified problems, relevant certifications highly desirable, multiple customers across the globe with differing shift timings and support processes, excellent communication and technical skills, need to be flexible in terms of work timings, location etc.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 5+ Years
Location : Chennai / Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
Windows System Administrator - L2
Ref : 155351
Interpersonal sensitivity and customer responsiveness excellent spoken and written communication skills. Ability to communicate complex technical contents. Strong working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows Server Operating systems (WinNT/2k/2k3). Terminal Service familiarity (remote console). Enterprise Level Security patch management--Working knowledge of technical patching. Enterprise Level knowledge of Active Directory, WINS, DNS. Server Hardware knowledge. Working knowledge and experience with Microsoft Resource Kit tools. Experience in Server Monitoring & Administration. Microsoft certified.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 3 to 5 Years
Work Location : Chennai
BU : ITO GCI
Microsoft Exchange Administrator - L2
Ref : 153763
Technical knowledge of messaging servers support like MS Exchange 5.5,2K and 2K3. At least 2 years of working experience on Windows NT, Win 2K, Win 2K3 knowledge. Understanding and support experience of SMTP and POP3. Knowledge of Back up software products like DataProtector, Veritas, Backup Exec. TetraPak and Ericsson Corporate Id. Ability and willingness to motivate and support others. Excellent in Interacting with the customer and in presentation. Good in Analytical, troubleshooting and Documentation and User Id's.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 3 to 5 Years
Work Location : Chennai
BU : ITO GCI
Microsoft Exchange Administrator - L3
Ref : 153810
Good knowledge of Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and 2003 and Exchange 5.5, Exchange 2000 and 2003. Migrations of Exchange infrastructure from Exchange 5.5 to Exchange 2000/2003 /2007, troubleshooting skills. Understanding and support experience of SMTP and POP3. Knowledge of MS LCS and Blackberry will be an added advantage. Knowledge of Active directory will be an added advantage. Migration of Exchange infrastructure using Quests EMW will be an added advantage.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 5+ Years
Location : Chennai / Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
Citrix Administrator - L2/L3
Ref : 155810
Hands on experience on Citrix Platform like XP, MPS3.0 or 4.0 and Farm Configuration. Good experience of hosting applications in Citrix, Load Balancing, Types of license, Administration, Installing Citrix and configuring ICA client software. Data store, Data Collector, and Zones. Citrix Management Console (CMC) and Administration. Good experience in Citrix Presentation server components installation manager/ Application Manager/ resource manager/ Load manager/ Printing/ Citrix Policy handler/ Web Interface/ PN agent/ PN client/ Pass through/ Citrix Secure Gateway, Should have a good trouble shooting skill
Good Knowledge in Windows NT, 2000 and 2003 including Active Directory
Non Technical: Knowledge in Ticketing tools like HP OVSD, Remedy knowledge in ITIL Concepts, Good in Written and Verbal skills.
Preferred certificates in Citrix Platform (CCA/CCEA).
Preferred certificated in Microsoft Platform (MCP/MCSA).
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 2 to 10 Years
Work Location : Chennai/Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
HP-UX System Administrator - L2
Ref: 155356
UNIX as part of their curriculum , UNIX knowledge , Good communication skills , Good learning skills , HP-UX system administrator, Server OS install/recovery/decommissioning experience, NPAR/VPAR console administration, Patch install/remove experience, Security hardening/patching experience, Performance tools experience, scripting experience.
Qualification : Bachelors degree in engineering or 10th + three year Diploma (University recognized) will be considered in exceptional cases
Experience : 3 to 5 Years
Work Location : Chennai/Bangalore
BU : ITO GCI
Walkin held for the above positions at our Khanija Bhavan office on Saturday , 25th Aug’07.
Venue:
Hewlett Packard
#49
Khanija Bhavan, 3rd Floor,
Race Cource Road,
Bangalore - 01
(Land Mark: Opp Taj West End)
Ph: 080 22268003
Saturday Timings: 9:00 am to 4:00pm
Contact Person - Roshini
EMERSON NETWORK POWER
Company Emerson Networks
Location Across India / NA
Eligibility
Details
A fast growing US MNC in manufacturing industry with its headquarters at Thane.
Designation MANAGEMENT TRAINEES-MT
Job Description Working on different functions related to different deptt. across the company in the relevent specialization.
NOTE: Candidates having an MBA/PGDBM Degree with an engineering background should only apply.
Desired Profile Working on different functions related to different deptt. across the company in the relevent specialization.
NOTE (Strictly): Candidates having an MBA/PGDBM Degree with an engineering background should only apply.
Experience 0
Industry Type Fresh Graduate-no industry experience
Functional Area Other
Education UG - B.Tech/B.E. - Electrical, Electronics/Telecomunication, Mechanical
PG - MBA/PGDM - Any Specialization, Finance, HR/Industrial Relations, Marketing, Other Management
Annual Salary Rupees. 275000 - 300000
Location Bangalore, Chennai, Delhi, Hyderabad / Secunderabad, Kolkata, Mumbai
Keywords MT
Contact Subal Siddharth
Emerson Network Power I Pvt lTd
Website http://www.emersonnetworkpower.co.in
Location Across India / NA
Eligibility
Details
A fast growing US MNC in manufacturing industry with its headquarters at Thane.
Designation MANAGEMENT TRAINEES-MT
Job Description Working on different functions related to different deptt. across the company in the relevent specialization.
NOTE: Candidates having an MBA/PGDBM Degree with an engineering background should only apply.
Desired Profile Working on different functions related to different deptt. across the company in the relevent specialization.
NOTE (Strictly): Candidates having an MBA/PGDBM Degree with an engineering background should only apply.
Experience 0
Industry Type Fresh Graduate-no industry experience
Functional Area Other
Education UG - B.Tech/B.E. - Electrical, Electronics/Telecomunication, Mechanical
PG - MBA/PGDM - Any Specialization, Finance, HR/Industrial Relations, Marketing, Other Management
Annual Salary Rupees. 275000 - 300000
Location Bangalore, Chennai, Delhi, Hyderabad / Secunderabad, Kolkata, Mumbai
Keywords MT
Contact Subal Siddharth
Emerson Network Power I Pvt lTd
Website http://www.emersonnetworkpower.co.in
Sunday, August 19, 2007
HP RECRUITS
HP is a leading global provider of products, technologies, solutions and services to consumers and business. The company's offerings span IT infrastructure, personal computing and access devices, global services, and imaging and printing. Our $4 billion annual R&D investment fuels the invention of products, solutions and new technologies so we can better serve customers and enter new markets. We invent, engineer and deliver technology solutions that drive business value, create social value and improve the lives of our customers.
Designation Administrative Assistant
Job Description business environment
hp invents.
We believe in thinking space. Room to create. Radical ideas.
And if ever we depart from that culture, we'll start over.
Our market is complex, but hp works simple: our structure is straightforward, grouping people and their skills in business or product sectors where they'll stimulate each other and work best together.
job description
Getting every detail right, first time, every time, is the task of our teams of administrators. You'll provide general routine and non-routine clerical help for your assigned area of the business or a particular project, such as handling telephone calls, entering and processing data, sorting and distributing mail, filing, photocopying and the 1001 things that are vital to the smooth running of our business. As you progress through the experience levels, you'll use your knowledge of business issues, key customers, company practices, procedures and processes to co-ordinate and manage processes, projects and, at team leader level, people.
As the lab admin for EFSL, this person will be primarily responsible for supporting the director of engineering in many administrative tasks such as:
''' * Managing the calendar
''' * Prepare and maintain the lab org chart
''' * Gather and drive approval process for lab travel
''' * Assist with all travel needs
''' * Responsible for space planning for EP
''' * Ensure new hires have equipment and necessary logins
''' * Organize Offsites and Setup visits
''' * Help track and reconcile headcounts, open reqs, and YTJ
''' * Update PDLs
''' * Raise Smartbuy order such as equipments for testing/benchmarking
''' * Manage emails
This person will have one or two contract admins to help support the rest of the Floor at EP and will be responsible for delegating and overseeing their work.
Business education is a real benefit. As much as possible would be an advantage if this person could take on more business operations as well. Specifically it would be great if this person could be involved in building and tracking our aspire budget, generate and track lab metrics to show year over year performance, and other similar tasks.
Desired Profile your profile
Two-year university
-business course preferred
Completion of secretarial curriculum or specialized training
0 to two years experience in administrative support experience
Skillful at Word/Excel/Access/Powerpoint
A thorough and organized approach
Ability to gather and organize complex data from multiple sources
Understanding of policies and procedures
Initiative, resourcefulness and problem solving ability
Confidence
Fluency in English and local language
Strong communication skills
Attention to detail
Ability to manage a changing workload
Ability to handle office technology
Customer focus:interact with customers, vendors, and HP personnel (all levels)
Knowledge of IT/Telecomm
Proficient with processing transactions through available systems
Ability to manage department budget
Experience 0 - 2
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area HR / Administration / IR
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Post Graduation Not Required
Location Bangalore
Keywords Administrative Assistant
Reference HPNAUK
Designation Administrative Assistant
Job Description business environment
hp invents.
We believe in thinking space. Room to create. Radical ideas.
And if ever we depart from that culture, we'll start over.
Our market is complex, but hp works simple: our structure is straightforward, grouping people and their skills in business or product sectors where they'll stimulate each other and work best together.
job description
Getting every detail right, first time, every time, is the task of our teams of administrators. You'll provide general routine and non-routine clerical help for your assigned area of the business or a particular project, such as handling telephone calls, entering and processing data, sorting and distributing mail, filing, photocopying and the 1001 things that are vital to the smooth running of our business. As you progress through the experience levels, you'll use your knowledge of business issues, key customers, company practices, procedures and processes to co-ordinate and manage processes, projects and, at team leader level, people.
As the lab admin for EFSL, this person will be primarily responsible for supporting the director of engineering in many administrative tasks such as:
''' * Managing the calendar
''' * Prepare and maintain the lab org chart
''' * Gather and drive approval process for lab travel
''' * Assist with all travel needs
''' * Responsible for space planning for EP
''' * Ensure new hires have equipment and necessary logins
''' * Organize Offsites and Setup visits
''' * Help track and reconcile headcounts, open reqs, and YTJ
''' * Update PDLs
''' * Raise Smartbuy order such as equipments for testing/benchmarking
''' * Manage emails
This person will have one or two contract admins to help support the rest of the Floor at EP and will be responsible for delegating and overseeing their work.
Business education is a real benefit. As much as possible would be an advantage if this person could take on more business operations as well. Specifically it would be great if this person could be involved in building and tracking our aspire budget, generate and track lab metrics to show year over year performance, and other similar tasks.
Desired Profile your profile
Two-year university
-business course preferred
Completion of secretarial curriculum or specialized training
0 to two years experience in administrative support experience
Skillful at Word/Excel/Access/Powerpoint
A thorough and organized approach
Ability to gather and organize complex data from multiple sources
Understanding of policies and procedures
Initiative, resourcefulness and problem solving ability
Confidence
Fluency in English and local language
Strong communication skills
Attention to detail
Ability to manage a changing workload
Ability to handle office technology
Customer focus:interact with customers, vendors, and HP personnel (all levels)
Knowledge of IT/Telecomm
Proficient with processing transactions through available systems
Ability to manage department budget
Experience 0 - 2
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area HR / Administration / IR
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Post Graduation Not Required
Location Bangalore
Keywords Administrative Assistant
Reference HPNAUK
DOVER INDIA PVT LTD
The candidate needs to take the responsibility independently.
Coordinate and manage the assigned tasks.
Should be ready to hardcore coding using the process and standards.
Experience in C, C++, VC++, EVC++ etc
Exposure in 'Windows CE' and Embedded concepts
Good communication and interpersonal skills
Bachelors Degree required, Maters degree suggested. (Electronics subjects will be added advantage)
Development experience and should be expert in C++ and OOPs concepts
Email resume@doversoftware.co.in, raghu@pdqdsi.com
Coordinate and manage the assigned tasks.
Should be ready to hardcore coding using the process and standards.
Experience in C, C++, VC++, EVC++ etc
Exposure in 'Windows CE' and Embedded concepts
Good communication and interpersonal skills
Bachelors Degree required, Maters degree suggested. (Electronics subjects will be added advantage)
Development experience and should be expert in C++ and OOPs concepts
Email resume@doversoftware.co.in, raghu@pdqdsi.com
NIIT EDGEINEERS-19 AUG
Test Date: 19th August 2007, For Details, SMS EDGE (AAE_your city) to 6161 or call: 1800 180 6448 (BSNL) and 1800 102 6448 (AIRTEL)
The 4-month Accelerated ANIIT Program for Engineers with Placement Assurance*. Admissions Open.
* Co-designed with major IT recruit
* Projects on emerging technologic
* Campus Placements.
ELIGIBILITY: B.E./ B.Tech./ MCA/ M.Sc. (IT/ CS). Admission restricted to 2000 applicants selected th an aptitude test, GD and personal interview. For details and applicability, write us at edgeineers@niit.com For exam registration visit your nearest NIIT centre or log on to www.niiteducation.com
Email edgeineers@niit.com
The 4-month Accelerated ANIIT Program for Engineers with Placement Assurance*. Admissions Open.
* Co-designed with major IT recruit
* Projects on emerging technologic
* Campus Placements.
ELIGIBILITY: B.E./ B.Tech./ MCA/ M.Sc. (IT/ CS). Admission restricted to 2000 applicants selected th an aptitude test, GD and personal interview. For details and applicability, write us at edgeineers@niit.com For exam registration visit your nearest NIIT centre or log on to www.niiteducation.com
Email edgeineers@niit.com
MXICODERS SOFT
Qualifying candidate must have
* 3+ months PHP experience with advanced skills
* 3+ months MySQL experience with advanced skills.
* 3+ months advanced Linux experience preferred but not necessary.
* XHTML/CSS layout and design. High level HTML/CSS required.
* Solid references and examples of previous work.
* Apache IIS server,a plus.
Mxicoders Software solutions
911,Akshat Tower,
Nr. Pakawan restaurant
S.G. highways
Ahmedabad - Gujarat ,INDI 380015
Visit link given below to apply online
http://mxicoders.com/career.html
* 3+ months PHP experience with advanced skills
* 3+ months MySQL experience with advanced skills.
* 3+ months advanced Linux experience preferred but not necessary.
* XHTML/CSS layout and design. High level HTML/CSS required.
* Solid references and examples of previous work.
* Apache IIS server,a plus.
Mxicoders Software solutions
911,Akshat Tower,
Nr. Pakawan restaurant
S.G. highways
Ahmedabad - Gujarat ,INDI 380015
Visit link given below to apply online
http://mxicoders.com/career.html
Saturday, August 18, 2007
avl india recruits freshers(c#)
Position Vacant C#,.Net Trainee (fresher Hiring)
Company Name AVL India Software Private Ltd.
Company Profile Would you like your talent to make a difference?Then consider AVL - a rapidly growing Austria based MNC with largest development centre creating innovative softwares for power engines.Every day we are developing cutting-edge soulutions for client.
Job Description Candidate should have good knowledge in C#,.Net framework and C++.
Knowledge of SDLC is must with good pick power.
Desired Profile Candidate should be B.tech in CSE/ECE.Candidates who will be passing out in 2007 need not apply,Only 2005 and 2006 passouts with min agg of 80% and B.Tech(IT) should not apply.
Maximum Experience 1 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area IT Software
Location Delhi
Education
UG - B.Tech/B.E. - Computers, Electrical
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Keywords C# , .Net , C++
Reference fresher
Contact Information
Name Ms. Priya Anand...
Email priya.anand@avl.com
Website http://www.avl.com
Address AVL India Software Private Ltd
Company Name AVL India Software Private Ltd.
Company Profile Would you like your talent to make a difference?Then consider AVL - a rapidly growing Austria based MNC with largest development centre creating innovative softwares for power engines.Every day we are developing cutting-edge soulutions for client.
Job Description Candidate should have good knowledge in C#,.Net framework and C++.
Knowledge of SDLC is must with good pick power.
Desired Profile Candidate should be B.tech in CSE/ECE.Candidates who will be passing out in 2007 need not apply,Only 2005 and 2006 passouts with min agg of 80% and B.Tech(IT) should not apply.
Maximum Experience 1 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area IT Software
Location Delhi
Education
UG - B.Tech/B.E. - Computers, Electrical
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Keywords C# , .Net , C++
Reference fresher
Contact Information
Name Ms. Priya Anand...
Email priya.anand@avl.com
Website http://www.avl.com
Address AVL India Software Private Ltd
tech mahindra walk in aug 18,19
Designation Walkin at Tech Mahindra
Job Description
We are looking for Executive / Sr. Executives for our Domestic BPO.
Requirement is as under :-
Good communication skills
Graduate/Under graduate
Please come for the walkin with following documents as given below address tomorrow and day after tomorrow i.e.; (18th and 19th Aug 07)
Kindly carry these documents as well
3 Photo graph
Salary Slip
Degree Certificate
Releiving letter from last to last organization (If any)
Address Proof
Venue
Tech MAhindra Ltd.
A-7,
Sec - 64
Noida
Contact Person : Amit Sharma
Time : 11:30 AM to 05:00 PM
Job Description
We are looking for Executive / Sr. Executives for our Domestic BPO.
Requirement is as under :-
Good communication skills
Graduate/Under graduate
Please come for the walkin with following documents as given below address tomorrow and day after tomorrow i.e.; (18th and 19th Aug 07)
Kindly carry these documents as well
3 Photo graph
Salary Slip
Degree Certificate
Releiving letter from last to last organization (If any)
Address Proof
Venue
Tech MAhindra Ltd.
A-7,
Sec - 64
Noida
Contact Person : Amit Sharma
Time : 11:30 AM to 05:00 PM
summitworks freshers walk in ;aug 20
Company Profile SummitWorks Technologies, Inc. (SWT) is a full service Software Consulting firm assisting clients achieve Information Technologies related objectives. Ranging from turnkey software solutions to just in time software consulting services, SummitWorks offers a complete set of onsite, offsite and offshore software development and maintenance services. Focusing on specific industry sector requirements, SummitWorks' iAcceleration project based consulting and selective outsourcing Solution Teams deliver the strategies, people, tools and resources that enable corporate leaders to build and deploy the most flexible, cost effective technology solutions crucial to sustaining their competitive edge in this increasingly complex marketplace. Recognized as a valued business partner by leading multinational and fortune 500 companies in the USA and abroad, SummitWorks Technologies, Inc., provides innovative ways for companies to succeed in today's extended enterprise business environment.
Designation Walk-in on Monday(August 20) for IT Recruiter
Experience 0 - 2 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area HR / Administration / IR
Keyword Recruiter, IT, HR, Resource Executive
Location Chennai
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Job Description
Sourcing, Coordination, Follow-up
Desired Profile
Should be able to Understand the IT Requirement
Should be able to Source Matching Candidates
should be able to Deliver under high pressure
should be able to do multi Tasking
Should be able to hunt & Identify Potential Candidates
Excellent Team Player
Good Communication Skills
Good Attitude
WALK-IN ON MONDAY, AUGUST 20TH IN BETWEEN 10 TO 12.
CANDIDATES DROPPING AFTER THE SPECIFIED TIME WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED
Reference GCS-Recruiter
Contact Information
Name G. Sill
Telephone 91-044-28478601
Website http://www.summitworks.com
Address Auras Corporate Centre,
98 A, 3rd Floor,
Dr.Radhakrishna Salai
Chennai - Tamilnadu ,Indi 600004
Email gsill@summitworks.com
Designation Walk-in on Monday(August 20) for IT Recruiter
Experience 0 - 2 years
Industry Type Software Services
Functional Area HR / Administration / IR
Keyword Recruiter, IT, HR, Resource Executive
Location Chennai
Education UG - Any Graduate - Any Specialization
PG - Any PG Course - Any Specialization
Job Description
Sourcing, Coordination, Follow-up
Desired Profile
Should be able to Understand the IT Requirement
Should be able to Source Matching Candidates
should be able to Deliver under high pressure
should be able to do multi Tasking
Should be able to hunt & Identify Potential Candidates
Excellent Team Player
Good Communication Skills
Good Attitude
WALK-IN ON MONDAY, AUGUST 20TH IN BETWEEN 10 TO 12.
CANDIDATES DROPPING AFTER THE SPECIFIED TIME WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED
Reference GCS-Recruiter
Contact Information
Name G. Sill
Telephone 91-044-28478601
Website http://www.summitworks.com
Address Auras Corporate Centre,
98 A, 3rd Floor,
Dr.Radhakrishna Salai
Chennai - Tamilnadu ,Indi 600004
Email gsill@summitworks.com
GOLDMAN SACHAS RECRUITS FRESHERS
Designation Analyst Legal Entity Accounting
Principal Responsibilities
Assist the Legal Entity Accounting group in the preparation of monthly financial statements under US GAAP or local GAAP (e.g. UK GAAP) & operate key controls over certain sections of the balance-sheet
Manage relationships with other areas: e.g. Product Control, Operations, Tax
Provide analysis and monthly comments to financial statements
Perform the quarterly Balance Sheet substantiation process
Analyze intercompany balances, reconciliations, daily funding payments and resolving breaks
Perform month-end process to properly reflect the Balance Sheet, P&L and Owner's Equity
Desired Profile CA Freshers, qualified in 2007
Industry Type Banking / Financial Services / Stock Broking
Education
UG - B.Com - Commerce
PG - CA
Location Bangalore
Keywords Chartered Accountant
Contact Anupama Bajpai - Goldman Sachs
How to Apply
Click here to Apply
Principal Responsibilities
Assist the Legal Entity Accounting group in the preparation of monthly financial statements under US GAAP or local GAAP (e.g. UK GAAP) & operate key controls over certain sections of the balance-sheet
Manage relationships with other areas: e.g. Product Control, Operations, Tax
Provide analysis and monthly comments to financial statements
Perform the quarterly Balance Sheet substantiation process
Analyze intercompany balances, reconciliations, daily funding payments and resolving breaks
Perform month-end process to properly reflect the Balance Sheet, P&L and Owner's Equity
Desired Profile CA Freshers, qualified in 2007
Industry Type Banking / Financial Services / Stock Broking
Education
UG - B.Com - Commerce
PG - CA
Location Bangalore
Keywords Chartered Accountant
Contact Anupama Bajpai - Goldman Sachs
How to Apply
Click here to Apply
ATRIC SOFTWERE
Designation Software Trainee
Experience 0 years
Keyword MCA - 2006 candidates , Btech CSE -2006 or IT - 2006 , trainees,
Desired Profile
We are interested to recruit fresh post graduates who have completed their MCA /BTECH CSE/IT (2006 or before batch )degree in First Division (2006/2005 candidates only can apply).
Advantages:
1.Training will be provided according to our client requirements on various software technologies.
2.Three to six months training and later on the candidate will work on live project for the next six to eight months
3.Most of our clients are from USA
4.Stipend will be provided while the candidate is on real time project work.
5.Candidates will be provided instructor led training and realtime projects depending upon the candidates interest.
6.Challenging Assignments to make the employees ready for all types of complex projects.
7.Based on performance the candidates will be deputed to the clients sites especially to USA & UK after one and half year of working with us
The candidate has to be with us for a minimum period of 36 months, as the Company will be thoroughly training him on the advanced technologies which he has to work while on real-time projects.
Reference Software Trainees
Contact Information Name Neeraja
Email richard@atiric.com
How to Apply
Experience 0 years
Keyword MCA - 2006 candidates , Btech CSE -2006 or IT - 2006 , trainees,
Desired Profile
We are interested to recruit fresh post graduates who have completed their MCA /BTECH CSE/IT (2006 or before batch )degree in First Division (2006/2005 candidates only can apply).
Advantages:
1.Training will be provided according to our client requirements on various software technologies.
2.Three to six months training and later on the candidate will work on live project for the next six to eight months
3.Most of our clients are from USA
4.Stipend will be provided while the candidate is on real time project work.
5.Candidates will be provided instructor led training and realtime projects depending upon the candidates interest.
6.Challenging Assignments to make the employees ready for all types of complex projects.
7.Based on performance the candidates will be deputed to the clients sites especially to USA & UK after one and half year of working with us
The candidate has to be with us for a minimum period of 36 months, as the Company will be thoroughly training him on the advanced technologies which he has to work while on real-time projects.
Reference Software Trainees
Contact Information Name Neeraja
Email richard@atiric.com
How to Apply
SYSTECH SOLUTIONS WALKIN FOR FRESHERS ;AUG 18
We now have opportunities in Data Warehousing & would like to offer you a career opportunity to be an IT professional . As a trainee you would be trained on Business Intelligence Concepts & related tools
Eligibility Criteria: -
1. 2007 Passouts
2. 70% from 10th std through Highest Qualification is required
3. Knowledge of RDBMS Concepts is must
4. Excellent verbal & written communication
Please note that the offer involves Two Year Bond.
Venue : Systech Solutions Pvt Ltd.
No 17, North Street,Sriram Nagar
Alwarpet
Chennai - 600018
Phone : 044-24313751
Landmark : Behind Park Sheraton Hotel
Candidates fulfilling the above criteria can walk-in with a resume and a passport size photograph for an online test on Aptitude and RDBMS concepts.
Walk-in Date : Aug - 18 - 2007( Saturday)
Walk-in Timings : 09.30 a.m. to 03.00 p.m.
Candidates who have already gone through the recruitment process in the past 6 months need not apply.
About Company
Founded in 1993, Los Angeles-based Systech Solutions Inc is a professional services firm delivers business solutions. Systech combines BI, CRM and Web tech with business strategy. Systech established an Offshore Tech Center in Chennai.
Eligibility Criteria: -
1. 2007 Passouts
2. 70% from 10th std through Highest Qualification is required
3. Knowledge of RDBMS Concepts is must
4. Excellent verbal & written communication
Please note that the offer involves Two Year Bond.
Venue : Systech Solutions Pvt Ltd.
No 17, North Street,Sriram Nagar
Alwarpet
Chennai - 600018
Phone : 044-24313751
Landmark : Behind Park Sheraton Hotel
Candidates fulfilling the above criteria can walk-in with a resume and a passport size photograph for an online test on Aptitude and RDBMS concepts.
Walk-in Date : Aug - 18 - 2007( Saturday)
Walk-in Timings : 09.30 a.m. to 03.00 p.m.
Candidates who have already gone through the recruitment process in the past 6 months need not apply.
About Company
Founded in 1993, Los Angeles-based Systech Solutions Inc is a professional services firm delivers business solutions. Systech combines BI, CRM and Web tech with business strategy. Systech established an Offshore Tech Center in Chennai.
Java Basics
1.The Java interpreter is used for the execution of the source code.
True
False
Ans: a.
2) On successful compilation a file with the class extension is created.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
3) The Java source code can be created in a Notepad editor.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
4) The Java Program is enclosed in a class definition.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
5) What declarations are required for every Java application?
Ans: A class and the main( ) method declarations.
6) What are the two parts in executing a Java program and their purposes?
Ans: Two parts in executing a Java program are:
Java Compiler and Java Interpreter.
The Java Compiler is used for compilation and the Java Interpreter is used for execution of the application.
7) What are the three OOPs principles and define them?
Ans : Encapsulation, Inheritance and Polymorphism are the three OOPs
Principles.
Encapsulation:
Is the Mechanism that binds together code and the data it manipulates, and keeps both safe from outside interference and misuse.
Inheritance:
Is the process by which one object acquires the properties of another object.
Polymorphism:
Is a feature that allows one interface to be used for a general class of actions.
8) What is a compilation unit?
Ans : Java source code file.
9) What output is displayed as the result of executing the following statement?
System.out.println("// Looks like a comment.");
// Looks like a comment
The statement results in a compilation error
Looks like a comment
No output is displayed
Ans : a.
10) In order for a source code file, containing the public class Test, to successfully compile, which of the following must be true?
It must have a package statement
It must be named Test.java
It must import java.lang
It must declare a public class named Test
Ans : b
11) What are identifiers and what is naming convention?
Ans : Identifiers are used for class names, method names and variable names. An identifier may be any descriptive sequence of upper case & lower case letters,numbers or underscore or dollar sign and must not begin with numbers.
12) What is the return type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : void
13) What is the argument type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : string array.
14) Which characters are as first characters of an identifier?
Ans : A – Z, a – z, _ ,$
15) What are different comments?
Ans : 1) // -- single line comment
2) /* --
*/ multiple line comment
3) /** --
*/ documentation
16) What is the difference between constructor method and method?
Ans : Constructor will be automatically invoked when an object is created. Whereas method has to be call explicitly.
17) What is the use of bin and lib in JDK?
Ans : Bin contains all tools such as javac, applet viewer, awt tool etc., whereas Lib
contains all packages and variables.
Data types,variables and Arrays
1) What is meant by variable?
Ans: Variables are locations in memory that can hold values. Before assigning any value to a variable, it must be declared.
2) What are the kinds of variables in Java? What are their uses?
Ans: Java has three kinds of variables namely, the instance variable, the local variable and the class variable.
Local variables are used inside blocks as counters or in methods as temporary variables and are used to store information needed by a single method.
Instance variables are used to define attributes or the state of a particular object and are used to store information needed by multiple methods in the objects.
Class variables are global to a class and to all the instances of the class and are useful for communicating between different objects of all the same class or keeping track of global states.
3) How are the variables declared?
Ans: Variables can be declared anywhere in the method definition and can be initialized during their declaration.They are commonly declared before usage at the beginning of the definition.
Variables with the same data type can be declared together. Local variables must be given a value before usage.
4) What are variable types?
Ans: Variable types can be any data type that java supports, which includes the eight primitive data types, the name of a class or interface and an array.
5) How do you assign values to variables?
Ans: Values are assigned to variables using the assignment operator =.
6) What is a literal? How many types of literals are there?
Ans: A literal represents a value of a certain type where the type describes how that value behaves.
There are different types of literals namely number literals, character literals,
boolean literals, string literals,etc.
7) What is an array?
Ans: An array is an object that stores a list of items.
8) How do you declare an array?
Ans: Array variable indicates the type of object that the array holds.
Ex: int arr[];
9) Java supports multidimensional arrays.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
10) An array of arrays can be created.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
11) What is a string?
Ans: A combination of characters is called as string.
12) Strings are instances of the class String.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
13) When a string literal is used in the program, Java automatically creates instances of the string class.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
14) Which operator is to create and concatenate string?
Ans: Addition operator(+).
15) Which of the following declare an array of string objects?
String[ ] s;
String [ ]s:
String[ s]:
String s[ ]:
Ans : a, b and d
16) What is the value of a[3] as the result of the following array declaration?
1
2
3
4
Ans : d
17) Which of the following are primitive types?
byte
String
integer
Float
Ans : a.
18) What is the range of the char type?
0 to 216
0 to 215
0 to 216-1
0 to 215-1
Ans. d
19) What are primitive data types?
Ans : byte, short, int, long
float, double
boolean
char
20) What are default values of different primitive types?
Ans : int - 0
short - 0
byte - 0
long - 0 l
float - 0.0 f
double - 0.0 d
boolean - false
char - null
21) Converting of primitive types to objects can be explicitly.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
22) How do we change the values of the elements of the array?
Ans : The array subscript expression can be used to change the values of the elements of the array.
23) What is final varaible?
Ans : If a variable is declared as final variable, then you can not change its value. It becomes constant.
24) What is static variable?
Ans : Static variables are shared by all instances of a class.
Operators
1) What are operators and what are the various types of operators available in Java?
Ans: Operators are special symbols used in expressions.
The following are the types of operators:
Arithmetic operators,
Assignment operators,
Increment & Decrement operators,
Logical operators,
Biwise operators,
Comparison/Relational operators and
Conditional operators
2) The ++ operator is used for incrementing and the -- operator is used for
decrementing.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) Comparison/Logical operators are used for testing and magnitude.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) Character literals are stored as unicode characters.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) What are the Logical operators?
Ans: OR(|), AND(&), XOR(^) AND NOT(~).
6) What is the % operator?
Ans : % operator is the modulo operator or reminder operator. It returns the reminder of dividing the first operand by second operand.
7) What is the value of 111 % 13?
3
5
7
9
Ans : c.
8) Is &&= a valid operator?
Ans : No.
9) Can a double value be cast to a byte?
Ans : Yes
10) Can a byte object be cast to a double value ?
Ans : No. An object cannot be cast to a primitive value.
11) What are order of precedence and associativity?
Ans : Order of precedence the order in which operators are evaluated in expressions.
Associativity determines whether an expression is evaluated left-right or right-left.
12) Which Java operator is right associativity?
Ans : = operator.
13) What is the difference between prefix and postfix of -- and ++ operators?
Ans : The prefix form returns the increment or decrement operation and returns the value of the increment or decrement operation.
The postfix form returns the current value of all of the expression and then
performs the increment or decrement operation on that value.
14) What is the result of expression 5.45 + "3,2"?
The double value 8.6
The string ""8.6"
The long value 8.
The String "5.453.2"
Ans : d
15) What are the values of x and y ?
x = 5; y = ++x;
Ans : x = 6; y = 6
16) What are the values of x and z?
x = 5; z = x++;
Ans : x = 6; z = 5
Control Statements
1) What are the programming constructs?
Ans: a) Sequential
b) Selection -- if and switch statements
c) Iteration -- for loop, while loop and do-while loop
2) class conditional {
public static void main(String args[]) {
int i = 20;
int j = 55;
int z = 0;
z = i < j ? i : j; // ternary operator
System.out.println("The value assigned is " + z);
}
}
What is output of the above program?
Ans: The value assigned is 20
3) The switch statement does not require a break.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
4) The conditional operator is otherwise known as the ternary operator.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) The while loop repeats a set of code while the condition is false.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
6) The do-while loop repeats a set of code atleast once before the condition is tested.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
7) What are difference between break and continue?
Ans: The break keyword halts the execution of the current loop and forces control out of the loop.
The continue is similar to break, except that instead of halting the execution of the loop, it starts the next iteration.
8) The for loop repeats a set of statements a certain number of times until a condition is matched.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) Can a for statement loop indefintely?
Ans : Yes.
10) What is the difference between while statement and a do statement/
Ans : A while statement checks at the beginning of a loop to see whether the next loop iteration should occur.
A do statement checks at the end of a loop to see whether the next iteration of a loop should occur. The do statement will always execute the body of a loop at least once.
Introduction to Classes and Methods
1) Which is used to get the value of the instance variables?
Ans: Dot notation.
2) The new operator creates a single instance named class and returns a
reference to that object.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) A class is a template for multiple objects with similar features.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) What is mean by garbage collection?
Ans: When an object is no longer referred to by any variable, Java automatically
reclaims memory used by that object. This is known as garbage collection.
5) What are methods and how are they defined?
Ans: Methods are functions that operate on instances of classes in which they are defined.Objects can communicate with each other using methods and can call methods in other classes.
Method definition has four parts. They are name of the method, type of object or primitive type the method returns, a list of parameters and the body of the method.
A method's signature is a combination of the first three parts mentioned above.
6) What is calling method?
Ans: Calling methods are similar to calling or referring to an instance variable. These methods are accessed using dot notation.
Ex: obj.methodname(param1,param2)
7) Which method is used to determine the class of an object?
Ans: getClass( ) method can be used to find out what class the belongs to. This class is defined in the object class and is available to all objects.
8) All the classes in java.lang package are automatically imported when
a program is compiled.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) How can class be imported to a program?
Ans: To import a class, the import keyword should be used as shown.;
import classname;
10) How can class be imported from a package to a program?
Ans: import java . packagename . classname (or) import java.package name.*;
11) What is a constructor?
Ans: A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is
initialized when created.
12) Which keyword is used to create an instance of a class?
Ans: new.
13) Which method is used to garbage collect an object?
Ans: finalize ().
14) Constructors can be overloaded like regular methods.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
15) What is casting?
Ans: Casting is bused to convert the value of one type to another.
16) Casting between primitive types allows conversion of one primitive type to another.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
17) Casting occurs commonly between numeric types.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
18) Boolean values can be cast into any other primitive type.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
19) Casting does not affect the original object or value.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
20) Which cast must be used to convert a larger value into a smaller one?
Ans: Explicit cast.
21) Which cast must be used to cast an object to another class?
Ans: Specific cast.
22) Which of the following features are common to both Java & C++?
A.The class declaration
b.The access modifiers
c.The encapsulation of data & methods with in objects
d.The use of pointers
Ans: a,b,c.
23) Which of the following statements accurately describe the use of access modifiers within a class definition?
a.They can be applied to both data & methods
b.They must precede a class's data variables or methods
c.They can follow a class's data variables or methods
d.They can appear in any order
e.They must be applied to data variables first and then to methods
Ans: a,b,d.
24) Suppose a given instance variable has been declared private.
Can this instance variable be manipulated by methods out side its class?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
25) Which of the following statements can be used to describe a public method?
a.It is accessible to all other classes in the hierarchy
b.It is accessablde only to subclasses of its parent class
c.It represents the public interface of its class
d.The only way to gain access to this method is by calling one of the public class
methods
Ans: a,c.
26) Which of the following types of class members can be part of the internal part of a class?
a.Public instance variables
b.Private instance variables
c.Public methods
d.Private methods
Ans: b,d.
27) You would use the ____ operator to create a single instance of a named class.
a.new
b.dot
Ans: a.
28) Which of the following statements correctly describes the relation between an object and the instance variable it stores?
a.Each new object has its own distinctive set of instance variables
b.Each object has a copy of the instance variables of its class
c.the instance variable of each object are seperate from the variables of other objects
d.The instance variables of each object are stored together with the variables of other objects
Ans: a,b,c.
29) If no input parameters are specified in a method declaration then the declaration will include __.
a.an empty set of parantheses
b.the term void
Ans: a.
30) What are the functions of the dot(.) operator?
a.It enables you to access instance variables of any objects within a class
b.It enables you to store values in instance variables of an object
c.It is used to call object methods
d.It is to create a new object
Ans: a,b,c.
31) Which of the following can be referenced by this variable?
a.The instance variables of a class only
b.The methods of a class only
c.The instance variables and methods of a class
Ans: c.
32) The this reference is used in conjunction with ___methods.
a.static
b.non-static
Ans: b.
33) Which of the following operators are used in conjunction with the this and super references?
a.The new operator
b.The instanceof operator
c.The dot operator
Ans: c.
34) A constructor is automatically called when an object is instantiated
a. true
b. false
Ans: a.
35) When may a constructor be called without specifying arguments?
a. When the default constructor is not called
b. When the name of the constructor differs from that of the class
c. When there are no constructors for the class
Ans: c.
36) Each class in java can have a finalizer method
a. true
b.false
Ans: a.
37) When an object is referenced, does this mean that it has been identified by the finalizer method for garbage collection?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
38) Because finalize () belongs to the java.lang.Object class, it is present in all ___.
a.objects
b.classes
c.methods
Ans: b.
39) Identify the true statements about finalization.
a.A class may have only one finalize method
b.Finalizers are mostly used with simple classes
c.Finalizer overloading is not allowed
Ans: a,c.
40) When you write finalize() method for your class, you are overriding a finalizer
inherited from a super class.
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
41) Java memory management mechanism garbage collects objects which are no longer referenced
a true
b.false
Ans: a.
42) are objects referenced by a variable candidates for garbage collection when the variable goes out of scope?
a yes
b. no
Ans: a.
43) Java's garbage collector runs as a ___ priority thread waiting for __priority threads to relinquish the processor.
a.high
b.low
Ans: a,b.
44) The garbage collector will run immediately when the system is out of memory
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
45) You can explicitly drop a object reference by setting the value of a variable whose data type is a reference type to ___
Ans: null
46) When might your program wish to run the garbage collecter?
a. before it enters a compute-intense section of code
b. before it enters a memory-intense section of code
c. before objects are finalized
d. when it knows there will be some idle time
Ans: a,b,d
47) For externalizable objects the class is solely responsible for the external format of its contents
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
48) When an object is stored, are all of the objects that are reachable from that object stored as well?
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
49) The default__ of objects protects private and trancient data, and supports the __ of the classes
a.evolution
b.encoding
Ans: b,a.
50) Which are keywords in Java?
a) NULL
b) sizeof
c) friend
d) extends
e) synchronized
Ans : d and e
51) When must the main class and the file name coincide?
Ans :When class is declared public.
52) What are different modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default, static, trancient, volatile, final, abstract.
53) What are access modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default.
54) What is meant by "Passing by value" and " Passing by reference"?
Ans : objects – pass by referrence
Methods - pass by value
55) Is a class a subclass of itself?
Ans : A class is a subclass itself.
56) What modifiers may be used with top-level class?
Ans : public, abstract, final.
57) What is an example of polymorphism?
Inner class
Anonymous classes
Method overloading
Method overriding
Ans : c
Packages and interface
1) What are packages ? what is use of packages ?
Ans :The package statement defines a name space in which classes are stored.If you omit the package, the classes are put into the default package.
Signature... package pkg;
Use: * It specifies to which package the classes defined in a file belongs to. * Package is both naming and a visibility control mechanism.
2) What is difference between importing "java.applet.Applet" and "java.applet.*;" ?
Ans :"java.applet.Applet" will import only the class Applet from the package java.applet
Where as "java.applet.*" will import all the classes from java.applet package.
3) What do you understand by package access specifier?
Ans : public: Anything declared as public can be accessed from anywhere
private: Anything declared in the private can’t be seen outside of its class.
default: It is visible to subclasses as well as to other classes in the same package.
4) What is interface? What is use of interface?
Ans : It is similar to class which may contain method’s signature only but not bodies.
Methods declared in interface are abstract methods. We can implement many interfaces on a class which support the multiple inheritance.
5) Is it is necessary to implement all methods in an interface?
Ans : Yes. All the methods have to be implemented.
6) Which is the default access modifier for an interface method?
Ans : public.
7) Can we define a variable in an interface ?and what type it should be ?
Ans : Yes we can define a variable in an interface. They are implicitly final and static.
8) What is difference between interface and an abstract class?
Ans : All the methods declared inside an Interface are abstract. Where as abstract class must have at least one abstract method and others may be concrete or abstract.
In Interface we need not use the keyword abstract for the methods.
9) By default, all program import the java.lang package.
True/False
Ans : True
10) Java compiler stores the .class files in the path specified in CLASSPATH
environmental variable.
True/False
Ans : False
11) User-defined package can also be imported just like the standard packages.
True/False
Ans : True
12) When a program does not want to handle exception, the ______class is used.
Ans : Throws
13) The main subclass of the Exception class is _______ class.
Ans : RuntimeException
14) Only subclasses of ______class may be caught or thrown.
Ans : Throwable
15) Any user-defined exception class is a subclass of the _____ class.
Ans : Exception
16) The catch clause of the user-defined exception class should ______ its
Base class catch clause.
Ans : Exception
17) A _______ is used to separate the hierarchy of the class while declaring an
Import statement.
Ans : Package
18) All standard classes of Java are included within a package called _____.
Ans : java.lang
19) All the classes in a package can be simultaneously imported using ____.
Ans : *
20) Can you define a variable inside an Interface. If no, why? If yes, how?
Ans.: YES. final and static
21) How many concrete classes can you have inside an interface?
Ans.: None
22) Can you extend an interface?
Ans.: Yes
23) Is it necessary to implement all the methods of an interface while implementing the interface?
Ans.: No
24) If you do not implement all the methods of an interface while implementing , what specifier should you use for the class ?
Ans.: abstract
25) How do you achieve multiple inheritance in Java?
Ans: Using interfaces.
26) How to declare an interface example?
Ans : access class classname implements interface.
27) Can you achieve multiple interface through interface?
a)True
b) false
Ans : a.
28) Can variables be declared in an interface ? If so, what are the modifiers?
Ans : Yes. final and static are the modifiers can be declared in an interface.
29) What are the possible access modifiers when implementing interface methods?
Ans : public.
30) Can anonymous classes be implemented an interface?
Ans : Yes.
31) Interfaces can’t be extended.
a)True
b)False
Ans : b.
32) Name interfaces without a method?
Ans : Serializable, Cloneble & Remote.
33) Is it possible to use few methods of an interface in a class ? If so, how?
Ans : Yes. Declare the class as abstract.
Exception Handling
1) What is the difference between ‘throw’ and ‘throws’ ?And it’s application?
Ans : Exceptions that are thrown by java runtime systems can be handled by Try and catch blocks. With throw exception we can handle the exceptions thrown by the program itself. If a method is capable of causing an exception that it does not
handle, it must specify this behavior so the callers of the method can guard
against that exception.
2) What is the difference between ‘Exception’ and ‘error’ in java?
Ans : Exception and Error are the subclasses of the Throwable class. Exception class is used for exceptional conditions that user program should catch. With exception class we can subclass to create our own custom exception.
Error defines exceptions that are not excepted to be caught by you program. Example is Stack Overflow.
3) What is ‘Resource leak’?
Ans : Freeing up other resources that might have been allocated at the beginning of a method.
4)What is the ‘finally’ block?
Ans : Finally block will execute whether or not an exception is thrown. If an exception is thrown, the finally block will execute even if no catch statement match the exception. Any time a method is about to return to the caller from inside try/catch block, via an uncaught exception or an explicit return statement, the finally clause is also execute.
5) Can we have catch block with out try block? If so when?
Ans : No. Try/Catch or Try/finally form a unit.
6) What is the difference between the following statements?
Catch (Exception e),
Catch (Error err),
Catch (Throwable t)
Ans :
7) What will happen to the Exception object after exception handling?
Ans : It will go for Garbage Collector. And frees the memory.
8) How many Exceptions we can define in ‘throws’ clause?
Ans : We can define multiple exceptions in throws clause.
Signature is..
type method-name (parameter-list) throws exception-list
9) The finally block is executed when an exception is thrown, even if no catch matches it.
True/False
Ans : True
10) The subclass exception should precede the base class exception when used within the catch clause.
True/False
Ans : True
11) Exceptions can be caught or rethrown to a calling method.
True/False
Ans : True
12) The statements following the throw keyword in a program are not executed.
True/False
Ans : True
13) The toString ( ) method in the user-defined exception class is overridden.
True/False
Ans : True
MULTI THREADING
1) What are the two types of multitasking?
Ans : 1.process-based
2.Thread-based
2) What are the two ways to create the thread?
Ans : 1.by implementing Runnable
2.by extending Thread
3) What is the signature of the constructor of a thread class?
Ans : Thread(Runnable threadob,String threadName)
4) What are all the methods available in the Runnable Interface?
Ans : run()
5) What is the data type for the method isAlive() and this method is
available in which class?
Ans : boolean, Thread
6) What are all the methods available in the Thread class?
Ans : 1.isAlive()
2.join()
3.resume()
4.suspend()
5.stop()
6.start()
7.sleep()
8.destroy()
7) What are all the methods used for Inter Thread communication and what is the class in which these methods are defined?
Ans :1. wait(),notify() & notifyall()
2. Object class
8) What is the mechanisam defind by java for the Resources to be used by only one Thread at a time?
Ans : Synchronisation
9) What is the procedure to own the moniter by many threads?
Ans : not possible
10) What is the unit for 1000 in the below statement?
ob.sleep(1000)
Ans : long milliseconds
11) What is the data type for the parameter of the sleep() method?
Ans : long
12) What are all the values for the following level?
max-priority
min-priority
normal-priority
Ans : 10,1,5
13) What is the method available for setting the priority?
Ans : setPriority()
14) What is the default thread at the time of starting the program?
Ans : main thread
15) The word synchronized can be used with only a method.
True/ False
Ans : False
16) Which priority Thread can prompt the lower primary Thread?
Ans : Higher Priority
17) How many threads at a time can access a monitor?
Ans : one
18) What are all the four states associated in the thread?
Ans : 1. new 2. runnable 3. blocked 4. dead
19) The suspend()method is used to teriminate a thread?
True /False
Ans : False
20) The run() method should necessary exists in clases created as subclass of thread?
True /False
Ans : True
21) When two threads are waiting on each other and can't proceed the programe is said to be in a deadlock?
True/False
Ans : True
22) Which method waits for the thread to die ?
Ans : join() method
23) Which of the following is true?
1) wait(),notify(),notifyall() are defined as final & can be called only from with in a synchronized method
2) Among wait(),notify(),notifyall() the wait() method only throws IOException
3) wait(),notify(),notifyall() & sleep() are methods of object class
1
2
3
1 & 2
1,2 & 3
Ans : D
24) Garbage collector thread belongs to which priority?
Ans : low-priority
25) What is meant by timeslicing or time sharing?
Ans : Timeslicing is the method of allocating CPU time to individual threads in a priority schedule.
26) What is meant by daemon thread? In java runtime, what is it's role?
Ans : Daemon thread is a low priority thread which runs intermittently in the background doing the garbage collection operation for the java runtime system.
Inheritance
1) What is the difference between superclass & subclass?
Ans : A super class is a class that is inherited whereas subclass is a class that does the inheriting.
2) Which keyword is used to inherit a class?
Ans : extends
3) Subclasses methods can access superclass members/ attributes at all times?
True/False
Ans : False
4) When can subclasses not access superclass members?
Ans : When superclass is declared as private.
5) Which class does begin Java class hierarchy?
Ans : Object class
6) Object class is a superclass of all other classes?
True/False
Ans : True
7) Java supports multiple inheritance?
True/False
Ans : False
8) What is inheritance?
Ans : Deriving an object from an existing class. In the other words, Inheritance is the process of inheriting all the features from a class
9) What are the advantages of inheritance?
Ans : Reusability of code and accessibility of variables and methods of the superclass by subclasses.
10) Which method is used to call the constructors of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super(argument)
11) Which is used to execute any method of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super.method-name(arguments)
12) Which methods are used to destroy the objects created by the constructor methods?
Ans : finalize()
13) What are abstract classes?
Ans : Abstract classes are those for which instances can’t be created.
14) What must a class do to implement an interface?
Ans: It must provide all of the methods in the interface and identify the interface in its implements clause.
15) Which methods in the Object class are declared as final?
Ans : getClass(), notify(), notifyAll(), and wait()
16) Final methods can be overridden.
True/False
Ans : False
17) Declaration of methods as final results in faster execution of the program?
True/False
Ans: True
18) Final variables should be declared in the beginning?
True/False
Ans : True
19) Can we declare variable inside a method as final variables? Why?
Ans : Cannot because, local variable cannot be declared as final variables.
20) Can an abstract class may be final?
Ans : An abstract class may not be declared as final.
21) Does a class inherit the constructors of it's super class?
Ans: A class does not inherit constructors from any of it's super classes.
22) What restrictions are placed on method overloading?
Ans: Two methods may not have the same name and argument list but different return types.
23) What restrictions are placed on method overriding?
Ans : Overridden methods must have the same name , argument list , and return type. The overriding method may not limit the access of the method it overridees.The overriding method may not throw any exceptions that may not be thrown by the overridden method.
24) What modifiers may be used with an inner class that is a member of an outer class?
Ans : a (non-local) inner class may be declared as public, protected, private, static, final or abstract.
25) How this() is used with constructors?
Ans: this() is used to invoke a constructor of the same class
26) How super() used with constructors?
Ans : super() is used to invoke a super class constructor
27) Which of the following statements correctly describes an interface?
a)It's a concrete class
b)It's a superclass
c)It's a type of abstract class
Ans: c
28) An interface contains __ methods
a)Non-abstract
b)Implemented
c)unimplemented
Ans:c
STRING HANDLING
Which package does define String and StringBuffer classes?
Ans : java.lang package.
Which method can be used to obtain the length of the String?
Ans : length( ) method.
How do you concatenate Strings?
Ans : By using " + " operator.
Which method can be used to compare two strings for equality?
Ans : equals( ) method.
Which method can be used to perform a comparison between strings that ignores case differences?
Ans : equalsIgnoreCase( ) method.
What is the use of valueOf( ) method?
Ans : valueOf( ) method converts data from its internal format into a human-readable form.
What are the uses of toLowerCase( ) and toUpperCase( ) methods?
Ans : The method toLowerCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from uppercase to
lowercase.
The method toUpperCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from lowercase to
uppercase.
Which method can be used to find out the total allocated capacity of a StrinBuffer?
Ans : capacity( ) method.
Which method can be used to set the length of the buffer within a StringBuffer object?
Ans : setLength( ).
What is the difference between String and StringBuffer?
Ans : String objects are constants, whereas StringBuffer objects are not.
String class supports constant strings, whereas StringBuffer class supports growable, modifiable strings.
What are wrapper classes?
Ans : Wrapper classes are classes that allow primitive types to be accessed as objects.
Which of the following is not a wrapper class?
String
Integer
Boolean
Character
Ans : a.
What is the output of the following program?
public class Question {
public static void main(String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
String s3 = s1.concat(s2.toUpperCase( ) );
System.out.println(s1+s2+s3);
}
}
abcdefabcdef
abcabcDEFDEF
abcdefabcDEF
None of the above
ANS : c.
Which of the following methods are methods of the String class?
delete( )
append( )
reverse( )
replace( )
Ans : d.
Which of the following methods cause the String object referenced by s to be changed?
s.concat( )
s.toUpperCase( )
s.replace( )
s.valueOf( )
Ans : a and b.
String is a wrapper class?
True
False
Ans : b.
17) If you run the code below, what gets printed out?
String s=new String("Bicycle");
int iBegin=1;
char iEnd=3;
System.out.println(s.substring(iBegin,iEnd));
Bic
ic
c) icy
d) error: no method matching substring(int,char)
Ans : b.
18) Given the following declarations
String s1=new String("Hello")
String s2=new String("there");
String s3=new String();
Which of the following are legal operations?
s3=s1 + s2;
s3=s1 - s2;
c) s3=s1 & s2
d) s3=s1 && s2
Ans : a.
19) Which of the following statements are true?
The String class is implemented as a char array, elements are addressed using the stringname[] convention
b) Strings are a primitive type in Java that overloads the + operator for concatenation
c) Strings are a primitive type in Java and the StringBuffer is used as the matching wrapper type
d) The size of a string can be retrieved using the length property.
Ans : b.
EXPLORING JAVA.LANG
java.lang package is automatically imported into all programs.
True
False
Ans : a
What are the interfaces defined by java.lang?
Ans : Cloneable, Comparable and Runnable.
What are the constants defined by both Flaot and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE,
NaN,
POSITIVE_INFINITY,
NEGATIVE_INFINITY and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by Byte, Short, Integer and Long?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by both Float and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_RADIX,
MIN_RADIX,
MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What is the purpose of the Runtime class?
Ans : The purpose of the Runtime class is to provide access to the Java runtime system.
What is the purpose of the System class?
Ans : The purpose of the System class is to provide access to system resources.
Which class is extended by all other classes?
Ans : Object class is extended by all other classes.
Which class can be used to obtain design information about an object?
Ans : The Class class can be used to obtain information about an object’s design.
Which method is used to calculate the absolute value of a number?
Ans : abs( ) method.
What are E and PI?
Ans : E is the base of the natural logarithm and PI is the mathematical value pi.
Which of the following classes is used to perform basic console I/O?
System
SecurityManager
Math
Runtime
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Class class is the superclass of the Object class.
The Object class is final.
The Class class can be used to load other classes.
The ClassLoader class can be used to load other classes.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following methods are methods of the Math class?
absolute( )
log( )
cosine( )
sine( )
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true about the Error and Exception classes?
Both classes extend Throwable.
The Error class is final and the Exception class is not.
The Exception class is final and the Error is not.
Both classes implement Throwable.
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Void class extends the Class class.
The Float class extends the Double class.
The System class extends the Runtime class.
The Integer class extends the Number class.
Ans : d.
17) Which of the following will output -4.0
System.out.println(Math.floor(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.round(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.ceil(-4.7));
d) System.out.println(Math.Min(-4.7));
Ans : c.
18) Which of the following are valid statements
a) public class MyCalc extends Math
b) Math.max(s);
c) Math.round(9.99,1);
d) Math.mod(4,10);
e) None of the above.
Ans : e.
19) What will happen if you attempt to compile and run the following code?
Integer ten=new Integer(10);
Long nine=new Long (9);
System.out.println(ten + nine);
int i=1;
System.out.println(i + ten);
19 followed by 20
19 followed by 11
Error: Can't convert java lang Integer
d) 10 followed by 1
Ans : c.
INPUT / OUTPUT : EXPLORING JAVA.IO
What is meant by Stream and what are the types of Streams and classes of the Streams?
Ans : A Stream is an abstraction that either produces or consumes information.
There are two types of Streams. They are:
Byte Streams : Byte Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of bytes.
Character Streams : Character Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of characters.
Byte Stream classes : Byte Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are:InputStream and OutputStream.
Character Stream classes : Character Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are : Reader and Writer.
Which of the following statements are true?
UTF characters are all 8-bits.
UTF characters are all 16-bits.
UTF characters are all 24-bits.
Unicode characters are all 16-bits.
Bytecode characters are all 16-bits.
Ans : d.
Which of the following statements are true?
When you construct an instance of File, if you do not use the filenaming semantics of the local machine, the constructor will throw an IOException.
When you construct an instance of File, if the corresponding file does not exist on the local file system, one will be created.
When an instance of File is garbage collected, the corresponding file on the local file system is deleted.
None of the above.
Ans : a,b and c.
The File class contains a method that changes the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : b.
It is possible to use the File class to list the contents of the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : a.
Readers have methods that can read and return floats and doubles.
True
False
Ans : b.
You execute the code below in an empty directory. What is the result?
File f1 = new File("dirname");
File f2 = new File(f1, "filename");
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory.
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory. A new file called filename is created in directory dirname.
A new directory called dirname and a new file called filename are created, both in the current working directory.
A new file called filename is created in the current working directory.
No directory is created, and no file is created.
Ans : e.
What is the difference between the Reader/Writer class hierarchy and the
InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy?
Ans : The Reader/Writer class hierarchy is character-oriented and the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy is byte-oriented.
What is an I/O filter?
Ans : An I/O filter is an object that reads from one stream and writes to another, usually altering the data in some way as it is passed from one stream to another.
What is the purpose of the File class?
Ans : The File class is used to create objects that provide access to the files and directories of a local file system.
What interface must an object implement before it can be written to a stream as an object?
Ans : An object must implement the Serializable or Externalizable interface before it can be written to a stream as an object.
What is the difference between the File and RandomAccessFile classes?
Ans : The File class encapsulates the files and directories of the local file system. The RandomAccessFile class provides the methods needed to directly access data contained in any part of a file.
What class allows you to read objects directly from a stream?
Ans : The ObjectInputStream class supports the reading of objects from input streams.
What value does read( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The read( ) method returns – 1 when it has reached the end of a file.
What value does readLine( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The readLine( ) method returns null when it has reached the end of a file.
How many bits are used to represent Unicode, ASCII, UTF-16 and UTF-8 characters?
Ans : Unicode requires 16-bits and ASCII requires 8-bits. Although the ASCII character set uses only 1-bits, it is usually represented as 8-bits. UTF-8 represents characters using 8, 16 and 18-bit patterns. UTF-16 uses 16-bit and larger bit patterns.
Which of the following are true?
The InputStream and OutputStream classes are byte-oriented.
The ObjectInputStream and ObjectOutputStream do not support serialized object input and output.
The Reader and Writer classes are character-oriented.
The Reader and Writer classes are the preferred solution to serialized object output.
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are true about I/O filters?
Filters are supported on input, but not on output.
Filters are supported by the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy, but not by the Reader/Writer class hierarchy.
Filters read from one stream and write to another.
A filter may alter data that is read from one stream and written to another.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following are true?
Any Unicode character is represented using 16-bits.
7-bits are needed to represent any ASCII character.
UTF-8 characters are represented using only 8-bits.
UTF-16 characters are represented using only 16-bits.
Ans : a and b.
Which of the following are true?
The Serializable interface is used to identify objects that may be written to an output stream.
The Externalizable interface is implemented by classes that control the way in which their objects are serialized.
The Serializable interface extends the Externalizable interface.
The Externalizable interface extends the Serializable interface.
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true about the File class?
A File object can be used to change the current working directory.
A File object can be used to access the files in the current directory.
When a File object is created, a corresponding directory or file is created in the local file system.
File objects are used to access files and directories on the local file system.
File objects can be garbage collected.
When a File object is garbage collected, the corresponding file or directory is deleted.
Ans : b, d and e.
How do you create a Reader object from an InputStream object?
Use the static createReader( ) method of InputStream class.
Use the static createReader( ) method of Reader class.
Create an InputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the InputStreamReader constructor.
Create an OutputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the OutputStreamReader constructor.
Ans : c.
Which of the following are true?
Writer classes can be used to write characters to output streams using different character encodings.
Writer classes can be used to write Unicode characters to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of the values of any Java primitive type to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of objects to output streams.
Ans : a and b.
The isFile( ) method returns a boolean value depending on whether the file object is a file or a directory.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
Reading or writing can be done even after closing the input/output source.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The ________ method helps in clearing the buffer.
Ans : flush( ).
The System.err method is used to print error message.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What is meant by StreamTokenizer?
Ans : StreamTokenizer breaks up InputStream into tokens that are delimited by sets of characters.
It has the constructor : StreamTokenizer(Reader inStream).
Here inStream must be some form of Reader.
What is Serialization and deserialization?
Ans : Serialization is the process of writing the state of an object to a byte stream.
Deserialization is the process of restoring these objects.
30) Which of the following can you perform using the File class?
a) Change the current directory
b) Return the name of the parent directory
c) Delete a file
d) Find if a file contains text or binary information
Ans : b and c.
31)How can you change the current working directory using an instance of the File class called FileName?
FileName.chdir("DirName").
FileName.cd("DirName").
FileName.cwd("DirName").
The File class does not support directly changing the current directory.
Ans : d.
EVENT HANDLING
The event delegation model, introduced in release 1.1 of the JDK, is fully compatible with the
event model.
True
False
Ans : b.
A component subclass that has executed enableEvents( ) to enable processing of a certain kind of event cannot also use an adapter as a listener for the same kind of event.
True
False
Ans : b.
What is the highest-level event class of the event-delegation model?
Ans : The java.util.eventObject class is the highest-level class in the event-delegation hierarchy.
What interface is extended by AWT event listeners?
Ans : All AWT event listeners extend the java.util.EventListener interface.
What class is the top of the AWT event hierarchy?
Ans : The java.awt.AWTEvent class is the highest-level class in the AWT event class hierarchy.
What event results from the clicking of a button?
Ans : The ActionEvent event is generated as the result of the clicking of a button.
What is the relationship between an event-listener interface and an event-adapter class?
Ans : An event-listener interface defines the methods that must be implemented by an event
handler for a particular kind of event.
An event adapter provides a default implementation of an event-listener interface.
In which package are most of the AWT events that support the event-delegation model defined?
Ans : Most of the AWT–related events of the event-delegation model are defined in the
java.awt.event package. The AWTEvent class is defined in the java.awt package.
What is the advantage of the event-delegation model over the earlier event-inheritance model?
Ans : The event-delegation has two advantages over the event-inheritance model. They are :
It enables event handling by objects other than the ones that generate the events. This
allows a clean separation between a component’s design and its use.
It performs much better in applications where many events are generated. This
performance improvement is due to the fact that the event-delegation model does not
have to repeatedly process unhandled events, as is the case of the event-inheritance
model.
What is the purpose of the enableEvents( ) method?
Ans :The enableEvents( ) method is used to enable an event for a particular object.
Which of the following are true?
The event-inheritance model has replaced the event-delegation model.
The event-inheritance model is more efficient than the event-delegation model.
The event-delegation model uses event listeners to define the methods of event-handling classes.
The event-delegation model uses the handleEvent( ) method to support event handling.
Ans : c.
Which of the following is the highest class in the event-delegation model?
java.util.EventListener
java.util.EventObject
java.awt.AWTEvent
java.awt.event.AWTEvent
Ans : b.
When two or more objects are added as listeners for the same event, which listener is first invoked to handle the event?
The first object that was added as listener.
The last object that was added as listener.
There is no way to determine which listener will be invoked first.
It is impossible to have more than one listener for a given event.
Ans : c.
Which of the following components generate action events?
Buttons
Labels
Check boxes
Windows
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
A TextField object may generate an ActionEvent.
A TextArea object may generate an ActionEvent.
A Button object may generate an ActionEvent.
A MenuItem object may generate an ActionEvent.
Ans : a,c and d.
Which of the following are true?
The MouseListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseMotionListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseClickListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The ActionListener interface defines methods for handling the clicking of a button.
Ans : a and d.
Suppose that you want to have an object eh handle the TextEvent of a TextArea object t. How should you add eh as the event handler for t?
t.addTextListener(eh);
eh.addTextListener(t);
addTextListener(eh.t);
addTextListener(t,eh);
Ans : a.
What is the preferred way to handle an object’s events in Java 2?
Override the object’s handleEvent( ) method.
Add one or more event listeners to handle the events.
Have the object override its processEvent( ) methods.
Have the object override its dispatchEvent( ) methods.
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true?
A component may handle its own events by adding itself as an event listener.
A component may handle its own events by overriding its event-dispatching method.
A component may not handle oits own events.
A component may handle its own events only if it implements the handleEvent( ) method.
Ans : a and b.
APPLETS
What is an Applet? Should applets have constructors?
Ans : Applet is a dynamic and interactive program that runs inside a Web page
displayed by a Java capable browser. We don’t have the concept of Constructors in Applets.
How do we read number information from my applet’s parameters, given that Applet’s getParameter() method returns a string?
Ans : Use the parseInt() method in the Integer Class, the Float(String) constructor in the
Class Float, or the Double(String) constructor in the class Double.
How can I arrange for different applets on a web page to communicate with each other?
Ans : Name your applets inside the Applet tag and invoke AppletContext’s getApplet()
method in your applet code to obtain references to the other applets on the page.
How do I select a URL from my Applet and send the browser to that page?
Ans : Ask the applet for its applet context and invoke showDocument() on that context object.
Eg. URL targetURL;
String URLString
AppletContext context = getAppletContext();
try{
targetUR L = new URL(URLString);
} catch (Malformed URLException e){
// Code for recover from the exception
}
context. showDocument (targetURL);
Can applets on different pages communicate with each other?
Ans : No. Not Directly. The applets will exchange the information at one meeting place
either on the local file system or at remote system.
How do Applets differ from Applications?
Ans : Appln: Stand Alone
Applet: Needs no explicit installation on local m/c.
Appln: Execution starts with main() method.
Applet: Execution starts with init() method.
Appln: May or may not be a GUI
Applet: Must run within a GUI (Using AWT)
How do I determine the width and height of my application?
Ans : Use the getSize() method, which the Applet class inherits from the Component
class in the Java.awt package. The getSize() method returns the size of the applet as
a Dimension object, from which you extract separate width, height fields.
Eg. Dimension dim = getSize ();
int appletwidth = dim.width ();
8) What is AppletStub Interface?
Ans : The applet stub interface provides the means by which an applet and the browser communicate. Your code will not typically implement this interface.
It is essential to have both the .java file and the .html file of an applet in the same
directory.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The tag contains two attributes namely _________ and _______.
Ans : Name , value.
Passing values to parameters is done in the _________ file of an applet.
Ans : .html.
12) What tags are mandatory when creating HTML to display an applet
name, height, width
code, name
codebase, height, width
d) code, height, width
Ans : d.
Applet’s getParameter( ) method can be used to get parameter values.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the Applet’s Life Cycle methods? Explain them?
Ans : init( ) method - Can be called when an applet is first loaded.
start( ) method - Can be called each time an applet is started.
paint( ) method - Can be called when the applet is minimized or refreshed.
stop( ) method - Can be called when the browser moves off the applet’s page.
destroy( ) method - Can be called when the browser is finished with the applet.
What are the Applet’s information methods?
Ans : getAppletInfo( ) method : Returns a string describing the applet, its author ,copy
right information, etc.
getParameterInfo( ) method : Returns an array of string describing the applet’s parameters.
All Applets are subclasses of Applet.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
All Applets must import java.applet and java.awt.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the steps involved in Applet development?
Ans : a) Edit a Java source file,
b) Compile your program and
c) Execute the appletviewer, specifying the name of your applet’s source file.
Applets are executed by the console based Java run-time interpreter.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
Which classes and interfaces does Applet class consist?
Ans : Applet class consists of a single class, the Applet class and three interfaces: AppletContext,
AppletStub and AudioClip.
What is the sequence for calling the methods by AWT for applets?
Ans : When an applet begins, the AWT calls the following methods, in this sequence.
init( )
start( )
paint( )
When an applet is terminated, the following sequence of method cals takes place :
stop( )
destroy( )
Which method is used to output a string to an applet?
Ans : drawString ( ) method.
Every color is created from an RGB value.
True.
False
Ans : a.
AWT : WINDOWS, GRAPHICS AND FONTS
How would you set the color of a graphics context called g to cyan?
g.setColor(Color.cyan);
g.setCurrentColor(cyan);
g.setColor("Color.cyan");
g.setColor("cyan’);
g.setColor(new Color(cyan));
Ans : a.
The code below draws a line. What color is the line?
g.setColor(Color.red.green.yellow.red.cyan);
g.drawLine(0, 0, 100,100);
Red
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Ans : d.
What does the following code draw?
g.setColor(Color.black);
g.drawLine(10, 10, 10, 50);
g.setColor(Color.RED);
g.drawRect(100, 100, 150, 150);
A red vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A red vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 100 pixel
Ans : b.
Which of the statements below are true?
A polyline is always filled.
b) A polyline can not be filled.
c) A polygon is always filled.
d) A polygon is always closed
e) A polygon may be filled or not filled
Ans : b, d and e.
What code would you use to construct a 24-point bold serif font?
new Font(Font.SERIF, 24,Font.BOLD);
new Font("SERIF", 24, BOLD");
new Font("BOLD ", 24,Font.SERIF);
new Font("SERIF", Font.BOLD,24);
new Font(Font.SERIF, "BOLD", 24);
Ans : d.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
The string "question #6", with its top-left corner at 10,0
A little squiggle coming down from the top of the component, a little way in from the left edge
Ans : b.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
A circle at (100, 100) with radius of 44
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 100
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 44
The code does not compile
Ans : d.
8)What is relationship between the Canvas class and the Graphics class?
Ans : A Canvas object provides access to a Graphics object via its paint( ) method.
What are the Component subclasses that support painting.
Ans : The Canvas, Frame, Panel and Applet classes support painting.
What is the difference between the paint( ) and repaint( ) method?
Ans : The paint( ) method supports painting via a Graphics object. The repaint( ) method is used
to cause paint( ) to be invoked by the AWT painting method.
What is the difference between the Font and FontMetrics classes?
Ans : The FontMetrics class is used to define implementation-specific properties, such as ascent
and descent, of a Font object.
Which of the following are passed as an argument to the paint( ) method?
A Canvas object
A Graphics object
An Image object
A paint object
Ans : b.
Which of the following methods are invoked by the AWT to support paint and repaint operations?
paint( )
repaint( )
draw( )
redraw( )
Ans : a.
Which of the following classes have a paint( ) method?
Canvas
Image
Frame
Graphics
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are methods of the Graphics class?
drawRect( )
drawImage( )
drawPoint( )
drawString( )
Ans : a, b and d.
Which Font attributes are available through the FontMetrics class?
ascent
leading
case
height
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true?
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been minimized and then maximized.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been covered and then uncovered.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when application data is changed.
The AWT does not support repainting operations.
Ans : a and b.
Which method is used to size a graphics object to fit the current size of the window?
Ans : getSize( ) method.
What are the methods to be used to set foreground and background colors?
Ans : setForeground( ) and setBackground( ) methods.
19) You have created a simple Frame and overridden the paint method as follows
public void paint(Graphics g){
g.drawString("Dolly",50,10);
}
What will be the result when you attempt to compile and run the program?
The string "Dolly" will be displayed at the centre of the frame
b) An error at compilation complaining at the signature of the paint method
c) The lower part of the word Dolly will be seen at the top of the form, with the top hidden.
d) The string "Dolly" will be shown at the bottom of the form
Ans : c.
20) Where g is a graphics instance what will the following code draw on the screen.
g.fillArc(45,90,50,50,90,180);
a) An arc bounded by a box of height 45, width 90 with a centre point of 50,50, starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
b) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a centre point of 45,90 starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees clockwise.
c) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a top left at coordinates of 45,
90, starting at 90 degrees and traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
d) An arc starting at 45 degrees, traversing through 90 degrees clockwise bounded by a
box of height 50, width 50 with a centre point of 90, 180.
Ans : c.
21) Given the following code
import java.awt.*;
public class SetF extends Frame{
public static void main(String argv[]){
SetF s = new SetF();
s.setSize(300,200);
s.setVisible(true);
}
}
How could you set the frame surface color to pink
a)s.setBackground(Color.pink);
b)s.setColor(PINK);
c)s.Background(pink);
d)s.color=Color.pink
Ans : a.
AWT: CONTROLS, LAYOUT MANAGERS AND MENUS
What is meant by Controls and what are different types of controls?
Ans : Controls are componenets that allow a user to interact with your application.
The AWT supports the following types of controls:
Labels
Push buttons
Check boxes
Choice lists
Lists
Scroll bars
Text components
These controls are subclasses of Component.
You want to construct a text area that is 80 character-widths wide and 10 character-heights tall. What code do you use?
new TextArea(80, 10)
new TextArea(10, 80)
Ans: b.
A text field has a variable-width font. It is constructed by calling new
TextField("iiiii"). What happens if you change the contents of the text field to
"wwwww"? (Bear in mind that is one of the narrowest characters, and w is one of the widest.)
The text field becomes wider.
The text field becomes narrower.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the ß and à keys.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the text field’s horizontal scroll bar.
Ans : c.
The CheckboxGroup class is a subclass of the Component class.
True
False
Ans : b.
5) What are the immediate super classes of the following classes?
a) Container class
b) MenuComponent class
c) Dialog class
d) Applet class
e) Menu class
Ans : a) Container - Component
b) MenuComponent - Object
c) Dialog - Window
d) Applet - Panel
e) Menu - MenuItem
6) What are the SubClass of Textcomponent Class?
Ans : TextField and TextArea
7) Which method of the component class is used to set the position and the size of a component?
Ans : setBounds()
8) Which TextComponent method is used to set a TextComponent to the read-only state?
Ans : setEditable()
9) How can the Checkbox class be used to create a radio button?
Ans : By associating Checkbox objects with a CheckboxGroup.
10) What Checkbox method allows you to tell if a Checkbox is checked?
Ans : getState()
11) Which Component method is used to access a component's immediate Container?
getVisible()
getImmediate
getParent()
getContainer
Ans : c.
12) What methods are used to get and set the text label displayed by a Button object?
Ans : getLabel( ) and setLabel( )
13) What is the difference between a Choice and a List?
Ans : A Choice is displayed in a compact form that requires you to pull it down to see the list of available choices. Only one item may be selected from a Choice.
A List may be displayed in such a way that several List items are visible. A List supports the selection of one or more List items.
14) Which Container method is used to cause a container to be laid out and redisplayed?
Ans : validate( )
15) What is the difference between a Scollbar and a Scrollpane?
Ans : A Scrollbar is a Component, but not a Container.
A Scrollpane is a Container and handles its own events and performs its own
scrolling.
16) Which Component subclass is used for drawing and painting?
Ans : Canvas.
17) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Component?
Button
Label
CheckboxMenuItem
Toolbar
Frame
Ans : a, b and e.
18) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Container?
Frame
TextArea
MenuBar
FileDialog
Applet
Ans : a,d and e.
19) Which method is used to set the text of a Label object?
setText( )
setLabel( )
setTextLabel( )
setLabelText( )
Ans : a.
20) Which constructor creates a TextArea with 10 rows and 20 columns?
new TextArea(10, 20)
new TextArea(20, 10)
new TextArea(new Rows(10), new columns(20))
new TextArea(200)
Ans : a.
(Usage is TextArea(rows, columns)
21) Which of the following creates a List with 5 visible items and multiple selection enabled?
new List(5, true)
new List(true, 5)
new List(5, false)
new List(false,5)
Ans : a.
[Usage is List(rows, multipleMode)]
22) Which are true about the Container class?
The validate( ) method is used to cause a Container to be laid out and redisplayed.
The add( ) method is used to add a Component to a Container.
The getBorder( ) method returns information about a Container’s insets.
The getComponent( ) method is used to access a Component that is contained in a Container.
Ans : a, b and d.
23) Suppose a Panel is added to a Frame and a Button is added to the Panel. If the Frame’s font is set to 12-point TimesRoman, the Panel’s font is set to 10-point TimesRoman, and the Button’s font is not set, what font will be used to dispaly the Button’s label?
12-point TimesRoman
11-point TimesRoman
10-point TimesRoman
9-point TimesRoman
Ans : c.
A Frame’s background color is set to Color.Yellow, and a Button’s background color is to Color.Blue. Suppose the Button is added to a Panel, which is added to the Frame. What background color will be used with the Panel?
Colr.Yellow
Color.Blue
Color.Green
Color.White
Ans : a.
25) Which method will cause a Frame to be displayed?
show( )
setVisible( )
display( )
displayFrame( )
Ans : a and b.
26) All the componenet classes and container classes are derived from _________ class.
Ans : Object.
27) Which method of the container class can be used to add components to a Panel.
Ans : add ( ) method.
28) What are the subclasses of the Container class?
Ans : The Container class has three major subclasses. They are :
Window
Panel
ScrollPane
29) The Choice component allows multiple selection.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
30) The List component does not generate any events.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
31) Which components are used to get text input from the user.
Ans : TextField and TextArea.
32) Which object is needed to group Checkboxes to make them exclusive?
Ans : CheckboxGroup.
33) Which of the following components allow multiple selections?
Non-exclusive Checkboxes.
Radio buttons.
Choice.
List.
Ans : a and d.
34) What are the types of Checkboxes and what is the difference between them?
Ans : Java supports two types of Checkboxes. They are : Exclusive and Non-exclusive.
In case of exclusive Checkboxes, only one among a group of items can be selected at a time. I f an item from the group is selected, the checkbox currently checked is deselected and the new selection is highlighted. The exclusive Checkboxes are also called as Radio buttons.
The non-exclusive checkboxes are not grouped together and each one can be selected independent of the other.
35) What is a Layout Manager and what are the different Layout Managers available in java.awt and what is the default Layout manager for the panal and the panal subclasses?
Ans: A layout Manager is an object that is used to organize components in a container.
The different layouts available in java.awt are :
FlowLayout, BorderLayout, CardLayout, GridLayout and GridBag Layout.
The default Layout Manager of Panal and Panal sub classes is FlowLayout".
36) Can I exert control over the size and placement of components in my interface?
Ans : Yes.
myPanal.setLayout(null);
myPanal.setbounds(20,20,200,200);
37) Can I add the same component to more than one container?
Ans : No. Adding a component to a container automatically removes it from any previous parent(container).
38) How do I specify where a window is to be placed?
Ans : Use setBounds, setSize, or setLocation methods to implement this.
setBounds(int x, int y, int width, int height)
setBounds(Rectangle r)
setSize(int width, int height)
setSize(Dimension d)
setLocation(int x, int y)
setLocation(Point p)
39) How can we create a borderless window?
Ans : Create an instance of the Window class, give it a size, and show it on the screen.
eg. Frame aFrame = ......
Window aWindow = new Window(aFrame);
aWindow.setLayout(new FlowLayout());
aWindow.add(new Button("Press Me"));
aWindow.getBounds(50,50,200,200);
aWindow.show();
40) Can I create a non-resizable windows? If so, how?
Ans: Yes. By using setResizable() method in class Frame.
41) What is the default Layout Manager for the Window and Window subclasses (Frame,Dialog)?
Ans : BorderLayout().
42) How are the elements of different layouts organized?
Ans : FlowLayout : The elements of a FlowLayout are organized in a top to bottom, left to right fashion.
BorderLayout : The elements of a BorderLayout are organized at the
borders (North, South, East and West) and the center of a
container.
CardLayout : The elements of a CardLayout are stacked, one on top of the other, like a deck of cards.
GridLayout : The elements of a GridLayout are of equal size and are laid out using the square of a grid.
GridBagLayout : The elements of a GridBagLayout are organized according to a grid.However, the elements are of different sizes and may occupy
more than one row or column of the grid. In addition, the rows and columns may have different sizes.
43) Which containers use a BorderLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Window, Frame and Dialog classes use a BorderLayout as their default layout.
44) Which containers use a FlowLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Panel and the Applet classes use the FlowLayout as their default layout.
45) What is the preferred size of a component?
Ans : The preferred size of a component size that will allow the component to display normally.
46) Which method is method to set the layout of a container?
startLayout( )
initLayout( )
layoutContainer( )
setLayout( )
Ans : d.
47) Which method returns the preferred size of a component?
getPreferredSize( )
getPreferred( )
getRequiredSize( )
getLayout( )
Ans : a.
48) Which layout should you use to organize the components of a container in a
tabular form?
CardLayout
BorederLayout
FlowLayout
GridLayout
Ans : d.
An application has a frame that uses a Border layout manager. Why is it probably not a good idea to put a vertical scroll bar at North in the frame?
The scroll bar’s height would be its preferred height, which is not likely to be enough.
The scroll bar’s width would be the entire width of the frame, which would be much wider than necessary.
Both a and b.
Neither a nor b. There is no problem with the layout as described.
Ans : c.
What is the default layouts for a applet, a frame and a panel?
Ans : For an applet and a panel, Flow layout is the default layout, whereas Border layout is default layout for a frame.
If a frame uses a Grid layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : a.
If a frame uses its default layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : b.
With a Border layout manager, the component at Center gets all the space that is left over, after the components at North and South have been considered.
True
False
Ans : b.
An Applet has its Layout Manager set to the default of FlowLayout. What code would be the correct to change to another Layout Manager?
setLayoutManager(new GridLayout());
setLayout(new GridLayout(2,2));
c) setGridLayout(2,2,))
d setBorderLayout();
Ans : b.
55) How do you indicate where a component will be positioned using Flowlayout?
a) North, South,East,West
b) Assign a row/column grid reference
c) Pass a X/Y percentage parameter to the add method
d) Do nothing, the FlowLayout will position the component
Ans :d.
56) How do you change the current layout manager for a container?
a) Use the setLayout method
b) Once created you cannot change the current layout manager of a component
c) Use the setLayoutManager method
d) Use the updateLayout method
Ans :a.
57)When using the GridBagLayout manager, each new component requires a new instance of the GridBagConstraints class. Is this statement true or false?
a) true
b) false
Ans : b.
58) Which of the following statements are true?
a)The default layout manager for an Applet is FlowLayout
b) The default layout manager for an application is FlowLayout
c) A layout manager must be assigned to an Applet before the setSize method is called
d) The FlowLayout manager attempts to honor the preferred size of any components
Ans : a and d.
59) Which method does display the messages whenever there is an item selection or deselection of the CheckboxMenuItem menu?
Ans : itemStateChanged method.
60) Which is a dual state menu item?
Ans : CheckboxMenuItem.
61) Which method can be used to enable/diable a checkbox menu item?
Ans : setState(boolean).
Which of the following may a menu contain?
A separator
A check box
A menu
A button
A panel
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following may contain a menu bar?
A panel
A frame
An applet
A menu bar
A menu
Ans : b
64) What is the difference between a MenuItem and a CheckboxMenuItem?
Ans : The CheckboxMenuItem class extends the MenuItem class to support a menu item
that may be checked or unchecked.
65) Which of the following are true?
A Dialog can have a MenuBar.
MenuItem extends Menu.
A MenuItem can be added to a Menu.
A Menu can be added to a Menu.
Ans : c and d.
Which colour is used to indicate instance methods in the standard "javadoc" format documentation:
1) blue
2) red
3) purple
4) orange
Answer : 2
explain
In JDK 1.1 the variabels, methods and constructors are colour coded to simplifytheir identification.
endExplain
What is the correct ordering for the import, class and package declarations when found in a single file?
1) package, import, class
2) class, import, package
3) import, package, class
4) package, class, import
Answer : 1
explain
This is my explanation for question 2
endExplain
Which methods can be legally applied to a string object?
(Multiple)
1) equals(String)
2) equals(Object)
3) trim()
4) round()
5) toString()
Answer : 1,2,3,5
What is the parameter specification for the public static void main method?
(multiple)
1) String args []
2) String [] args
3) Strings args []
4) String args
Answer : 1,2
What does the zeroth element of the string array passed to the public static void main method contain?
(multiple)
1) The name of the program
2) The number of arguments
3) The first argument if one is present
Answer : 3
Which of the following are Java keywords?
(multiple)
1) goto
2) malloc
3) extends
4) FALSE
Answer : 3
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
int age;
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 4
Which of these is the correct format to use to create the literal char value a?
(multiple)
1) 'a'
2) "a"
3) new Character(a)
4) \000a
Answer : 1
What is the legal range of a byte integral type?
1) 0 - 65, 535
2) (-128) - 127
3) (-32,768) - 32,767
4) (-256) - 255
Answer : 2
Which of the following is illegal:
1) int i = 32;
2) float f = 45.0;
3) double d = 45.0;
Answer 2
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
static int age;
public static void main (String args []) {
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 2
Which of the following are correct?
(multiple)
1) 128 >> 1 gives 64
2) 128 >>> 1 gives 64
3) 128 >> 1 gives -64
4) 128 >>> 1 gives -64
Answer : 1
Which of the following return true?
(multiple)
1) "john" == new String("john")
2) "john".equals("john")
3) "john" = "john"
4) "john".equals(new Button("john"))
Answer : 2
Which of the following do not lead to a runtime error?
(multiple)
1) "john" + " was " + " here"
2) "john" + 3
3) 3 + 5
4) 5 + 5.5
answer 1,2,3,4
Which of the following are so called "short circuit" logical operators?
(multiple)
1) &
2) ||
3) &&
4) |
Answer : 2,3
Which of the following are acceptable?
(multiple)
1) Object o = new Button("A");
2) Boolean flag = true;
3) Panel p = new Frame();
4) Frame f = new Panel();
5) Panel p = new Applet();
Answer : 1,5
What is the result of compiling and running the following code:
public class Test {
static int total = 10;
public static void main (String args []) {
new Test();
}
public Test () {
System.out.println("In test");
System.out.println(this);
int temp = this.total;
if (temp > 5) {
System.out.println(temp);
}
}
}
(multiple)
1) The class will not compile
2) The compiler reports and error at line 2
3) The compiler reports an error at line 9
4) The value 10 is one of the elements printed to the standard output
5) The class compiles but generates a runtime error
Answer : 4
Which of the following is correct:
1) String temp [] = new String {"j" "a" "z"};
2) String temp [] = { "j " " b" "c"};
3) String temp = {"a", "b", "c"};
4) String temp [] = {"a", "b", "c"};
Answer 4
What is the correct declaration of an abstract method that is intended to be public:
1) public abstract void add();
2) public abstract void add() {}
3) public abstract add();
4) public virtual add();
Answer : 1
Under what situations do you obtain a default constructor?
1) When you define any class
2) When the class has no other constructors
3) When you define at least one constructor
Answer : 2
Which of the following can be used to define a constructor for this class, given the following code:
public class Test {
...
}
1) public void Test() {...}
2) public Test() {...}
3) public static Test() {...}
4) public static void Test() {...}
Answer : 2
Which of the following are acceptable to the Java compiler:
(multiple)
1) if (2 == 3) System.out.println("Hi");
2) if (2 = 3) System.out.println("Hi");
3) if (true) System.out.println("Hi");
4) if (2 != 3) System.out.println("Hi");
5) if (aString.equals("hello")) System.out.println("Hi");
Answer : 1,3,4,5
Assuming a method contains code which may raise an Exception (but not a RuntimeException), what is the correct way for a method to indicate that it expects the caller to handle that exception:
1) throw Exception
2) throws Exception
3) new Exception
4) Don't need to specify anything
Answer : 2
What is the result of executing the following code, using the parameters 4 and 0:
public void divide(int a, int b) {
try {
int c = a / b;
} catch (Exception e) {
System.out.print("Exception ");
} finally {
System.out.println("Finally");
}
1) Prints out: Exception Finally
2) Prints out: Finally
3) Prints out: Exception
4) No output
Answer : 1
Which of the following is a legal return type of a method overloading the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) void
2) int
3) Can be anything
Answer : 3
Which of the following statements is correct for a method which is overriding the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) the overriding method must return void
2) the overriding method must return int
3) the overriding method can return whatever it likes
Answer : 1
Given the following classes defined in separate files, what will be the effect of compiling and running this class Test?
class Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Vehicle: drive");
}
}
class Car extends Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Car: drive");
}
}
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
Vehicle v;
Car c;
v = new Vehicle();
c = new Car();
v.drive();
c.drive();
v = c;
v.drive();
}
}
1) Generates a Compiler error on the statement v= c;
2) Generates runtime error on the statement v= c;
3) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Car: drive
4) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Vehicle: drive
Answer : 3
Where in a constructor, can you place a call to a constructor defined in the super class?
1) Anywhere
2) The first statement in the constructor
3) The last statement in the constructor
4) You can't call super in a constructor
Answer : 2
Which variables can an inner class access from the class which encapsulates it?
(multiple)
1) All static variables
2) All final variables
3) All instance variables
4) Only final instance variables
5) Only final static variables
Answer : 1,2,3
What class must an inner class extend:
1) The top level class
2) The Object class
3) Any class or interface
4) It must extend an interface
Answer 3
In the following code, which is the earliest statement, where the object originally held in e, may be garbage collected:
1. public class Test {
2. public static void main (String args []) {
3. Employee e = new Employee("Bob", 48);
4. e.calculatePay();
5. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
6. e = null;
7. e = new Employee("Denise", 36);
8. e.calculatePay();
9. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
10. }
11. }
1) Line 10
2) Line 11
3) Line 7
4) Line 8
5) Never
Answer : 3
What is the name of the interface that can be used to define a class that can execute within its own thread?
1) Runnable
2) Run
3) Threadable
4) Thread
5) Executable
Answer : 1
What is the name of the method used to schedule a thread for execution?
1) init();
2) start();
3) run();
4) resume();
5) sleep();
Answer : 2
Which methods may cause a thread to stop executing?
(multiple)
1) sleep();
2) stop();
3) yield();
4) wait();
5) notify();
6) notifyAll()
7) synchronized()
Answer : 1,2,3,4
Which of the following would create a text field able to display 10 characters (assuming a fixed size font) displaying the initial string "hello":
1) new TextField("hello", 10);
2) new TextField("hello");
3) new textField(10);
4) new TextField();
Answer : 1
Which of the following methods are defined on the Graphics class:
(multiple)
1) drawLine(int, int, int, int)
2) drawImage(Image, int, int, ImageObserver)
3) drawString(String, int, int)
4) add(Component);
5) setVisible(boolean);
6) setLayout(Object);
Answer : 1,2,3
Which of the following layout managers honours the preferred size of a component:
(multiple)
1) CardLayout
2) FlowLayout
3) BorderLayout
4) GridLayout
Answer : 2
Given the following code what is the effect of a being 5:
public class Test {
public void add(int a) {
loop: for (int i = 1; i < 3; i++){
for (int j = 1; j < 3; j++) {
if (a == 5) {
break loop;
}
System.out.println(i * j);
}
}
}
}
1) Generate a runtime error
2) Throw an ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException
3) Print the values: 1, 2, 2, 4
4) Produces no output
Answer : 4
What is the effect of issuing a wait() method on an object
1) If a notify() method has already been sent to that object then it has no effect
2) The object issuing the call to wait() will halt until another object sends a notify() or notifyAll() method
3) An exception will be raised
4) The object issuing the call to wait() will be automatically synchronized with any other objects using the receiving object.
Answer : 2
The layout of a container can be altered using which of the following methods:
(multiple)
1) setLayout(aLayoutManager);
2) addLayout(aLayoutManager);
3) layout(aLayoutManager);
4) setLayoutManager(aLayoutManager);
Answer : 1
Using a FlowLayout manager, which is the correct way to add elements to a container:
1) add(component);
2) add("Center", component);
3) add(x, y, component);
4) set(component);
Answer : 1
Given that a Button can generate an ActionEvent which listener would you expect to have to implement, in a class which would handle this event?
1) FocusListener
2) ComponentListener
3) WindowListener
4) ActionListener
5) ItemListener
Answer : 4
Which of the following, are valid return types, for listener methods:
1) boolean
2) the type of event handled
3) void
4) Component
Answer : 3
Assuming we have a class which implements the ActionListener interface, which method should be used to register this with a Button?
1) addListener(*);
2) addActionListener(*);
3) addButtonListener(*);
4) setListener(*);
Answer : 2
In order to cause the paint(Graphics) method to execute, which of the following is the most appropriate method to call:
1) paint()
2) repaint()
3) paint(Graphics)
4) update(Graphics)
5) None - you should never cause paint(Graphics) to execute
Answer : 2
Which of the following illustrates the correct way to pass a parameter into an applet:
1)
True
False
Ans: a.
2) On successful compilation a file with the class extension is created.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
3) The Java source code can be created in a Notepad editor.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
4) The Java Program is enclosed in a class definition.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
5) What declarations are required for every Java application?
Ans: A class and the main( ) method declarations.
6) What are the two parts in executing a Java program and their purposes?
Ans: Two parts in executing a Java program are:
Java Compiler and Java Interpreter.
The Java Compiler is used for compilation and the Java Interpreter is used for execution of the application.
7) What are the three OOPs principles and define them?
Ans : Encapsulation, Inheritance and Polymorphism are the three OOPs
Principles.
Encapsulation:
Is the Mechanism that binds together code and the data it manipulates, and keeps both safe from outside interference and misuse.
Inheritance:
Is the process by which one object acquires the properties of another object.
Polymorphism:
Is a feature that allows one interface to be used for a general class of actions.
8) What is a compilation unit?
Ans : Java source code file.
9) What output is displayed as the result of executing the following statement?
System.out.println("// Looks like a comment.");
// Looks like a comment
The statement results in a compilation error
Looks like a comment
No output is displayed
Ans : a.
10) In order for a source code file, containing the public class Test, to successfully compile, which of the following must be true?
It must have a package statement
It must be named Test.java
It must import java.lang
It must declare a public class named Test
Ans : b
11) What are identifiers and what is naming convention?
Ans : Identifiers are used for class names, method names and variable names. An identifier may be any descriptive sequence of upper case & lower case letters,numbers or underscore or dollar sign and must not begin with numbers.
12) What is the return type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : void
13) What is the argument type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : string array.
14) Which characters are as first characters of an identifier?
Ans : A – Z, a – z, _ ,$
15) What are different comments?
Ans : 1) // -- single line comment
2) /* --
*/ multiple line comment
3) /** --
*/ documentation
16) What is the difference between constructor method and method?
Ans : Constructor will be automatically invoked when an object is created. Whereas method has to be call explicitly.
17) What is the use of bin and lib in JDK?
Ans : Bin contains all tools such as javac, applet viewer, awt tool etc., whereas Lib
contains all packages and variables.
Data types,variables and Arrays
1) What is meant by variable?
Ans: Variables are locations in memory that can hold values. Before assigning any value to a variable, it must be declared.
2) What are the kinds of variables in Java? What are their uses?
Ans: Java has three kinds of variables namely, the instance variable, the local variable and the class variable.
Local variables are used inside blocks as counters or in methods as temporary variables and are used to store information needed by a single method.
Instance variables are used to define attributes or the state of a particular object and are used to store information needed by multiple methods in the objects.
Class variables are global to a class and to all the instances of the class and are useful for communicating between different objects of all the same class or keeping track of global states.
3) How are the variables declared?
Ans: Variables can be declared anywhere in the method definition and can be initialized during their declaration.They are commonly declared before usage at the beginning of the definition.
Variables with the same data type can be declared together. Local variables must be given a value before usage.
4) What are variable types?
Ans: Variable types can be any data type that java supports, which includes the eight primitive data types, the name of a class or interface and an array.
5) How do you assign values to variables?
Ans: Values are assigned to variables using the assignment operator =.
6) What is a literal? How many types of literals are there?
Ans: A literal represents a value of a certain type where the type describes how that value behaves.
There are different types of literals namely number literals, character literals,
boolean literals, string literals,etc.
7) What is an array?
Ans: An array is an object that stores a list of items.
8) How do you declare an array?
Ans: Array variable indicates the type of object that the array holds.
Ex: int arr[];
9) Java supports multidimensional arrays.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
10) An array of arrays can be created.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
11) What is a string?
Ans: A combination of characters is called as string.
12) Strings are instances of the class String.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
13) When a string literal is used in the program, Java automatically creates instances of the string class.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
14) Which operator is to create and concatenate string?
Ans: Addition operator(+).
15) Which of the following declare an array of string objects?
String[ ] s;
String [ ]s:
String[ s]:
String s[ ]:
Ans : a, b and d
16) What is the value of a[3] as the result of the following array declaration?
1
2
3
4
Ans : d
17) Which of the following are primitive types?
byte
String
integer
Float
Ans : a.
18) What is the range of the char type?
0 to 216
0 to 215
0 to 216-1
0 to 215-1
Ans. d
19) What are primitive data types?
Ans : byte, short, int, long
float, double
boolean
char
20) What are default values of different primitive types?
Ans : int - 0
short - 0
byte - 0
long - 0 l
float - 0.0 f
double - 0.0 d
boolean - false
char - null
21) Converting of primitive types to objects can be explicitly.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
22) How do we change the values of the elements of the array?
Ans : The array subscript expression can be used to change the values of the elements of the array.
23) What is final varaible?
Ans : If a variable is declared as final variable, then you can not change its value. It becomes constant.
24) What is static variable?
Ans : Static variables are shared by all instances of a class.
Operators
1) What are operators and what are the various types of operators available in Java?
Ans: Operators are special symbols used in expressions.
The following are the types of operators:
Arithmetic operators,
Assignment operators,
Increment & Decrement operators,
Logical operators,
Biwise operators,
Comparison/Relational operators and
Conditional operators
2) The ++ operator is used for incrementing and the -- operator is used for
decrementing.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) Comparison/Logical operators are used for testing and magnitude.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) Character literals are stored as unicode characters.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) What are the Logical operators?
Ans: OR(|), AND(&), XOR(^) AND NOT(~).
6) What is the % operator?
Ans : % operator is the modulo operator or reminder operator. It returns the reminder of dividing the first operand by second operand.
7) What is the value of 111 % 13?
3
5
7
9
Ans : c.
8) Is &&= a valid operator?
Ans : No.
9) Can a double value be cast to a byte?
Ans : Yes
10) Can a byte object be cast to a double value ?
Ans : No. An object cannot be cast to a primitive value.
11) What are order of precedence and associativity?
Ans : Order of precedence the order in which operators are evaluated in expressions.
Associativity determines whether an expression is evaluated left-right or right-left.
12) Which Java operator is right associativity?
Ans : = operator.
13) What is the difference between prefix and postfix of -- and ++ operators?
Ans : The prefix form returns the increment or decrement operation and returns the value of the increment or decrement operation.
The postfix form returns the current value of all of the expression and then
performs the increment or decrement operation on that value.
14) What is the result of expression 5.45 + "3,2"?
The double value 8.6
The string ""8.6"
The long value 8.
The String "5.453.2"
Ans : d
15) What are the values of x and y ?
x = 5; y = ++x;
Ans : x = 6; y = 6
16) What are the values of x and z?
x = 5; z = x++;
Ans : x = 6; z = 5
Control Statements
1) What are the programming constructs?
Ans: a) Sequential
b) Selection -- if and switch statements
c) Iteration -- for loop, while loop and do-while loop
2) class conditional {
public static void main(String args[]) {
int i = 20;
int j = 55;
int z = 0;
z = i < j ? i : j; // ternary operator
System.out.println("The value assigned is " + z);
}
}
What is output of the above program?
Ans: The value assigned is 20
3) The switch statement does not require a break.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
4) The conditional operator is otherwise known as the ternary operator.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) The while loop repeats a set of code while the condition is false.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
6) The do-while loop repeats a set of code atleast once before the condition is tested.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
7) What are difference between break and continue?
Ans: The break keyword halts the execution of the current loop and forces control out of the loop.
The continue is similar to break, except that instead of halting the execution of the loop, it starts the next iteration.
8) The for loop repeats a set of statements a certain number of times until a condition is matched.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) Can a for statement loop indefintely?
Ans : Yes.
10) What is the difference between while statement and a do statement/
Ans : A while statement checks at the beginning of a loop to see whether the next loop iteration should occur.
A do statement checks at the end of a loop to see whether the next iteration of a loop should occur. The do statement will always execute the body of a loop at least once.
Introduction to Classes and Methods
1) Which is used to get the value of the instance variables?
Ans: Dot notation.
2) The new operator creates a single instance named class and returns a
reference to that object.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) A class is a template for multiple objects with similar features.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) What is mean by garbage collection?
Ans: When an object is no longer referred to by any variable, Java automatically
reclaims memory used by that object. This is known as garbage collection.
5) What are methods and how are they defined?
Ans: Methods are functions that operate on instances of classes in which they are defined.Objects can communicate with each other using methods and can call methods in other classes.
Method definition has four parts. They are name of the method, type of object or primitive type the method returns, a list of parameters and the body of the method.
A method's signature is a combination of the first three parts mentioned above.
6) What is calling method?
Ans: Calling methods are similar to calling or referring to an instance variable. These methods are accessed using dot notation.
Ex: obj.methodname(param1,param2)
7) Which method is used to determine the class of an object?
Ans: getClass( ) method can be used to find out what class the belongs to. This class is defined in the object class and is available to all objects.
8) All the classes in java.lang package are automatically imported when
a program is compiled.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) How can class be imported to a program?
Ans: To import a class, the import keyword should be used as shown.;
import classname;
10) How can class be imported from a package to a program?
Ans: import java . packagename . classname (or) import java.package name.*;
11) What is a constructor?
Ans: A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is
initialized when created.
12) Which keyword is used to create an instance of a class?
Ans: new.
13) Which method is used to garbage collect an object?
Ans: finalize ().
14) Constructors can be overloaded like regular methods.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
15) What is casting?
Ans: Casting is bused to convert the value of one type to another.
16) Casting between primitive types allows conversion of one primitive type to another.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
17) Casting occurs commonly between numeric types.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
18) Boolean values can be cast into any other primitive type.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
19) Casting does not affect the original object or value.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
20) Which cast must be used to convert a larger value into a smaller one?
Ans: Explicit cast.
21) Which cast must be used to cast an object to another class?
Ans: Specific cast.
22) Which of the following features are common to both Java & C++?
A.The class declaration
b.The access modifiers
c.The encapsulation of data & methods with in objects
d.The use of pointers
Ans: a,b,c.
23) Which of the following statements accurately describe the use of access modifiers within a class definition?
a.They can be applied to both data & methods
b.They must precede a class's data variables or methods
c.They can follow a class's data variables or methods
d.They can appear in any order
e.They must be applied to data variables first and then to methods
Ans: a,b,d.
24) Suppose a given instance variable has been declared private.
Can this instance variable be manipulated by methods out side its class?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
25) Which of the following statements can be used to describe a public method?
a.It is accessible to all other classes in the hierarchy
b.It is accessablde only to subclasses of its parent class
c.It represents the public interface of its class
d.The only way to gain access to this method is by calling one of the public class
methods
Ans: a,c.
26) Which of the following types of class members can be part of the internal part of a class?
a.Public instance variables
b.Private instance variables
c.Public methods
d.Private methods
Ans: b,d.
27) You would use the ____ operator to create a single instance of a named class.
a.new
b.dot
Ans: a.
28) Which of the following statements correctly describes the relation between an object and the instance variable it stores?
a.Each new object has its own distinctive set of instance variables
b.Each object has a copy of the instance variables of its class
c.the instance variable of each object are seperate from the variables of other objects
d.The instance variables of each object are stored together with the variables of other objects
Ans: a,b,c.
29) If no input parameters are specified in a method declaration then the declaration will include __.
a.an empty set of parantheses
b.the term void
Ans: a.
30) What are the functions of the dot(.) operator?
a.It enables you to access instance variables of any objects within a class
b.It enables you to store values in instance variables of an object
c.It is used to call object methods
d.It is to create a new object
Ans: a,b,c.
31) Which of the following can be referenced by this variable?
a.The instance variables of a class only
b.The methods of a class only
c.The instance variables and methods of a class
Ans: c.
32) The this reference is used in conjunction with ___methods.
a.static
b.non-static
Ans: b.
33) Which of the following operators are used in conjunction with the this and super references?
a.The new operator
b.The instanceof operator
c.The dot operator
Ans: c.
34) A constructor is automatically called when an object is instantiated
a. true
b. false
Ans: a.
35) When may a constructor be called without specifying arguments?
a. When the default constructor is not called
b. When the name of the constructor differs from that of the class
c. When there are no constructors for the class
Ans: c.
36) Each class in java can have a finalizer method
a. true
b.false
Ans: a.
37) When an object is referenced, does this mean that it has been identified by the finalizer method for garbage collection?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
38) Because finalize () belongs to the java.lang.Object class, it is present in all ___.
a.objects
b.classes
c.methods
Ans: b.
39) Identify the true statements about finalization.
a.A class may have only one finalize method
b.Finalizers are mostly used with simple classes
c.Finalizer overloading is not allowed
Ans: a,c.
40) When you write finalize() method for your class, you are overriding a finalizer
inherited from a super class.
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
41) Java memory management mechanism garbage collects objects which are no longer referenced
a true
b.false
Ans: a.
42) are objects referenced by a variable candidates for garbage collection when the variable goes out of scope?
a yes
b. no
Ans: a.
43) Java's garbage collector runs as a ___ priority thread waiting for __priority threads to relinquish the processor.
a.high
b.low
Ans: a,b.
44) The garbage collector will run immediately when the system is out of memory
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
45) You can explicitly drop a object reference by setting the value of a variable whose data type is a reference type to ___
Ans: null
46) When might your program wish to run the garbage collecter?
a. before it enters a compute-intense section of code
b. before it enters a memory-intense section of code
c. before objects are finalized
d. when it knows there will be some idle time
Ans: a,b,d
47) For externalizable objects the class is solely responsible for the external format of its contents
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
48) When an object is stored, are all of the objects that are reachable from that object stored as well?
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
49) The default__ of objects protects private and trancient data, and supports the __ of the classes
a.evolution
b.encoding
Ans: b,a.
50) Which are keywords in Java?
a) NULL
b) sizeof
c) friend
d) extends
e) synchronized
Ans : d and e
51) When must the main class and the file name coincide?
Ans :When class is declared public.
52) What are different modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default, static, trancient, volatile, final, abstract.
53) What are access modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default.
54) What is meant by "Passing by value" and " Passing by reference"?
Ans : objects – pass by referrence
Methods - pass by value
55) Is a class a subclass of itself?
Ans : A class is a subclass itself.
56) What modifiers may be used with top-level class?
Ans : public, abstract, final.
57) What is an example of polymorphism?
Inner class
Anonymous classes
Method overloading
Method overriding
Ans : c
Packages and interface
1) What are packages ? what is use of packages ?
Ans :The package statement defines a name space in which classes are stored.If you omit the package, the classes are put into the default package.
Signature... package pkg;
Use: * It specifies to which package the classes defined in a file belongs to. * Package is both naming and a visibility control mechanism.
2) What is difference between importing "java.applet.Applet" and "java.applet.*;" ?
Ans :"java.applet.Applet" will import only the class Applet from the package java.applet
Where as "java.applet.*" will import all the classes from java.applet package.
3) What do you understand by package access specifier?
Ans : public: Anything declared as public can be accessed from anywhere
private: Anything declared in the private can’t be seen outside of its class.
default: It is visible to subclasses as well as to other classes in the same package.
4) What is interface? What is use of interface?
Ans : It is similar to class which may contain method’s signature only but not bodies.
Methods declared in interface are abstract methods. We can implement many interfaces on a class which support the multiple inheritance.
5) Is it is necessary to implement all methods in an interface?
Ans : Yes. All the methods have to be implemented.
6) Which is the default access modifier for an interface method?
Ans : public.
7) Can we define a variable in an interface ?and what type it should be ?
Ans : Yes we can define a variable in an interface. They are implicitly final and static.
8) What is difference between interface and an abstract class?
Ans : All the methods declared inside an Interface are abstract. Where as abstract class must have at least one abstract method and others may be concrete or abstract.
In Interface we need not use the keyword abstract for the methods.
9) By default, all program import the java.lang package.
True/False
Ans : True
10) Java compiler stores the .class files in the path specified in CLASSPATH
environmental variable.
True/False
Ans : False
11) User-defined package can also be imported just like the standard packages.
True/False
Ans : True
12) When a program does not want to handle exception, the ______class is used.
Ans : Throws
13) The main subclass of the Exception class is _______ class.
Ans : RuntimeException
14) Only subclasses of ______class may be caught or thrown.
Ans : Throwable
15) Any user-defined exception class is a subclass of the _____ class.
Ans : Exception
16) The catch clause of the user-defined exception class should ______ its
Base class catch clause.
Ans : Exception
17) A _______ is used to separate the hierarchy of the class while declaring an
Import statement.
Ans : Package
18) All standard classes of Java are included within a package called _____.
Ans : java.lang
19) All the classes in a package can be simultaneously imported using ____.
Ans : *
20) Can you define a variable inside an Interface. If no, why? If yes, how?
Ans.: YES. final and static
21) How many concrete classes can you have inside an interface?
Ans.: None
22) Can you extend an interface?
Ans.: Yes
23) Is it necessary to implement all the methods of an interface while implementing the interface?
Ans.: No
24) If you do not implement all the methods of an interface while implementing , what specifier should you use for the class ?
Ans.: abstract
25) How do you achieve multiple inheritance in Java?
Ans: Using interfaces.
26) How to declare an interface example?
Ans : access class classname implements interface.
27) Can you achieve multiple interface through interface?
a)True
b) false
Ans : a.
28) Can variables be declared in an interface ? If so, what are the modifiers?
Ans : Yes. final and static are the modifiers can be declared in an interface.
29) What are the possible access modifiers when implementing interface methods?
Ans : public.
30) Can anonymous classes be implemented an interface?
Ans : Yes.
31) Interfaces can’t be extended.
a)True
b)False
Ans : b.
32) Name interfaces without a method?
Ans : Serializable, Cloneble & Remote.
33) Is it possible to use few methods of an interface in a class ? If so, how?
Ans : Yes. Declare the class as abstract.
Exception Handling
1) What is the difference between ‘throw’ and ‘throws’ ?And it’s application?
Ans : Exceptions that are thrown by java runtime systems can be handled by Try and catch blocks. With throw exception we can handle the exceptions thrown by the program itself. If a method is capable of causing an exception that it does not
handle, it must specify this behavior so the callers of the method can guard
against that exception.
2) What is the difference between ‘Exception’ and ‘error’ in java?
Ans : Exception and Error are the subclasses of the Throwable class. Exception class is used for exceptional conditions that user program should catch. With exception class we can subclass to create our own custom exception.
Error defines exceptions that are not excepted to be caught by you program. Example is Stack Overflow.
3) What is ‘Resource leak’?
Ans : Freeing up other resources that might have been allocated at the beginning of a method.
4)What is the ‘finally’ block?
Ans : Finally block will execute whether or not an exception is thrown. If an exception is thrown, the finally block will execute even if no catch statement match the exception. Any time a method is about to return to the caller from inside try/catch block, via an uncaught exception or an explicit return statement, the finally clause is also execute.
5) Can we have catch block with out try block? If so when?
Ans : No. Try/Catch or Try/finally form a unit.
6) What is the difference between the following statements?
Catch (Exception e),
Catch (Error err),
Catch (Throwable t)
Ans :
7) What will happen to the Exception object after exception handling?
Ans : It will go for Garbage Collector. And frees the memory.
8) How many Exceptions we can define in ‘throws’ clause?
Ans : We can define multiple exceptions in throws clause.
Signature is..
type method-name (parameter-list) throws exception-list
9) The finally block is executed when an exception is thrown, even if no catch matches it.
True/False
Ans : True
10) The subclass exception should precede the base class exception when used within the catch clause.
True/False
Ans : True
11) Exceptions can be caught or rethrown to a calling method.
True/False
Ans : True
12) The statements following the throw keyword in a program are not executed.
True/False
Ans : True
13) The toString ( ) method in the user-defined exception class is overridden.
True/False
Ans : True
MULTI THREADING
1) What are the two types of multitasking?
Ans : 1.process-based
2.Thread-based
2) What are the two ways to create the thread?
Ans : 1.by implementing Runnable
2.by extending Thread
3) What is the signature of the constructor of a thread class?
Ans : Thread(Runnable threadob,String threadName)
4) What are all the methods available in the Runnable Interface?
Ans : run()
5) What is the data type for the method isAlive() and this method is
available in which class?
Ans : boolean, Thread
6) What are all the methods available in the Thread class?
Ans : 1.isAlive()
2.join()
3.resume()
4.suspend()
5.stop()
6.start()
7.sleep()
8.destroy()
7) What are all the methods used for Inter Thread communication and what is the class in which these methods are defined?
Ans :1. wait(),notify() & notifyall()
2. Object class
8) What is the mechanisam defind by java for the Resources to be used by only one Thread at a time?
Ans : Synchronisation
9) What is the procedure to own the moniter by many threads?
Ans : not possible
10) What is the unit for 1000 in the below statement?
ob.sleep(1000)
Ans : long milliseconds
11) What is the data type for the parameter of the sleep() method?
Ans : long
12) What are all the values for the following level?
max-priority
min-priority
normal-priority
Ans : 10,1,5
13) What is the method available for setting the priority?
Ans : setPriority()
14) What is the default thread at the time of starting the program?
Ans : main thread
15) The word synchronized can be used with only a method.
True/ False
Ans : False
16) Which priority Thread can prompt the lower primary Thread?
Ans : Higher Priority
17) How many threads at a time can access a monitor?
Ans : one
18) What are all the four states associated in the thread?
Ans : 1. new 2. runnable 3. blocked 4. dead
19) The suspend()method is used to teriminate a thread?
True /False
Ans : False
20) The run() method should necessary exists in clases created as subclass of thread?
True /False
Ans : True
21) When two threads are waiting on each other and can't proceed the programe is said to be in a deadlock?
True/False
Ans : True
22) Which method waits for the thread to die ?
Ans : join() method
23) Which of the following is true?
1) wait(),notify(),notifyall() are defined as final & can be called only from with in a synchronized method
2) Among wait(),notify(),notifyall() the wait() method only throws IOException
3) wait(),notify(),notifyall() & sleep() are methods of object class
1
2
3
1 & 2
1,2 & 3
Ans : D
24) Garbage collector thread belongs to which priority?
Ans : low-priority
25) What is meant by timeslicing or time sharing?
Ans : Timeslicing is the method of allocating CPU time to individual threads in a priority schedule.
26) What is meant by daemon thread? In java runtime, what is it's role?
Ans : Daemon thread is a low priority thread which runs intermittently in the background doing the garbage collection operation for the java runtime system.
Inheritance
1) What is the difference between superclass & subclass?
Ans : A super class is a class that is inherited whereas subclass is a class that does the inheriting.
2) Which keyword is used to inherit a class?
Ans : extends
3) Subclasses methods can access superclass members/ attributes at all times?
True/False
Ans : False
4) When can subclasses not access superclass members?
Ans : When superclass is declared as private.
5) Which class does begin Java class hierarchy?
Ans : Object class
6) Object class is a superclass of all other classes?
True/False
Ans : True
7) Java supports multiple inheritance?
True/False
Ans : False
8) What is inheritance?
Ans : Deriving an object from an existing class. In the other words, Inheritance is the process of inheriting all the features from a class
9) What are the advantages of inheritance?
Ans : Reusability of code and accessibility of variables and methods of the superclass by subclasses.
10) Which method is used to call the constructors of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super(argument)
11) Which is used to execute any method of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super.method-name(arguments)
12) Which methods are used to destroy the objects created by the constructor methods?
Ans : finalize()
13) What are abstract classes?
Ans : Abstract classes are those for which instances can’t be created.
14) What must a class do to implement an interface?
Ans: It must provide all of the methods in the interface and identify the interface in its implements clause.
15) Which methods in the Object class are declared as final?
Ans : getClass(), notify(), notifyAll(), and wait()
16) Final methods can be overridden.
True/False
Ans : False
17) Declaration of methods as final results in faster execution of the program?
True/False
Ans: True
18) Final variables should be declared in the beginning?
True/False
Ans : True
19) Can we declare variable inside a method as final variables? Why?
Ans : Cannot because, local variable cannot be declared as final variables.
20) Can an abstract class may be final?
Ans : An abstract class may not be declared as final.
21) Does a class inherit the constructors of it's super class?
Ans: A class does not inherit constructors from any of it's super classes.
22) What restrictions are placed on method overloading?
Ans: Two methods may not have the same name and argument list but different return types.
23) What restrictions are placed on method overriding?
Ans : Overridden methods must have the same name , argument list , and return type. The overriding method may not limit the access of the method it overridees.The overriding method may not throw any exceptions that may not be thrown by the overridden method.
24) What modifiers may be used with an inner class that is a member of an outer class?
Ans : a (non-local) inner class may be declared as public, protected, private, static, final or abstract.
25) How this() is used with constructors?
Ans: this() is used to invoke a constructor of the same class
26) How super() used with constructors?
Ans : super() is used to invoke a super class constructor
27) Which of the following statements correctly describes an interface?
a)It's a concrete class
b)It's a superclass
c)It's a type of abstract class
Ans: c
28) An interface contains __ methods
a)Non-abstract
b)Implemented
c)unimplemented
Ans:c
STRING HANDLING
Which package does define String and StringBuffer classes?
Ans : java.lang package.
Which method can be used to obtain the length of the String?
Ans : length( ) method.
How do you concatenate Strings?
Ans : By using " + " operator.
Which method can be used to compare two strings for equality?
Ans : equals( ) method.
Which method can be used to perform a comparison between strings that ignores case differences?
Ans : equalsIgnoreCase( ) method.
What is the use of valueOf( ) method?
Ans : valueOf( ) method converts data from its internal format into a human-readable form.
What are the uses of toLowerCase( ) and toUpperCase( ) methods?
Ans : The method toLowerCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from uppercase to
lowercase.
The method toUpperCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from lowercase to
uppercase.
Which method can be used to find out the total allocated capacity of a StrinBuffer?
Ans : capacity( ) method.
Which method can be used to set the length of the buffer within a StringBuffer object?
Ans : setLength( ).
What is the difference between String and StringBuffer?
Ans : String objects are constants, whereas StringBuffer objects are not.
String class supports constant strings, whereas StringBuffer class supports growable, modifiable strings.
What are wrapper classes?
Ans : Wrapper classes are classes that allow primitive types to be accessed as objects.
Which of the following is not a wrapper class?
String
Integer
Boolean
Character
Ans : a.
What is the output of the following program?
public class Question {
public static void main(String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
String s3 = s1.concat(s2.toUpperCase( ) );
System.out.println(s1+s2+s3);
}
}
abcdefabcdef
abcabcDEFDEF
abcdefabcDEF
None of the above
ANS : c.
Which of the following methods are methods of the String class?
delete( )
append( )
reverse( )
replace( )
Ans : d.
Which of the following methods cause the String object referenced by s to be changed?
s.concat( )
s.toUpperCase( )
s.replace( )
s.valueOf( )
Ans : a and b.
String is a wrapper class?
True
False
Ans : b.
17) If you run the code below, what gets printed out?
String s=new String("Bicycle");
int iBegin=1;
char iEnd=3;
System.out.println(s.substring(iBegin,iEnd));
Bic
ic
c) icy
d) error: no method matching substring(int,char)
Ans : b.
18) Given the following declarations
String s1=new String("Hello")
String s2=new String("there");
String s3=new String();
Which of the following are legal operations?
s3=s1 + s2;
s3=s1 - s2;
c) s3=s1 & s2
d) s3=s1 && s2
Ans : a.
19) Which of the following statements are true?
The String class is implemented as a char array, elements are addressed using the stringname[] convention
b) Strings are a primitive type in Java that overloads the + operator for concatenation
c) Strings are a primitive type in Java and the StringBuffer is used as the matching wrapper type
d) The size of a string can be retrieved using the length property.
Ans : b.
EXPLORING JAVA.LANG
java.lang package is automatically imported into all programs.
True
False
Ans : a
What are the interfaces defined by java.lang?
Ans : Cloneable, Comparable and Runnable.
What are the constants defined by both Flaot and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE,
NaN,
POSITIVE_INFINITY,
NEGATIVE_INFINITY and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by Byte, Short, Integer and Long?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by both Float and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_RADIX,
MIN_RADIX,
MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What is the purpose of the Runtime class?
Ans : The purpose of the Runtime class is to provide access to the Java runtime system.
What is the purpose of the System class?
Ans : The purpose of the System class is to provide access to system resources.
Which class is extended by all other classes?
Ans : Object class is extended by all other classes.
Which class can be used to obtain design information about an object?
Ans : The Class class can be used to obtain information about an object’s design.
Which method is used to calculate the absolute value of a number?
Ans : abs( ) method.
What are E and PI?
Ans : E is the base of the natural logarithm and PI is the mathematical value pi.
Which of the following classes is used to perform basic console I/O?
System
SecurityManager
Math
Runtime
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Class class is the superclass of the Object class.
The Object class is final.
The Class class can be used to load other classes.
The ClassLoader class can be used to load other classes.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following methods are methods of the Math class?
absolute( )
log( )
cosine( )
sine( )
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true about the Error and Exception classes?
Both classes extend Throwable.
The Error class is final and the Exception class is not.
The Exception class is final and the Error is not.
Both classes implement Throwable.
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Void class extends the Class class.
The Float class extends the Double class.
The System class extends the Runtime class.
The Integer class extends the Number class.
Ans : d.
17) Which of the following will output -4.0
System.out.println(Math.floor(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.round(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.ceil(-4.7));
d) System.out.println(Math.Min(-4.7));
Ans : c.
18) Which of the following are valid statements
a) public class MyCalc extends Math
b) Math.max(s);
c) Math.round(9.99,1);
d) Math.mod(4,10);
e) None of the above.
Ans : e.
19) What will happen if you attempt to compile and run the following code?
Integer ten=new Integer(10);
Long nine=new Long (9);
System.out.println(ten + nine);
int i=1;
System.out.println(i + ten);
19 followed by 20
19 followed by 11
Error: Can't convert java lang Integer
d) 10 followed by 1
Ans : c.
INPUT / OUTPUT : EXPLORING JAVA.IO
What is meant by Stream and what are the types of Streams and classes of the Streams?
Ans : A Stream is an abstraction that either produces or consumes information.
There are two types of Streams. They are:
Byte Streams : Byte Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of bytes.
Character Streams : Character Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of characters.
Byte Stream classes : Byte Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are:InputStream and OutputStream.
Character Stream classes : Character Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are : Reader and Writer.
Which of the following statements are true?
UTF characters are all 8-bits.
UTF characters are all 16-bits.
UTF characters are all 24-bits.
Unicode characters are all 16-bits.
Bytecode characters are all 16-bits.
Ans : d.
Which of the following statements are true?
When you construct an instance of File, if you do not use the filenaming semantics of the local machine, the constructor will throw an IOException.
When you construct an instance of File, if the corresponding file does not exist on the local file system, one will be created.
When an instance of File is garbage collected, the corresponding file on the local file system is deleted.
None of the above.
Ans : a,b and c.
The File class contains a method that changes the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : b.
It is possible to use the File class to list the contents of the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : a.
Readers have methods that can read and return floats and doubles.
True
False
Ans : b.
You execute the code below in an empty directory. What is the result?
File f1 = new File("dirname");
File f2 = new File(f1, "filename");
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory.
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory. A new file called filename is created in directory dirname.
A new directory called dirname and a new file called filename are created, both in the current working directory.
A new file called filename is created in the current working directory.
No directory is created, and no file is created.
Ans : e.
What is the difference between the Reader/Writer class hierarchy and the
InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy?
Ans : The Reader/Writer class hierarchy is character-oriented and the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy is byte-oriented.
What is an I/O filter?
Ans : An I/O filter is an object that reads from one stream and writes to another, usually altering the data in some way as it is passed from one stream to another.
What is the purpose of the File class?
Ans : The File class is used to create objects that provide access to the files and directories of a local file system.
What interface must an object implement before it can be written to a stream as an object?
Ans : An object must implement the Serializable or Externalizable interface before it can be written to a stream as an object.
What is the difference between the File and RandomAccessFile classes?
Ans : The File class encapsulates the files and directories of the local file system. The RandomAccessFile class provides the methods needed to directly access data contained in any part of a file.
What class allows you to read objects directly from a stream?
Ans : The ObjectInputStream class supports the reading of objects from input streams.
What value does read( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The read( ) method returns – 1 when it has reached the end of a file.
What value does readLine( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The readLine( ) method returns null when it has reached the end of a file.
How many bits are used to represent Unicode, ASCII, UTF-16 and UTF-8 characters?
Ans : Unicode requires 16-bits and ASCII requires 8-bits. Although the ASCII character set uses only 1-bits, it is usually represented as 8-bits. UTF-8 represents characters using 8, 16 and 18-bit patterns. UTF-16 uses 16-bit and larger bit patterns.
Which of the following are true?
The InputStream and OutputStream classes are byte-oriented.
The ObjectInputStream and ObjectOutputStream do not support serialized object input and output.
The Reader and Writer classes are character-oriented.
The Reader and Writer classes are the preferred solution to serialized object output.
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are true about I/O filters?
Filters are supported on input, but not on output.
Filters are supported by the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy, but not by the Reader/Writer class hierarchy.
Filters read from one stream and write to another.
A filter may alter data that is read from one stream and written to another.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following are true?
Any Unicode character is represented using 16-bits.
7-bits are needed to represent any ASCII character.
UTF-8 characters are represented using only 8-bits.
UTF-16 characters are represented using only 16-bits.
Ans : a and b.
Which of the following are true?
The Serializable interface is used to identify objects that may be written to an output stream.
The Externalizable interface is implemented by classes that control the way in which their objects are serialized.
The Serializable interface extends the Externalizable interface.
The Externalizable interface extends the Serializable interface.
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true about the File class?
A File object can be used to change the current working directory.
A File object can be used to access the files in the current directory.
When a File object is created, a corresponding directory or file is created in the local file system.
File objects are used to access files and directories on the local file system.
File objects can be garbage collected.
When a File object is garbage collected, the corresponding file or directory is deleted.
Ans : b, d and e.
How do you create a Reader object from an InputStream object?
Use the static createReader( ) method of InputStream class.
Use the static createReader( ) method of Reader class.
Create an InputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the InputStreamReader constructor.
Create an OutputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the OutputStreamReader constructor.
Ans : c.
Which of the following are true?
Writer classes can be used to write characters to output streams using different character encodings.
Writer classes can be used to write Unicode characters to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of the values of any Java primitive type to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of objects to output streams.
Ans : a and b.
The isFile( ) method returns a boolean value depending on whether the file object is a file or a directory.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
Reading or writing can be done even after closing the input/output source.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The ________ method helps in clearing the buffer.
Ans : flush( ).
The System.err method is used to print error message.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What is meant by StreamTokenizer?
Ans : StreamTokenizer breaks up InputStream into tokens that are delimited by sets of characters.
It has the constructor : StreamTokenizer(Reader inStream).
Here inStream must be some form of Reader.
What is Serialization and deserialization?
Ans : Serialization is the process of writing the state of an object to a byte stream.
Deserialization is the process of restoring these objects.
30) Which of the following can you perform using the File class?
a) Change the current directory
b) Return the name of the parent directory
c) Delete a file
d) Find if a file contains text or binary information
Ans : b and c.
31)How can you change the current working directory using an instance of the File class called FileName?
FileName.chdir("DirName").
FileName.cd("DirName").
FileName.cwd("DirName").
The File class does not support directly changing the current directory.
Ans : d.
EVENT HANDLING
The event delegation model, introduced in release 1.1 of the JDK, is fully compatible with the
event model.
True
False
Ans : b.
A component subclass that has executed enableEvents( ) to enable processing of a certain kind of event cannot also use an adapter as a listener for the same kind of event.
True
False
Ans : b.
What is the highest-level event class of the event-delegation model?
Ans : The java.util.eventObject class is the highest-level class in the event-delegation hierarchy.
What interface is extended by AWT event listeners?
Ans : All AWT event listeners extend the java.util.EventListener interface.
What class is the top of the AWT event hierarchy?
Ans : The java.awt.AWTEvent class is the highest-level class in the AWT event class hierarchy.
What event results from the clicking of a button?
Ans : The ActionEvent event is generated as the result of the clicking of a button.
What is the relationship between an event-listener interface and an event-adapter class?
Ans : An event-listener interface defines the methods that must be implemented by an event
handler for a particular kind of event.
An event adapter provides a default implementation of an event-listener interface.
In which package are most of the AWT events that support the event-delegation model defined?
Ans : Most of the AWT–related events of the event-delegation model are defined in the
java.awt.event package. The AWTEvent class is defined in the java.awt package.
What is the advantage of the event-delegation model over the earlier event-inheritance model?
Ans : The event-delegation has two advantages over the event-inheritance model. They are :
It enables event handling by objects other than the ones that generate the events. This
allows a clean separation between a component’s design and its use.
It performs much better in applications where many events are generated. This
performance improvement is due to the fact that the event-delegation model does not
have to repeatedly process unhandled events, as is the case of the event-inheritance
model.
What is the purpose of the enableEvents( ) method?
Ans :The enableEvents( ) method is used to enable an event for a particular object.
Which of the following are true?
The event-inheritance model has replaced the event-delegation model.
The event-inheritance model is more efficient than the event-delegation model.
The event-delegation model uses event listeners to define the methods of event-handling classes.
The event-delegation model uses the handleEvent( ) method to support event handling.
Ans : c.
Which of the following is the highest class in the event-delegation model?
java.util.EventListener
java.util.EventObject
java.awt.AWTEvent
java.awt.event.AWTEvent
Ans : b.
When two or more objects are added as listeners for the same event, which listener is first invoked to handle the event?
The first object that was added as listener.
The last object that was added as listener.
There is no way to determine which listener will be invoked first.
It is impossible to have more than one listener for a given event.
Ans : c.
Which of the following components generate action events?
Buttons
Labels
Check boxes
Windows
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
A TextField object may generate an ActionEvent.
A TextArea object may generate an ActionEvent.
A Button object may generate an ActionEvent.
A MenuItem object may generate an ActionEvent.
Ans : a,c and d.
Which of the following are true?
The MouseListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseMotionListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseClickListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The ActionListener interface defines methods for handling the clicking of a button.
Ans : a and d.
Suppose that you want to have an object eh handle the TextEvent of a TextArea object t. How should you add eh as the event handler for t?
t.addTextListener(eh);
eh.addTextListener(t);
addTextListener(eh.t);
addTextListener(t,eh);
Ans : a.
What is the preferred way to handle an object’s events in Java 2?
Override the object’s handleEvent( ) method.
Add one or more event listeners to handle the events.
Have the object override its processEvent( ) methods.
Have the object override its dispatchEvent( ) methods.
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true?
A component may handle its own events by adding itself as an event listener.
A component may handle its own events by overriding its event-dispatching method.
A component may not handle oits own events.
A component may handle its own events only if it implements the handleEvent( ) method.
Ans : a and b.
APPLETS
What is an Applet? Should applets have constructors?
Ans : Applet is a dynamic and interactive program that runs inside a Web page
displayed by a Java capable browser. We don’t have the concept of Constructors in Applets.
How do we read number information from my applet’s parameters, given that Applet’s getParameter() method returns a string?
Ans : Use the parseInt() method in the Integer Class, the Float(String) constructor in the
Class Float, or the Double(String) constructor in the class Double.
How can I arrange for different applets on a web page to communicate with each other?
Ans : Name your applets inside the Applet tag and invoke AppletContext’s getApplet()
method in your applet code to obtain references to the other applets on the page.
How do I select a URL from my Applet and send the browser to that page?
Ans : Ask the applet for its applet context and invoke showDocument() on that context object.
Eg. URL targetURL;
String URLString
AppletContext context = getAppletContext();
try{
targetUR L = new URL(URLString);
} catch (Malformed URLException e){
// Code for recover from the exception
}
context. showDocument (targetURL);
Can applets on different pages communicate with each other?
Ans : No. Not Directly. The applets will exchange the information at one meeting place
either on the local file system or at remote system.
How do Applets differ from Applications?
Ans : Appln: Stand Alone
Applet: Needs no explicit installation on local m/c.
Appln: Execution starts with main() method.
Applet: Execution starts with init() method.
Appln: May or may not be a GUI
Applet: Must run within a GUI (Using AWT)
How do I determine the width and height of my application?
Ans : Use the getSize() method, which the Applet class inherits from the Component
class in the Java.awt package. The getSize() method returns the size of the applet as
a Dimension object, from which you extract separate width, height fields.
Eg. Dimension dim = getSize ();
int appletwidth = dim.width ();
8) What is AppletStub Interface?
Ans : The applet stub interface provides the means by which an applet and the browser communicate. Your code will not typically implement this interface.
It is essential to have both the .java file and the .html file of an applet in the same
directory.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The tag contains two attributes namely _________ and _______.
Ans : Name , value.
Passing values to parameters is done in the _________ file of an applet.
Ans : .html.
12) What tags are mandatory when creating HTML to display an applet
name, height, width
code, name
codebase, height, width
d) code, height, width
Ans : d.
Applet’s getParameter( ) method can be used to get parameter values.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the Applet’s Life Cycle methods? Explain them?
Ans : init( ) method - Can be called when an applet is first loaded.
start( ) method - Can be called each time an applet is started.
paint( ) method - Can be called when the applet is minimized or refreshed.
stop( ) method - Can be called when the browser moves off the applet’s page.
destroy( ) method - Can be called when the browser is finished with the applet.
What are the Applet’s information methods?
Ans : getAppletInfo( ) method : Returns a string describing the applet, its author ,copy
right information, etc.
getParameterInfo( ) method : Returns an array of string describing the applet’s parameters.
All Applets are subclasses of Applet.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
All Applets must import java.applet and java.awt.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the steps involved in Applet development?
Ans : a) Edit a Java source file,
b) Compile your program and
c) Execute the appletviewer, specifying the name of your applet’s source file.
Applets are executed by the console based Java run-time interpreter.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
Which classes and interfaces does Applet class consist?
Ans : Applet class consists of a single class, the Applet class and three interfaces: AppletContext,
AppletStub and AudioClip.
What is the sequence for calling the methods by AWT for applets?
Ans : When an applet begins, the AWT calls the following methods, in this sequence.
init( )
start( )
paint( )
When an applet is terminated, the following sequence of method cals takes place :
stop( )
destroy( )
Which method is used to output a string to an applet?
Ans : drawString ( ) method.
Every color is created from an RGB value.
True.
False
Ans : a.
AWT : WINDOWS, GRAPHICS AND FONTS
How would you set the color of a graphics context called g to cyan?
g.setColor(Color.cyan);
g.setCurrentColor(cyan);
g.setColor("Color.cyan");
g.setColor("cyan’);
g.setColor(new Color(cyan));
Ans : a.
The code below draws a line. What color is the line?
g.setColor(Color.red.green.yellow.red.cyan);
g.drawLine(0, 0, 100,100);
Red
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Ans : d.
What does the following code draw?
g.setColor(Color.black);
g.drawLine(10, 10, 10, 50);
g.setColor(Color.RED);
g.drawRect(100, 100, 150, 150);
A red vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A red vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 100 pixel
Ans : b.
Which of the statements below are true?
A polyline is always filled.
b) A polyline can not be filled.
c) A polygon is always filled.
d) A polygon is always closed
e) A polygon may be filled or not filled
Ans : b, d and e.
What code would you use to construct a 24-point bold serif font?
new Font(Font.SERIF, 24,Font.BOLD);
new Font("SERIF", 24, BOLD");
new Font("BOLD ", 24,Font.SERIF);
new Font("SERIF", Font.BOLD,24);
new Font(Font.SERIF, "BOLD", 24);
Ans : d.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
The string "question #6", with its top-left corner at 10,0
A little squiggle coming down from the top of the component, a little way in from the left edge
Ans : b.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
A circle at (100, 100) with radius of 44
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 100
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 44
The code does not compile
Ans : d.
8)What is relationship between the Canvas class and the Graphics class?
Ans : A Canvas object provides access to a Graphics object via its paint( ) method.
What are the Component subclasses that support painting.
Ans : The Canvas, Frame, Panel and Applet classes support painting.
What is the difference between the paint( ) and repaint( ) method?
Ans : The paint( ) method supports painting via a Graphics object. The repaint( ) method is used
to cause paint( ) to be invoked by the AWT painting method.
What is the difference between the Font and FontMetrics classes?
Ans : The FontMetrics class is used to define implementation-specific properties, such as ascent
and descent, of a Font object.
Which of the following are passed as an argument to the paint( ) method?
A Canvas object
A Graphics object
An Image object
A paint object
Ans : b.
Which of the following methods are invoked by the AWT to support paint and repaint operations?
paint( )
repaint( )
draw( )
redraw( )
Ans : a.
Which of the following classes have a paint( ) method?
Canvas
Image
Frame
Graphics
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are methods of the Graphics class?
drawRect( )
drawImage( )
drawPoint( )
drawString( )
Ans : a, b and d.
Which Font attributes are available through the FontMetrics class?
ascent
leading
case
height
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true?
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been minimized and then maximized.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been covered and then uncovered.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when application data is changed.
The AWT does not support repainting operations.
Ans : a and b.
Which method is used to size a graphics object to fit the current size of the window?
Ans : getSize( ) method.
What are the methods to be used to set foreground and background colors?
Ans : setForeground( ) and setBackground( ) methods.
19) You have created a simple Frame and overridden the paint method as follows
public void paint(Graphics g){
g.drawString("Dolly",50,10);
}
What will be the result when you attempt to compile and run the program?
The string "Dolly" will be displayed at the centre of the frame
b) An error at compilation complaining at the signature of the paint method
c) The lower part of the word Dolly will be seen at the top of the form, with the top hidden.
d) The string "Dolly" will be shown at the bottom of the form
Ans : c.
20) Where g is a graphics instance what will the following code draw on the screen.
g.fillArc(45,90,50,50,90,180);
a) An arc bounded by a box of height 45, width 90 with a centre point of 50,50, starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
b) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a centre point of 45,90 starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees clockwise.
c) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a top left at coordinates of 45,
90, starting at 90 degrees and traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
d) An arc starting at 45 degrees, traversing through 90 degrees clockwise bounded by a
box of height 50, width 50 with a centre point of 90, 180.
Ans : c.
21) Given the following code
import java.awt.*;
public class SetF extends Frame{
public static void main(String argv[]){
SetF s = new SetF();
s.setSize(300,200);
s.setVisible(true);
}
}
How could you set the frame surface color to pink
a)s.setBackground(Color.pink);
b)s.setColor(PINK);
c)s.Background(pink);
d)s.color=Color.pink
Ans : a.
AWT: CONTROLS, LAYOUT MANAGERS AND MENUS
What is meant by Controls and what are different types of controls?
Ans : Controls are componenets that allow a user to interact with your application.
The AWT supports the following types of controls:
Labels
Push buttons
Check boxes
Choice lists
Lists
Scroll bars
Text components
These controls are subclasses of Component.
You want to construct a text area that is 80 character-widths wide and 10 character-heights tall. What code do you use?
new TextArea(80, 10)
new TextArea(10, 80)
Ans: b.
A text field has a variable-width font. It is constructed by calling new
TextField("iiiii"). What happens if you change the contents of the text field to
"wwwww"? (Bear in mind that is one of the narrowest characters, and w is one of the widest.)
The text field becomes wider.
The text field becomes narrower.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the ß and à keys.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the text field’s horizontal scroll bar.
Ans : c.
The CheckboxGroup class is a subclass of the Component class.
True
False
Ans : b.
5) What are the immediate super classes of the following classes?
a) Container class
b) MenuComponent class
c) Dialog class
d) Applet class
e) Menu class
Ans : a) Container - Component
b) MenuComponent - Object
c) Dialog - Window
d) Applet - Panel
e) Menu - MenuItem
6) What are the SubClass of Textcomponent Class?
Ans : TextField and TextArea
7) Which method of the component class is used to set the position and the size of a component?
Ans : setBounds()
8) Which TextComponent method is used to set a TextComponent to the read-only state?
Ans : setEditable()
9) How can the Checkbox class be used to create a radio button?
Ans : By associating Checkbox objects with a CheckboxGroup.
10) What Checkbox method allows you to tell if a Checkbox is checked?
Ans : getState()
11) Which Component method is used to access a component's immediate Container?
getVisible()
getImmediate
getParent()
getContainer
Ans : c.
12) What methods are used to get and set the text label displayed by a Button object?
Ans : getLabel( ) and setLabel( )
13) What is the difference between a Choice and a List?
Ans : A Choice is displayed in a compact form that requires you to pull it down to see the list of available choices. Only one item may be selected from a Choice.
A List may be displayed in such a way that several List items are visible. A List supports the selection of one or more List items.
14) Which Container method is used to cause a container to be laid out and redisplayed?
Ans : validate( )
15) What is the difference between a Scollbar and a Scrollpane?
Ans : A Scrollbar is a Component, but not a Container.
A Scrollpane is a Container and handles its own events and performs its own
scrolling.
16) Which Component subclass is used for drawing and painting?
Ans : Canvas.
17) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Component?
Button
Label
CheckboxMenuItem
Toolbar
Frame
Ans : a, b and e.
18) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Container?
Frame
TextArea
MenuBar
FileDialog
Applet
Ans : a,d and e.
19) Which method is used to set the text of a Label object?
setText( )
setLabel( )
setTextLabel( )
setLabelText( )
Ans : a.
20) Which constructor creates a TextArea with 10 rows and 20 columns?
new TextArea(10, 20)
new TextArea(20, 10)
new TextArea(new Rows(10), new columns(20))
new TextArea(200)
Ans : a.
(Usage is TextArea(rows, columns)
21) Which of the following creates a List with 5 visible items and multiple selection enabled?
new List(5, true)
new List(true, 5)
new List(5, false)
new List(false,5)
Ans : a.
[Usage is List(rows, multipleMode)]
22) Which are true about the Container class?
The validate( ) method is used to cause a Container to be laid out and redisplayed.
The add( ) method is used to add a Component to a Container.
The getBorder( ) method returns information about a Container’s insets.
The getComponent( ) method is used to access a Component that is contained in a Container.
Ans : a, b and d.
23) Suppose a Panel is added to a Frame and a Button is added to the Panel. If the Frame’s font is set to 12-point TimesRoman, the Panel’s font is set to 10-point TimesRoman, and the Button’s font is not set, what font will be used to dispaly the Button’s label?
12-point TimesRoman
11-point TimesRoman
10-point TimesRoman
9-point TimesRoman
Ans : c.
A Frame’s background color is set to Color.Yellow, and a Button’s background color is to Color.Blue. Suppose the Button is added to a Panel, which is added to the Frame. What background color will be used with the Panel?
Colr.Yellow
Color.Blue
Color.Green
Color.White
Ans : a.
25) Which method will cause a Frame to be displayed?
show( )
setVisible( )
display( )
displayFrame( )
Ans : a and b.
26) All the componenet classes and container classes are derived from _________ class.
Ans : Object.
27) Which method of the container class can be used to add components to a Panel.
Ans : add ( ) method.
28) What are the subclasses of the Container class?
Ans : The Container class has three major subclasses. They are :
Window
Panel
ScrollPane
29) The Choice component allows multiple selection.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
30) The List component does not generate any events.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
31) Which components are used to get text input from the user.
Ans : TextField and TextArea.
32) Which object is needed to group Checkboxes to make them exclusive?
Ans : CheckboxGroup.
33) Which of the following components allow multiple selections?
Non-exclusive Checkboxes.
Radio buttons.
Choice.
List.
Ans : a and d.
34) What are the types of Checkboxes and what is the difference between them?
Ans : Java supports two types of Checkboxes. They are : Exclusive and Non-exclusive.
In case of exclusive Checkboxes, only one among a group of items can be selected at a time. I f an item from the group is selected, the checkbox currently checked is deselected and the new selection is highlighted. The exclusive Checkboxes are also called as Radio buttons.
The non-exclusive checkboxes are not grouped together and each one can be selected independent of the other.
35) What is a Layout Manager and what are the different Layout Managers available in java.awt and what is the default Layout manager for the panal and the panal subclasses?
Ans: A layout Manager is an object that is used to organize components in a container.
The different layouts available in java.awt are :
FlowLayout, BorderLayout, CardLayout, GridLayout and GridBag Layout.
The default Layout Manager of Panal and Panal sub classes is FlowLayout".
36) Can I exert control over the size and placement of components in my interface?
Ans : Yes.
myPanal.setLayout(null);
myPanal.setbounds(20,20,200,200);
37) Can I add the same component to more than one container?
Ans : No. Adding a component to a container automatically removes it from any previous parent(container).
38) How do I specify where a window is to be placed?
Ans : Use setBounds, setSize, or setLocation methods to implement this.
setBounds(int x, int y, int width, int height)
setBounds(Rectangle r)
setSize(int width, int height)
setSize(Dimension d)
setLocation(int x, int y)
setLocation(Point p)
39) How can we create a borderless window?
Ans : Create an instance of the Window class, give it a size, and show it on the screen.
eg. Frame aFrame = ......
Window aWindow = new Window(aFrame);
aWindow.setLayout(new FlowLayout());
aWindow.add(new Button("Press Me"));
aWindow.getBounds(50,50,200,200);
aWindow.show();
40) Can I create a non-resizable windows? If so, how?
Ans: Yes. By using setResizable() method in class Frame.
41) What is the default Layout Manager for the Window and Window subclasses (Frame,Dialog)?
Ans : BorderLayout().
42) How are the elements of different layouts organized?
Ans : FlowLayout : The elements of a FlowLayout are organized in a top to bottom, left to right fashion.
BorderLayout : The elements of a BorderLayout are organized at the
borders (North, South, East and West) and the center of a
container.
CardLayout : The elements of a CardLayout are stacked, one on top of the other, like a deck of cards.
GridLayout : The elements of a GridLayout are of equal size and are laid out using the square of a grid.
GridBagLayout : The elements of a GridBagLayout are organized according to a grid.However, the elements are of different sizes and may occupy
more than one row or column of the grid. In addition, the rows and columns may have different sizes.
43) Which containers use a BorderLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Window, Frame and Dialog classes use a BorderLayout as their default layout.
44) Which containers use a FlowLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Panel and the Applet classes use the FlowLayout as their default layout.
45) What is the preferred size of a component?
Ans : The preferred size of a component size that will allow the component to display normally.
46) Which method is method to set the layout of a container?
startLayout( )
initLayout( )
layoutContainer( )
setLayout( )
Ans : d.
47) Which method returns the preferred size of a component?
getPreferredSize( )
getPreferred( )
getRequiredSize( )
getLayout( )
Ans : a.
48) Which layout should you use to organize the components of a container in a
tabular form?
CardLayout
BorederLayout
FlowLayout
GridLayout
Ans : d.
An application has a frame that uses a Border layout manager. Why is it probably not a good idea to put a vertical scroll bar at North in the frame?
The scroll bar’s height would be its preferred height, which is not likely to be enough.
The scroll bar’s width would be the entire width of the frame, which would be much wider than necessary.
Both a and b.
Neither a nor b. There is no problem with the layout as described.
Ans : c.
What is the default layouts for a applet, a frame and a panel?
Ans : For an applet and a panel, Flow layout is the default layout, whereas Border layout is default layout for a frame.
If a frame uses a Grid layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : a.
If a frame uses its default layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : b.
With a Border layout manager, the component at Center gets all the space that is left over, after the components at North and South have been considered.
True
False
Ans : b.
An Applet has its Layout Manager set to the default of FlowLayout. What code would be the correct to change to another Layout Manager?
setLayoutManager(new GridLayout());
setLayout(new GridLayout(2,2));
c) setGridLayout(2,2,))
d setBorderLayout();
Ans : b.
55) How do you indicate where a component will be positioned using Flowlayout?
a) North, South,East,West
b) Assign a row/column grid reference
c) Pass a X/Y percentage parameter to the add method
d) Do nothing, the FlowLayout will position the component
Ans :d.
56) How do you change the current layout manager for a container?
a) Use the setLayout method
b) Once created you cannot change the current layout manager of a component
c) Use the setLayoutManager method
d) Use the updateLayout method
Ans :a.
57)When using the GridBagLayout manager, each new component requires a new instance of the GridBagConstraints class. Is this statement true or false?
a) true
b) false
Ans : b.
58) Which of the following statements are true?
a)The default layout manager for an Applet is FlowLayout
b) The default layout manager for an application is FlowLayout
c) A layout manager must be assigned to an Applet before the setSize method is called
d) The FlowLayout manager attempts to honor the preferred size of any components
Ans : a and d.
59) Which method does display the messages whenever there is an item selection or deselection of the CheckboxMenuItem menu?
Ans : itemStateChanged method.
60) Which is a dual state menu item?
Ans : CheckboxMenuItem.
61) Which method can be used to enable/diable a checkbox menu item?
Ans : setState(boolean).
Which of the following may a menu contain?
A separator
A check box
A menu
A button
A panel
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following may contain a menu bar?
A panel
A frame
An applet
A menu bar
A menu
Ans : b
64) What is the difference between a MenuItem and a CheckboxMenuItem?
Ans : The CheckboxMenuItem class extends the MenuItem class to support a menu item
that may be checked or unchecked.
65) Which of the following are true?
A Dialog can have a MenuBar.
MenuItem extends Menu.
A MenuItem can be added to a Menu.
A Menu can be added to a Menu.
Ans : c and d.
Which colour is used to indicate instance methods in the standard "javadoc" format documentation:
1) blue
2) red
3) purple
4) orange
Answer : 2
explain
In JDK 1.1 the variabels, methods and constructors are colour coded to simplifytheir identification.
endExplain
What is the correct ordering for the import, class and package declarations when found in a single file?
1) package, import, class
2) class, import, package
3) import, package, class
4) package, class, import
Answer : 1
explain
This is my explanation for question 2
endExplain
Which methods can be legally applied to a string object?
(Multiple)
1) equals(String)
2) equals(Object)
3) trim()
4) round()
5) toString()
Answer : 1,2,3,5
What is the parameter specification for the public static void main method?
(multiple)
1) String args []
2) String [] args
3) Strings args []
4) String args
Answer : 1,2
What does the zeroth element of the string array passed to the public static void main method contain?
(multiple)
1) The name of the program
2) The number of arguments
3) The first argument if one is present
Answer : 3
Which of the following are Java keywords?
(multiple)
1) goto
2) malloc
3) extends
4) FALSE
Answer : 3
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
int age;
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 4
Which of these is the correct format to use to create the literal char value a?
(multiple)
1) 'a'
2) "a"
3) new Character(a)
4) \000a
Answer : 1
What is the legal range of a byte integral type?
1) 0 - 65, 535
2) (-128) - 127
3) (-32,768) - 32,767
4) (-256) - 255
Answer : 2
Which of the following is illegal:
1) int i = 32;
2) float f = 45.0;
3) double d = 45.0;
Answer 2
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
static int age;
public static void main (String args []) {
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 2
Which of the following are correct?
(multiple)
1) 128 >> 1 gives 64
2) 128 >>> 1 gives 64
3) 128 >> 1 gives -64
4) 128 >>> 1 gives -64
Answer : 1
Which of the following return true?
(multiple)
1) "john" == new String("john")
2) "john".equals("john")
3) "john" = "john"
4) "john".equals(new Button("john"))
Answer : 2
Which of the following do not lead to a runtime error?
(multiple)
1) "john" + " was " + " here"
2) "john" + 3
3) 3 + 5
4) 5 + 5.5
answer 1,2,3,4
Which of the following are so called "short circuit" logical operators?
(multiple)
1) &
2) ||
3) &&
4) |
Answer : 2,3
Which of the following are acceptable?
(multiple)
1) Object o = new Button("A");
2) Boolean flag = true;
3) Panel p = new Frame();
4) Frame f = new Panel();
5) Panel p = new Applet();
Answer : 1,5
What is the result of compiling and running the following code:
public class Test {
static int total = 10;
public static void main (String args []) {
new Test();
}
public Test () {
System.out.println("In test");
System.out.println(this);
int temp = this.total;
if (temp > 5) {
System.out.println(temp);
}
}
}
(multiple)
1) The class will not compile
2) The compiler reports and error at line 2
3) The compiler reports an error at line 9
4) The value 10 is one of the elements printed to the standard output
5) The class compiles but generates a runtime error
Answer : 4
Which of the following is correct:
1) String temp [] = new String {"j" "a" "z"};
2) String temp [] = { "j " " b" "c"};
3) String temp = {"a", "b", "c"};
4) String temp [] = {"a", "b", "c"};
Answer 4
What is the correct declaration of an abstract method that is intended to be public:
1) public abstract void add();
2) public abstract void add() {}
3) public abstract add();
4) public virtual add();
Answer : 1
Under what situations do you obtain a default constructor?
1) When you define any class
2) When the class has no other constructors
3) When you define at least one constructor
Answer : 2
Which of the following can be used to define a constructor for this class, given the following code:
public class Test {
...
}
1) public void Test() {...}
2) public Test() {...}
3) public static Test() {...}
4) public static void Test() {...}
Answer : 2
Which of the following are acceptable to the Java compiler:
(multiple)
1) if (2 == 3) System.out.println("Hi");
2) if (2 = 3) System.out.println("Hi");
3) if (true) System.out.println("Hi");
4) if (2 != 3) System.out.println("Hi");
5) if (aString.equals("hello")) System.out.println("Hi");
Answer : 1,3,4,5
Assuming a method contains code which may raise an Exception (but not a RuntimeException), what is the correct way for a method to indicate that it expects the caller to handle that exception:
1) throw Exception
2) throws Exception
3) new Exception
4) Don't need to specify anything
Answer : 2
What is the result of executing the following code, using the parameters 4 and 0:
public void divide(int a, int b) {
try {
int c = a / b;
} catch (Exception e) {
System.out.print("Exception ");
} finally {
System.out.println("Finally");
}
1) Prints out: Exception Finally
2) Prints out: Finally
3) Prints out: Exception
4) No output
Answer : 1
Which of the following is a legal return type of a method overloading the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) void
2) int
3) Can be anything
Answer : 3
Which of the following statements is correct for a method which is overriding the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) the overriding method must return void
2) the overriding method must return int
3) the overriding method can return whatever it likes
Answer : 1
Given the following classes defined in separate files, what will be the effect of compiling and running this class Test?
class Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Vehicle: drive");
}
}
class Car extends Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Car: drive");
}
}
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
Vehicle v;
Car c;
v = new Vehicle();
c = new Car();
v.drive();
c.drive();
v = c;
v.drive();
}
}
1) Generates a Compiler error on the statement v= c;
2) Generates runtime error on the statement v= c;
3) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Car: drive
4) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Vehicle: drive
Answer : 3
Where in a constructor, can you place a call to a constructor defined in the super class?
1) Anywhere
2) The first statement in the constructor
3) The last statement in the constructor
4) You can't call super in a constructor
Answer : 2
Which variables can an inner class access from the class which encapsulates it?
(multiple)
1) All static variables
2) All final variables
3) All instance variables
4) Only final instance variables
5) Only final static variables
Answer : 1,2,3
What class must an inner class extend:
1) The top level class
2) The Object class
3) Any class or interface
4) It must extend an interface
Answer 3
In the following code, which is the earliest statement, where the object originally held in e, may be garbage collected:
1. public class Test {
2. public static void main (String args []) {
3. Employee e = new Employee("Bob", 48);
4. e.calculatePay();
5. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
6. e = null;
7. e = new Employee("Denise", 36);
8. e.calculatePay();
9. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
10. }
11. }
1) Line 10
2) Line 11
3) Line 7
4) Line 8
5) Never
Answer : 3
What is the name of the interface that can be used to define a class that can execute within its own thread?
1) Runnable
2) Run
3) Threadable
4) Thread
5) Executable
Answer : 1
What is the name of the method used to schedule a thread for execution?
1) init();
2) start();
3) run();
4) resume();
5) sleep();
Answer : 2
Which methods may cause a thread to stop executing?
(multiple)
1) sleep();
2) stop();
3) yield();
4) wait();
5) notify();
6) notifyAll()
7) synchronized()
Answer : 1,2,3,4
Which of the following would create a text field able to display 10 characters (assuming a fixed size font) displaying the initial string "hello":
1) new TextField("hello", 10);
2) new TextField("hello");
3) new textField(10);
4) new TextField();
Answer : 1
Which of the following methods are defined on the Graphics class:
(multiple)
1) drawLine(int, int, int, int)
2) drawImage(Image, int, int, ImageObserver)
3) drawString(String, int, int)
4) add(Component);
5) setVisible(boolean);
6) setLayout(Object);
Answer : 1,2,3
Which of the following layout managers honours the preferred size of a component:
(multiple)
1) CardLayout
2) FlowLayout
3) BorderLayout
4) GridLayout
Answer : 2
Given the following code what is the effect of a being 5:
public class Test {
public void add(int a) {
loop: for (int i = 1; i < 3; i++){
for (int j = 1; j < 3; j++) {
if (a == 5) {
break loop;
}
System.out.println(i * j);
}
}
}
}
1) Generate a runtime error
2) Throw an ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException
3) Print the values: 1, 2, 2, 4
4) Produces no output
Answer : 4
What is the effect of issuing a wait() method on an object
1) If a notify() method has already been sent to that object then it has no effect
2) The object issuing the call to wait() will halt until another object sends a notify() or notifyAll() method
3) An exception will be raised
4) The object issuing the call to wait() will be automatically synchronized with any other objects using the receiving object.
Answer : 2
The layout of a container can be altered using which of the following methods:
(multiple)
1) setLayout(aLayoutManager);
2) addLayout(aLayoutManager);
3) layout(aLayoutManager);
4) setLayoutManager(aLayoutManager);
Answer : 1
Using a FlowLayout manager, which is the correct way to add elements to a container:
1) add(component);
2) add("Center", component);
3) add(x, y, component);
4) set(component);
Answer : 1
Given that a Button can generate an ActionEvent which listener would you expect to have to implement, in a class which would handle this event?
1) FocusListener
2) ComponentListener
3) WindowListener
4) ActionListener
5) ItemListener
Answer : 4
Which of the following, are valid return types, for listener methods:
1) boolean
2) the type of event handled
3) void
4) Component
Answer : 3
Assuming we have a class which implements the ActionListener interface, which method should be used to register this with a Button?
1) addListener(*);
2) addActionListener(*);
3) addButtonListener(*);
4) setListener(*);
Answer : 2
In order to cause the paint(Graphics) method to execute, which of the following is the most appropriate method to call:
1) paint()
2) repaint()
3) paint(Graphics)
4) update(Graphics)
5) None - you should never cause paint(Graphics) to execute
Answer : 2
Which of the following illustrates the correct way to pass a parameter into an applet:
1)
RDBMS Concepts
1. What is database?
A database is a logically coherent collection of data with some inherent meaning, representing some aspect of real world and which is designed, built and populated with data for a specific purpose.
2. What is DBMS?
It is a collection of programs that enables user to create and maintain a database. In other words it is general-purpose software that provides the users with the processes of defining, constructing and manipulating the database for various applications.
3. What is a Database system?
The database and DBMS software together is called as Database system.
4. Advantages of DBMS?
Ø Redundancy is controlled.
Ø Unauthorised access is restricted.
Ø Providing multiple user interfaces.
Ø Enforcing integrity constraints.
Ø Providing backup and recovery.
5. Disadvantage in File Processing System?
Ø Data redundancy & inconsistency.
Ø Difficult in accessing data.
Ø Data isolation.
Ø Data integrity.
Ø Concurrent access is not possible.
Ø Security Problems.
6. Describe the three levels of data abstraction?
The are three levels of abstraction:
Ø Physical level: The lowest level of abstraction describes how data are stored.
Ø Logical level: The next higher level of abstraction, describes what data are stored in database and what relationship among those data.
Ø View level: The highest level of abstraction describes only part of entire database.
7. Define the "integrity rules"
There are two Integrity rules.
Ø Entity Integrity: States that “Primary key cannot have NULL value”
Ø Referential Integrity: States that “Foreign Key can be either a NULL value or should be Primary Key value of other relation.
8. What is extension and intension?
Extension -
It is the number of tuples present in a table at any instance. This is time dependent.
Intension -
It is a constant value that gives the name, structure of table and the constraints laid on it.
9. What is System R? What are its two major subsystems?
System R was designed and developed over a period of 1974-79 at IBM San Jose Research Center. It is a prototype and its purpose was to demonstrate that it is possible to build a Relational System that can be used in a real life environment to solve real life problems, with performance at least comparable to that of existing system.
Its two subsystems are
Ø Research Storage
Ø System Relational Data System.
10. How is the data structure of System R different from the relational structure?
Unlike Relational systems in System R
Ø Domains are not supported
Ø Enforcement of candidate key uniqueness is optional
Ø Enforcement of entity integrity is optional
Ø Referential integrity is not enforced
11. What is Data Independence?
Data independence means that “the application is independent of the storage structure and access strategy of data”. In other words, The ability to modify the schema definition in one level should not affect the schema definition in the next higher level.
Two types of Data Independence:
Ø Physical Data Independence: Modification in physical level should not affect the logical level.
Ø Logical Data Independence: Modification in logical level should affect the view level.
NOTE: Logical Data Independence is more difficult to achieve
12. What is a view? How it is related to data independence?
A view may be thought of as a virtual table, that is, a table that does not really exist in its own right but is instead derived from one or more underlying base table. In other words, there is no stored file that direct represents the view instead a definition of view is stored in data dictionary.
Growth and restructuring of base tables is not reflected in views. Thus the view can insulate users from the effects of restructuring and growth in the database. Hence accounts for logical data independence.
13. What is Data Model?
A collection of conceptual tools for describing data, data relationships data semantics and constraints.
14. What is E-R model?
This data model is based on real world that consists of basic objects called entities and of relationship among these objects. Entities are described in a database by a set of attributes.
15. What is Object Oriented model?
This model is based on collection of objects. An object contains values stored in instance variables with in the object. An object also contains bodies of code that operate on the object. These bodies of code are called methods. Objects that contain same types of values and the same methods are grouped together into classes.
16. What is an Entity?
It is a 'thing' in the real world with an independent existence.
17. What is an Entity type?
It is a collection (set) of entities that have same attributes.
18. What is an Entity set?
It is a collection of all entities of particular entity type in the database.
19. What is an Extension of entity type?
The collections of entities of a particular entity type are grouped together into an entity set.
20. What is Weak Entity set?
An entity set may not have sufficient attributes to form a primary key, and its primary key compromises of its partial key and primary key of its parent entity, then it is said to be Weak Entity set.
21. What is an attribute?
It is a particular property, which describes the entity.
22. What is a Relation Schema and a Relation?
A relation Schema denoted by R(A1, A2, …, An) is made up of the relation name R and the list of attributes Ai that it contains. A relation is defined as a set of tuples. Let r be the relation which contains set tuples (t1, t2, t3, ..., tn). Each tuple is an ordered list of n-values t=(v1,v2, ..., vn).
23. What is degree of a Relation?
It is the number of attribute of its relation schema.
24. What is Relationship?
It is an association among two or more entities.
25. What is Relationship set?
The collection (or set) of similar relationships.
26. What is Relationship type?
Relationship type defines a set of associations or a relationship set among a given set of entity types.
27. What is degree of Relationship type?
It is the number of entity type participating.
25. What is DDL (Data Definition Language)?
A data base schema is specifies by a set of definitions expressed by a special language called DDL.
26. What is VDL (View Definition Language)?
It specifies user views and their mappings to the conceptual schema.
27. What is SDL (Storage Definition Language)?
This language is to specify the internal schema. This language may specify the mapping between two schemas.
28. What is Data Storage - Definition Language?
The storage structures and access methods used by database system are specified by a set of definition in a special type of DDL called data storage-definition language.
29. What is DML (Data Manipulation Language)?
This language that enable user to access or manipulate data as organised by appropriate data model.
Ø Procedural DML or Low level: DML requires a user to specify what data are needed and how to get those data.
Ø Non-Procedural DML or High level: DML requires a user to specify what data are needed without specifying how to get those data.
31. What is DML Compiler?
It translates DML statements in a query language into low-level instruction that the query evaluation engine can understand.
32. What is Query evaluation engine?
It executes low-level instruction generated by compiler.
33. What is DDL Interpreter?
It interprets DDL statements and record them in tables containing metadata.
34. What is Record-at-a-time?
The Low level or Procedural DML can specify and retrieve each record from a set of records. This retrieve of a record is said to be Record-at-a-time.
35. What is Set-at-a-time or Set-oriented?
The High level or Non-procedural DML can specify and retrieve many records in a single DML statement. This retrieve of a record is said to be Set-at-a-time or Set-oriented.
36. What is Relational Algebra?
It is procedural query language. It consists of a set of operations that take one or two relations as input and produce a new relation.
37. What is Relational Calculus?
It is an applied predicate calculus specifically tailored for relational databases proposed by E.F. Codd. E.g. of languages based on it are DSL ALPHA, QUEL.
38. How does Tuple-oriented relational calculus differ from domain-oriented relational calculus
The tuple-oriented calculus uses a tuple variables i.e., variable whose only permitted values are tuples of that relation. E.g. QUEL
The domain-oriented calculus has domain variables i.e., variables that range over the underlying domains instead of over relation. E.g. ILL, DEDUCE.
39. What is normalization?
It is a process of analysing the given relation schemas based on their Functional Dependencies (FDs) and primary key to achieve the properties
Ø Minimizing redundancy
Ø Minimizing insertion, deletion and update anomalies.
40. What is Functional Dependency?
A Functional dependency is denoted by X Y between two sets of attributes X and Y that are subsets of R specifies a constraint on the possible tuple that can form a relation state r of R. The constraint is for any two tuples t1 and t2 in r if t1[X] = t2[X] then they have t1[Y] = t2[Y]. This means the value of X component of a tuple uniquely determines the value of component Y.
41. When is a functional dependency F said to be minimal?
Ø Every dependency in F has a single attribute for its right hand side.
Ø We cannot replace any dependency X A in F with a dependency Y A where Y is a proper subset of X and still have a set of dependency that is equivalent to F.
Ø We cannot remove any dependency from F and still have set of dependency that is equivalent to F.
42. What is Multivalued dependency?
Multivalued dependency denoted by X Y specified on relation schema R, where X and Y are both subsets of R, specifies the following constraint on any relation r of R: if two tuples t1 and t2 exist in r such that t1[X] = t2[X] then t3 and t4 should also exist in r with the following properties
Ø t3[x] = t4[X] = t1[X] = t2[X]
Ø t3[Y] = t1[Y] and t4[Y] = t2[Y]
Ø t3[Z] = t2[Z] and t4[Z] = t1[Z]
where [Z = (R-(X U Y)) ]
43. What is Lossless join property?
It guarantees that the spurious tuple generation does not occur with respect to relation schemas after decomposition.
44. What is 1 NF (Normal Form)?
The domain of attribute must include only atomic (simple, indivisible) values.
45. What is Fully Functional dependency?
It is based on concept of full functional dependency. A functional dependency X Y is full functional dependency if removal of any attribute A from X means that the dependency does not hold any more.
46. What is 2NF?
A relation schema R is in 2NF if it is in 1NF and every non-prime attribute A in R is fully functionally dependent on primary key.
47. What is 3NF?
A relation schema R is in 3NF if it is in 2NF and for every FD X A either of the following is true
Ø X is a Super-key of R.
Ø A is a prime attribute of R.
In other words, if every non prime attribute is non-transitively dependent on primary key.
48. What is BCNF (Boyce-Codd Normal Form)?
A relation schema R is in BCNF if it is in 3NF and satisfies an additional constraint that for every FD X A, X must be a candidate key.
49. What is 4NF?
A relation schema R is said to be in 4NF if for every Multivalued dependency X Y that holds over R, one of following is true
Ø X is subset or equal to (or) XY = R.
Ø X is a super key.
50. What is 5NF?
A Relation schema R is said to be 5NF if for every join dependency {R1, R2, ..., Rn} that holds R, one the following is true
Ø Ri = R for some i.
Ø The join dependency is implied by the set of FD, over R in which the left side is key of R.
51. What is Domain-Key Normal Form?
A relation is said to be in DKNF if all constraints and dependencies that should hold on the the constraint can be enforced by simply enforcing the domain constraint and key constraint on the relation.
52. What are partial, alternate,, artificial, compound and natural key?
Partial Key:
It is a set of attributes that can uniquely identify weak entities and that are related to same owner entity. It is sometime called as Discriminator.
Alternate Key:
All Candidate Keys excluding the Primary Key are known as Alternate Keys.
Artificial Key:
If no obvious key, either stand alone or compound is available, then the last resort is to simply create a key, by assigning a unique number to each record or occurrence. Then this is known as developing an artificial key.
Compound Key:
If no single data element uniquely identifies occurrences within a construct, then combining multiple elements to create a unique identifier for the construct is known as creating a compound key.
Natural Key:
When one of the data elements stored within a construct is utilized as the primary key, then it is called the natural key.
53. What is indexing and what are the different kinds of indexing?
Indexing is a technique for determining how quickly specific data can be found.
Types:
Ø Binary search style indexing
Ø B-Tree indexing
Ø Inverted list indexing
Ø Memory resident table
Ø Table indexing
54. What is system catalog or catalog relation? How is better known as?
A RDBMS maintains a description of all the data that it contains, information about every relation and index that it contains. This information is stored in a collection of relations maintained by the system called metadata. It is also called data dictionary.
55. What is meant by query optimization?
The phase that identifies an efficient execution plan for evaluating a query that has the least estimated cost is referred to as query optimization.
56. What is join dependency and inclusion dependency?
Join Dependency:
A Join dependency is generalization of Multivalued dependency.A JD {R1, R2, ..., Rn} is said to hold over a relation R if R1, R2, R3, ..., Rn is a lossless-join decomposition of R . There is no set of sound and complete inference rules for JD.
Inclusion Dependency:
An Inclusion Dependency is a statement of the form that some columns of a relation are contained in other columns. A foreign key constraint is an example of inclusion dependency.
57. What is durability in DBMS?
Once the DBMS informs the user that a transaction has successfully completed, its effects should persist even if the system crashes before all its changes are reflected on disk. This property is called durability.
58. What do you mean by atomicity and aggregation?
Atomicity:
Either all actions are carried out or none are. Users should not have to worry about the effect of incomplete transactions. DBMS ensures this by undoing the actions of incomplete transactions.
Aggregation:
A concept which is used to model a relationship between a collection of entities and relationships. It is used when we need to express a relationship among relationships.
59. What is a Phantom Deadlock?
In distributed deadlock detection, the delay in propagating local information might cause the deadlock detection algorithms to identify deadlocks that do not really exist. Such situations are called phantom deadlocks and they lead to unnecessary aborts.
60. What is a checkpoint and When does it occur?
A Checkpoint is like a snapshot of the DBMS state. By taking checkpoints, the DBMS can reduce the amount of work to be done during restart in the event of subsequent crashes.
61. What are the different phases of transaction?
Different phases are
Ø Analysis phase
Ø Redo Phase
Ø Undo phase
62. What do you mean by flat file database?
It is a database in which there are no programs or user access languages. It has no cross-file capabilities but is user-friendly and provides user-interface management.
63. What is "transparent DBMS"?
It is one, which keeps its Physical Structure hidden from user.
64. Brief theory of Network, Hierarchical schemas and their properties
Network schema uses a graph data structure to organize records example for such a database management system is CTCG while a hierarchical schema uses a tree data structure example for such a system is IMS.
65. What is a query?
A query with respect to DBMS relates to user commands that are used to interact with a data base. The query language can be classified into data definition language and data manipulation language.
66. What do you mean by Correlated subquery?
Subqueries, or nested queries, are used to bring back a set of rows to be used by the parent query. Depending on how the subquery is written, it can be executed once for the parent query or it can be executed once for each row returned by the parent query. If the subquery is executed for each row of the parent, this is called a correlated subquery.
A correlated subquery can be easily identified if it contains any references to the parent subquery columns in its WHERE clause. Columns from the subquery cannot be referenced anywhere else in the parent query. The following example demonstrates a non-correlated subquery.
E.g. Select * From CUST Where '10/03/1990' IN (Select ODATE From ORDER Where CUST.CNUM = ORDER.CNUM)
67. What are the primitive operations common to all record management systems?
Addition, deletion and modification.
68. Name the buffer in which all the commands that are typed in are stored
‘Edit’ Buffer
69. What are the unary operations in Relational Algebra?
PROJECTION and SELECTION.
70. Are the resulting relations of PRODUCT and JOIN operation the same?
No.
PRODUCT: Concatenation of every row in one relation with every row in another.
JOIN: Concatenation of rows from one relation and related rows from another.
71. What is RDBMS KERNEL?
Two important pieces of RDBMS architecture are the kernel, which is the software, and the data dictionary, which consists of the system-level data structures used by the kernel to manage the database
You might think of an RDBMS as an operating system (or set of subsystems), designed specifically for controlling data access; its primary functions are storing, retrieving, and securing data. An RDBMS maintains its own list of authorized users and their associated privileges; manages memory caches and paging; controls locking for concurrent resource usage; dispatches and schedules user requests; and manages space usage within its table-space structures
.
72. Name the sub-systems of a RDBMS
I/O, Security, Language Processing, Process Control, Storage Management, Logging and Recovery, Distribution Control, Transaction Control, Memory Management, Lock Management
73. Which part of the RDBMS takes care of the data dictionary? How
Data dictionary is a set of tables and database objects that is stored in a special area of the database and maintained exclusively by the kernel.
74. What is the job of the information stored in data-dictionary?
The information in the data dictionary validates the existence of the objects, provides access to them, and maps the actual physical storage location.
75. Not only RDBMS takes care of locating data it also
determines an optimal access path to store or retrieve the data
76. How do you communicate with an RDBMS?
You communicate with an RDBMS using Structured Query Language (SQL)
77. Define SQL and state the differences between SQL and other conventional programming Languages
SQL is a nonprocedural language that is designed specifically for data access operations on normalized relational database structures. The primary difference between SQL and other conventional programming languages is that SQL statements specify what data operations should be performed rather than how to perform them.
78. Name the three major set of files on disk that compose a database in Oracle
There are three major sets of files on disk that compose a database. All the files are binary. These are
Ø Database files
Ø Control files
Ø Redo logs
The most important of these are the database files where the actual data resides. The control files and the redo logs support the functioning of the architecture itself.
All three sets of files must be present, open, and available to Oracle for any data on the database to be useable. Without these files, you cannot access the database, and the database administrator might have to recover some or all of the database using a backup, if there is one.
79. What is an Oracle Instance?
The Oracle system processes, also known as Oracle background processes, provide functions for the user processes—functions that would otherwise be done by the user processes themselves
Oracle database-wide system memory is known as the SGA, the system global area or shared global area. The data and control structures in the SGA are shareable, and all the Oracle background processes and user processes can use them.
The combination of the SGA and the Oracle background processes is known as an Oracle instance
80. What are the four Oracle system processes that must always be up and running for the database to be useable
The four Oracle system processes that must always be up and running for the database to be useable include DBWR (Database Writer), LGWR (Log Writer), SMON (System Monitor), and PMON (Process Monitor).
81. What are database files, control files and log files. How many of these files should a database have at least? Why?
Database Files
The database files hold the actual data and are typically the largest in size. Depending on their sizes, the tables (and other objects) for all the user accounts can go in one database file—but that's not an ideal situation because it does not make the database structure very flexible for controlling access to storage for different users, putting the database on different disk drives, or backing up and restoring just part of the database.
You must have at least one database file but usually, more than one files are used. In terms of accessing and using the data in the tables and other objects, the number (or location) of the files is immaterial.
The database files are fixed in size and never grow bigger than the size at which they were created
Control Files
The control files and redo logs support the rest of the architecture. Any database must have at least one control file, although you typically have more than one to guard against loss. The control file records the name of the database, the date and time it was created, the location of the database and redo logs, and the synchronization information to ensure that all three sets of files are always in step. Every time you add a new database or redo log file to the database, the information is recorded in the control files.
Redo Logs
Any database must have at least two redo logs. These are the journals for the database; the redo logs record all changes to the user objects or system objects. If any type of failure occurs, the changes recorded in the redo logs can be used to bring the database to a consistent state without losing any committed transactions. In the case of non-data loss failure, Oracle can apply the information in the redo logs automatically without intervention from the DBA.
The redo log files are fixed in size and never grow dynamically from the size at which they were created.
82. What is ROWID?
The ROWID is a unique database-wide physical address for every row on every table. Once assigned (when the row is first inserted into the database), it never changes until the row is deleted or the table is dropped.
The ROWID consists of the following three components, the combination of which uniquely identifies the physical storage location of the row.
Ø Oracle database file number, which contains the block with the rows
Ø Oracle block address, which contains the row
Ø The row within the block (because each block can hold many rows)
The ROWID is used internally in indexes as a quick means of retrieving rows with a particular key value. Application developers also use it in SQL statements as a quick way to access a row once they know the ROWID
83. What is Oracle Block? Can two Oracle Blocks have the same address?
Oracle "formats" the database files into a number of Oracle blocks when they are first created—making it easier for the RDBMS software to manage the files and easier to read data into the memory areas.
The block size should be a multiple of the operating system block size. Regardless of the block size, the entire block is not available for holding data; Oracle takes up some space to manage the contents of the block. This block header has a minimum size, but it can grow.
These Oracle blocks are the smallest unit of storage. Increasing the Oracle block size can improve performance, but it should be done only when the database is first created.
Each Oracle block is numbered sequentially for each database file starting at 1. Two blocks can have the same block address if they are in different database files.
84. What is database Trigger?
A database trigger is a PL/SQL block that can defined to automatically execute for insert, update, and delete statements against a table. The trigger can e defined to execute once for the entire statement or once for every row that is inserted, updated, or deleted. For any one table, there are twelve events for which you can define database triggers. A database trigger can call database procedures that are also written in PL/SQL.
85. Name two utilities that Oracle provides, which are use for backup and recovery.
Along with the RDBMS software, Oracle provides two utilities that you can use to back up and restore the database. These utilities are Export and Import.
The Export utility dumps the definitions and data for the specified part of the database to an operating system binary file. The Import utility reads the file produced by an export, recreates the definitions of objects, and inserts the data
If Export and Import are used as a means of backing up and recovering the database, all the changes made to the database cannot be recovered since the export was performed. The best you can do is recover the database to the time when the export was last performed.
86. What are stored-procedures? And what are the advantages of using them.
Stored procedures are database objects that perform a user defined operation. A stored procedure can have a set of compound SQL statements. A stored procedure executes the SQL commands and returns the result to the client. Stored procedures are used to reduce network traffic.
87. How are exceptions handled in PL/SQL? Give some of the internal exceptions' name
PL/SQL exception handling is a mechanism for dealing with run-time errors encountered during procedure execution. Use of this mechanism enables execution to continue if the error is not severe enough to cause procedure termination.
The exception handler must be defined within a subprogram specification. Errors cause the program to raise an exception with a transfer of control to the exception-handler block. After the exception handler executes, control returns to the block in which the handler was defined. If there are no more executable statements in the block, control returns to the caller.
User-Defined Exceptions
PL/SQL enables the user to define exception handlers in the declarations area of subprogram specifications. User accomplishes this by naming an exception as in the following example:
ot_failure EXCEPTION;
In this case, the exception name is ot_failure. Code associated with this handler is written in the EXCEPTION specification area as follows:
EXCEPTION
when OT_FAILURE then
out_status_code := g_out_status_code;
out_msg := g_out_msg;
The following is an example of a subprogram exception:
EXCEPTION
when NO_DATA_FOUND then
g_out_status_code := 'FAIL';
RAISE ot_failure;
Within this exception is the RAISE statement that transfers control back to the ot_failure exception handler. This technique of raising the exception is used to invoke all user-defined exceptions.
System-Defined Exceptions
Exceptions internal to PL/SQL are raised automatically upon error. NO_DATA_FOUND is a system-defined exception. Table below gives a complete list of internal exceptions.
PL/SQL internal exceptions.
Exception Name Oracle Error
CURSOR_ALREADY_OPEN ORA-06511
DUP_VAL_ON_INDEX ORA-00001
INVALID_CURSOR ORA-01001
INVALID_NUMBER ORA-01722
LOGIN_DENIED ORA-01017
NO_DATA_FOUND ORA-01403
NOT_LOGGED_ON ORA-01012
PROGRAM_ERROR ORA-06501
STORAGE_ERROR ORA-06500
TIMEOUT_ON_RESOURCE ORA-00051
TOO_MANY_ROWS ORA-01422
TRANSACTION_BACKED_OUT ORA-00061
VALUE_ERROR ORA-06502
ZERO_DIVIDE ORA-01476
In addition to this list of exceptions, there is a catch-all exception named OTHERS that traps all errors for which specific error handling has not been established.
88. Does PL/SQL support "overloading"? Explain
The concept of overloading in PL/SQL relates to the idea that you can define procedures and functions with the same name. PL/SQL does not look only at the referenced name, however, to resolve a procedure or function call. The count and data types of formal parameters are also considered.
PL/SQL also attempts to resolve any procedure or function calls in locally defined packages before looking at globally defined packages or internal functions. To further ensure calling the proper procedure, you can use the dot notation. Prefacing a procedure or function name with the package name fully qualifies any procedure or function reference.
89. Tables derived from the ERD
a) Are totally unnormalised
b) Are always in 1NF
c) Can be further denormalised
d) May have multi-valued attributes
(b) Are always in 1NF
90. Spurious tuples may occur due to
i. Bad normalization
ii. Theta joins
iii. Updating tables from join
a) i & ii b) ii & iii
c) i & iii d) ii & iii
(a) i & iii because theta joins are joins made on keys that are not primary keys.
91. A B C is a set of attributes. The functional dependency is as follows
AB -> B
AC -> C
C -> B
a) is in 1NF
b) is in 2NF
c) is in 3NF
d) is in BCNF
(a) is in 1NF since (AC)+ = { A, B, C} hence AC is the primary key. Since C B is a FD given, where neither C is a Key nor B is a prime attribute, this it is not in 3NF. Further B is not functionally dependent on key AC thus it is not in 2NF. Thus the given FDs is in 1NF.
92. In mapping of ERD to DFD
a) entities in ERD should correspond to an existing entity/store in DFD
b) entity in DFD is converted to attributes of an entity in ERD
c) relations in ERD has 1 to 1 correspondence to processes in DFD
d) relationships in ERD has 1 to 1 correspondence to flows in DFD
(a) entities in ERD should correspond to an existing entity/store in DFD
93. A dominant entity is the entity
a) on the N side in a 1 : N relationship
b) on the 1 side in a 1 : N relationship
c) on either side in a 1 : 1 relationship
d) nothing to do with 1 : 1 or 1 : N relationship
(b) on the 1 side in a 1 : N relationship
94. Select 'NORTH', CUSTOMER From CUST_DTLS Where REGION = 'N' Order By
CUSTOMER Union Select 'EAST', CUSTOMER From CUST_DTLS Where REGION = 'E' Order By CUSTOMER
The above is
a) Not an error
b) Error - the string in single quotes 'NORTH' and 'SOUTH'
c) Error - the string should be in double quotes
d) Error - ORDER BY clause
(d) Error - the ORDER BY clause. Since ORDER BY clause cannot be used in UNIONS
95. What is Storage Manager?
It is a program module that provides the interface between the low-level data stored in database, application programs and queries submitted to the system.
96. What is Buffer Manager?
It is a program module, which is responsible for fetching data from disk storage into main memory and deciding what data to be cache in memory.
97. What is Transaction Manager?
It is a program module, which ensures that database, remains in a consistent state despite system failures and concurrent transaction execution proceeds without conflicting.
98. What is File Manager?
It is a program module, which manages the allocation of space on disk storage and data structure used to represent information stored on a disk.
99. What is Authorization and Integrity manager?
It is the program module, which tests for the satisfaction of integrity constraint and checks the authority of user to access data.
100. What are stand-alone procedures?
Procedures that are not part of a package are known as stand-alone because they independently defined. A good example of a stand-alone procedure is one written in a SQL*Forms application. These types of procedures are not available for reference from other Oracle tools. Another limitation of stand-alone procedures is that they are compiled at run time, which slows execution.
101. What are cursors give different types of cursors.
PL/SQL uses cursors for all database information accesses statements. The language supports the use two types of cursors
Ø Implicit
Ø Explicit
102. What is cold backup and hot backup (in case of Oracle)?
Ø Cold Backup:
It is copying the three sets of files (database files, redo logs, and control file) when the instance is shut down. This is a straight file copy, usually from the disk directly to tape. You must shut down the instance to guarantee a consistent copy.
If a cold backup is performed, the only option available in the event of data file loss is restoring all the files from the latest backup. All work performed on the database since the last backup is lost.
Ø Hot Backup:
Some sites (such as worldwide airline reservations systems) cannot shut down the database while making a backup copy of the files. The cold backup is not an available option.
So different means of backing up database must be used — the hot backup. Issue a SQL command to indicate to Oracle, on a tablespace-by-tablespace basis, that the files of the tablespace are to backed up. The users can continue to make full use of the files, including making changes to the data. Once the user has indicated that he/she wants to back up the tablespace files, he/she can use the operating system to copy those files to the desired backup destination.
The database must be running in ARCHIVELOG mode for the hot backup option.
If a data loss failure does occur, the lost database files can be restored using the hot backup and the online and offline redo logs created since the backup was done. The database is restored to the most consistent state without any loss of committed transactions.
103. What are Armstrong rules? How do we say that they are complete and/or sound
The well-known inference rules for FDs
Ø Reflexive rule :
If Y is subset or equal to X then X Y.
Ø Augmentation rule:
If X Y then XZ YZ.
Ø Transitive rule:
If {X Y, Y Z} then X Z.
Ø Decomposition rule :
If X YZ then X Y.
Ø Union or Additive rule:
If {X Y, X Z} then X YZ.
Ø Pseudo Transitive rule :
If {X Y, WY Z} then WX Z.
Of these the first three are known as Amstrong Rules. They are sound because it is enough if a set of FDs satisfy these three. They are called complete because using these three rules we can generate the rest all inference rules.
104. How can you find the minimal key of relational schema?
Minimal key is one which can identify each tuple of the given relation schema uniquely. For finding the minimal key it is required to find the closure that is the set of all attributes that are dependent on any given set of attributes under the given set of functional dependency.
Algo. I Determining X+, closure for X, given set of FDs F
1. Set X+ = X
2. Set Old X+ = X+
3. For each FD Y Z in F and if Y belongs to X+ then add Z to X+
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until Old X+ = X+
Algo.II Determining minimal K for relation schema R, given set of FDs F
1. Set K to R that is make K a set of all attributes in R
2. For each attribute A in K
a. Compute (K – A)+ with respect to F
b. If (K – A)+ = R then set K = (K – A)+
105. What do you understand by dependency preservation?
Given a relation R and a set of FDs F, dependency preservation states that the closure of the union of the projection of F on each decomposed relation Ri is equal to the closure of F. i.e.,
((PR1(F)) U … U (PRn(F)))+ = F+
if decomposition is not dependency preserving, then some dependency is lost in the decomposition.
106. What is meant by Proactive, Retroactive and Simultaneous Update.
Proactive Update:
The updates that are applied to database before it becomes effective in real world .
Retroactive Update:
The updates that are applied to database after it becomes effective in real world .
Simulatneous Update:
The updates that are applied to database at the same time when it becomes effective in real world .
107. What are the different types of JOIN operations?
Equi Join: This is the most common type of join which involves only equality comparisions. The disadvantage in this type of join is that there
A database is a logically coherent collection of data with some inherent meaning, representing some aspect of real world and which is designed, built and populated with data for a specific purpose.
2. What is DBMS?
It is a collection of programs that enables user to create and maintain a database. In other words it is general-purpose software that provides the users with the processes of defining, constructing and manipulating the database for various applications.
3. What is a Database system?
The database and DBMS software together is called as Database system.
4. Advantages of DBMS?
Ø Redundancy is controlled.
Ø Unauthorised access is restricted.
Ø Providing multiple user interfaces.
Ø Enforcing integrity constraints.
Ø Providing backup and recovery.
5. Disadvantage in File Processing System?
Ø Data redundancy & inconsistency.
Ø Difficult in accessing data.
Ø Data isolation.
Ø Data integrity.
Ø Concurrent access is not possible.
Ø Security Problems.
6. Describe the three levels of data abstraction?
The are three levels of abstraction:
Ø Physical level: The lowest level of abstraction describes how data are stored.
Ø Logical level: The next higher level of abstraction, describes what data are stored in database and what relationship among those data.
Ø View level: The highest level of abstraction describes only part of entire database.
7. Define the "integrity rules"
There are two Integrity rules.
Ø Entity Integrity: States that “Primary key cannot have NULL value”
Ø Referential Integrity: States that “Foreign Key can be either a NULL value or should be Primary Key value of other relation.
8. What is extension and intension?
Extension -
It is the number of tuples present in a table at any instance. This is time dependent.
Intension -
It is a constant value that gives the name, structure of table and the constraints laid on it.
9. What is System R? What are its two major subsystems?
System R was designed and developed over a period of 1974-79 at IBM San Jose Research Center. It is a prototype and its purpose was to demonstrate that it is possible to build a Relational System that can be used in a real life environment to solve real life problems, with performance at least comparable to that of existing system.
Its two subsystems are
Ø Research Storage
Ø System Relational Data System.
10. How is the data structure of System R different from the relational structure?
Unlike Relational systems in System R
Ø Domains are not supported
Ø Enforcement of candidate key uniqueness is optional
Ø Enforcement of entity integrity is optional
Ø Referential integrity is not enforced
11. What is Data Independence?
Data independence means that “the application is independent of the storage structure and access strategy of data”. In other words, The ability to modify the schema definition in one level should not affect the schema definition in the next higher level.
Two types of Data Independence:
Ø Physical Data Independence: Modification in physical level should not affect the logical level.
Ø Logical Data Independence: Modification in logical level should affect the view level.
NOTE: Logical Data Independence is more difficult to achieve
12. What is a view? How it is related to data independence?
A view may be thought of as a virtual table, that is, a table that does not really exist in its own right but is instead derived from one or more underlying base table. In other words, there is no stored file that direct represents the view instead a definition of view is stored in data dictionary.
Growth and restructuring of base tables is not reflected in views. Thus the view can insulate users from the effects of restructuring and growth in the database. Hence accounts for logical data independence.
13. What is Data Model?
A collection of conceptual tools for describing data, data relationships data semantics and constraints.
14. What is E-R model?
This data model is based on real world that consists of basic objects called entities and of relationship among these objects. Entities are described in a database by a set of attributes.
15. What is Object Oriented model?
This model is based on collection of objects. An object contains values stored in instance variables with in the object. An object also contains bodies of code that operate on the object. These bodies of code are called methods. Objects that contain same types of values and the same methods are grouped together into classes.
16. What is an Entity?
It is a 'thing' in the real world with an independent existence.
17. What is an Entity type?
It is a collection (set) of entities that have same attributes.
18. What is an Entity set?
It is a collection of all entities of particular entity type in the database.
19. What is an Extension of entity type?
The collections of entities of a particular entity type are grouped together into an entity set.
20. What is Weak Entity set?
An entity set may not have sufficient attributes to form a primary key, and its primary key compromises of its partial key and primary key of its parent entity, then it is said to be Weak Entity set.
21. What is an attribute?
It is a particular property, which describes the entity.
22. What is a Relation Schema and a Relation?
A relation Schema denoted by R(A1, A2, …, An) is made up of the relation name R and the list of attributes Ai that it contains. A relation is defined as a set of tuples. Let r be the relation which contains set tuples (t1, t2, t3, ..., tn). Each tuple is an ordered list of n-values t=(v1,v2, ..., vn).
23. What is degree of a Relation?
It is the number of attribute of its relation schema.
24. What is Relationship?
It is an association among two or more entities.
25. What is Relationship set?
The collection (or set) of similar relationships.
26. What is Relationship type?
Relationship type defines a set of associations or a relationship set among a given set of entity types.
27. What is degree of Relationship type?
It is the number of entity type participating.
25. What is DDL (Data Definition Language)?
A data base schema is specifies by a set of definitions expressed by a special language called DDL.
26. What is VDL (View Definition Language)?
It specifies user views and their mappings to the conceptual schema.
27. What is SDL (Storage Definition Language)?
This language is to specify the internal schema. This language may specify the mapping between two schemas.
28. What is Data Storage - Definition Language?
The storage structures and access methods used by database system are specified by a set of definition in a special type of DDL called data storage-definition language.
29. What is DML (Data Manipulation Language)?
This language that enable user to access or manipulate data as organised by appropriate data model.
Ø Procedural DML or Low level: DML requires a user to specify what data are needed and how to get those data.
Ø Non-Procedural DML or High level: DML requires a user to specify what data are needed without specifying how to get those data.
31. What is DML Compiler?
It translates DML statements in a query language into low-level instruction that the query evaluation engine can understand.
32. What is Query evaluation engine?
It executes low-level instruction generated by compiler.
33. What is DDL Interpreter?
It interprets DDL statements and record them in tables containing metadata.
34. What is Record-at-a-time?
The Low level or Procedural DML can specify and retrieve each record from a set of records. This retrieve of a record is said to be Record-at-a-time.
35. What is Set-at-a-time or Set-oriented?
The High level or Non-procedural DML can specify and retrieve many records in a single DML statement. This retrieve of a record is said to be Set-at-a-time or Set-oriented.
36. What is Relational Algebra?
It is procedural query language. It consists of a set of operations that take one or two relations as input and produce a new relation.
37. What is Relational Calculus?
It is an applied predicate calculus specifically tailored for relational databases proposed by E.F. Codd. E.g. of languages based on it are DSL ALPHA, QUEL.
38. How does Tuple-oriented relational calculus differ from domain-oriented relational calculus
The tuple-oriented calculus uses a tuple variables i.e., variable whose only permitted values are tuples of that relation. E.g. QUEL
The domain-oriented calculus has domain variables i.e., variables that range over the underlying domains instead of over relation. E.g. ILL, DEDUCE.
39. What is normalization?
It is a process of analysing the given relation schemas based on their Functional Dependencies (FDs) and primary key to achieve the properties
Ø Minimizing redundancy
Ø Minimizing insertion, deletion and update anomalies.
40. What is Functional Dependency?
A Functional dependency is denoted by X Y between two sets of attributes X and Y that are subsets of R specifies a constraint on the possible tuple that can form a relation state r of R. The constraint is for any two tuples t1 and t2 in r if t1[X] = t2[X] then they have t1[Y] = t2[Y]. This means the value of X component of a tuple uniquely determines the value of component Y.
41. When is a functional dependency F said to be minimal?
Ø Every dependency in F has a single attribute for its right hand side.
Ø We cannot replace any dependency X A in F with a dependency Y A where Y is a proper subset of X and still have a set of dependency that is equivalent to F.
Ø We cannot remove any dependency from F and still have set of dependency that is equivalent to F.
42. What is Multivalued dependency?
Multivalued dependency denoted by X Y specified on relation schema R, where X and Y are both subsets of R, specifies the following constraint on any relation r of R: if two tuples t1 and t2 exist in r such that t1[X] = t2[X] then t3 and t4 should also exist in r with the following properties
Ø t3[x] = t4[X] = t1[X] = t2[X]
Ø t3[Y] = t1[Y] and t4[Y] = t2[Y]
Ø t3[Z] = t2[Z] and t4[Z] = t1[Z]
where [Z = (R-(X U Y)) ]
43. What is Lossless join property?
It guarantees that the spurious tuple generation does not occur with respect to relation schemas after decomposition.
44. What is 1 NF (Normal Form)?
The domain of attribute must include only atomic (simple, indivisible) values.
45. What is Fully Functional dependency?
It is based on concept of full functional dependency. A functional dependency X Y is full functional dependency if removal of any attribute A from X means that the dependency does not hold any more.
46. What is 2NF?
A relation schema R is in 2NF if it is in 1NF and every non-prime attribute A in R is fully functionally dependent on primary key.
47. What is 3NF?
A relation schema R is in 3NF if it is in 2NF and for every FD X A either of the following is true
Ø X is a Super-key of R.
Ø A is a prime attribute of R.
In other words, if every non prime attribute is non-transitively dependent on primary key.
48. What is BCNF (Boyce-Codd Normal Form)?
A relation schema R is in BCNF if it is in 3NF and satisfies an additional constraint that for every FD X A, X must be a candidate key.
49. What is 4NF?
A relation schema R is said to be in 4NF if for every Multivalued dependency X Y that holds over R, one of following is true
Ø X is subset or equal to (or) XY = R.
Ø X is a super key.
50. What is 5NF?
A Relation schema R is said to be 5NF if for every join dependency {R1, R2, ..., Rn} that holds R, one the following is true
Ø Ri = R for some i.
Ø The join dependency is implied by the set of FD, over R in which the left side is key of R.
51. What is Domain-Key Normal Form?
A relation is said to be in DKNF if all constraints and dependencies that should hold on the the constraint can be enforced by simply enforcing the domain constraint and key constraint on the relation.
52. What are partial, alternate,, artificial, compound and natural key?
Partial Key:
It is a set of attributes that can uniquely identify weak entities and that are related to same owner entity. It is sometime called as Discriminator.
Alternate Key:
All Candidate Keys excluding the Primary Key are known as Alternate Keys.
Artificial Key:
If no obvious key, either stand alone or compound is available, then the last resort is to simply create a key, by assigning a unique number to each record or occurrence. Then this is known as developing an artificial key.
Compound Key:
If no single data element uniquely identifies occurrences within a construct, then combining multiple elements to create a unique identifier for the construct is known as creating a compound key.
Natural Key:
When one of the data elements stored within a construct is utilized as the primary key, then it is called the natural key.
53. What is indexing and what are the different kinds of indexing?
Indexing is a technique for determining how quickly specific data can be found.
Types:
Ø Binary search style indexing
Ø B-Tree indexing
Ø Inverted list indexing
Ø Memory resident table
Ø Table indexing
54. What is system catalog or catalog relation? How is better known as?
A RDBMS maintains a description of all the data that it contains, information about every relation and index that it contains. This information is stored in a collection of relations maintained by the system called metadata. It is also called data dictionary.
55. What is meant by query optimization?
The phase that identifies an efficient execution plan for evaluating a query that has the least estimated cost is referred to as query optimization.
56. What is join dependency and inclusion dependency?
Join Dependency:
A Join dependency is generalization of Multivalued dependency.A JD {R1, R2, ..., Rn} is said to hold over a relation R if R1, R2, R3, ..., Rn is a lossless-join decomposition of R . There is no set of sound and complete inference rules for JD.
Inclusion Dependency:
An Inclusion Dependency is a statement of the form that some columns of a relation are contained in other columns. A foreign key constraint is an example of inclusion dependency.
57. What is durability in DBMS?
Once the DBMS informs the user that a transaction has successfully completed, its effects should persist even if the system crashes before all its changes are reflected on disk. This property is called durability.
58. What do you mean by atomicity and aggregation?
Atomicity:
Either all actions are carried out or none are. Users should not have to worry about the effect of incomplete transactions. DBMS ensures this by undoing the actions of incomplete transactions.
Aggregation:
A concept which is used to model a relationship between a collection of entities and relationships. It is used when we need to express a relationship among relationships.
59. What is a Phantom Deadlock?
In distributed deadlock detection, the delay in propagating local information might cause the deadlock detection algorithms to identify deadlocks that do not really exist. Such situations are called phantom deadlocks and they lead to unnecessary aborts.
60. What is a checkpoint and When does it occur?
A Checkpoint is like a snapshot of the DBMS state. By taking checkpoints, the DBMS can reduce the amount of work to be done during restart in the event of subsequent crashes.
61. What are the different phases of transaction?
Different phases are
Ø Analysis phase
Ø Redo Phase
Ø Undo phase
62. What do you mean by flat file database?
It is a database in which there are no programs or user access languages. It has no cross-file capabilities but is user-friendly and provides user-interface management.
63. What is "transparent DBMS"?
It is one, which keeps its Physical Structure hidden from user.
64. Brief theory of Network, Hierarchical schemas and their properties
Network schema uses a graph data structure to organize records example for such a database management system is CTCG while a hierarchical schema uses a tree data structure example for such a system is IMS.
65. What is a query?
A query with respect to DBMS relates to user commands that are used to interact with a data base. The query language can be classified into data definition language and data manipulation language.
66. What do you mean by Correlated subquery?
Subqueries, or nested queries, are used to bring back a set of rows to be used by the parent query. Depending on how the subquery is written, it can be executed once for the parent query or it can be executed once for each row returned by the parent query. If the subquery is executed for each row of the parent, this is called a correlated subquery.
A correlated subquery can be easily identified if it contains any references to the parent subquery columns in its WHERE clause. Columns from the subquery cannot be referenced anywhere else in the parent query. The following example demonstrates a non-correlated subquery.
E.g. Select * From CUST Where '10/03/1990' IN (Select ODATE From ORDER Where CUST.CNUM = ORDER.CNUM)
67. What are the primitive operations common to all record management systems?
Addition, deletion and modification.
68. Name the buffer in which all the commands that are typed in are stored
‘Edit’ Buffer
69. What are the unary operations in Relational Algebra?
PROJECTION and SELECTION.
70. Are the resulting relations of PRODUCT and JOIN operation the same?
No.
PRODUCT: Concatenation of every row in one relation with every row in another.
JOIN: Concatenation of rows from one relation and related rows from another.
71. What is RDBMS KERNEL?
Two important pieces of RDBMS architecture are the kernel, which is the software, and the data dictionary, which consists of the system-level data structures used by the kernel to manage the database
You might think of an RDBMS as an operating system (or set of subsystems), designed specifically for controlling data access; its primary functions are storing, retrieving, and securing data. An RDBMS maintains its own list of authorized users and their associated privileges; manages memory caches and paging; controls locking for concurrent resource usage; dispatches and schedules user requests; and manages space usage within its table-space structures
.
72. Name the sub-systems of a RDBMS
I/O, Security, Language Processing, Process Control, Storage Management, Logging and Recovery, Distribution Control, Transaction Control, Memory Management, Lock Management
73. Which part of the RDBMS takes care of the data dictionary? How
Data dictionary is a set of tables and database objects that is stored in a special area of the database and maintained exclusively by the kernel.
74. What is the job of the information stored in data-dictionary?
The information in the data dictionary validates the existence of the objects, provides access to them, and maps the actual physical storage location.
75. Not only RDBMS takes care of locating data it also
determines an optimal access path to store or retrieve the data
76. How do you communicate with an RDBMS?
You communicate with an RDBMS using Structured Query Language (SQL)
77. Define SQL and state the differences between SQL and other conventional programming Languages
SQL is a nonprocedural language that is designed specifically for data access operations on normalized relational database structures. The primary difference between SQL and other conventional programming languages is that SQL statements specify what data operations should be performed rather than how to perform them.
78. Name the three major set of files on disk that compose a database in Oracle
There are three major sets of files on disk that compose a database. All the files are binary. These are
Ø Database files
Ø Control files
Ø Redo logs
The most important of these are the database files where the actual data resides. The control files and the redo logs support the functioning of the architecture itself.
All three sets of files must be present, open, and available to Oracle for any data on the database to be useable. Without these files, you cannot access the database, and the database administrator might have to recover some or all of the database using a backup, if there is one.
79. What is an Oracle Instance?
The Oracle system processes, also known as Oracle background processes, provide functions for the user processes—functions that would otherwise be done by the user processes themselves
Oracle database-wide system memory is known as the SGA, the system global area or shared global area. The data and control structures in the SGA are shareable, and all the Oracle background processes and user processes can use them.
The combination of the SGA and the Oracle background processes is known as an Oracle instance
80. What are the four Oracle system processes that must always be up and running for the database to be useable
The four Oracle system processes that must always be up and running for the database to be useable include DBWR (Database Writer), LGWR (Log Writer), SMON (System Monitor), and PMON (Process Monitor).
81. What are database files, control files and log files. How many of these files should a database have at least? Why?
Database Files
The database files hold the actual data and are typically the largest in size. Depending on their sizes, the tables (and other objects) for all the user accounts can go in one database file—but that's not an ideal situation because it does not make the database structure very flexible for controlling access to storage for different users, putting the database on different disk drives, or backing up and restoring just part of the database.
You must have at least one database file but usually, more than one files are used. In terms of accessing and using the data in the tables and other objects, the number (or location) of the files is immaterial.
The database files are fixed in size and never grow bigger than the size at which they were created
Control Files
The control files and redo logs support the rest of the architecture. Any database must have at least one control file, although you typically have more than one to guard against loss. The control file records the name of the database, the date and time it was created, the location of the database and redo logs, and the synchronization information to ensure that all three sets of files are always in step. Every time you add a new database or redo log file to the database, the information is recorded in the control files.
Redo Logs
Any database must have at least two redo logs. These are the journals for the database; the redo logs record all changes to the user objects or system objects. If any type of failure occurs, the changes recorded in the redo logs can be used to bring the database to a consistent state without losing any committed transactions. In the case of non-data loss failure, Oracle can apply the information in the redo logs automatically without intervention from the DBA.
The redo log files are fixed in size and never grow dynamically from the size at which they were created.
82. What is ROWID?
The ROWID is a unique database-wide physical address for every row on every table. Once assigned (when the row is first inserted into the database), it never changes until the row is deleted or the table is dropped.
The ROWID consists of the following three components, the combination of which uniquely identifies the physical storage location of the row.
Ø Oracle database file number, which contains the block with the rows
Ø Oracle block address, which contains the row
Ø The row within the block (because each block can hold many rows)
The ROWID is used internally in indexes as a quick means of retrieving rows with a particular key value. Application developers also use it in SQL statements as a quick way to access a row once they know the ROWID
83. What is Oracle Block? Can two Oracle Blocks have the same address?
Oracle "formats" the database files into a number of Oracle blocks when they are first created—making it easier for the RDBMS software to manage the files and easier to read data into the memory areas.
The block size should be a multiple of the operating system block size. Regardless of the block size, the entire block is not available for holding data; Oracle takes up some space to manage the contents of the block. This block header has a minimum size, but it can grow.
These Oracle blocks are the smallest unit of storage. Increasing the Oracle block size can improve performance, but it should be done only when the database is first created.
Each Oracle block is numbered sequentially for each database file starting at 1. Two blocks can have the same block address if they are in different database files.
84. What is database Trigger?
A database trigger is a PL/SQL block that can defined to automatically execute for insert, update, and delete statements against a table. The trigger can e defined to execute once for the entire statement or once for every row that is inserted, updated, or deleted. For any one table, there are twelve events for which you can define database triggers. A database trigger can call database procedures that are also written in PL/SQL.
85. Name two utilities that Oracle provides, which are use for backup and recovery.
Along with the RDBMS software, Oracle provides two utilities that you can use to back up and restore the database. These utilities are Export and Import.
The Export utility dumps the definitions and data for the specified part of the database to an operating system binary file. The Import utility reads the file produced by an export, recreates the definitions of objects, and inserts the data
If Export and Import are used as a means of backing up and recovering the database, all the changes made to the database cannot be recovered since the export was performed. The best you can do is recover the database to the time when the export was last performed.
86. What are stored-procedures? And what are the advantages of using them.
Stored procedures are database objects that perform a user defined operation. A stored procedure can have a set of compound SQL statements. A stored procedure executes the SQL commands and returns the result to the client. Stored procedures are used to reduce network traffic.
87. How are exceptions handled in PL/SQL? Give some of the internal exceptions' name
PL/SQL exception handling is a mechanism for dealing with run-time errors encountered during procedure execution. Use of this mechanism enables execution to continue if the error is not severe enough to cause procedure termination.
The exception handler must be defined within a subprogram specification. Errors cause the program to raise an exception with a transfer of control to the exception-handler block. After the exception handler executes, control returns to the block in which the handler was defined. If there are no more executable statements in the block, control returns to the caller.
User-Defined Exceptions
PL/SQL enables the user to define exception handlers in the declarations area of subprogram specifications. User accomplishes this by naming an exception as in the following example:
ot_failure EXCEPTION;
In this case, the exception name is ot_failure. Code associated with this handler is written in the EXCEPTION specification area as follows:
EXCEPTION
when OT_FAILURE then
out_status_code := g_out_status_code;
out_msg := g_out_msg;
The following is an example of a subprogram exception:
EXCEPTION
when NO_DATA_FOUND then
g_out_status_code := 'FAIL';
RAISE ot_failure;
Within this exception is the RAISE statement that transfers control back to the ot_failure exception handler. This technique of raising the exception is used to invoke all user-defined exceptions.
System-Defined Exceptions
Exceptions internal to PL/SQL are raised automatically upon error. NO_DATA_FOUND is a system-defined exception. Table below gives a complete list of internal exceptions.
PL/SQL internal exceptions.
Exception Name Oracle Error
CURSOR_ALREADY_OPEN ORA-06511
DUP_VAL_ON_INDEX ORA-00001
INVALID_CURSOR ORA-01001
INVALID_NUMBER ORA-01722
LOGIN_DENIED ORA-01017
NO_DATA_FOUND ORA-01403
NOT_LOGGED_ON ORA-01012
PROGRAM_ERROR ORA-06501
STORAGE_ERROR ORA-06500
TIMEOUT_ON_RESOURCE ORA-00051
TOO_MANY_ROWS ORA-01422
TRANSACTION_BACKED_OUT ORA-00061
VALUE_ERROR ORA-06502
ZERO_DIVIDE ORA-01476
In addition to this list of exceptions, there is a catch-all exception named OTHERS that traps all errors for which specific error handling has not been established.
88. Does PL/SQL support "overloading"? Explain
The concept of overloading in PL/SQL relates to the idea that you can define procedures and functions with the same name. PL/SQL does not look only at the referenced name, however, to resolve a procedure or function call. The count and data types of formal parameters are also considered.
PL/SQL also attempts to resolve any procedure or function calls in locally defined packages before looking at globally defined packages or internal functions. To further ensure calling the proper procedure, you can use the dot notation. Prefacing a procedure or function name with the package name fully qualifies any procedure or function reference.
89. Tables derived from the ERD
a) Are totally unnormalised
b) Are always in 1NF
c) Can be further denormalised
d) May have multi-valued attributes
(b) Are always in 1NF
90. Spurious tuples may occur due to
i. Bad normalization
ii. Theta joins
iii. Updating tables from join
a) i & ii b) ii & iii
c) i & iii d) ii & iii
(a) i & iii because theta joins are joins made on keys that are not primary keys.
91. A B C is a set of attributes. The functional dependency is as follows
AB -> B
AC -> C
C -> B
a) is in 1NF
b) is in 2NF
c) is in 3NF
d) is in BCNF
(a) is in 1NF since (AC)+ = { A, B, C} hence AC is the primary key. Since C B is a FD given, where neither C is a Key nor B is a prime attribute, this it is not in 3NF. Further B is not functionally dependent on key AC thus it is not in 2NF. Thus the given FDs is in 1NF.
92. In mapping of ERD to DFD
a) entities in ERD should correspond to an existing entity/store in DFD
b) entity in DFD is converted to attributes of an entity in ERD
c) relations in ERD has 1 to 1 correspondence to processes in DFD
d) relationships in ERD has 1 to 1 correspondence to flows in DFD
(a) entities in ERD should correspond to an existing entity/store in DFD
93. A dominant entity is the entity
a) on the N side in a 1 : N relationship
b) on the 1 side in a 1 : N relationship
c) on either side in a 1 : 1 relationship
d) nothing to do with 1 : 1 or 1 : N relationship
(b) on the 1 side in a 1 : N relationship
94. Select 'NORTH', CUSTOMER From CUST_DTLS Where REGION = 'N' Order By
CUSTOMER Union Select 'EAST', CUSTOMER From CUST_DTLS Where REGION = 'E' Order By CUSTOMER
The above is
a) Not an error
b) Error - the string in single quotes 'NORTH' and 'SOUTH'
c) Error - the string should be in double quotes
d) Error - ORDER BY clause
(d) Error - the ORDER BY clause. Since ORDER BY clause cannot be used in UNIONS
95. What is Storage Manager?
It is a program module that provides the interface between the low-level data stored in database, application programs and queries submitted to the system.
96. What is Buffer Manager?
It is a program module, which is responsible for fetching data from disk storage into main memory and deciding what data to be cache in memory.
97. What is Transaction Manager?
It is a program module, which ensures that database, remains in a consistent state despite system failures and concurrent transaction execution proceeds without conflicting.
98. What is File Manager?
It is a program module, which manages the allocation of space on disk storage and data structure used to represent information stored on a disk.
99. What is Authorization and Integrity manager?
It is the program module, which tests for the satisfaction of integrity constraint and checks the authority of user to access data.
100. What are stand-alone procedures?
Procedures that are not part of a package are known as stand-alone because they independently defined. A good example of a stand-alone procedure is one written in a SQL*Forms application. These types of procedures are not available for reference from other Oracle tools. Another limitation of stand-alone procedures is that they are compiled at run time, which slows execution.
101. What are cursors give different types of cursors.
PL/SQL uses cursors for all database information accesses statements. The language supports the use two types of cursors
Ø Implicit
Ø Explicit
102. What is cold backup and hot backup (in case of Oracle)?
Ø Cold Backup:
It is copying the three sets of files (database files, redo logs, and control file) when the instance is shut down. This is a straight file copy, usually from the disk directly to tape. You must shut down the instance to guarantee a consistent copy.
If a cold backup is performed, the only option available in the event of data file loss is restoring all the files from the latest backup. All work performed on the database since the last backup is lost.
Ø Hot Backup:
Some sites (such as worldwide airline reservations systems) cannot shut down the database while making a backup copy of the files. The cold backup is not an available option.
So different means of backing up database must be used — the hot backup. Issue a SQL command to indicate to Oracle, on a tablespace-by-tablespace basis, that the files of the tablespace are to backed up. The users can continue to make full use of the files, including making changes to the data. Once the user has indicated that he/she wants to back up the tablespace files, he/she can use the operating system to copy those files to the desired backup destination.
The database must be running in ARCHIVELOG mode for the hot backup option.
If a data loss failure does occur, the lost database files can be restored using the hot backup and the online and offline redo logs created since the backup was done. The database is restored to the most consistent state without any loss of committed transactions.
103. What are Armstrong rules? How do we say that they are complete and/or sound
The well-known inference rules for FDs
Ø Reflexive rule :
If Y is subset or equal to X then X Y.
Ø Augmentation rule:
If X Y then XZ YZ.
Ø Transitive rule:
If {X Y, Y Z} then X Z.
Ø Decomposition rule :
If X YZ then X Y.
Ø Union or Additive rule:
If {X Y, X Z} then X YZ.
Ø Pseudo Transitive rule :
If {X Y, WY Z} then WX Z.
Of these the first three are known as Amstrong Rules. They are sound because it is enough if a set of FDs satisfy these three. They are called complete because using these three rules we can generate the rest all inference rules.
104. How can you find the minimal key of relational schema?
Minimal key is one which can identify each tuple of the given relation schema uniquely. For finding the minimal key it is required to find the closure that is the set of all attributes that are dependent on any given set of attributes under the given set of functional dependency.
Algo. I Determining X+, closure for X, given set of FDs F
1. Set X+ = X
2. Set Old X+ = X+
3. For each FD Y Z in F and if Y belongs to X+ then add Z to X+
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until Old X+ = X+
Algo.II Determining minimal K for relation schema R, given set of FDs F
1. Set K to R that is make K a set of all attributes in R
2. For each attribute A in K
a. Compute (K – A)+ with respect to F
b. If (K – A)+ = R then set K = (K – A)+
105. What do you understand by dependency preservation?
Given a relation R and a set of FDs F, dependency preservation states that the closure of the union of the projection of F on each decomposed relation Ri is equal to the closure of F. i.e.,
((PR1(F)) U … U (PRn(F)))+ = F+
if decomposition is not dependency preserving, then some dependency is lost in the decomposition.
106. What is meant by Proactive, Retroactive and Simultaneous Update.
Proactive Update:
The updates that are applied to database before it becomes effective in real world .
Retroactive Update:
The updates that are applied to database after it becomes effective in real world .
Simulatneous Update:
The updates that are applied to database at the same time when it becomes effective in real world .
107. What are the different types of JOIN operations?
Equi Join: This is the most common type of join which involves only equality comparisions. The disadvantage in this type of join is that there
VERBAL
1. Depreciation: deflation, depression, devaluation, fall, slump
2. Deprecate : feel and express disapproval,
3. Incentive : thing one encourages one to do (stimulus)
4. Echelon : level of authority or responsibility
5. Innovation : make changes or introduce new things
6. Intermittent : externally stopping and then starting
7. Detrimental: harmful
8. Conciliation : make less angry or more friendly
9. Orthodox: conventional or traditional, superstitious
10. Fallible : liable to error
11. Volatile : ever changing
12. Manifest: clear and obvious
13. Connotation : suggest or implied meaning of expression
14. Reciprocal: reverse or opposite
15. Agrarian : related to agriculture
16. Vacillate : undecided or dilemma
17. Expedient : fitting proper, desirable
18. Simulate : produce artificially resembling an existing one.
19. Access : to approach
20. Compensation: salary
21. Truncate : shorten by cutting
22. Adherence : stick
23. Heterogeneous: non similar things
24. Surplus : excessive
25. Assess : determine the amount or value
26. Cognizance : knowledge
27. Retrospective : review
28. Naive : innocent, rustic
29. Equivocate : tallying on both sides, lie, mislead
30. Postulate : frame a theory
31. Latent : dormant, secret
32. Fluctuation : wavering,
33. Eliminate : to reduce
34. Affinity : strong liking
35. Expedite : hasten
36. Console : to show sympathy
37. Adversary : opposition
38. Affable : lovable or approachable
39. Decomposition : rotten
40. Agregious : apart from the crowd, especially bad
41. Conglomeration: group, collection
42. Aberration: deviation
43. Augury : prediction
44. Creditability : ability to common belief, quality of being credible
45. Coincident: incidentally
46. Constituent : accompanying
47. Differential : having or showing or making use of
48. Litigation : engaging in a law suit
49. Moratorium: legally or officially determined period of delay before
fulfillment of the agreement of paying of debts.
50. Negotiate : discuss or bargain
51. Preparation : act of preparing
52. Preponderant : superiority of power or quality
53. Relevance : quality of being relevant
54. Apparatus : appliances
55. Ignorance : blindness, in experience
56. Obsession: complex enthusiasm
57. precipitate : speed, active
58. corroborative: refutable
59. obnoxious : harmless
60. sanction: hinder
61. empirical: experimental
62. aborigine: emigrant
63. corpulent : emaciated
64. officious: pragmate
65. Agitator : Firebrand :: Renegade : Turncoat
66. Burst : Sound :: Tinder : Fire
67. Star : cluster :: Tree : clump
68. Piston : Cylinder :: elevator : shaft
69. Mitigate : punishment :: commute : sentence
70. Erudite : scholar :: illiterate : ignorant
71. Fire : Ashes :: explosion : debris
72. mason : wall :: Author : Book
73. Fire : Ashes :: Event : memories
74. (a) cheerleaders : pompoms
(b) audience:seats
(c) team:goalposts
(d) conductor:podium
(e) referee:decision
Ans. (a)
75. archipelago:islands::
(a) arbor:bower
(b) garden:flower
(c) mountain:valley
(d) sand:dune
(e) constellation:star
Ans. (a)
76. crow:boastful ::
(a) smirk:witty
(b) conceal:s;y
(c) pout:sulky
(d) blush:coarse
(e) bluster:unhappy
Ans. (a)
77. bracket:shelf ::
(a) hammer:anvil
(b) girder:rivet
(c) strut:rafter
(d) valve:pipe
(e) bucket:well
Ans. (a)
78. taxonomy:classification ::
(a) etymology:derivation
(b) autonomy:authorization
(c) economy:rationalization
(d) tautology:justification
(e) ecology:urbanisation
Ans. (a)
79. moderator:debate ::
(a) legislator:election
(b) chef:banquet
(c) auditor:lecture
(d) conspirator:plot
(e) umpire:game
Ans. (a)
80. glossary:words ::
(a) catalogue:dates
(b) atlas:maps
(c) almanac:synonyms
(d) thesaurus:rhymes
(e) lexicon:numbers
Ans. (a)
81. lumber: bear ::
(a) roost:hen
(b) bray:donkey
(c) waddle:goose
(d) swoop:hawk
(e) chirp:sparrow
Ans. (a)
82. celerity:snail ::
(a) indolence:sloth
(b) cunning:weasel
(c) curiosity:cat
(d) humility:peacock
(e) obstinacy:mule
Ans. (a)
83. wood:sand ::
(a) coal:burn
(b) brick:lay
(c) oil:polish
(d) metal:burnish
(e) stone:quarry
Ans. (a)
84. carpenter:saw ::
(a) stenographer:typist
(b) painter:brush
(c) lawyer:brief
(d) runner:sneakers
(e) seamstress:scissors
Ans. (a)
85. horns:bull ::
(a) mane:lion
(b) wattles:turkey
(c) antlers:stag
(d) hooves:horse
(e) wings:eagle
Ans. (a)
86. gullible:duped ::
(a) credible:cheated
(b) careful:cautioned
(c) malleable:moulded
(d) myopic:mislead
(e) articulate:silenced
Ans. (a)
87. marathon:stamina ::
(a) relay:independence
(b) hurdle:perseverance
(c) sprint:celerity
(d) job:weariness
(e) ramble:directness
Ans. (a)
88. Skin:man ::
(a) hide:animal
(b) jump:start
(c) peel:potato
(d) eat:food
(e) wool:cloth
Ans. (a)
89. Bamboo:Shoot ::
(a) Bean:Sprout
(b) Peas:Pod
(c) Potato:Eye
(d) Carrot:Root
(e) Leaf:Stem
Ans. (a)
90. Deflect:Missile ::
(a) Siege:Castle
(b) Distract:Attraction
(c) Protect:Honour
(d) Drop:Catch
(e) Score:Goal
Ans. (a)
91. Editor:magazine ::
(a) captain:ship
(b) actor:movie
(c) director:film
(d) player:team
(e) jockey:horse
Ans. (a)
92. Volcano : Lava ::
(a) Fault:earthquate
(b) crack:wall
(c) tunnel:dig
(d) water:swim
(e) floor:polish
Ans. (a)
93. Disregarded
(a) heed
(b) hopeful
(c) evade
(d) dense
Ans. (a)
94. Obviate
(a) becloud
(b) necessitate
(c) rationalize
(d) execute
Ans. (b)
95. Superficial
(a) profound
(b) exaggerated
(c) subjective
(d) spirited
Ans. (a)
96. chief : tribe :: governer : state
97. epaulette : shoulder :: tiara : head
98. guttural : throat :: gastric : stomach
99. inept : clever :: languid : active
100. Erudite : scholar :: illiterate : ignorant
2. Deprecate : feel and express disapproval,
3. Incentive : thing one encourages one to do (stimulus)
4. Echelon : level of authority or responsibility
5. Innovation : make changes or introduce new things
6. Intermittent : externally stopping and then starting
7. Detrimental: harmful
8. Conciliation : make less angry or more friendly
9. Orthodox: conventional or traditional, superstitious
10. Fallible : liable to error
11. Volatile : ever changing
12. Manifest: clear and obvious
13. Connotation : suggest or implied meaning of expression
14. Reciprocal: reverse or opposite
15. Agrarian : related to agriculture
16. Vacillate : undecided or dilemma
17. Expedient : fitting proper, desirable
18. Simulate : produce artificially resembling an existing one.
19. Access : to approach
20. Compensation: salary
21. Truncate : shorten by cutting
22. Adherence : stick
23. Heterogeneous: non similar things
24. Surplus : excessive
25. Assess : determine the amount or value
26. Cognizance : knowledge
27. Retrospective : review
28. Naive : innocent, rustic
29. Equivocate : tallying on both sides, lie, mislead
30. Postulate : frame a theory
31. Latent : dormant, secret
32. Fluctuation : wavering,
33. Eliminate : to reduce
34. Affinity : strong liking
35. Expedite : hasten
36. Console : to show sympathy
37. Adversary : opposition
38. Affable : lovable or approachable
39. Decomposition : rotten
40. Agregious : apart from the crowd, especially bad
41. Conglomeration: group, collection
42. Aberration: deviation
43. Augury : prediction
44. Creditability : ability to common belief, quality of being credible
45. Coincident: incidentally
46. Constituent : accompanying
47. Differential : having or showing or making use of
48. Litigation : engaging in a law suit
49. Moratorium: legally or officially determined period of delay before
fulfillment of the agreement of paying of debts.
50. Negotiate : discuss or bargain
51. Preparation : act of preparing
52. Preponderant : superiority of power or quality
53. Relevance : quality of being relevant
54. Apparatus : appliances
55. Ignorance : blindness, in experience
56. Obsession: complex enthusiasm
57. precipitate : speed, active
58. corroborative: refutable
59. obnoxious : harmless
60. sanction: hinder
61. empirical: experimental
62. aborigine: emigrant
63. corpulent : emaciated
64. officious: pragmate
65. Agitator : Firebrand :: Renegade : Turncoat
66. Burst : Sound :: Tinder : Fire
67. Star : cluster :: Tree : clump
68. Piston : Cylinder :: elevator : shaft
69. Mitigate : punishment :: commute : sentence
70. Erudite : scholar :: illiterate : ignorant
71. Fire : Ashes :: explosion : debris
72. mason : wall :: Author : Book
73. Fire : Ashes :: Event : memories
74. (a) cheerleaders : pompoms
(b) audience:seats
(c) team:goalposts
(d) conductor:podium
(e) referee:decision
Ans. (a)
75. archipelago:islands::
(a) arbor:bower
(b) garden:flower
(c) mountain:valley
(d) sand:dune
(e) constellation:star
Ans. (a)
76. crow:boastful ::
(a) smirk:witty
(b) conceal:s;y
(c) pout:sulky
(d) blush:coarse
(e) bluster:unhappy
Ans. (a)
77. bracket:shelf ::
(a) hammer:anvil
(b) girder:rivet
(c) strut:rafter
(d) valve:pipe
(e) bucket:well
Ans. (a)
78. taxonomy:classification ::
(a) etymology:derivation
(b) autonomy:authorization
(c) economy:rationalization
(d) tautology:justification
(e) ecology:urbanisation
Ans. (a)
79. moderator:debate ::
(a) legislator:election
(b) chef:banquet
(c) auditor:lecture
(d) conspirator:plot
(e) umpire:game
Ans. (a)
80. glossary:words ::
(a) catalogue:dates
(b) atlas:maps
(c) almanac:synonyms
(d) thesaurus:rhymes
(e) lexicon:numbers
Ans. (a)
81. lumber: bear ::
(a) roost:hen
(b) bray:donkey
(c) waddle:goose
(d) swoop:hawk
(e) chirp:sparrow
Ans. (a)
82. celerity:snail ::
(a) indolence:sloth
(b) cunning:weasel
(c) curiosity:cat
(d) humility:peacock
(e) obstinacy:mule
Ans. (a)
83. wood:sand ::
(a) coal:burn
(b) brick:lay
(c) oil:polish
(d) metal:burnish
(e) stone:quarry
Ans. (a)
84. carpenter:saw ::
(a) stenographer:typist
(b) painter:brush
(c) lawyer:brief
(d) runner:sneakers
(e) seamstress:scissors
Ans. (a)
85. horns:bull ::
(a) mane:lion
(b) wattles:turkey
(c) antlers:stag
(d) hooves:horse
(e) wings:eagle
Ans. (a)
86. gullible:duped ::
(a) credible:cheated
(b) careful:cautioned
(c) malleable:moulded
(d) myopic:mislead
(e) articulate:silenced
Ans. (a)
87. marathon:stamina ::
(a) relay:independence
(b) hurdle:perseverance
(c) sprint:celerity
(d) job:weariness
(e) ramble:directness
Ans. (a)
88. Skin:man ::
(a) hide:animal
(b) jump:start
(c) peel:potato
(d) eat:food
(e) wool:cloth
Ans. (a)
89. Bamboo:Shoot ::
(a) Bean:Sprout
(b) Peas:Pod
(c) Potato:Eye
(d) Carrot:Root
(e) Leaf:Stem
Ans. (a)
90. Deflect:Missile ::
(a) Siege:Castle
(b) Distract:Attraction
(c) Protect:Honour
(d) Drop:Catch
(e) Score:Goal
Ans. (a)
91. Editor:magazine ::
(a) captain:ship
(b) actor:movie
(c) director:film
(d) player:team
(e) jockey:horse
Ans. (a)
92. Volcano : Lava ::
(a) Fault:earthquate
(b) crack:wall
(c) tunnel:dig
(d) water:swim
(e) floor:polish
Ans. (a)
93. Disregarded
(a) heed
(b) hopeful
(c) evade
(d) dense
Ans. (a)
94. Obviate
(a) becloud
(b) necessitate
(c) rationalize
(d) execute
Ans. (b)
95. Superficial
(a) profound
(b) exaggerated
(c) subjective
(d) spirited
Ans. (a)
96. chief : tribe :: governer : state
97. epaulette : shoulder :: tiara : head
98. guttural : throat :: gastric : stomach
99. inept : clever :: languid : active
100. Erudite : scholar :: illiterate : ignorant
APTITUDE
Aptitude Questions
1.One of the following is my secret word:AIM DUE MOD OAT TIE.With the list in front of you, if I were to tell you any one of my secret word, then you would be able to tell me the number of vowels in my secret word.Which is my secret word?
Ans.TIE
2.In the following figure:A B C
D
E F G
H
I
Each of the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 is:
a)Represented by a different letter in the figure above.
b)Positioned in the figure above so that each of A + B + C,C + D +E,E + F + G, and G + H + I is equal to 13.
Which digit does E represent?
Ans.E is 4
3.One of Mr. Horton,his wife,their son,and Mr. Horton's mother is a doctor and another is a lawyer.
a)If the doctor is younger than the lawyer, then the doctor and the lawyer are not blood relatives.
b)If the doctor is a woman, then the doctor and the lawyer are blood relatives.
c)If the lawyer is a man, then the doctor is a man.
Whose occupation you know?
Ans.Mr. Horton:he is the doctor.
4.Here is a picture of two cubes:
a)The two cubes are exactly alike.
b)The hidden faces indicated by the dots have the same alphabet on them.
Which alphabet-q, r, w, or k is on the faces indicated by the dots?
Ans.q
5.In the following figure:
A D
B G E
C F
Each of the seven digits from 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 is:
a)Represented by a different letter in the figure above.
b)Positioned in the figure above so that A*B*C,B*G*E, and D*E*F are equal.
Which digit does G represent?
Ans.G represents the digit 2.
6.Mr. and Mrs. Aye and Mr. and Mrs. Bee competed in a chess tournament.Of the three games played:
a)In only the first game werethe two players married to each other.
b)The men won two games and the women won one game.
c)The Ayes won more games than the Bees.
d)Anyone who lost game did not play the subsequent game.
Who did not lose a game?
Ans.Mrs.Bee did not lose a game.
7.Three piles of chips--pile I consists one chip, pile II consists of chips, and pile III consists of three chips--are to be used in game played by Anita and Brinda.The game requires:
a)That each player in turn take only one chip or all chips from just one pile.
b)That the player who has to take the last chip loses.
c)That Anita now have her turn.
From which pile should Anita draw in order to win?
Ans.Pile II
8.Of Abdul, Binoy, and Chandini:
a)Each member belongs to the Tee family whose members always tell the truth or to the El family whose members always lie.
b)Abdul says ''Either I belong or Binoy belongs to a different family from the other two."
Whose family do you name of?
Ans.Binoy's family--El.
9.In a class composed of x girls and y boys what part of the class is composed of girls
A.y/(x + y)
B.x/xy
C.x/(x + y)
D.y/xy
Ans.C
10.What is the maximum number of half-pint bottles of cream that can be filled with a 4-gallon can of cream(2 pt.=1 qt. and 4 qt.=1 gal)
A.16
B.24
C.30
D.64
Ans.D
11.If the operation,^ is defined by the equation x ^ y = 2x + y,what is the value of a in 2 ^ a = a ^ 3
A.0
B.1
C.-1
D.4
Ans.B
12.A coffee shop blends 2 kinds of coffee,putting in 2 parts of a 33p. a gm. grade to 1 part of a 24p. a gm.If the mixture is changed to 1 part of the 33p. a gm. to 2 parts of the less expensive grade,how much will the shop save in blending 100 gms.
A.Rs.90
B.Rs.1.00
C.Rs.3.00
D.Rs.8.00
Ans.C
13.There are 200 questions on a 3 hr examination.Among these questions are 50 mathematics problems.It is suggested that twice as much time be spent on each maths problem as for each other question.How many minutes should be spent on mathematics problems
A.36
B.72
C.60
D.100
Ans.B
14.In a group of 15,7 have studied Latin, 8 have studied Greek, and 3 have not studied either.How many of these studied both Latin and Greek
A.0
B.3
C.4
D.5
Ans.B
15.If 13 = 13w/(1-w) ,then (2w)2 =
A.1/4
B.1/2
C.1
D.2
Ans.C
16. If a and b are positive integers and (a-b)/3.5 = 4/7, then
(A) b < a
(B) b > a
(C) b = a
(D) b >= a
Ans. A
17. In june a baseball team that played 60 games had won 30% of its game played. After a phenomenal winning streak this team raised its average to 50% .How many games must the team have won in a row to attain this average?
A. 12
B. 20
C. 24
D. 30
Ans. C
18. M men agree to purchase a gift for Rs. D. If three men drop out how much more will each have to contribute towards the purchase of the gift/
A. D/(M-3)
B. MD/3
C. M/(D-3)
D. 3D/(M2-3M)
Ans. D
19. A company contracts to paint 3 houses. Mr.Brown can paint a house in 6 days while Mr.Black would take 8 days and Mr.Blue 12 days. After 8 days Mr.Brown goes on vacation and Mr. Black begins to work for a period of 6 days. How many days will it take Mr.Blue to complete the contract?
A. 7
B. 8
C. 11
D. 12
Ans.C
20. 2 hours after a freight train leaves Delhi a passenger train leaves the same station travelling in the same direction at an average speed of 16 km/hr. After travelling 4 hrs the passenger train overtakes the freight train. The average speed of the freight train was?
A. 30
B. 40
C.58
D. 60
Ans. B
21. If 9x-3y=12 and 3x-5y=7 then 6x-2y = ?
A.-5
B. 4
C. 2
D. 8
Ans. D
22. There are 5 red shoes, 4 green shoes. If one draw randomly a shoe what is the probability of getting a red shoe
Ans 5c1/ 9c1
23. What is the selling price of a car? If the cost of the car is Rs.60 and a profit of 10% over selling price is earned
Ans: Rs 66/-
24. 1/3 of girls , 1/2 of boys go to canteen .What factor and total number of classmates go to canteen.
Ans: Cannot be determined.
25. The price of a product is reduced by 30% . By what percentage should it be increased to make it 100%
Ans: 42.857%
26. There is a square of side 6cm . A circle is inscribed inside the square. Find the ratio of the area of circle to square.
Ans. 11/14
27. There are two candles of equal lengths and of different thickness. The thicker one lasts of six hours. The thinner 2 hours less than the thicker one. Ramesh lights the two candles at the same time. When he went to bed he saw the thicker one is twice the length of the thinner one. How long ago did Ramesh light the two candles .
Ans: 3 hours.
28. If M/N = 6/5,then 3M+2N = ?
29. If p/q = 5/4 , then 2p+q= ?
30. If PQRST is a parallelogram what it the ratio of triangle PQS & parallelogram PQRST .
Ans: 1:2
31. The cost of an item is Rs 12.60. If the profit is 10% over selling price what is the selling price ?
Ans: Rs 13.86/-
32. There are 6 red shoes & 4 green shoes . If two of red shoes are drawn what is the probability of getting red shoes
Ans: 6c2/10c2
33. To 15 lts of water containing 20% alcohol, we add 5 lts of pure water. What is % alcohol.
Ans : 15%
34. A worker is paid Rs.20/- for a full days work. He works 1,1/3,2/3,1/8.3/4 days in a week. What is the total amount paid for that worker ?
Ans : 57.50
35. If the value of x lies between 0 & 1 which of the following is the largest?
(a) x
(b) x2
(c) -x
(d) 1/x
Ans : (d)
36. If the total distance of a journey is 120 km .If one goes by 60 kmph and comes back at 40kmph what is the average speed during the journey?
Ans: 48kmph
37. A school has 30% students from Maharashtra .Out of these 20% are Bombey students. Find the total percentage of Bombay?
Ans: 6%
38. An equilateral triangle of sides 3 inch each is given. How many equilateral triangles of side 1 inch can be formed from it?
Ans: 9
39. If A/B = 3/5,then 15A = ?
Ans : 9B
40. Each side of a rectangle is increased by 100% .By what percentage does the area increase?
Ans : 300%
41. Perimeter of the back wheel = 9 feet, front wheel = 7 feet on a certain distance, the front wheel gets 10 revolutions more than the back wheel .What is the distance?
Ans : 315 feet.
42. Perimeter of front wheel =30, back wheel = 20. If front wheel revolves 240 times. How many revolutions will the back wheel take?
Ans: 360 times
43. 20% of a 6 litre solution and 60% of 4 litre solution are mixed. What percentage of the mixture of solution
Ans: 36%
44City A's population is 68000, decreasing at a rate of 80 people per year. City B having population 42000 is increasing at a rate of 120 people per year. In how many years both the cities will have same population?
Ans: 130 years
45Two cars are 15 kms apart. One is turning at a speed of 50kmph and the other at 40kmph . How much time will it take for the two cars to meet?
Ans: 3/2 hours
46A person wants to buy 3 paise and 5 paise stamps costing exactly one rupee. If he buys which of the following number of stamps he won't able to buy 3 paise stamps.
Ans: 9
47There are 12 boys and 15 girls, How many different dancing groups can be formed with 2 boys and 3 girls.
48Which of the following fractions is less than 1/3
(a) 22/62
(b) 15/46
(c) 2/3
(d) 1
Ans: (b)
49There are two circles, one circle is inscribed and another circle is circumscribed over a square. What is the ratio of area of inner to outer circle?
Ans: 1 : 2
50Three types of tea the a,b,c costs Rs. 95/kg,100/kg and70/kg respectively.
How many kgs of each should be blended to produce 100 kg of mixture worth Rs.90/kg,
given that the quntities of band c are equal
a)70,15,15
b)50,25,25
c)60,20,20
d)40,30,30
Ans. (b)
51. in a class, except 18 all are above 50 years.
15 are below 50 years of age. How many people are there
(a) 30
(b) 33
(c) 36
(d) none of these.
Ans. (d)
52. If a boat is moving in upstream with velocity of 14 km/hr and goes downstream with a velocity of 40 km/hr, then what is the speed of the stream ?
(a) 13 km/hr
(b) 26 km/hr
(c) 34 km/hr
(d) none of these
Ans. A
53. Find the value of ( 0.75 * 0.75 * 0.75 - 0.001 ) / ( 0.75 * 0.75 - 0.075 + 0.01)
(a) 0.845
(b) 1.908
(c) 2.312
(d) 0.001
Ans. A
54. A can have a piece of work done in 8 days, B can work three times faster than the A, C can work five times faster than A. How many days will they take to do the work together ?
(a) 3 days
(b) 8/9 days
(c) 4 days
(d) can't say
Ans. B
55. A car travels a certain distance taking 7 hrs in forward journey, during the return journey increased speed 12km/hr takes the times 5 hrs.What is the distance travelled
(a) 210 kms
(b) 30 kms
(c) 20 kms
(c) none of these
Ans. B
56. Instead of multiplying a number by 7, the number is divided by 7. What is the percentage of error obtained ?
57. Find (7x + 4y ) / (x-2y) if x/2y = 3/2 ?
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 7
(d) data insufficient
Ans. C
58. A man buys 12 lts of liquid which contains 20% of the liquid and the rest is water. He then mixes it with 10 lts of another mixture with 30% of liquid.What is the % of water in the new mixture?
59. If a man buys 1 lt of milk for Rs.12 and mixes it with 20% water and sells it for Rs.15, then what is the percentage of gain?
60. Pipe A can fill a tank in 30 mins and Pipe B can fill it in 28 mins.If 3/4th of the tank is filled by Pipe B alone and both are opened, how much time is required by both the pipes to fill the tank completely ?
61. If on an item a company gives 25% discount, they earn 25% profit. If they now give 10% discount then what is the profit percentage.
(a) 40%
(b) 55%
(c) 35%
(d) 30%
Ans. D
62. A certain number of men can finish a piece of work in 10 days. If however there were 10 men less it will take 10 days more for the work to be finished. How many men were there originally?
(a) 110 men
(b) 130 men
(c) 100 men
(d) none of these
Ans. A
63. In simple interest what sum amounts of Rs.1120/- in 4 years and Rs.1200/- in 5 years ?
(a) Rs. 500
(b) Rs. 600
(c) Rs. 800
(d) Rs. 900
Ans. C
64. If a sum of money compound annually amounts of thrice itself in 3 years. In how many years
will it become 9 times itself.
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 10
(d) 12
Ans A
65. Two trains move in the same direction at 50 kmph and 32 kmph respectively. A man in the slower train
observes the 15 seconds elapse before the faster train completely passes by him.
What is the length of faster train ?
(a) 100m
(b) 75m
(c) 120m
(d) 50m
Ans B
66. How many mashes are there in 1 squrare meter of wire gauge if each mesh
is 8mm long and 5mm wide ?
(a) 2500
(b) 25000
(c) 250
(d) 250000
Ans B
67. x% of y is y% of ?
(a) x/y
(b) 2y
(c) x
(d) can't be determined
Ans. C
68. The price of sugar increases by 20%, by what % should a housewife reduce the consumption of sugar so that expenditure on sugar can be same as before ?
(a) 15%
(b) 16.66%
(c) 12%
(d) 9%
Ans B
69. A man spends half of his salary on household expenses, 1/4th for rent, 1/5th for travel expenses, the man deposits the rest in a bank. If his monthly deposits in the bank amount 50, what is his monthly salary ?
(a) Rs.500
(b) Rs.1500
(c) Rs.1000
(d) Rs. 900
Ans C
70. The population of a city increases @ 4% p.a. There is an additional annual increase of 4% of the population due to the influx of job seekers, find the % increase in population after 2 years ?
71. The ratio of the number of boys and girls in a school is 3:2 Out of these 10% the boys and 25% of girls are scholarship holders. % of students who are not scholarship holders.?
72. 15 men take 21 days of 8 hrs. each to do a piece of work. How many days of 6 hrs. each would it take for 21 women if 3 women do as much work as 2 men?
(a) 30
(b) 20
(c) 19
(d) 29
Ans. A
73. A cylinder is 6 cms in diameter and 6 cms in height. If spheres of the same size are made from the material obtained, what is the diameter of each sphere?
(a) 5 cms
(b) 2 cms
(c) 3 cms
(d) 4 cms
Ans C
74. A rectangular plank (2)1/2 meters wide can be placed so that it is on either side of the diagonal of a square shown below.(Figure is not available)What is the area of the plank?
Ans :7*(2)1/2
75. The difference b/w the compound interest payble half yearly and the simple interest on a
certain sum lent out at 10% p.a for 1 year is Rs 25. What is the sum?
(a) Rs. 15000
(b) Rs. 12000
(c) Rs. 10000
(d) none of these
Ans C
76. What is the smallest number by which 2880 must be divided in order to make it into a
perfect square ?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 6
Ans. C
77. A father is 30 years older than his son however he will be only thrice as old as the son after 5 years
what is father's present age ?
(a) 40 yrs
(b) 30 yrs
(c) 50 yrs
(d) none of these
Ans. A
78. An article sold at a profit of 20% if both the cost price and selling price would be Rs.20/- the profit would be 10% more. What is the cost price of that article?
29. If an item costs Rs.3 in '99 and Rs.203 in '00.What is the % increase in price?
(a) 200/3 %
(b) 200/6 %
(c) 100%
(d) none of these
Ans. A
80. 5 men or 8 women do equal amount of work in a day. a job requires 3 men and 5 women to finish the job in 10 days how many woman are required to finish the job in 14 days.
a) 10
b) 7
c) 6
d) 12
Ans 7
81. A simple interest amount of rs 5000 for six month is rs 200. what is the anual rate of interest?
a) 10%
b) 6%
c) 8%
d) 9%
Ans 8%
82. In objective test a correct ans score 4 marks and on a wrong ans 2 marks are ---. a student score 480 marks from 150 question. how many ans were correct?
a) 120
b) 130
c) 110
d) 150
Ans130.
83. An artical sold at amount of 50% the net sale price is rs 425 .what is the list price of the artical?
a) 500
b) 488
c) 480
d) 510
Ans 500
84. A man leaves office daily at 7pm A driver with car comes from his home to pick him from office and bring back home
One day he gets free at 5:30 and instead of waiting for driver he starts walking towards home.
In the way he meets the car and returns home on car He reaches home 20 minutes earlier than usual.
In how much time does the man reach home usually??
Ans. 1hr 20min
85. A works thrice as much as B. If A takes 60 days less than B to do a work then find the number of days it would take to complete the work if both work together?
Ans. 22½days
86. How many 1's are there in the binary form of 8*1024 + 3*64 + 3
Ans. 4
87. In a digital circuit which was to implement (A B) + (A)XOR(B), the designer implements (A B) (A)XOR(B)
What is the probability of error in it ?
88. A boy has Rs 2. He wins or loses Re 1 at a time If he wins he gets Re 1 and if he loses the game he loses Re 1.
He can loose only 5 times. He is out of the game if he earns Rs 5.
Find the number of ways in which this is possible?
Ans. 16
89. If there are 1024*1280 pixels on a screen and each pixel can have around 16 million colors
Find the memory required for this?
Ans. 4MB
90. On a particular day A and B decide that they would either speak the truth or will lie.
C asks A whether he is speaking truth or lying?
He answers and B listens to what he said. C then asks B what A has said B says "A says that he is a liar"
What is B speaking ?
(a) Truth
(b) Lie
(c) Truth when A lies
(d) Cannot be determined
Ans. (b)
91. What is the angle between the two hands of a clock when time is 8:30
Ans. 75(approx)
92. A student is ranked 13th from right and 8th from left. How many students are there in totality ?
93. A man walks east and turns right and then from there to his left and then 45degrees to
his right.In which direction did he go
Ans. North west
94. A student gets 70% in one subject, 80% in the other. To get an overall of 75% how much should get in third subject.
95. A man shows his friend a woman sitting in a park and says that she the daughter of my grandmother's only son.
What is the relation between the two
Ans. Daughter
96. How many squares with sides 1/2 inch long are needed to cover a rectangle that is 4 ft long and 6 ft wide
(a) 24
(b) 96
(c) 3456
(d) 13824
(e) 14266
97. If a=2/3b , b=2/3c, and c=2/3d what part of d is b/
(a) 8/27
(b) 4/9
(c) 2/3
(d) 75%
(e) 4/3
Ans. (b)
2598Successive discounts of 20% and 15% are equal to a single discount of
(a) 30%
(b) 32%
(c) 34%
(d) 35%
(e) 36
Ans. (b)
99. The petrol tank of an automobile can hold g liters.If a liters was removed when the tank was full, what part of the full tank was removed?
(a)g-a
(b)g/a
(c) a/g
(d) (g-a)/a
(e) (g-a)/g
Ans. (c)
100. If x/y=4 and y is not '0' what % of x is 2x-y
(a)150%
(b)175%
(c)200%
(d)250%
Ans. (b)
PART – 2
Aptitude Questions
1.If 2x-y=4 then 6x-3y=?
(a)15
(b)12
(c)18
(d)10
Ans. (b)
2.If x=y=2z and xyz=256 then what is the value of x?
(a)12
(b)8
(c)16
(d)6
Ans. (b)
3. (1/10)18 - (1/10)20 = ?
(a) 99/1020
(b) 99/10
(c) 0.9
(d) none of these
Ans. (a)
4.Pipe A can fill in 20 minutes and Pipe B in 30 mins and Pipe C can empty the same in 40 mins.If all of them work together, find the time taken to fill the tank
(a) 17 1/7 mins
(b) 20 mins
(c) 8 mins
(d) none of these
Ans. (a)
5. Thirty men take 20 days to complete a job working 9 hours a day.How many hour a day should 40 men work to complete the job?
(a) 8 hrs
(b) 7 1/2 hrs
(c) 7 hrs
(d) 9 hrs
Ans. (b)
6. Find the smallest number in a GP whose sum is 38 and product 1728
(a) 12
(b) 20
(c) 8
(d) none of these
Ans. (c)
7. A boat travels 20 kms upstream in 6 hrs and 18 kms downstream in 4 hrs.Find the speed of the boat in still water and the speed of the water current?
(a) 1/2 kmph
(b) 7/12 kmph
(c) 5 kmph
(d) none of these
Ans. (b)
8. A goat is tied to one corner of a square plot of side 12m by a rope 7m long.Find the area it can graze?
(a) 38.5 sq.m
(b) 155 sq.m
(c) 144 sq.m
(d) 19.25 sq.m
Ans. (a)
9. Mr. Shah decided to walk down the escalator of a tube station. He found that if he walks down 26 steps, he requires 30 seconds to reach the bottom. However, if he steps down 34 stairs he would only require 18 seconds to get to the bottom. If the time is measured from the moment the top step begins to descend to the time he steps off the last step at the bottom, find out the height of the stair way in steps?
Ans.46 steps.
10. The average age of 10 members of a committee is the same as it was 4 years ago, because an old member has been replaced by a young member. Find how much younger is the new member ?
Ans.40 years.
11. Three containers A, B and C have volumes a, b, and c respectively; and container A is full of water while the other two are empty. If from container A water is poured into container B which becomes 1/3 full, and into container C which becomes 1/2 full, how much water is left in container A?
12. ABCE is an isosceles trapezoid and ACDE is a rectangle. AB = 10 and EC = 20. What is the length of AE?
Ans. AE = 10.
13. In the given figure, PA and PB are tangents to the circle at A and B respectively and the chord BC is parallel to tangent PA. If AC = 6 cm, and length of the tangent AP is 9 cm, then what is the length of the chord BC?
Ans. BC = 4 cm.
15 Three cards are drawn at random from an ordinary pack of cards. Find the probability that they will consist of a king, a queen and an ace.
Ans. 64/2210.
16. A number of cats got together and decided to kill between them 999919 mice. Every cat killed an equal number of mice. Each cat killed more mice than there were cats. How many cats do you think there were ?
Ans. 991.
17. If Log2 x - 5 Log x + 6 = 0, then what would the value / values of x be?
Ans. x = e2 or e3.
18. The square of a two digit number is divided by half the number. After 36 is added to the quotient, this sum is then divided by 2. The digits of the resulting number are the same as those in the original number, but they are in reverse order. The ten's place of the original number is equal to twice the difference between its digits. What is the number?
Ans. 46
19.Can you tender a one rupee note in such a manner that there shall be total 50 coins but none of them would be 2 paise coins.?
Ans. 45 one paisa coins, 2 five paise coins, 2 ten paise coins, and 1 twenty-five paise coins.
20.A monkey starts climbing up a tree 20ft. tall. Each hour, it hops 3ft. and slips back 2ft. How much time would it take the monkey to reach the top?
Ans.18 hours.
21. What is the missing number in this series? 8 2 14 6 11 ? 14 6 18 12
Ans. 9
22. A certain type of mixture is prepared by mixing brand A at Rs.9 a kg. with brand B at Rs.4 a kg. If the mixture is worth Rs.7 a kg., how many kgs. of brand A are needed to make 40kgs. of the mixture?
Ans. Brand A needed is 24kgs.
23. A wizard named Nepo says "I am only three times my son's age. My father is 40 years more than twice my age. Together the three of us are a mere 1240 years old." How old is Nepo?
Ans. 360 years old.
24. One dog tells the other that there are two dogs in front of me. The other one also shouts that he too had two behind him. How many are they?
Ans. Three.
25. A man ate 100 bananas in five days, each day eating 6 more than the previous day. How many bananas did he eat on the first day?
Ans. Eight.
26. If it takes five minutes to boil one egg, how long will it take to boil four eggs?
Ans. Five minutes.
27. The minute hand of a clock overtakes the hour hand at intervals of 64 minutes of correct time. How much a day does the clock gain or lose?
Ans. 32 8/11 minutes.
28. Solve for x and y: 1/x - 1/y = 1/3, 1/x2 + 1/y2 = 5/9.
Ans. x = 3/2 or -3 and y = 3 or -3/2.
29. Daal is now being sold at Rs. 20 a kg. During last month its rate was Rs. 16 per kg. By how much percent should a family reduce its consumption so as to keep the expenditure fixed?
Ans. 20 %.
30. Find the least value of 3x + 4y if x2y3 = 6.
Ans. 10.
31. Can you find out what day of the week was January 12, 1979?
Ans. Friday.
32. A garrison of 3300 men has provisions for 32 days, when given at a rate of 850 grams per head. At the end of 7 days a reinforcement arrives and it was found that now the provisions will last 8 days less, when given at the rate of 825 grams per head. How, many more men can it feed?
Ans. 1700 men.
33. From 5 different green balls, four different blue balls and three different red balls, how many combinations of balls can be chosen taking at least one green and one blue ball?
Ans. 3720.
34. Three pipes, A, B, & C are attached to a tank. A & B can fill it in 20 & 30 minutes respectively while C can empty it in 15 minutes. If A, B & C are kept open successively for 1 minute each, how soon will the tank be filled?
Ans. 167 minutes.
35. A person walking 5/6 of his usual rate is 40 minutes late. What is his usual time? Ans. 3 hours 20 minutes.
36.For a motorist there are three ways going from City A to City C. By way of bridge the distance is 20 miles and toll is $0.75. A tunnel between the two cities is a distance of 10 miles and toll is $1.00 for the vehicle and driver and $0.10 for each passenger. A two-lane highway without toll goes east for 30 miles to city B and then 20 miles in a northwest direction to City C.
1. Which is the shortest route from B to C
(a) Directly on toll free highway to City C
(b) The bridge
(c) The Tunnel
(d) The bridge or the tunnel
(e) The bridge only if traffic is heavy on the toll free highway
Ans. (a)
2. The most economical way of going from City A to City B, in terms of toll and distance is to use the
(a) tunnel
(b) bridge
(c) bridge or tunnel
(d) toll free highway
(e) bridge and highway
Ans. (a)
3. Jim usually drives alone from City C to City A every working day. His firm deducts a percentage of employee pay for lateness. Which factor would most influence his choice of the bridge or the tunnel ?
(a) Whether his wife goes with him
(b) scenic beauty on the route
(c) Traffic conditions on the road, bridge and tunnel
(d) saving $0.25 in tolls
(e) price of gasoline consumed in covering additional 10 miles on the bridge
Ans. (a)
4. In choosing between the use of the bridge and the tunnel the chief factor(s) would be:
I. Traffic and road conditions
II. Number of passengers in the car
III. Location of one's homes in the center or outskirts of one of the cities
IV. Desire to save $0.25
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) II and III only
(d) III and IV only
(e) I and II only
Ans. (a)
37.The letters A, B, C, D, E, F and G, not necessarily in that order, stand for seven consecutive integers from 1 to 10
D is 3 less than A
B is the middle term
F is as much less than B as C is greater than D
G is greater than F
1. The fifth integer is
(a) A
(b) C
(c) D
(d) E
(e) F
Ans. (a)
2. A is as much greater than F as which integer is less than G
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
(e) E
Ans. (a)
3. If A = 7, the sum of E and G is
(a) 8
(b) 10
(c) 12
(d) 14
(e) 16
Ans. (a)
4. A - F = ?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
(e) Cannot be determined
Ans. (a)
5. An integer T is as much greater than C as C is greater than E. T can be written as A + E. What is D?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
(e) Cannot be determined
Ans. (a)
6. The greatest possible value of C is how much greater than the smallest possible value of D?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
(e) 6
Ans. (a)
38.
1. All G's are H's
2. All G's are J's or K's
3. All J's and K's are G's
4. All L's are K's
5. All N's are M's
6. No M's are G's
1. If no P's are K's, which of the following must be true?
(a) All P's are J's
(b) No P is a G
(c) No P is an H
(d) If any P is an H it is a G
(e) If any P is a G it is a J
Ans. (a)
2. Which of the following can be logically deduced from the conditions stated?
(a) No M's are H's
(b) No M's that are not N's are H's
(c) No H's are M's
(d) Some M's are H's
(e) All M's are H's
Ans. (a)
3. Which of the following is inconsistent with one or more of the conditions?
(a) All H's are G's
(b) All H's that are not G's are M's
(c) Some H's are both M's and G's
(d) No M's are H's
(e) All M's are H's
Ans. (a)
4. The statement "No L's are J's" is
I. Logically deducible from the conditions stated
II. Consistent with but not deducible from the conditions stated
III. Deducible from the stated conditions together with the additional statement "No J's are K's"
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) III only
(d) II and III only
(e) Neither I, II nor III
Ans. (a)
39.In country X, democratic, conservative and justice parties have fought three civil wars in twenty years. TO restore stability an agreement is reached to rotate the top offices President, Prime Minister and Army Chief among the parties so that each party controls one and only one office at all times. The three top office holders must each have two deputies, one from each of the other parties. Each deputy must choose a staff composed of equally members of his or her chiefs party and member of the third party.
1. When Justice party holds one of the top offices, which of the following cannot be true
(a) Some of the staff members within that office are justice party members
(b) Some of the staff members within that office are democratic party members
(c) Two of the deputies within the other offices are justice party members
(d) Two of the deputies within the other offices are conservative party members
(e) Some of the staff members within the other offices are justice party members.
Ans. (a)
2. When the democratic party holds presidency, the staff of the prime minister's deputies are composed
I. One-fourth of democratic party members
II. One-half of justice party members and one-fourth of conservative party members
III. One-half of conservative party members and one-fourth of justice party members.
(a) I only
(b) I and II only
(c) II or III but not both
(d) I and II or I and III
(e) None of these
Ans. (a)
3. Which of the following is allowable under the rules as stated:
(a) More than half of the staff within a given office belonging to a single party
(b) Half of the staff within a given office belonging to a single party
(c) Any person having a member of the same party as his or her immediate superior
(d) Half the total number of staff members in all three offices belonging to a single party
(e) Half the staff members in a given office belonging to parties different from the party of the top office holder in that office.
Ans. (a)
4. The office of the Army Chief passes from Conservative to Justice party. Which of the following must be fired.
(a) The democratic deputy and all staff members belonging to Justice party
(b) Justice party deputy and all his or hers staff members
(c) Justice party deputy and half of his Conservative staff members in the chief of staff office
(d) The Conservative deputy and all of his or her staff members belonging to Conservative party
(e) No deputies and all staff members belonging to conservative parties.
Ans. (a)
40.In recommendations to the board of trustees a tuition increase of $500 per year, the president of the university said "There were no student demonstrations over the previous increases of $300 last year and $200 the year before". If the president's statement is accurate then which of the following can be validly inferred from the information given:
I. Most students in previous years felt that the increases were justified because of increased operating costs.
II. Student apathy was responsible for the failure of students to protest the previous tuition increases.
III. Students are not likely to demonstrate over new tuition increases.
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) I or II but not both
(d) I, II and III
(e) None
Ans. (a)
41. The office staff of XYZ corporation presently consists of three bookeepers--A, B, C and 5 secretaries D, E, F, G, H. The management is planning to open a new office in another city using 2 bookeepers and 3 secretaries of the present staff . To do so they plan to seperate certain individuals who don't function well together. The following guidelines were established to set up the new office
I. Bookeepers A and C are constantly finding fault with one another and should not be sent together to the new office as a team
II. C and E function well alone but not as a team , they should be seperated
III. D and G have not been on speaking terms and shouldn't go together
IV Since D and F have been competing for promotion they shouldn't be a team
1.If A is to be moved as one of the bookeepers,which of the following cannot be a possible working unit.
A.ABDEH
B.ABDGH
C.ABEFH
D.ABEGH
Ans.B
2.If C and F are moved to the new office,how many combinations are possible
A.1
B.2
C.3
D.4
Ans.A
3.If C is sent to the new office,which member of the staff cannot go with C
A.B
B.D
C.F
D.G
Ans.B
4.Under the guidelines developed,which of the following must go to the new office
A.B
B.D
C.E
D.G
Ans.A
5.If D goes to the new office,which of the following is/are true
I.C cannot go
II.A cannot go
III.H must also go
A.I only
B.II only
C.I and II only
D.I and III only
Ans.D
42.After months of talent searching for an administrative assistant to the president of the college the field of applicants has been narrowed down to 5--A, B, C, D, E .It was announced that the finalist would be chosen after a series of all-day group personal interviews were held.The examining committee agreed upon the following procedure
I.The interviews will be held once a week
II.3 candidates will appear at any all-day interview session
III.Each candidate will appear at least once
IV.If it becomes necessary to call applicants for additonal interviews, no more 1 such applicant should be asked to appear the next week
V.Because of a detail in the written applications,it was agreed that whenever candidate B appears, A should also be present.
VI.Because of travel difficulties it was agreed that C will appear for only 1 interview.
1.At the first interview the following candidates appear A,B,D.Which of the follwing combinations can be called for the interview to be held next week.
A.BCD
B.CDE
C.ABE
D.ABC
Ans.B
2.Which of the following is a possible sequence of combinations for interviews in 2 successive weeks
A.ABC;BDE
B.ABD;ABE
C.ADE;ABC
D.BDE;ACD
Ans.C
3.If A ,B and D appear for the interview and D is called for additional interview the following week,which 2 candidates may be asked to appear with D?
I. A
II B
III.C
IV.E
A.I and II
B.I and III only
C.II and III only
D.III and IV only
Ans.D
4.Which of the following correctly state(s) the procedure followed by the search committee
I.After the second interview all applicants have appeared at least once
II.The committee sees each applicant a second time
III.If a third session,it is possible for all applicants to appear at least twice
A.I only
B.II only
C.III only
D.Both I and II
Ans.A
43. A certain city is served by subway lines A,B and C and numbers 1 2 and 3
When it snows , morning service on B is delayed
When it rains or snows , service on A, 2 and 3 are delayed both in the morning and afternoon
When temp. falls below 30 degrees farenheit afternoon service is cancelled in either the A line or the 3 line,
but not both.
When the temperature rises over 90 degrees farenheit, the afternoon service is cancelled in either the line C or the
3 line but not both.
When the service on the A line is delayed or cancelled, service on the C line which connects the A line, is delayed.
When service on the 3 line is cancelled, service on the B line which connects the 3 line is delayed.
Q1. On Jan 10th, with the temperature at 15 degree farenheit, it snows all day. On how many lines will service be
affected, including both morning and afternoon.
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Ans. D
Q2. On Aug 15th with the temperature at 97 degrees farenheit it begins to rain at 1 PM. What is the minimum number
of lines on which service will be affected?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Ans. C
Q3. On which of the following occasions would service be on the greatest number of lines disrupted.
(A) A snowy afternoon with the temperature at 45 degree farenheit
(B) A snowy morning with the temperature at 45 degree farenheit
(C) A rainy afternoon with the temperature at 45 degree farenheit
(D) A rainy afternoon with the temperature at 95 degree farenheit
Ans. B
44. In a certain society, there are two marriage groups, red and brown. No marriage is permitted within a group. On marriage, males become part of their wives groups; women remain in their own group. Children belong to the same group as their parents. Widowers and divorced males revert to the group of their birth. Marriage to more than one person at the same time and marriage to a direct descendant are forbidden
Q1. A brown female could have had
I. A grandfather born Red
II. A grandmother born Red
III Two grandfathers born Brown
(A) I only
(B) III only
(C) I, II and III
(D) I and II only
Ans. D
Q2. A male born into the brown group may have
(A) An uncle in either group
(B) A brown daughter
(C) A brown son
(D) A son-in-law born into red group
Ans. A
Q3. Which of the following is not permitted under the rules as stated.
(A) A brown male marrying his father's sister
(B) A red female marrying her mother's brother
(C) A widower marrying his wife's sister
(D) A widow marrying her divorced daughter's ex-husband
Ans. B
Q4. If widowers and divorced males retained their group they had upon marrying which of the following would be permissible ( Assume that no previous marriage occurred)
(A) A woman marrying her dead sister's husband
(B) A woman marrying her divorced daughter's ex-husband
(C) A widower marrying his brother's daughter
(D) A woman marrying her mother's brother who is a widower.
Ans. D
Q5. I. All G's are H's
II. All G's are J's or K's
III All J's and K's are G's
IV All L's are K's
V All N's are M's
VI No M's are G's
45. There are six steps that lead from the first to the second floor. No two people can be on the same step
Mr. A is two steps below Mr. C
Mr. B is a step next to Mr. D
Only one step is vacant ( No one standing on that step )
Denote the first step by step 1 and second step by step 2 etc.
1. If Mr. A is on the first step, Which of the following is true?
(a) Mr. B is on the second step
(b) Mr. C is on the fourth step.
(c) A person Mr. E, could be on the third step
(d) Mr. D is on higher step than Mr. C.
Ans: (d)
2. If Mr. E was on the third step & Mr. B was on a higher step than Mr. E which step must be vacant
(a) step 1
(b) step 2
(c) step 4
(d) step 5
(e) step 6
Ans: (a)
3. If Mr. B was on step 1, which step could A be on?
(a) 2&e only
(b) 3&5 only
(c) 3&4 only
(d) 4&5 only
(e) 2&4 only
Ans: (c)
4. If there were two steps between the step that A was standing and the step that B was standing on, and A was on a higher step than D , A must be on step
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
(e) 6
Ans: (c)
5. Which of the following is false
i. B&D can be both on odd-numbered steps in one configuration
ii. In a particular configuration A and C must either both an odd numbered steps or both an even-numbered steps
iii. A person E can be on a step next to the vacant step.
(a) i only
(b) ii only
(c) iii only
(d) both i and iii
Ans: (c)
46. Six swimmers A, B, C, D, E, F compete in a race. The outcome is as follows.
i. B does not win.
ii. Only two swimmers separate E & D
iii. A is behind D & E
iv. B is ahead of E , with one swimmer intervening
v. F is a head of D
1. Who stood fifth in the race ?
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
(e) E
Ans: (e)
2. How many swimmers seperate A and F ?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
(e) cannot be determined
Ans: (d)
3. The swimmer between C & E is
(a) none
(b) F
(c) D
(d) B
(e) A
Ans: (a)
4. If the end of the race, swimmer D is disqualified by the Judges then swimmer B finishes in which place
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
(e) 5
Ans: (b)
47. Five houses lettered A,B,C,D, & E are built in a row next to each other. The houses are lined up in the order A,B,C,D, & E. Each of the five houses has a colored chimney. The roof and chimney of each housemust be painted as follows.
i. The roof must be painted either green,red ,or yellow.
ii. The chimney must be painted either white, black, or red.
iii. No house may have the same color chimney as the color of roof.
iv. No house may use any of the same colors that the every next house uses.
v. House E has a green roof.
vi. House B has a red roof and a black chimney
1. Which of the following is true ?
(a) At least two houses have black chimney.
(b) At least two houses have red roofs.
(c) At least two houses have white chimneys
(d) At least two houses have green roofs
(e) At least two houses have yellow roofs
Ans: (c)
2. Which must be false ?
(a) House A has a yellow roof
(b) House A & C have different color chimney
(c) House D has a black chimney
(d) House E has a white chimney
(e) House B&D have the same color roof.
Ans: (b)
3. If house C has a yellow roof. Which must be true.
(a) House E has a white chimney
(b) House E has a black chimney
(c) House E has a red chimney
(d) House D has a red chimney
(e) House C has a black chimney
Ans: (a)
4. Which possible combinations of roof & chimney can house
I. A red roof 7 a black chimney
II. A yellow roof & a red chimney
III. A yellow roof & a black chimney
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) III only
(d) I & II only
(e) I&II&III
Ans: (e)
48. Find x+2y
(i). x+y=10
(ii). 2x+4y=20
Ans: (b)
49. Is angle BAC is a right angle
(i) AB=2BC
(2) BC=1.5AC
Ans: (e)
50. Is x greater than y
(i) x=2k
(ii) k=2y
Ans: (e)
PART – 3
Aptitude Questions
Solve the following and check with the answers given at the end.
1. It was calculated that 75 men could complete a piece of work in 20 days. When work was scheduled to commence, it was found necessary to send 25 men to another project. How much longer will it take to complete the work?
2. A student divided a number by 2/3 when he required to multiply by 3/2. Calculate the percentage of error in his result.
3. A dishonest shopkeeper professes to sell pulses at the cost price, but he uses a false weight of 950gm. for a kg. His gain is …%.
4. A software engineer has the capability of thinking 100 lines of code in five minutes and can type 100 lines of code in 10 minutes. He takes a break for five minutes after every ten minutes. How many lines of codes will he complete typing after an hour?
5. A man was engaged on a job for 30 days on the condition that he would get a wage of Rs. 10 for the day he works, but he have to pay a fine of Rs. 2 for each day of his absence. If he gets Rs. 216 at the end, he was absent for work for ... days.
6. A contractor agreeing to finish a work in 150 days, employed 75 men each working 8 hours daily. After 90 days, only 2/7 of the work was completed. Increasing the number of men by ________ each working now for 10 hours daily, the work can be completed in time.
7. what is a percent of b divided by b percent of a?
(a) a (b) b (c) 1 (d) 10 (d) 100
8. A man bought a horse and a cart. If he sold the horse at 10 % loss and the cart at 20 % gain, he would not lose anything; but if he sold the horse at 5% loss and the cart at 5% gain, he would lose Rs. 10 in the bargain. The amount paid by him was Rs._______ for the horse and Rs.________ for the cart.
9. A tennis marker is trying to put together a team of four players for a tennis tournament out of seven available. males - a, b and c; females – m, n, o and p. All players are of equal ability and there must be at least two males in the team. For a team of four, all players must be able to play with each other under the following restrictions:
b should not play with m,
c should not play with p, and
a should not play with o.
Which of the following statements must be false?
1. b and p cannot be selected together
2. c and o cannot be selected together
3. c and n cannot be selected together.
10-12. The following figure depicts three views of a cube. Based on this, answer questions 10-12.
6 5 4
1 22 3 6
10. The number on the face opposite to the face carrying 1 is _______ .
11. The number on the faces adjacent to the face marked 5 are _______ .
12. Which of the following pairs does not correctly give the numbers on the opposite faces.
(1) 6,5 (2) 4,1 (3) 1,3 (4) 4,2
13. Five farmers have 7, 9, 11, 13 & 14 apple trees, respectively in their orchards. Last year, each of them discovered that every tree in their own orchard bore exactly the same number of apples. Further, if the third farmer gives one apple to the first, and the fifth gives three to each of the second and the fourth, they would all have exactly the same number of apples. What were the yields per tree in the orchards of the third and fourth farmers?
14. Five boys were climbing a hill. J was following H. R was just ahead of G. K was between G & H. They were climbing up in a column. Who was the second?
15-18 John is undecided which of the four novels to buy. He is considering a spy
thriller, a Murder mystery, a Gothic romance and a science fiction novel. The books are written by Rothko, Gorky, Burchfield and Hopper, not necessary in that order, and published by Heron, Piegon, Blueja and sparrow, not necessary in that order.
(1) The book by Rothko is published by Sparrow.
(2) The Spy thriller is published by Heron.
(3) The science fiction novel is by Burchfield and is not published by Blueja.
(4)The Gothic romance is by Hopper.
15. Pigeon publishes ____________.
16. The novel by Gorky ________________.
17. John purchases books by the authors whose names come first and third in alphabetical order. He does not buy the books ______.
18. On the basis of the first paragraph and statement (2), (3) and (4) only, it is possible to deduce that
1. Rothko wrote the murder mystery or the spy thriller
2. Sparrow published the murder mystery or the spy thriller
3. The book by Burchfield is published by Sparrow.
19. If a light flashes every 6 seconds, how many times will it flash in ¾ of an hour?
20. If point P is on line segment AB, then which of the following is always true?
(1) AP = PB (2) AP > PB (3) PB > AP (4) AB > AP (5) AB > AP + PB
21. All men are vertebrates. Some mammals are vertebrates. Which of the following conclusions drawn from the above statement is correct.
All men are mammals
All mammals are men
Some vertebrates are mammals.
None
22. Which of the following statements drawn from the given statements are correct?
Given:
All watches sold in that shop are of high standard. Some of the HMT watches are sold in that shop.
a) All watches of high standard were manufactured by HMT.
b) Some of the HMT watches are of high standard.
c) None of the HMT watches is of high standard.
d) Some of the HMT watches of high standard are sold in that shop.
23-27.
1. Ashland is north of East Liverpool and west of Coshocton.
2. Bowling green is north of Ashland and west of Fredericktown.
3. Dover is south and east of Ashland.
4. East Liverpool is north of Fredericktown and east of Dover.
5. Fredericktown is north of Dover and west of Ashland.
6. Coshocton is south of Fredericktown and west of Dover.
23. Which of the towns mentioned is furthest of the north – west
(a) Ashland (b) Bowling green (c) Coshocton
(d) East Liverpool (e) Fredericktown
24. Which of the following must be both north and east of Fredericktown?
(a) Ashland (b) Coshocton (c) East Liverpool
I a only II b only III c only IV a & b V a & c
25. Which of the following towns must be situated both south and west of at least one other town?
A. Ashland only
B. Ashland and Fredericktown
C. Dover and Fredericktown
D. Dover, Coshocton and Fredericktown
E. Coshocton, Dover and East Liverpool.
26. Which of the following statements, if true, would make the information in the numbered statements more specific?
(a) Coshocton is north of Dover.
(b) East Liverpool is north of Dover
(c) Ashland is east of Bowling green.
(d) Coshocton is east of Fredericktown
(e) Bowling green is north of Fredericktown
27. Which of the numbered statements gives information that can be deduced from one or more of the other statements?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 6
28. Eight friends Harsha, Fakis, Balaji, Eswar, Dhinesh, Chandra, Geetha, and Ahmed are sitting in a circle facing the center. Balaji is sitting between Geetha and Dhinesh. Harsha is third to the left of Balaji and second to the right of Ahmed. Chandra is sitting between Ahmed and Geetha and Balaji and Eshwar are not sitting opposite to each other. Who is third to the left of Dhinesh?
29. If every alternative letter starting from B of the English alphabet is written in small letter, rest all are written in capital letters, how the month “ September” be written.
(1) SeptEMbEr (2) SEpTeMBEr (3) SeptembeR
(4) SepteMber (5) None of the above.
30. The length of the side of a square is represented by x+2. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle is 2x. If the square and the equilateral triangle have equal perimeter, then the value of x is _______.
31. It takes Mr. Karthik y hours to complete typing a manuscript. After 2 hours, he was called away. What fractional part of the assignment was left incomplete?
32. Which of the following is larger than 3/5?
(1) ½ (2) 39/50 (3) 7/25 (4) 3/10 (5) 59/100
33. The number that does not have a reciprocal is ____________.
34. There are 3 persons Sudhir, Arvind, and Gauri. Sudhir lent cars to Arvind and Gauri as many as they had already. After some time Arvind gave as many cars to Sudhir and Gauri as many as they have. After sometime Gauri did the same thing. At the end of this transaction each one of them had 24. Find the cars each originally had.
35. A man bought a horse and a cart. If he sold the horse at 10 % loss and the cart at 20 % gain, he would not lose anything; but if he sold the horse at 5% loss and the cart at 5% gain, he would lose Rs. 10 in the bargain. The amount paid by him was Rs._______ for the horse and Rs.________ for the cart.
Answers:
1. Answer:
30 days.
Explanation:
Before:
One day work = 1 / 20
One man’s one day work = 1 / ( 20 * 75)
Now:
No. Of workers = 50
One day work = 50 * 1 / ( 20 * 75)
The total no. of days required to complete the work = (75 * 20) / 50 = 30
2. Answer:
0 %
Explanation:
Since 3x / 2 = x / (2 / 3)
3. Answer:
5.3 %
Explanation:
He sells 950 grams of pulses and gains 50 grams.
If he sells 100 grams of pulses then he will gain (50 / 950) *100 = 5.26
4. Answer:
250 lines of codes
5. Answer:
7 days
Explanation:
The equation portraying the given problem is:
10 * x – 2 * (30 – x) = 216 where x is the number of working days.
Solving this we get x = 23
Number of days he was absent was 7 (30-23) days.
6. Answer:
150 men.
Explanation:
One day’s work = 2 / (7 * 90)
One hour’s work = 2 / (7 * 90 * 8)
One man’s work = 2 / (7 * 90 * 8 * 75)
The remaining work (5/7) has to be completed within 60 days, because the total number of days allotted for the project is 150 days.
So we get the equation
(2 * 10 * x * 60) / (7 * 90 * 8 * 75) = 5/7 where x is the number of men working after the 90th day.
We get x = 225
Since we have 75 men already, it is enough to add only 150 men.
7. Answer:
(c) 1
Explanation:
a percent of b : (a/100) * b
b percent of a : (b/100) * a
a percent of b divided by b percent of a : ((a / 100 )*b) / (b/100) * a )) = 1
8. Answer:
Cost price of horse = Rs. 400 & the cost price of cart = 200.
Explanation:-
Let x be the cost price of the horse and y be the cost price of the cart.
In the first sale there is no loss or profit. (i.e.) The loss obtained is equal to the gain.
Therefore (10/100) * x = (20/100) * y
X = 2 * y -----------------(1)
In the second sale, he lost Rs. 10. (i.e.) The loss is greater than the profit by Rs. 10.
Therefore (5 / 100) * x = (5 / 100) * y + 10 -------(2)
Substituting (1) in (2) we get
(10 / 100) * y = (5 / 100) * y + 10
(5 / 100) * y = 10
y = 200
From (1) 2 * 200 = x = 400
9. Answer:
3.
Explanation:
Since inclusion of any male player will reject a female from the team. Since there should be four member in the team and only three males are available, the girl, n should included in the team always irrespective of others selection.
10. Answer:
5
11. Answer:
1,2,3 & 4
12. Answer:
B
13. Answer:
11 & 9 apples per tree.
Explanation:
Let a, b, c, d & e be the total number of apples bored per year in A, B, C, D & E ‘s orchard. Given that a + 1 = b + 3 = c – 1 = d + 3 = e – 6
But the question is to find the number of apples bored per tree in C and D ‘s orchard. If is enough to consider c – 1 = d + 3.
Since the number of trees in C’s orchard is 11 and that of D’s orchard is 13. Let x and y be the number of apples bored per tree in C & d ‘s orchard respectively.
Therefore 11 x – 1 = 13 y + 3
By trial and error method, we get the value for x and y as 11 and 9
14. Answer:
G.
Explanation:
The order in which they are climbing is R – G – K – H – J
15 – 18
Answer:
Novel Name Author Publisher
Spy thriller Rathko Heron
Murder mystery Gorky Piegon
Gothic romance Burchfield Blueja
Science fiction Hopper Sparrow
Explanation:
Given
Novel Name Author Publisher
Spy thriller Rathko Heron
Murder mystery Gorky Piegon
Gothic romance Burchfield Blueja
Science fiction Hopper Sparrow
Since Blueja doesn’t publish the novel by Burchfield and Heron publishes the novel spy thriller, Piegon publishes the novel by Burchfield.
Since Hopper writes Gothic romance and Heron publishes the novel spy thriller, Blueja publishes the novel by Hopper.
Since Heron publishes the novel spy thriller and Heron publishes the novel by Gorky, Gorky writes Spy thriller and Rathko writes Murder mystery.
19. Answer:
451 times.
Explanation:
There are 60 minutes in an hour.
In ¾ of an hour there are (60 * ¾) minutes = 45 minutes.
In ¾ of an hour there are (60 * 45) seconds = 2700 seconds.
Light flashed for every 6 seconds.
In 2700 seconds 2700/6 = 450 times.
The count start after the first flash, the light will flashes 451 times in ¾ of an hour.
20. Answer:
(4)
Explanation:
P
A B
Since p is a point on the line segment AB, AB > AP
21. Answer: (c)
22. Answer: (b) & (d).
Ahmed
23 - 27.Answer:
Fakis Chandra
28. Answer: Fakis
Explanation: Harsha Geetha
Eswar Balaji
Dhinesh
29. Answer:
(5).
Explanation:
Since every alternative letter starting from B of the English alphabet is written in small letter, the letters written in small letter are b, d, f...
In the first two answers the letter E is written in both small & capital letters, so they are not the correct answers. But in third and fourth answers the letter is written in small letter instead capital letter, so they are not the answers.
30. Answer:
x = 4
Explanation:
Since the side of the square is x + 2, its perimeter = 4 (x + 2) = 4x + 8
Since the side of the equilateral triangle is 2x, its perimeter = 3 * 2x = 6x
Also, the perimeters of both are equal.
(i.e.) 4x + 8 = 6x
(i.e.) 2x = 8 è x = 4.
31. Answer:
(y – 2) / y.
Explanation:
To type a manuscript karthik took y hours.
Therefore his speed in typing = 1/y.
He was called away after 2 hours of typing.
Therefore the work completed = 1/y * 2.
Therefore the remaining work to be completed = 1 – 2/y.
(i.e.) work to be completed = (y-2)/y
32. Answer:
(2)
33. Answer:
1
Explanation:
One is the only number exists without reciprocal because the reciprocal of one is one itself.
34. Answer:
Sudhir had 39 cars, Arvind had 21 cars and Gauri had 12 cars.
Explanation:
Sudhir Arvind Gauri
Finally 24 24 24
Before Gauri’s transaction 12 12 48
Before Arvind’s transaction 6 42 24
Before Sudhir’ s transaction 39 21 12
35. Answer:
Cost price of horse: Rs. 400 &
Cost price of cart: Rs. 200
Explanation:
Let x be the cost of horse & y be the cost of the cart.
10 % of loss in selling horse = 20 % of gain in selling the cart
Therefore (10 / 100) * x = (20 * 100) * y
è x = 2y -----------(1)
5 % of loss in selling the horse is 10 more than the 5 % gain in selling the cart.
Therefore (5 / 100) * x - 10 = (5 / 100) * y
è 5x - 1000 = 5y
Substituting (1)
10y - 1000 = 5y
5y = 1000
y = 200
x = 400 from (1)
Exercise 2.1
For the following, find the next term in the series
1. 6, 24, 60,120, 210
a) 336 b) 366 c) 330 d) 660
Answer : a) 336
Explanation : The series is 1.2.3, 2.3.4, 3.4.5, 4.5.6, 5.6.7, ..... ( '.' means product)
2. 1, 5, 13, 25
Answer : 41
Explanation : The series is of the form 0^2+1^2, 1^2+2^2,...
3. 0, 5, 8, 17
Answer : 24
Explanation : 1^2-1, 2^2+1, 3^2-1, 4^2+1, 5^2-1
4. 1, 8, 9, 64, 25 (Hint : Every successive terms are related)
Answer : 216
Explanation : 1^2, 2^3, 3^2, 4^3, 5^2, 6^3
5. 8,24,12,36,18,54
Answer : 27
6. 71,76,69,74,67,72
Answer : 67
7. 5,9,16,29,54
Answer : 103
Explanation : 5*2-1=9; 9*2-2=16; 16*2-3=29; 29*2-4=54; 54*2-5=103
8. 1,2,4,10,16,40,64 (Successive terms are related)
Answer : 200
Explanation : The series is powers of 2 (2^0,2^1,..).
All digits are less than 8. Every second number is in octal number system.
128 should follow 64. 128 base 10 = 200 base 8.
Exercise 2.2
Find the odd man out.
1. 3,5,7,12,13,17,19
Answer : 12
Explanation : All but 12 are odd numbers
2. 2,5,10,17,26,37,50,64
Answer : 64
Explanation : 2+3=5; 5+5=10; 10+7=17; 17+9=26; 26+11=37; 37+13=50; 50+15=65;
3. 105,85,60,30,0,-45,-90
Answer : 0
Explanation : 105-20=85; 85-25=60; 60-30=30; 30-35=-5; -5-40=-45; -45-45=-90;
Exercise 3
Solve the following.
1. What is the number of zeros at the end of the product of the numbers from 1 to 100?
Answer : 127
2. A fast typist can type some matter in 2 hours and a slow typist can type the same in 3 hours. If both type combinely, in how much time will they finish?
Answer : 1 hr 12 min
Explanation : The fast typist's work done in 1 hr = 1/2
The slow typist's work done in 1 hr = 1/3
If they work combinely, work done in 1 hr = 1/2+1/3 = 5/6
So, the work will be completed in 6/5 hours. i.e., 1+1/5 hours = 1hr 12 min
3. Gavaskar's average in his first 50 innings was 50. After the 51st innings, his average was 51. How many runs did he score in his 51st innings. (supposing that he lost his wicket in his 51st innings)
Answer : 101
Explanation : Total score after 50 innings = 50*50 = 2500
Total score after 51 innings = 51*51 = 2601
So, runs made in the 51st innings = 2601-2500 = 101
If he had not lost his wicket in his 51st innings, he would have scored an unbeaten 50 in his 51st innings.
4. Out of 80 coins, one is counterfeit. What is the minimum number of weighings needed to find out the counterfeit coin?
Answer : 4
5. What can you conclude from the statement : All green are blue, all blue are red. ?
(i) some blue are green
(ii) some red are green
(iii) some green are not red
(iv) all red are blue
(a) i or ii but not both
(b) i & ii only
(c) iii or iv but not both
(d) iii & iv
Answer : (b)
6. A rectangular plate with length 8 inches, breadth 11 inches and thickness 2 inches is available. What is the length of the circular rod with diameter 8 inches and equal to the volume of the rectangular plate?
Answer : 3.5 inches
Explanation : Volume of the circular rod (cylinder) = Volume of the rectangular plate
(22/7)*4*4*h = 8*11*2
h = 7/2 = 3.5
7. What is the sum of all numbers between 100 and 1000 which are divisible by 14 ?
Answer : 35392
Explanation : The number closest to 100 which is greater than 100 and divisible by 14 is 112, which is the first term of the series which has to be summed.
The number closest to 1000 which is less than 1000 and divisible by 14 is 994, which is the last term of the series.
112 + 126 + .... + 994 = 14(8+9+ ... + 71) = 35392
8. If s(a) denotes square root of a, find the value of s(12+s(12+s(12+ ...... upto infinity.
Answer : 4
Explanation : Let x = s(12+s(12+s(12+.....
We can write x = s(12+x). i.e., x^2 = 12 + x. Solving this quadratic equation, we get x = -3 or x=4. Sum cannot be -ve and hence sum = 4.
9. A cylindrical container has a radius of eight inches with a height of three inches. Compute how many inches should be added to either the radius or height to give the same increase in volume?
Answer : 16/3 inches
Explanation : Let x be the amount of increase. The volume will increase by the same amount if the radius increased or the height is increased.
So, the effect on increasing height is equal to the effect on increasing the radius.
i.e., (22/7)*8*8*(3+x) = (22/7)*(8+x)*(8+x)*3
Solving the quadratic equation we get the x = 0 or 16/3. The possible increase would be by 16/3 inches.
10. With just six weights and a balance scale, you can weigh any unit number of kgs from 1 to 364. What could be the six weights?
Answer : 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243 (All powers of 3)
11. Diophantus passed one sixth of his life in childhood, one twelfth in youth, and one seventh more as a bachelor; five years after his marriage a son was born who died four years before his father at half his final age. How old is Diophantus?
Answer : 84 years
Explanation : x/6 + x/12 + x/7 + 5 + x/2 + 4 = x
12 . If time at this moment is 9 P.M., what will be the time 23999999992 hours later?
Answer : 1 P.M.
Explanation : 24 billion hours later, it would be 9 P.M. and 8 hours before that it would be 1 P.M.
13. How big will an angle of one and a half degree look through a glass that magnifies things three times?
Answer : 1 1/2 degrees
Explanation : The magnifying glass cannot increase the magnitude of an angle.
14. Divide 45 into four parts such that when 2 is added to the first part, 2 is subtracted from the second part, 2 is multiplied by the third part and the fourth part is divided by two, all result in the same number.
Answer: 8, 12, 5, 20
Explanation: a + b + c + d =45; a+2 = b-2 = 2c = d/2; a=b-4; c = (b-2)/2; d = 2(b-2); b-4 + b + (b-2)/2 + 2(b-2) = 45;
15. I drove 60 km at 30 kmph and then an additional 60 km at 50 kmph. Compute my average speed over my 120 km.
Answer : 37 1/2
Explanation : Time reqd for the first 60 km = 120 min.; Time reqd for the second 60 km = 72 min.; Total time reqd = 192 min
Avg speed = (60*120)/192 = 37 1/2
Questions 16 and 17 are based on the following :
Five executives of European Corporation hold a Conference in Rome
Mr. A converses in Spanish & Italian
Mr. B, a spaniard, knows English also
Mr. C knows English and belongs to Italy
Mr. D converses in French and Spanish
Mr. E , a native of Italy knows French
16. Which of the following can act as interpreter if Mr. C & Mr. D wish to converse
a) only Mr. A b) Only Mr. B c) Mr. A & Mr. B d) Any of the other three
Answer : d) Any of the other three.
Explanation : From the data given, we can infer the following.
A knows Spanish, Italian
B knows Spanish, English
C knows Italian, English
D knows Spanish, French
E knows Italian, French
To act as an interpreter between C and D, a person has to know one of the combinations Italian&Spanish, Italian&French, English&Spanish, English&French
A, B, and E know atleast one of the combinations.
17. If a 6th executive is brought in, to be understood by maximum number of original five he should be fluent in
a) English & French b) Italian & Spanish c) English & French d) French & Italian
Answer : b) Italian & Spanish
Explanation : No of executives who know
i) English is 2
ii) Spanish is 3
iii) Italian is 3
iv) French is 2
Italian & Spanish are spoken by the maximum no of executives. So, if the 6th executive is fluent in Italian & Spanish, he can communicate with all the original five because everybody knows either Spanish or Italian.
18. What is the sum of the first 25 natural odd numbers?
Answer : 625
Explanation : The sum of the first n natural odd nos is square(n).
1+3 = 4 = square(2) 1+3+5 = 9 = square(3)
19. The sum of any seven consecutive numbers is divisible by
a) 2 b) 7 c) 3 d) 11
Exercise 3
Try the following.
1. There are seventy clerks working in a company, of which 30 are females. Also, 30 clerks are married; 24 clerks are above 25 years of age; 19 married clerks are above 25 years, of which 7 are males; 12 males are above 25 years of age; and 15 males are married. How many bachelor girls are there and how many of these are above 25?
2. A man sailed off from the North Pole. After covering 2,000 miles in one direction he turned West, sailed 2,000 miles, turned North and sailed ahead another 2,000 miles till he met his friend. How far was he from the North Pole and in what direction?
3. Here is a series of comments on the ages of three persons J, R, S by themselves.
S : The difference between R's age and mine is three years.
J : R is the youngest.
R : Either I am 24 years old or J 25 or S 26.
J : All are above 24 years of age.
S : I am the eldest if and only if R is not the youngest.
R : S is elder to me.
J : I am the eldest.
R : S is not 27 years old.
S : The sum of my age and J's is two more than twice R's age.
One of the three had been telling a lie throughout whereas others had spoken the truth. Determine the ages of S,J,R.
4. In a group of five people, what is the probability of finding two persons with the same month of birth?
5. A father and his son go out for a 'walk-and-run' every morning around a track formed by an equilateral triangle. The father's walking speed is 2 mph and his running speed is 5 mph. The son's walking and running speeds are twice that of his father. Both start together from one apex of the triangle, the son going clockwise and the father anti-clockwise. Initially the father runs and the son walks for a certain period of time. Thereafter, as soon as the father starts walking, the son starts running. Both complete the course in 45 minutes. For how long does the father run? Where do the two cross each other?
6. The Director of Medical Services was on his annual visit to the ENT Hospital. While going through the out patients' records he came across the following data for a particular day : " Ear consultations 45; Nose 50; Throat 70; Ear and Nose 30; Nose and Throat 20; Ear and Throat 30; Ear, Nose and Throat 10; Total patients 100." Then he came to the conclusion that the records were bogus. Was he right?
7. Amongst Ram, Sham and Gobind are a doctor, a lawyer and a police officer. They are married to Radha, Gita and Sita (not in order). Each of the wives have a profession. Gobind's wife is an artist. Ram is not married to Gita. The lawyer's wife is a teacher. Radha is married to the police officer. Sita is an expert cook. Who's who?
8. What should come next?
1, 2, 4, 10, 16, 40, 64,
Questions 9-12 are based on the following :
Three adults – Roberto, Sarah and Vicky – will be traveling in a van with five children – Freddy, Hillary, Jonathan, Lupe, and Marta. The van has a driver’s seat and one passenger seat in the front, and two benches behind the front seats, one beach behind the other. Each bench has room for exactly three people. Everyone must sit in a seat or on a bench, and seating is subject to the following restrictions: An adult must sit on each bench.
Either Roberto or Sarah must sit in the driver’s seat.
Jonathan must sit immediately beside Marta.
9. Of the following, who can sit in the front passenger seat ?
(a) Jonathan (b) Lupe (c) Roberto (d) Sarah (e) Vicky
10. Which of the following groups of three can sit together on a bench?
(a) Freddy, Jonathan and Marta (b) Freddy, Jonathan and Vicky
(c) Freddy, Sarah and Vicky (d) Hillary, Lupe and Sarah
(e) Lupe, Marta and Roberto
11. If Freddy sits immediately beside Vicky, which of the following cannot be true ?
a. Jonathan sits immediately beside Sarah
b. Lupe sits immediately beside Vicky
c. Hillary sits in the front passenger seat
d. Freddy sits on the same bench as Hillary
e. Hillary sits on the same bench as Roberto
12. If Sarah sits on a bench that is behind where Jonathan is sitting, which of the following must be true ?
a. Hillary sits in a seat or on a bench that is in front of where Marta is sitting
b. Lupe sits in a seat or on a bench that is in front of where Freddy is sitting
c. Freddy sits on the same bench as Hillary
d. Lupe sits on the same bench as Sarah
e. Marta sits on the same bench as Vicky
13. Make six squares of the same size using twelve match-sticks. (Hint : You will need an adhesive to arrange the required figure)
14. A farmer has two rectangular fields. The larger field has twice the length and 4 times the width of the smaller field. If the smaller field has area K, then the are of the larger field is greater than the area of the smaller field by what amount?
(a) 6K (b) 8K (c) 12K (d) 7K
15. Nine equal circles are enclosed in a square whose area is 36sq units. Find the area of each circle.
16. There are 9 cards. Arrange them in a 3*3 matrix. Cards are of 4 colors. They are red, yellow, blue, green. Conditions for arrangement: one red card must be in first row or second row. 2 green cards should be in 3rd column. Yellow cards must be in the 3 corners only. Two blue cards must be in the 2nd row. At least one green card in each row.
17. Is z less than w? z and w are real numbers.
(I) z2 = 25
(II) w = 9
To answer the question,
a) Either I or II is sufficient
b) Both I and II are sufficient but neither of them is alone sufficient
c) I & II are sufficient
d) Both are not sufficient
18. A speaks truth 70% of the time; B speaks truth 80% of the time. What is the probability that both are contradicting each other?
19. In a family 7 children don't eat spinach, 6 don't eat carrot, 5 don't eat beans, 4 don't eat spinach & carrots, 3 don't eat carrot & beans, 2 don't eat beans & spinach. One doesn't eat all 3. Find the no. of children.
20. Anna, Bena, Catherina and Diana are at their monthly business meeting. Their occupations are author, biologist, chemist and doctor, but not necessarily in that order. Diana just told the neighbour, who is a biologist that Catherina was on her way with doughnuts. Anna is sitting across from the doctor and next to the chemist. The doctor was thinking that Bena was a good name for parent's to choose, but didn't say anything. What is each person's occupation?
1.One of the following is my secret word:AIM DUE MOD OAT TIE.With the list in front of you, if I were to tell you any one of my secret word, then you would be able to tell me the number of vowels in my secret word.Which is my secret word?
Ans.TIE
2.In the following figure:A B C
D
E F G
H
I
Each of the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 is:
a)Represented by a different letter in the figure above.
b)Positioned in the figure above so that each of A + B + C,C + D +E,E + F + G, and G + H + I is equal to 13.
Which digit does E represent?
Ans.E is 4
3.One of Mr. Horton,his wife,their son,and Mr. Horton's mother is a doctor and another is a lawyer.
a)If the doctor is younger than the lawyer, then the doctor and the lawyer are not blood relatives.
b)If the doctor is a woman, then the doctor and the lawyer are blood relatives.
c)If the lawyer is a man, then the doctor is a man.
Whose occupation you know?
Ans.Mr. Horton:he is the doctor.
4.Here is a picture of two cubes:
a)The two cubes are exactly alike.
b)The hidden faces indicated by the dots have the same alphabet on them.
Which alphabet-q, r, w, or k is on the faces indicated by the dots?
Ans.q
5.In the following figure:
A D
B G E
C F
Each of the seven digits from 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 is:
a)Represented by a different letter in the figure above.
b)Positioned in the figure above so that A*B*C,B*G*E, and D*E*F are equal.
Which digit does G represent?
Ans.G represents the digit 2.
6.Mr. and Mrs. Aye and Mr. and Mrs. Bee competed in a chess tournament.Of the three games played:
a)In only the first game werethe two players married to each other.
b)The men won two games and the women won one game.
c)The Ayes won more games than the Bees.
d)Anyone who lost game did not play the subsequent game.
Who did not lose a game?
Ans.Mrs.Bee did not lose a game.
7.Three piles of chips--pile I consists one chip, pile II consists of chips, and pile III consists of three chips--are to be used in game played by Anita and Brinda.The game requires:
a)That each player in turn take only one chip or all chips from just one pile.
b)That the player who has to take the last chip loses.
c)That Anita now have her turn.
From which pile should Anita draw in order to win?
Ans.Pile II
8.Of Abdul, Binoy, and Chandini:
a)Each member belongs to the Tee family whose members always tell the truth or to the El family whose members always lie.
b)Abdul says ''Either I belong or Binoy belongs to a different family from the other two."
Whose family do you name of?
Ans.Binoy's family--El.
9.In a class composed of x girls and y boys what part of the class is composed of girls
A.y/(x + y)
B.x/xy
C.x/(x + y)
D.y/xy
Ans.C
10.What is the maximum number of half-pint bottles of cream that can be filled with a 4-gallon can of cream(2 pt.=1 qt. and 4 qt.=1 gal)
A.16
B.24
C.30
D.64
Ans.D
11.If the operation,^ is defined by the equation x ^ y = 2x + y,what is the value of a in 2 ^ a = a ^ 3
A.0
B.1
C.-1
D.4
Ans.B
12.A coffee shop blends 2 kinds of coffee,putting in 2 parts of a 33p. a gm. grade to 1 part of a 24p. a gm.If the mixture is changed to 1 part of the 33p. a gm. to 2 parts of the less expensive grade,how much will the shop save in blending 100 gms.
A.Rs.90
B.Rs.1.00
C.Rs.3.00
D.Rs.8.00
Ans.C
13.There are 200 questions on a 3 hr examination.Among these questions are 50 mathematics problems.It is suggested that twice as much time be spent on each maths problem as for each other question.How many minutes should be spent on mathematics problems
A.36
B.72
C.60
D.100
Ans.B
14.In a group of 15,7 have studied Latin, 8 have studied Greek, and 3 have not studied either.How many of these studied both Latin and Greek
A.0
B.3
C.4
D.5
Ans.B
15.If 13 = 13w/(1-w) ,then (2w)2 =
A.1/4
B.1/2
C.1
D.2
Ans.C
16. If a and b are positive integers and (a-b)/3.5 = 4/7, then
(A) b < a
(B) b > a
(C) b = a
(D) b >= a
Ans. A
17. In june a baseball team that played 60 games had won 30% of its game played. After a phenomenal winning streak this team raised its average to 50% .How many games must the team have won in a row to attain this average?
A. 12
B. 20
C. 24
D. 30
Ans. C
18. M men agree to purchase a gift for Rs. D. If three men drop out how much more will each have to contribute towards the purchase of the gift/
A. D/(M-3)
B. MD/3
C. M/(D-3)
D. 3D/(M2-3M)
Ans. D
19. A company contracts to paint 3 houses. Mr.Brown can paint a house in 6 days while Mr.Black would take 8 days and Mr.Blue 12 days. After 8 days Mr.Brown goes on vacation and Mr. Black begins to work for a period of 6 days. How many days will it take Mr.Blue to complete the contract?
A. 7
B. 8
C. 11
D. 12
Ans.C
20. 2 hours after a freight train leaves Delhi a passenger train leaves the same station travelling in the same direction at an average speed of 16 km/hr. After travelling 4 hrs the passenger train overtakes the freight train. The average speed of the freight train was?
A. 30
B. 40
C.58
D. 60
Ans. B
21. If 9x-3y=12 and 3x-5y=7 then 6x-2y = ?
A.-5
B. 4
C. 2
D. 8
Ans. D
22. There are 5 red shoes, 4 green shoes. If one draw randomly a shoe what is the probability of getting a red shoe
Ans 5c1/ 9c1
23. What is the selling price of a car? If the cost of the car is Rs.60 and a profit of 10% over selling price is earned
Ans: Rs 66/-
24. 1/3 of girls , 1/2 of boys go to canteen .What factor and total number of classmates go to canteen.
Ans: Cannot be determined.
25. The price of a product is reduced by 30% . By what percentage should it be increased to make it 100%
Ans: 42.857%
26. There is a square of side 6cm . A circle is inscribed inside the square. Find the ratio of the area of circle to square.
Ans. 11/14
27. There are two candles of equal lengths and of different thickness. The thicker one lasts of six hours. The thinner 2 hours less than the thicker one. Ramesh lights the two candles at the same time. When he went to bed he saw the thicker one is twice the length of the thinner one. How long ago did Ramesh light the two candles .
Ans: 3 hours.
28. If M/N = 6/5,then 3M+2N = ?
29. If p/q = 5/4 , then 2p+q= ?
30. If PQRST is a parallelogram what it the ratio of triangle PQS & parallelogram PQRST .
Ans: 1:2
31. The cost of an item is Rs 12.60. If the profit is 10% over selling price what is the selling price ?
Ans: Rs 13.86/-
32. There are 6 red shoes & 4 green shoes . If two of red shoes are drawn what is the probability of getting red shoes
Ans: 6c2/10c2
33. To 15 lts of water containing 20% alcohol, we add 5 lts of pure water. What is % alcohol.
Ans : 15%
34. A worker is paid Rs.20/- for a full days work. He works 1,1/3,2/3,1/8.3/4 days in a week. What is the total amount paid for that worker ?
Ans : 57.50
35. If the value of x lies between 0 & 1 which of the following is the largest?
(a) x
(b) x2
(c) -x
(d) 1/x
Ans : (d)
36. If the total distance of a journey is 120 km .If one goes by 60 kmph and comes back at 40kmph what is the average speed during the journey?
Ans: 48kmph
37. A school has 30% students from Maharashtra .Out of these 20% are Bombey students. Find the total percentage of Bombay?
Ans: 6%
38. An equilateral triangle of sides 3 inch each is given. How many equilateral triangles of side 1 inch can be formed from it?
Ans: 9
39. If A/B = 3/5,then 15A = ?
Ans : 9B
40. Each side of a rectangle is increased by 100% .By what percentage does the area increase?
Ans : 300%
41. Perimeter of the back wheel = 9 feet, front wheel = 7 feet on a certain distance, the front wheel gets 10 revolutions more than the back wheel .What is the distance?
Ans : 315 feet.
42. Perimeter of front wheel =30, back wheel = 20. If front wheel revolves 240 times. How many revolutions will the back wheel take?
Ans: 360 times
43. 20% of a 6 litre solution and 60% of 4 litre solution are mixed. What percentage of the mixture of solution
Ans: 36%
44City A's population is 68000, decreasing at a rate of 80 people per year. City B having population 42000 is increasing at a rate of 120 people per year. In how many years both the cities will have same population?
Ans: 130 years
45Two cars are 15 kms apart. One is turning at a speed of 50kmph and the other at 40kmph . How much time will it take for the two cars to meet?
Ans: 3/2 hours
46A person wants to buy 3 paise and 5 paise stamps costing exactly one rupee. If he buys which of the following number of stamps he won't able to buy 3 paise stamps.
Ans: 9
47There are 12 boys and 15 girls, How many different dancing groups can be formed with 2 boys and 3 girls.
48Which of the following fractions is less than 1/3
(a) 22/62
(b) 15/46
(c) 2/3
(d) 1
Ans: (b)
49There are two circles, one circle is inscribed and another circle is circumscribed over a square. What is the ratio of area of inner to outer circle?
Ans: 1 : 2
50Three types of tea the a,b,c costs Rs. 95/kg,100/kg and70/kg respectively.
How many kgs of each should be blended to produce 100 kg of mixture worth Rs.90/kg,
given that the quntities of band c are equal
a)70,15,15
b)50,25,25
c)60,20,20
d)40,30,30
Ans. (b)
51. in a class, except 18 all are above 50 years.
15 are below 50 years of age. How many people are there
(a) 30
(b) 33
(c) 36
(d) none of these.
Ans. (d)
52. If a boat is moving in upstream with velocity of 14 km/hr and goes downstream with a velocity of 40 km/hr, then what is the speed of the stream ?
(a) 13 km/hr
(b) 26 km/hr
(c) 34 km/hr
(d) none of these
Ans. A
53. Find the value of ( 0.75 * 0.75 * 0.75 - 0.001 ) / ( 0.75 * 0.75 - 0.075 + 0.01)
(a) 0.845
(b) 1.908
(c) 2.312
(d) 0.001
Ans. A
54. A can have a piece of work done in 8 days, B can work three times faster than the A, C can work five times faster than A. How many days will they take to do the work together ?
(a) 3 days
(b) 8/9 days
(c) 4 days
(d) can't say
Ans. B
55. A car travels a certain distance taking 7 hrs in forward journey, during the return journey increased speed 12km/hr takes the times 5 hrs.What is the distance travelled
(a) 210 kms
(b) 30 kms
(c) 20 kms
(c) none of these
Ans. B
56. Instead of multiplying a number by 7, the number is divided by 7. What is the percentage of error obtained ?
57. Find (7x + 4y ) / (x-2y) if x/2y = 3/2 ?
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 7
(d) data insufficient
Ans. C
58. A man buys 12 lts of liquid which contains 20% of the liquid and the rest is water. He then mixes it with 10 lts of another mixture with 30% of liquid.What is the % of water in the new mixture?
59. If a man buys 1 lt of milk for Rs.12 and mixes it with 20% water and sells it for Rs.15, then what is the percentage of gain?
60. Pipe A can fill a tank in 30 mins and Pipe B can fill it in 28 mins.If 3/4th of the tank is filled by Pipe B alone and both are opened, how much time is required by both the pipes to fill the tank completely ?
61. If on an item a company gives 25% discount, they earn 25% profit. If they now give 10% discount then what is the profit percentage.
(a) 40%
(b) 55%
(c) 35%
(d) 30%
Ans. D
62. A certain number of men can finish a piece of work in 10 days. If however there were 10 men less it will take 10 days more for the work to be finished. How many men were there originally?
(a) 110 men
(b) 130 men
(c) 100 men
(d) none of these
Ans. A
63. In simple interest what sum amounts of Rs.1120/- in 4 years and Rs.1200/- in 5 years ?
(a) Rs. 500
(b) Rs. 600
(c) Rs. 800
(d) Rs. 900
Ans. C
64. If a sum of money compound annually amounts of thrice itself in 3 years. In how many years
will it become 9 times itself.
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 10
(d) 12
Ans A
65. Two trains move in the same direction at 50 kmph and 32 kmph respectively. A man in the slower train
observes the 15 seconds elapse before the faster train completely passes by him.
What is the length of faster train ?
(a) 100m
(b) 75m
(c) 120m
(d) 50m
Ans B
66. How many mashes are there in 1 squrare meter of wire gauge if each mesh
is 8mm long and 5mm wide ?
(a) 2500
(b) 25000
(c) 250
(d) 250000
Ans B
67. x% of y is y% of ?
(a) x/y
(b) 2y
(c) x
(d) can't be determined
Ans. C
68. The price of sugar increases by 20%, by what % should a housewife reduce the consumption of sugar so that expenditure on sugar can be same as before ?
(a) 15%
(b) 16.66%
(c) 12%
(d) 9%
Ans B
69. A man spends half of his salary on household expenses, 1/4th for rent, 1/5th for travel expenses, the man deposits the rest in a bank. If his monthly deposits in the bank amount 50, what is his monthly salary ?
(a) Rs.500
(b) Rs.1500
(c) Rs.1000
(d) Rs. 900
Ans C
70. The population of a city increases @ 4% p.a. There is an additional annual increase of 4% of the population due to the influx of job seekers, find the % increase in population after 2 years ?
71. The ratio of the number of boys and girls in a school is 3:2 Out of these 10% the boys and 25% of girls are scholarship holders. % of students who are not scholarship holders.?
72. 15 men take 21 days of 8 hrs. each to do a piece of work. How many days of 6 hrs. each would it take for 21 women if 3 women do as much work as 2 men?
(a) 30
(b) 20
(c) 19
(d) 29
Ans. A
73. A cylinder is 6 cms in diameter and 6 cms in height. If spheres of the same size are made from the material obtained, what is the diameter of each sphere?
(a) 5 cms
(b) 2 cms
(c) 3 cms
(d) 4 cms
Ans C
74. A rectangular plank (2)1/2 meters wide can be placed so that it is on either side of the diagonal of a square shown below.(Figure is not available)What is the area of the plank?
Ans :7*(2)1/2
75. The difference b/w the compound interest payble half yearly and the simple interest on a
certain sum lent out at 10% p.a for 1 year is Rs 25. What is the sum?
(a) Rs. 15000
(b) Rs. 12000
(c) Rs. 10000
(d) none of these
Ans C
76. What is the smallest number by which 2880 must be divided in order to make it into a
perfect square ?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 6
Ans. C
77. A father is 30 years older than his son however he will be only thrice as old as the son after 5 years
what is father's present age ?
(a) 40 yrs
(b) 30 yrs
(c) 50 yrs
(d) none of these
Ans. A
78. An article sold at a profit of 20% if both the cost price and selling price would be Rs.20/- the profit would be 10% more. What is the cost price of that article?
29. If an item costs Rs.3 in '99 and Rs.203 in '00.What is the % increase in price?
(a) 200/3 %
(b) 200/6 %
(c) 100%
(d) none of these
Ans. A
80. 5 men or 8 women do equal amount of work in a day. a job requires 3 men and 5 women to finish the job in 10 days how many woman are required to finish the job in 14 days.
a) 10
b) 7
c) 6
d) 12
Ans 7
81. A simple interest amount of rs 5000 for six month is rs 200. what is the anual rate of interest?
a) 10%
b) 6%
c) 8%
d) 9%
Ans 8%
82. In objective test a correct ans score 4 marks and on a wrong ans 2 marks are ---. a student score 480 marks from 150 question. how many ans were correct?
a) 120
b) 130
c) 110
d) 150
Ans130.
83. An artical sold at amount of 50% the net sale price is rs 425 .what is the list price of the artical?
a) 500
b) 488
c) 480
d) 510
Ans 500
84. A man leaves office daily at 7pm A driver with car comes from his home to pick him from office and bring back home
One day he gets free at 5:30 and instead of waiting for driver he starts walking towards home.
In the way he meets the car and returns home on car He reaches home 20 minutes earlier than usual.
In how much time does the man reach home usually??
Ans. 1hr 20min
85. A works thrice as much as B. If A takes 60 days less than B to do a work then find the number of days it would take to complete the work if both work together?
Ans. 22½days
86. How many 1's are there in the binary form of 8*1024 + 3*64 + 3
Ans. 4
87. In a digital circuit which was to implement (A B) + (A)XOR(B), the designer implements (A B) (A)XOR(B)
What is the probability of error in it ?
88. A boy has Rs 2. He wins or loses Re 1 at a time If he wins he gets Re 1 and if he loses the game he loses Re 1.
He can loose only 5 times. He is out of the game if he earns Rs 5.
Find the number of ways in which this is possible?
Ans. 16
89. If there are 1024*1280 pixels on a screen and each pixel can have around 16 million colors
Find the memory required for this?
Ans. 4MB
90. On a particular day A and B decide that they would either speak the truth or will lie.
C asks A whether he is speaking truth or lying?
He answers and B listens to what he said. C then asks B what A has said B says "A says that he is a liar"
What is B speaking ?
(a) Truth
(b) Lie
(c) Truth when A lies
(d) Cannot be determined
Ans. (b)
91. What is the angle between the two hands of a clock when time is 8:30
Ans. 75(approx)
92. A student is ranked 13th from right and 8th from left. How many students are there in totality ?
93. A man walks east and turns right and then from there to his left and then 45degrees to
his right.In which direction did he go
Ans. North west
94. A student gets 70% in one subject, 80% in the other. To get an overall of 75% how much should get in third subject.
95. A man shows his friend a woman sitting in a park and says that she the daughter of my grandmother's only son.
What is the relation between the two
Ans. Daughter
96. How many squares with sides 1/2 inch long are needed to cover a rectangle that is 4 ft long and 6 ft wide
(a) 24
(b) 96
(c) 3456
(d) 13824
(e) 14266
97. If a=2/3b , b=2/3c, and c=2/3d what part of d is b/
(a) 8/27
(b) 4/9
(c) 2/3
(d) 75%
(e) 4/3
Ans. (b)
2598Successive discounts of 20% and 15% are equal to a single discount of
(a) 30%
(b) 32%
(c) 34%
(d) 35%
(e) 36
Ans. (b)
99. The petrol tank of an automobile can hold g liters.If a liters was removed when the tank was full, what part of the full tank was removed?
(a)g-a
(b)g/a
(c) a/g
(d) (g-a)/a
(e) (g-a)/g
Ans. (c)
100. If x/y=4 and y is not '0' what % of x is 2x-y
(a)150%
(b)175%
(c)200%
(d)250%
Ans. (b)
PART – 2
Aptitude Questions
1.If 2x-y=4 then 6x-3y=?
(a)15
(b)12
(c)18
(d)10
Ans. (b)
2.If x=y=2z and xyz=256 then what is the value of x?
(a)12
(b)8
(c)16
(d)6
Ans. (b)
3. (1/10)18 - (1/10)20 = ?
(a) 99/1020
(b) 99/10
(c) 0.9
(d) none of these
Ans. (a)
4.Pipe A can fill in 20 minutes and Pipe B in 30 mins and Pipe C can empty the same in 40 mins.If all of them work together, find the time taken to fill the tank
(a) 17 1/7 mins
(b) 20 mins
(c) 8 mins
(d) none of these
Ans. (a)
5. Thirty men take 20 days to complete a job working 9 hours a day.How many hour a day should 40 men work to complete the job?
(a) 8 hrs
(b) 7 1/2 hrs
(c) 7 hrs
(d) 9 hrs
Ans. (b)
6. Find the smallest number in a GP whose sum is 38 and product 1728
(a) 12
(b) 20
(c) 8
(d) none of these
Ans. (c)
7. A boat travels 20 kms upstream in 6 hrs and 18 kms downstream in 4 hrs.Find the speed of the boat in still water and the speed of the water current?
(a) 1/2 kmph
(b) 7/12 kmph
(c) 5 kmph
(d) none of these
Ans. (b)
8. A goat is tied to one corner of a square plot of side 12m by a rope 7m long.Find the area it can graze?
(a) 38.5 sq.m
(b) 155 sq.m
(c) 144 sq.m
(d) 19.25 sq.m
Ans. (a)
9. Mr. Shah decided to walk down the escalator of a tube station. He found that if he walks down 26 steps, he requires 30 seconds to reach the bottom. However, if he steps down 34 stairs he would only require 18 seconds to get to the bottom. If the time is measured from the moment the top step begins to descend to the time he steps off the last step at the bottom, find out the height of the stair way in steps?
Ans.46 steps.
10. The average age of 10 members of a committee is the same as it was 4 years ago, because an old member has been replaced by a young member. Find how much younger is the new member ?
Ans.40 years.
11. Three containers A, B and C have volumes a, b, and c respectively; and container A is full of water while the other two are empty. If from container A water is poured into container B which becomes 1/3 full, and into container C which becomes 1/2 full, how much water is left in container A?
12. ABCE is an isosceles trapezoid and ACDE is a rectangle. AB = 10 and EC = 20. What is the length of AE?
Ans. AE = 10.
13. In the given figure, PA and PB are tangents to the circle at A and B respectively and the chord BC is parallel to tangent PA. If AC = 6 cm, and length of the tangent AP is 9 cm, then what is the length of the chord BC?
Ans. BC = 4 cm.
15 Three cards are drawn at random from an ordinary pack of cards. Find the probability that they will consist of a king, a queen and an ace.
Ans. 64/2210.
16. A number of cats got together and decided to kill between them 999919 mice. Every cat killed an equal number of mice. Each cat killed more mice than there were cats. How many cats do you think there were ?
Ans. 991.
17. If Log2 x - 5 Log x + 6 = 0, then what would the value / values of x be?
Ans. x = e2 or e3.
18. The square of a two digit number is divided by half the number. After 36 is added to the quotient, this sum is then divided by 2. The digits of the resulting number are the same as those in the original number, but they are in reverse order. The ten's place of the original number is equal to twice the difference between its digits. What is the number?
Ans. 46
19.Can you tender a one rupee note in such a manner that there shall be total 50 coins but none of them would be 2 paise coins.?
Ans. 45 one paisa coins, 2 five paise coins, 2 ten paise coins, and 1 twenty-five paise coins.
20.A monkey starts climbing up a tree 20ft. tall. Each hour, it hops 3ft. and slips back 2ft. How much time would it take the monkey to reach the top?
Ans.18 hours.
21. What is the missing number in this series? 8 2 14 6 11 ? 14 6 18 12
Ans. 9
22. A certain type of mixture is prepared by mixing brand A at Rs.9 a kg. with brand B at Rs.4 a kg. If the mixture is worth Rs.7 a kg., how many kgs. of brand A are needed to make 40kgs. of the mixture?
Ans. Brand A needed is 24kgs.
23. A wizard named Nepo says "I am only three times my son's age. My father is 40 years more than twice my age. Together the three of us are a mere 1240 years old." How old is Nepo?
Ans. 360 years old.
24. One dog tells the other that there are two dogs in front of me. The other one also shouts that he too had two behind him. How many are they?
Ans. Three.
25. A man ate 100 bananas in five days, each day eating 6 more than the previous day. How many bananas did he eat on the first day?
Ans. Eight.
26. If it takes five minutes to boil one egg, how long will it take to boil four eggs?
Ans. Five minutes.
27. The minute hand of a clock overtakes the hour hand at intervals of 64 minutes of correct time. How much a day does the clock gain or lose?
Ans. 32 8/11 minutes.
28. Solve for x and y: 1/x - 1/y = 1/3, 1/x2 + 1/y2 = 5/9.
Ans. x = 3/2 or -3 and y = 3 or -3/2.
29. Daal is now being sold at Rs. 20 a kg. During last month its rate was Rs. 16 per kg. By how much percent should a family reduce its consumption so as to keep the expenditure fixed?
Ans. 20 %.
30. Find the least value of 3x + 4y if x2y3 = 6.
Ans. 10.
31. Can you find out what day of the week was January 12, 1979?
Ans. Friday.
32. A garrison of 3300 men has provisions for 32 days, when given at a rate of 850 grams per head. At the end of 7 days a reinforcement arrives and it was found that now the provisions will last 8 days less, when given at the rate of 825 grams per head. How, many more men can it feed?
Ans. 1700 men.
33. From 5 different green balls, four different blue balls and three different red balls, how many combinations of balls can be chosen taking at least one green and one blue ball?
Ans. 3720.
34. Three pipes, A, B, & C are attached to a tank. A & B can fill it in 20 & 30 minutes respectively while C can empty it in 15 minutes. If A, B & C are kept open successively for 1 minute each, how soon will the tank be filled?
Ans. 167 minutes.
35. A person walking 5/6 of his usual rate is 40 minutes late. What is his usual time? Ans. 3 hours 20 minutes.
36.For a motorist there are three ways going from City A to City C. By way of bridge the distance is 20 miles and toll is $0.75. A tunnel between the two cities is a distance of 10 miles and toll is $1.00 for the vehicle and driver and $0.10 for each passenger. A two-lane highway without toll goes east for 30 miles to city B and then 20 miles in a northwest direction to City C.
1. Which is the shortest route from B to C
(a) Directly on toll free highway to City C
(b) The bridge
(c) The Tunnel
(d) The bridge or the tunnel
(e) The bridge only if traffic is heavy on the toll free highway
Ans. (a)
2. The most economical way of going from City A to City B, in terms of toll and distance is to use the
(a) tunnel
(b) bridge
(c) bridge or tunnel
(d) toll free highway
(e) bridge and highway
Ans. (a)
3. Jim usually drives alone from City C to City A every working day. His firm deducts a percentage of employee pay for lateness. Which factor would most influence his choice of the bridge or the tunnel ?
(a) Whether his wife goes with him
(b) scenic beauty on the route
(c) Traffic conditions on the road, bridge and tunnel
(d) saving $0.25 in tolls
(e) price of gasoline consumed in covering additional 10 miles on the bridge
Ans. (a)
4. In choosing between the use of the bridge and the tunnel the chief factor(s) would be:
I. Traffic and road conditions
II. Number of passengers in the car
III. Location of one's homes in the center or outskirts of one of the cities
IV. Desire to save $0.25
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) II and III only
(d) III and IV only
(e) I and II only
Ans. (a)
37.The letters A, B, C, D, E, F and G, not necessarily in that order, stand for seven consecutive integers from 1 to 10
D is 3 less than A
B is the middle term
F is as much less than B as C is greater than D
G is greater than F
1. The fifth integer is
(a) A
(b) C
(c) D
(d) E
(e) F
Ans. (a)
2. A is as much greater than F as which integer is less than G
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
(e) E
Ans. (a)
3. If A = 7, the sum of E and G is
(a) 8
(b) 10
(c) 12
(d) 14
(e) 16
Ans. (a)
4. A - F = ?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
(e) Cannot be determined
Ans. (a)
5. An integer T is as much greater than C as C is greater than E. T can be written as A + E. What is D?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
(e) Cannot be determined
Ans. (a)
6. The greatest possible value of C is how much greater than the smallest possible value of D?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
(e) 6
Ans. (a)
38.
1. All G's are H's
2. All G's are J's or K's
3. All J's and K's are G's
4. All L's are K's
5. All N's are M's
6. No M's are G's
1. If no P's are K's, which of the following must be true?
(a) All P's are J's
(b) No P is a G
(c) No P is an H
(d) If any P is an H it is a G
(e) If any P is a G it is a J
Ans. (a)
2. Which of the following can be logically deduced from the conditions stated?
(a) No M's are H's
(b) No M's that are not N's are H's
(c) No H's are M's
(d) Some M's are H's
(e) All M's are H's
Ans. (a)
3. Which of the following is inconsistent with one or more of the conditions?
(a) All H's are G's
(b) All H's that are not G's are M's
(c) Some H's are both M's and G's
(d) No M's are H's
(e) All M's are H's
Ans. (a)
4. The statement "No L's are J's" is
I. Logically deducible from the conditions stated
II. Consistent with but not deducible from the conditions stated
III. Deducible from the stated conditions together with the additional statement "No J's are K's"
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) III only
(d) II and III only
(e) Neither I, II nor III
Ans. (a)
39.In country X, democratic, conservative and justice parties have fought three civil wars in twenty years. TO restore stability an agreement is reached to rotate the top offices President, Prime Minister and Army Chief among the parties so that each party controls one and only one office at all times. The three top office holders must each have two deputies, one from each of the other parties. Each deputy must choose a staff composed of equally members of his or her chiefs party and member of the third party.
1. When Justice party holds one of the top offices, which of the following cannot be true
(a) Some of the staff members within that office are justice party members
(b) Some of the staff members within that office are democratic party members
(c) Two of the deputies within the other offices are justice party members
(d) Two of the deputies within the other offices are conservative party members
(e) Some of the staff members within the other offices are justice party members.
Ans. (a)
2. When the democratic party holds presidency, the staff of the prime minister's deputies are composed
I. One-fourth of democratic party members
II. One-half of justice party members and one-fourth of conservative party members
III. One-half of conservative party members and one-fourth of justice party members.
(a) I only
(b) I and II only
(c) II or III but not both
(d) I and II or I and III
(e) None of these
Ans. (a)
3. Which of the following is allowable under the rules as stated:
(a) More than half of the staff within a given office belonging to a single party
(b) Half of the staff within a given office belonging to a single party
(c) Any person having a member of the same party as his or her immediate superior
(d) Half the total number of staff members in all three offices belonging to a single party
(e) Half the staff members in a given office belonging to parties different from the party of the top office holder in that office.
Ans. (a)
4. The office of the Army Chief passes from Conservative to Justice party. Which of the following must be fired.
(a) The democratic deputy and all staff members belonging to Justice party
(b) Justice party deputy and all his or hers staff members
(c) Justice party deputy and half of his Conservative staff members in the chief of staff office
(d) The Conservative deputy and all of his or her staff members belonging to Conservative party
(e) No deputies and all staff members belonging to conservative parties.
Ans. (a)
40.In recommendations to the board of trustees a tuition increase of $500 per year, the president of the university said "There were no student demonstrations over the previous increases of $300 last year and $200 the year before". If the president's statement is accurate then which of the following can be validly inferred from the information given:
I. Most students in previous years felt that the increases were justified because of increased operating costs.
II. Student apathy was responsible for the failure of students to protest the previous tuition increases.
III. Students are not likely to demonstrate over new tuition increases.
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) I or II but not both
(d) I, II and III
(e) None
Ans. (a)
41. The office staff of XYZ corporation presently consists of three bookeepers--A, B, C and 5 secretaries D, E, F, G, H. The management is planning to open a new office in another city using 2 bookeepers and 3 secretaries of the present staff . To do so they plan to seperate certain individuals who don't function well together. The following guidelines were established to set up the new office
I. Bookeepers A and C are constantly finding fault with one another and should not be sent together to the new office as a team
II. C and E function well alone but not as a team , they should be seperated
III. D and G have not been on speaking terms and shouldn't go together
IV Since D and F have been competing for promotion they shouldn't be a team
1.If A is to be moved as one of the bookeepers,which of the following cannot be a possible working unit.
A.ABDEH
B.ABDGH
C.ABEFH
D.ABEGH
Ans.B
2.If C and F are moved to the new office,how many combinations are possible
A.1
B.2
C.3
D.4
Ans.A
3.If C is sent to the new office,which member of the staff cannot go with C
A.B
B.D
C.F
D.G
Ans.B
4.Under the guidelines developed,which of the following must go to the new office
A.B
B.D
C.E
D.G
Ans.A
5.If D goes to the new office,which of the following is/are true
I.C cannot go
II.A cannot go
III.H must also go
A.I only
B.II only
C.I and II only
D.I and III only
Ans.D
42.After months of talent searching for an administrative assistant to the president of the college the field of applicants has been narrowed down to 5--A, B, C, D, E .It was announced that the finalist would be chosen after a series of all-day group personal interviews were held.The examining committee agreed upon the following procedure
I.The interviews will be held once a week
II.3 candidates will appear at any all-day interview session
III.Each candidate will appear at least once
IV.If it becomes necessary to call applicants for additonal interviews, no more 1 such applicant should be asked to appear the next week
V.Because of a detail in the written applications,it was agreed that whenever candidate B appears, A should also be present.
VI.Because of travel difficulties it was agreed that C will appear for only 1 interview.
1.At the first interview the following candidates appear A,B,D.Which of the follwing combinations can be called for the interview to be held next week.
A.BCD
B.CDE
C.ABE
D.ABC
Ans.B
2.Which of the following is a possible sequence of combinations for interviews in 2 successive weeks
A.ABC;BDE
B.ABD;ABE
C.ADE;ABC
D.BDE;ACD
Ans.C
3.If A ,B and D appear for the interview and D is called for additional interview the following week,which 2 candidates may be asked to appear with D?
I. A
II B
III.C
IV.E
A.I and II
B.I and III only
C.II and III only
D.III and IV only
Ans.D
4.Which of the following correctly state(s) the procedure followed by the search committee
I.After the second interview all applicants have appeared at least once
II.The committee sees each applicant a second time
III.If a third session,it is possible for all applicants to appear at least twice
A.I only
B.II only
C.III only
D.Both I and II
Ans.A
43. A certain city is served by subway lines A,B and C and numbers 1 2 and 3
When it snows , morning service on B is delayed
When it rains or snows , service on A, 2 and 3 are delayed both in the morning and afternoon
When temp. falls below 30 degrees farenheit afternoon service is cancelled in either the A line or the 3 line,
but not both.
When the temperature rises over 90 degrees farenheit, the afternoon service is cancelled in either the line C or the
3 line but not both.
When the service on the A line is delayed or cancelled, service on the C line which connects the A line, is delayed.
When service on the 3 line is cancelled, service on the B line which connects the 3 line is delayed.
Q1. On Jan 10th, with the temperature at 15 degree farenheit, it snows all day. On how many lines will service be
affected, including both morning and afternoon.
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Ans. D
Q2. On Aug 15th with the temperature at 97 degrees farenheit it begins to rain at 1 PM. What is the minimum number
of lines on which service will be affected?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Ans. C
Q3. On which of the following occasions would service be on the greatest number of lines disrupted.
(A) A snowy afternoon with the temperature at 45 degree farenheit
(B) A snowy morning with the temperature at 45 degree farenheit
(C) A rainy afternoon with the temperature at 45 degree farenheit
(D) A rainy afternoon with the temperature at 95 degree farenheit
Ans. B
44. In a certain society, there are two marriage groups, red and brown. No marriage is permitted within a group. On marriage, males become part of their wives groups; women remain in their own group. Children belong to the same group as their parents. Widowers and divorced males revert to the group of their birth. Marriage to more than one person at the same time and marriage to a direct descendant are forbidden
Q1. A brown female could have had
I. A grandfather born Red
II. A grandmother born Red
III Two grandfathers born Brown
(A) I only
(B) III only
(C) I, II and III
(D) I and II only
Ans. D
Q2. A male born into the brown group may have
(A) An uncle in either group
(B) A brown daughter
(C) A brown son
(D) A son-in-law born into red group
Ans. A
Q3. Which of the following is not permitted under the rules as stated.
(A) A brown male marrying his father's sister
(B) A red female marrying her mother's brother
(C) A widower marrying his wife's sister
(D) A widow marrying her divorced daughter's ex-husband
Ans. B
Q4. If widowers and divorced males retained their group they had upon marrying which of the following would be permissible ( Assume that no previous marriage occurred)
(A) A woman marrying her dead sister's husband
(B) A woman marrying her divorced daughter's ex-husband
(C) A widower marrying his brother's daughter
(D) A woman marrying her mother's brother who is a widower.
Ans. D
Q5. I. All G's are H's
II. All G's are J's or K's
III All J's and K's are G's
IV All L's are K's
V All N's are M's
VI No M's are G's
45. There are six steps that lead from the first to the second floor. No two people can be on the same step
Mr. A is two steps below Mr. C
Mr. B is a step next to Mr. D
Only one step is vacant ( No one standing on that step )
Denote the first step by step 1 and second step by step 2 etc.
1. If Mr. A is on the first step, Which of the following is true?
(a) Mr. B is on the second step
(b) Mr. C is on the fourth step.
(c) A person Mr. E, could be on the third step
(d) Mr. D is on higher step than Mr. C.
Ans: (d)
2. If Mr. E was on the third step & Mr. B was on a higher step than Mr. E which step must be vacant
(a) step 1
(b) step 2
(c) step 4
(d) step 5
(e) step 6
Ans: (a)
3. If Mr. B was on step 1, which step could A be on?
(a) 2&e only
(b) 3&5 only
(c) 3&4 only
(d) 4&5 only
(e) 2&4 only
Ans: (c)
4. If there were two steps between the step that A was standing and the step that B was standing on, and A was on a higher step than D , A must be on step
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
(e) 6
Ans: (c)
5. Which of the following is false
i. B&D can be both on odd-numbered steps in one configuration
ii. In a particular configuration A and C must either both an odd numbered steps or both an even-numbered steps
iii. A person E can be on a step next to the vacant step.
(a) i only
(b) ii only
(c) iii only
(d) both i and iii
Ans: (c)
46. Six swimmers A, B, C, D, E, F compete in a race. The outcome is as follows.
i. B does not win.
ii. Only two swimmers separate E & D
iii. A is behind D & E
iv. B is ahead of E , with one swimmer intervening
v. F is a head of D
1. Who stood fifth in the race ?
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
(e) E
Ans: (e)
2. How many swimmers seperate A and F ?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
(e) cannot be determined
Ans: (d)
3. The swimmer between C & E is
(a) none
(b) F
(c) D
(d) B
(e) A
Ans: (a)
4. If the end of the race, swimmer D is disqualified by the Judges then swimmer B finishes in which place
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
(e) 5
Ans: (b)
47. Five houses lettered A,B,C,D, & E are built in a row next to each other. The houses are lined up in the order A,B,C,D, & E. Each of the five houses has a colored chimney. The roof and chimney of each housemust be painted as follows.
i. The roof must be painted either green,red ,or yellow.
ii. The chimney must be painted either white, black, or red.
iii. No house may have the same color chimney as the color of roof.
iv. No house may use any of the same colors that the every next house uses.
v. House E has a green roof.
vi. House B has a red roof and a black chimney
1. Which of the following is true ?
(a) At least two houses have black chimney.
(b) At least two houses have red roofs.
(c) At least two houses have white chimneys
(d) At least two houses have green roofs
(e) At least two houses have yellow roofs
Ans: (c)
2. Which must be false ?
(a) House A has a yellow roof
(b) House A & C have different color chimney
(c) House D has a black chimney
(d) House E has a white chimney
(e) House B&D have the same color roof.
Ans: (b)
3. If house C has a yellow roof. Which must be true.
(a) House E has a white chimney
(b) House E has a black chimney
(c) House E has a red chimney
(d) House D has a red chimney
(e) House C has a black chimney
Ans: (a)
4. Which possible combinations of roof & chimney can house
I. A red roof 7 a black chimney
II. A yellow roof & a red chimney
III. A yellow roof & a black chimney
(a) I only
(b) II only
(c) III only
(d) I & II only
(e) I&II&III
Ans: (e)
48. Find x+2y
(i). x+y=10
(ii). 2x+4y=20
Ans: (b)
49. Is angle BAC is a right angle
(i) AB=2BC
(2) BC=1.5AC
Ans: (e)
50. Is x greater than y
(i) x=2k
(ii) k=2y
Ans: (e)
PART – 3
Aptitude Questions
Solve the following and check with the answers given at the end.
1. It was calculated that 75 men could complete a piece of work in 20 days. When work was scheduled to commence, it was found necessary to send 25 men to another project. How much longer will it take to complete the work?
2. A student divided a number by 2/3 when he required to multiply by 3/2. Calculate the percentage of error in his result.
3. A dishonest shopkeeper professes to sell pulses at the cost price, but he uses a false weight of 950gm. for a kg. His gain is …%.
4. A software engineer has the capability of thinking 100 lines of code in five minutes and can type 100 lines of code in 10 minutes. He takes a break for five minutes after every ten minutes. How many lines of codes will he complete typing after an hour?
5. A man was engaged on a job for 30 days on the condition that he would get a wage of Rs. 10 for the day he works, but he have to pay a fine of Rs. 2 for each day of his absence. If he gets Rs. 216 at the end, he was absent for work for ... days.
6. A contractor agreeing to finish a work in 150 days, employed 75 men each working 8 hours daily. After 90 days, only 2/7 of the work was completed. Increasing the number of men by ________ each working now for 10 hours daily, the work can be completed in time.
7. what is a percent of b divided by b percent of a?
(a) a (b) b (c) 1 (d) 10 (d) 100
8. A man bought a horse and a cart. If he sold the horse at 10 % loss and the cart at 20 % gain, he would not lose anything; but if he sold the horse at 5% loss and the cart at 5% gain, he would lose Rs. 10 in the bargain. The amount paid by him was Rs._______ for the horse and Rs.________ for the cart.
9. A tennis marker is trying to put together a team of four players for a tennis tournament out of seven available. males - a, b and c; females – m, n, o and p. All players are of equal ability and there must be at least two males in the team. For a team of four, all players must be able to play with each other under the following restrictions:
b should not play with m,
c should not play with p, and
a should not play with o.
Which of the following statements must be false?
1. b and p cannot be selected together
2. c and o cannot be selected together
3. c and n cannot be selected together.
10-12. The following figure depicts three views of a cube. Based on this, answer questions 10-12.
6 5 4
1 22 3 6
10. The number on the face opposite to the face carrying 1 is _______ .
11. The number on the faces adjacent to the face marked 5 are _______ .
12. Which of the following pairs does not correctly give the numbers on the opposite faces.
(1) 6,5 (2) 4,1 (3) 1,3 (4) 4,2
13. Five farmers have 7, 9, 11, 13 & 14 apple trees, respectively in their orchards. Last year, each of them discovered that every tree in their own orchard bore exactly the same number of apples. Further, if the third farmer gives one apple to the first, and the fifth gives three to each of the second and the fourth, they would all have exactly the same number of apples. What were the yields per tree in the orchards of the third and fourth farmers?
14. Five boys were climbing a hill. J was following H. R was just ahead of G. K was between G & H. They were climbing up in a column. Who was the second?
15-18 John is undecided which of the four novels to buy. He is considering a spy
thriller, a Murder mystery, a Gothic romance and a science fiction novel. The books are written by Rothko, Gorky, Burchfield and Hopper, not necessary in that order, and published by Heron, Piegon, Blueja and sparrow, not necessary in that order.
(1) The book by Rothko is published by Sparrow.
(2) The Spy thriller is published by Heron.
(3) The science fiction novel is by Burchfield and is not published by Blueja.
(4)The Gothic romance is by Hopper.
15. Pigeon publishes ____________.
16. The novel by Gorky ________________.
17. John purchases books by the authors whose names come first and third in alphabetical order. He does not buy the books ______.
18. On the basis of the first paragraph and statement (2), (3) and (4) only, it is possible to deduce that
1. Rothko wrote the murder mystery or the spy thriller
2. Sparrow published the murder mystery or the spy thriller
3. The book by Burchfield is published by Sparrow.
19. If a light flashes every 6 seconds, how many times will it flash in ¾ of an hour?
20. If point P is on line segment AB, then which of the following is always true?
(1) AP = PB (2) AP > PB (3) PB > AP (4) AB > AP (5) AB > AP + PB
21. All men are vertebrates. Some mammals are vertebrates. Which of the following conclusions drawn from the above statement is correct.
All men are mammals
All mammals are men
Some vertebrates are mammals.
None
22. Which of the following statements drawn from the given statements are correct?
Given:
All watches sold in that shop are of high standard. Some of the HMT watches are sold in that shop.
a) All watches of high standard were manufactured by HMT.
b) Some of the HMT watches are of high standard.
c) None of the HMT watches is of high standard.
d) Some of the HMT watches of high standard are sold in that shop.
23-27.
1. Ashland is north of East Liverpool and west of Coshocton.
2. Bowling green is north of Ashland and west of Fredericktown.
3. Dover is south and east of Ashland.
4. East Liverpool is north of Fredericktown and east of Dover.
5. Fredericktown is north of Dover and west of Ashland.
6. Coshocton is south of Fredericktown and west of Dover.
23. Which of the towns mentioned is furthest of the north – west
(a) Ashland (b) Bowling green (c) Coshocton
(d) East Liverpool (e) Fredericktown
24. Which of the following must be both north and east of Fredericktown?
(a) Ashland (b) Coshocton (c) East Liverpool
I a only II b only III c only IV a & b V a & c
25. Which of the following towns must be situated both south and west of at least one other town?
A. Ashland only
B. Ashland and Fredericktown
C. Dover and Fredericktown
D. Dover, Coshocton and Fredericktown
E. Coshocton, Dover and East Liverpool.
26. Which of the following statements, if true, would make the information in the numbered statements more specific?
(a) Coshocton is north of Dover.
(b) East Liverpool is north of Dover
(c) Ashland is east of Bowling green.
(d) Coshocton is east of Fredericktown
(e) Bowling green is north of Fredericktown
27. Which of the numbered statements gives information that can be deduced from one or more of the other statements?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 6
28. Eight friends Harsha, Fakis, Balaji, Eswar, Dhinesh, Chandra, Geetha, and Ahmed are sitting in a circle facing the center. Balaji is sitting between Geetha and Dhinesh. Harsha is third to the left of Balaji and second to the right of Ahmed. Chandra is sitting between Ahmed and Geetha and Balaji and Eshwar are not sitting opposite to each other. Who is third to the left of Dhinesh?
29. If every alternative letter starting from B of the English alphabet is written in small letter, rest all are written in capital letters, how the month “ September” be written.
(1) SeptEMbEr (2) SEpTeMBEr (3) SeptembeR
(4) SepteMber (5) None of the above.
30. The length of the side of a square is represented by x+2. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle is 2x. If the square and the equilateral triangle have equal perimeter, then the value of x is _______.
31. It takes Mr. Karthik y hours to complete typing a manuscript. After 2 hours, he was called away. What fractional part of the assignment was left incomplete?
32. Which of the following is larger than 3/5?
(1) ½ (2) 39/50 (3) 7/25 (4) 3/10 (5) 59/100
33. The number that does not have a reciprocal is ____________.
34. There are 3 persons Sudhir, Arvind, and Gauri. Sudhir lent cars to Arvind and Gauri as many as they had already. After some time Arvind gave as many cars to Sudhir and Gauri as many as they have. After sometime Gauri did the same thing. At the end of this transaction each one of them had 24. Find the cars each originally had.
35. A man bought a horse and a cart. If he sold the horse at 10 % loss and the cart at 20 % gain, he would not lose anything; but if he sold the horse at 5% loss and the cart at 5% gain, he would lose Rs. 10 in the bargain. The amount paid by him was Rs._______ for the horse and Rs.________ for the cart.
Answers:
1. Answer:
30 days.
Explanation:
Before:
One day work = 1 / 20
One man’s one day work = 1 / ( 20 * 75)
Now:
No. Of workers = 50
One day work = 50 * 1 / ( 20 * 75)
The total no. of days required to complete the work = (75 * 20) / 50 = 30
2. Answer:
0 %
Explanation:
Since 3x / 2 = x / (2 / 3)
3. Answer:
5.3 %
Explanation:
He sells 950 grams of pulses and gains 50 grams.
If he sells 100 grams of pulses then he will gain (50 / 950) *100 = 5.26
4. Answer:
250 lines of codes
5. Answer:
7 days
Explanation:
The equation portraying the given problem is:
10 * x – 2 * (30 – x) = 216 where x is the number of working days.
Solving this we get x = 23
Number of days he was absent was 7 (30-23) days.
6. Answer:
150 men.
Explanation:
One day’s work = 2 / (7 * 90)
One hour’s work = 2 / (7 * 90 * 8)
One man’s work = 2 / (7 * 90 * 8 * 75)
The remaining work (5/7) has to be completed within 60 days, because the total number of days allotted for the project is 150 days.
So we get the equation
(2 * 10 * x * 60) / (7 * 90 * 8 * 75) = 5/7 where x is the number of men working after the 90th day.
We get x = 225
Since we have 75 men already, it is enough to add only 150 men.
7. Answer:
(c) 1
Explanation:
a percent of b : (a/100) * b
b percent of a : (b/100) * a
a percent of b divided by b percent of a : ((a / 100 )*b) / (b/100) * a )) = 1
8. Answer:
Cost price of horse = Rs. 400 & the cost price of cart = 200.
Explanation:-
Let x be the cost price of the horse and y be the cost price of the cart.
In the first sale there is no loss or profit. (i.e.) The loss obtained is equal to the gain.
Therefore (10/100) * x = (20/100) * y
X = 2 * y -----------------(1)
In the second sale, he lost Rs. 10. (i.e.) The loss is greater than the profit by Rs. 10.
Therefore (5 / 100) * x = (5 / 100) * y + 10 -------(2)
Substituting (1) in (2) we get
(10 / 100) * y = (5 / 100) * y + 10
(5 / 100) * y = 10
y = 200
From (1) 2 * 200 = x = 400
9. Answer:
3.
Explanation:
Since inclusion of any male player will reject a female from the team. Since there should be four member in the team and only three males are available, the girl, n should included in the team always irrespective of others selection.
10. Answer:
5
11. Answer:
1,2,3 & 4
12. Answer:
B
13. Answer:
11 & 9 apples per tree.
Explanation:
Let a, b, c, d & e be the total number of apples bored per year in A, B, C, D & E ‘s orchard. Given that a + 1 = b + 3 = c – 1 = d + 3 = e – 6
But the question is to find the number of apples bored per tree in C and D ‘s orchard. If is enough to consider c – 1 = d + 3.
Since the number of trees in C’s orchard is 11 and that of D’s orchard is 13. Let x and y be the number of apples bored per tree in C & d ‘s orchard respectively.
Therefore 11 x – 1 = 13 y + 3
By trial and error method, we get the value for x and y as 11 and 9
14. Answer:
G.
Explanation:
The order in which they are climbing is R – G – K – H – J
15 – 18
Answer:
Novel Name Author Publisher
Spy thriller Rathko Heron
Murder mystery Gorky Piegon
Gothic romance Burchfield Blueja
Science fiction Hopper Sparrow
Explanation:
Given
Novel Name Author Publisher
Spy thriller Rathko Heron
Murder mystery Gorky Piegon
Gothic romance Burchfield Blueja
Science fiction Hopper Sparrow
Since Blueja doesn’t publish the novel by Burchfield and Heron publishes the novel spy thriller, Piegon publishes the novel by Burchfield.
Since Hopper writes Gothic romance and Heron publishes the novel spy thriller, Blueja publishes the novel by Hopper.
Since Heron publishes the novel spy thriller and Heron publishes the novel by Gorky, Gorky writes Spy thriller and Rathko writes Murder mystery.
19. Answer:
451 times.
Explanation:
There are 60 minutes in an hour.
In ¾ of an hour there are (60 * ¾) minutes = 45 minutes.
In ¾ of an hour there are (60 * 45) seconds = 2700 seconds.
Light flashed for every 6 seconds.
In 2700 seconds 2700/6 = 450 times.
The count start after the first flash, the light will flashes 451 times in ¾ of an hour.
20. Answer:
(4)
Explanation:
P
A B
Since p is a point on the line segment AB, AB > AP
21. Answer: (c)
22. Answer: (b) & (d).
Ahmed
23 - 27.Answer:
Fakis Chandra
28. Answer: Fakis
Explanation: Harsha Geetha
Eswar Balaji
Dhinesh
29. Answer:
(5).
Explanation:
Since every alternative letter starting from B of the English alphabet is written in small letter, the letters written in small letter are b, d, f...
In the first two answers the letter E is written in both small & capital letters, so they are not the correct answers. But in third and fourth answers the letter is written in small letter instead capital letter, so they are not the answers.
30. Answer:
x = 4
Explanation:
Since the side of the square is x + 2, its perimeter = 4 (x + 2) = 4x + 8
Since the side of the equilateral triangle is 2x, its perimeter = 3 * 2x = 6x
Also, the perimeters of both are equal.
(i.e.) 4x + 8 = 6x
(i.e.) 2x = 8 è x = 4.
31. Answer:
(y – 2) / y.
Explanation:
To type a manuscript karthik took y hours.
Therefore his speed in typing = 1/y.
He was called away after 2 hours of typing.
Therefore the work completed = 1/y * 2.
Therefore the remaining work to be completed = 1 – 2/y.
(i.e.) work to be completed = (y-2)/y
32. Answer:
(2)
33. Answer:
1
Explanation:
One is the only number exists without reciprocal because the reciprocal of one is one itself.
34. Answer:
Sudhir had 39 cars, Arvind had 21 cars and Gauri had 12 cars.
Explanation:
Sudhir Arvind Gauri
Finally 24 24 24
Before Gauri’s transaction 12 12 48
Before Arvind’s transaction 6 42 24
Before Sudhir’ s transaction 39 21 12
35. Answer:
Cost price of horse: Rs. 400 &
Cost price of cart: Rs. 200
Explanation:
Let x be the cost of horse & y be the cost of the cart.
10 % of loss in selling horse = 20 % of gain in selling the cart
Therefore (10 / 100) * x = (20 * 100) * y
è x = 2y -----------(1)
5 % of loss in selling the horse is 10 more than the 5 % gain in selling the cart.
Therefore (5 / 100) * x - 10 = (5 / 100) * y
è 5x - 1000 = 5y
Substituting (1)
10y - 1000 = 5y
5y = 1000
y = 200
x = 400 from (1)
Exercise 2.1
For the following, find the next term in the series
1. 6, 24, 60,120, 210
a) 336 b) 366 c) 330 d) 660
Answer : a) 336
Explanation : The series is 1.2.3, 2.3.4, 3.4.5, 4.5.6, 5.6.7, ..... ( '.' means product)
2. 1, 5, 13, 25
Answer : 41
Explanation : The series is of the form 0^2+1^2, 1^2+2^2,...
3. 0, 5, 8, 17
Answer : 24
Explanation : 1^2-1, 2^2+1, 3^2-1, 4^2+1, 5^2-1
4. 1, 8, 9, 64, 25 (Hint : Every successive terms are related)
Answer : 216
Explanation : 1^2, 2^3, 3^2, 4^3, 5^2, 6^3
5. 8,24,12,36,18,54
Answer : 27
6. 71,76,69,74,67,72
Answer : 67
7. 5,9,16,29,54
Answer : 103
Explanation : 5*2-1=9; 9*2-2=16; 16*2-3=29; 29*2-4=54; 54*2-5=103
8. 1,2,4,10,16,40,64 (Successive terms are related)
Answer : 200
Explanation : The series is powers of 2 (2^0,2^1,..).
All digits are less than 8. Every second number is in octal number system.
128 should follow 64. 128 base 10 = 200 base 8.
Exercise 2.2
Find the odd man out.
1. 3,5,7,12,13,17,19
Answer : 12
Explanation : All but 12 are odd numbers
2. 2,5,10,17,26,37,50,64
Answer : 64
Explanation : 2+3=5; 5+5=10; 10+7=17; 17+9=26; 26+11=37; 37+13=50; 50+15=65;
3. 105,85,60,30,0,-45,-90
Answer : 0
Explanation : 105-20=85; 85-25=60; 60-30=30; 30-35=-5; -5-40=-45; -45-45=-90;
Exercise 3
Solve the following.
1. What is the number of zeros at the end of the product of the numbers from 1 to 100?
Answer : 127
2. A fast typist can type some matter in 2 hours and a slow typist can type the same in 3 hours. If both type combinely, in how much time will they finish?
Answer : 1 hr 12 min
Explanation : The fast typist's work done in 1 hr = 1/2
The slow typist's work done in 1 hr = 1/3
If they work combinely, work done in 1 hr = 1/2+1/3 = 5/6
So, the work will be completed in 6/5 hours. i.e., 1+1/5 hours = 1hr 12 min
3. Gavaskar's average in his first 50 innings was 50. After the 51st innings, his average was 51. How many runs did he score in his 51st innings. (supposing that he lost his wicket in his 51st innings)
Answer : 101
Explanation : Total score after 50 innings = 50*50 = 2500
Total score after 51 innings = 51*51 = 2601
So, runs made in the 51st innings = 2601-2500 = 101
If he had not lost his wicket in his 51st innings, he would have scored an unbeaten 50 in his 51st innings.
4. Out of 80 coins, one is counterfeit. What is the minimum number of weighings needed to find out the counterfeit coin?
Answer : 4
5. What can you conclude from the statement : All green are blue, all blue are red. ?
(i) some blue are green
(ii) some red are green
(iii) some green are not red
(iv) all red are blue
(a) i or ii but not both
(b) i & ii only
(c) iii or iv but not both
(d) iii & iv
Answer : (b)
6. A rectangular plate with length 8 inches, breadth 11 inches and thickness 2 inches is available. What is the length of the circular rod with diameter 8 inches and equal to the volume of the rectangular plate?
Answer : 3.5 inches
Explanation : Volume of the circular rod (cylinder) = Volume of the rectangular plate
(22/7)*4*4*h = 8*11*2
h = 7/2 = 3.5
7. What is the sum of all numbers between 100 and 1000 which are divisible by 14 ?
Answer : 35392
Explanation : The number closest to 100 which is greater than 100 and divisible by 14 is 112, which is the first term of the series which has to be summed.
The number closest to 1000 which is less than 1000 and divisible by 14 is 994, which is the last term of the series.
112 + 126 + .... + 994 = 14(8+9+ ... + 71) = 35392
8. If s(a) denotes square root of a, find the value of s(12+s(12+s(12+ ...... upto infinity.
Answer : 4
Explanation : Let x = s(12+s(12+s(12+.....
We can write x = s(12+x). i.e., x^2 = 12 + x. Solving this quadratic equation, we get x = -3 or x=4. Sum cannot be -ve and hence sum = 4.
9. A cylindrical container has a radius of eight inches with a height of three inches. Compute how many inches should be added to either the radius or height to give the same increase in volume?
Answer : 16/3 inches
Explanation : Let x be the amount of increase. The volume will increase by the same amount if the radius increased or the height is increased.
So, the effect on increasing height is equal to the effect on increasing the radius.
i.e., (22/7)*8*8*(3+x) = (22/7)*(8+x)*(8+x)*3
Solving the quadratic equation we get the x = 0 or 16/3. The possible increase would be by 16/3 inches.
10. With just six weights and a balance scale, you can weigh any unit number of kgs from 1 to 364. What could be the six weights?
Answer : 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243 (All powers of 3)
11. Diophantus passed one sixth of his life in childhood, one twelfth in youth, and one seventh more as a bachelor; five years after his marriage a son was born who died four years before his father at half his final age. How old is Diophantus?
Answer : 84 years
Explanation : x/6 + x/12 + x/7 + 5 + x/2 + 4 = x
12 . If time at this moment is 9 P.M., what will be the time 23999999992 hours later?
Answer : 1 P.M.
Explanation : 24 billion hours later, it would be 9 P.M. and 8 hours before that it would be 1 P.M.
13. How big will an angle of one and a half degree look through a glass that magnifies things three times?
Answer : 1 1/2 degrees
Explanation : The magnifying glass cannot increase the magnitude of an angle.
14. Divide 45 into four parts such that when 2 is added to the first part, 2 is subtracted from the second part, 2 is multiplied by the third part and the fourth part is divided by two, all result in the same number.
Answer: 8, 12, 5, 20
Explanation: a + b + c + d =45; a+2 = b-2 = 2c = d/2; a=b-4; c = (b-2)/2; d = 2(b-2); b-4 + b + (b-2)/2 + 2(b-2) = 45;
15. I drove 60 km at 30 kmph and then an additional 60 km at 50 kmph. Compute my average speed over my 120 km.
Answer : 37 1/2
Explanation : Time reqd for the first 60 km = 120 min.; Time reqd for the second 60 km = 72 min.; Total time reqd = 192 min
Avg speed = (60*120)/192 = 37 1/2
Questions 16 and 17 are based on the following :
Five executives of European Corporation hold a Conference in Rome
Mr. A converses in Spanish & Italian
Mr. B, a spaniard, knows English also
Mr. C knows English and belongs to Italy
Mr. D converses in French and Spanish
Mr. E , a native of Italy knows French
16. Which of the following can act as interpreter if Mr. C & Mr. D wish to converse
a) only Mr. A b) Only Mr. B c) Mr. A & Mr. B d) Any of the other three
Answer : d) Any of the other three.
Explanation : From the data given, we can infer the following.
A knows Spanish, Italian
B knows Spanish, English
C knows Italian, English
D knows Spanish, French
E knows Italian, French
To act as an interpreter between C and D, a person has to know one of the combinations Italian&Spanish, Italian&French, English&Spanish, English&French
A, B, and E know atleast one of the combinations.
17. If a 6th executive is brought in, to be understood by maximum number of original five he should be fluent in
a) English & French b) Italian & Spanish c) English & French d) French & Italian
Answer : b) Italian & Spanish
Explanation : No of executives who know
i) English is 2
ii) Spanish is 3
iii) Italian is 3
iv) French is 2
Italian & Spanish are spoken by the maximum no of executives. So, if the 6th executive is fluent in Italian & Spanish, he can communicate with all the original five because everybody knows either Spanish or Italian.
18. What is the sum of the first 25 natural odd numbers?
Answer : 625
Explanation : The sum of the first n natural odd nos is square(n).
1+3 = 4 = square(2) 1+3+5 = 9 = square(3)
19. The sum of any seven consecutive numbers is divisible by
a) 2 b) 7 c) 3 d) 11
Exercise 3
Try the following.
1. There are seventy clerks working in a company, of which 30 are females. Also, 30 clerks are married; 24 clerks are above 25 years of age; 19 married clerks are above 25 years, of which 7 are males; 12 males are above 25 years of age; and 15 males are married. How many bachelor girls are there and how many of these are above 25?
2. A man sailed off from the North Pole. After covering 2,000 miles in one direction he turned West, sailed 2,000 miles, turned North and sailed ahead another 2,000 miles till he met his friend. How far was he from the North Pole and in what direction?
3. Here is a series of comments on the ages of three persons J, R, S by themselves.
S : The difference between R's age and mine is three years.
J : R is the youngest.
R : Either I am 24 years old or J 25 or S 26.
J : All are above 24 years of age.
S : I am the eldest if and only if R is not the youngest.
R : S is elder to me.
J : I am the eldest.
R : S is not 27 years old.
S : The sum of my age and J's is two more than twice R's age.
One of the three had been telling a lie throughout whereas others had spoken the truth. Determine the ages of S,J,R.
4. In a group of five people, what is the probability of finding two persons with the same month of birth?
5. A father and his son go out for a 'walk-and-run' every morning around a track formed by an equilateral triangle. The father's walking speed is 2 mph and his running speed is 5 mph. The son's walking and running speeds are twice that of his father. Both start together from one apex of the triangle, the son going clockwise and the father anti-clockwise. Initially the father runs and the son walks for a certain period of time. Thereafter, as soon as the father starts walking, the son starts running. Both complete the course in 45 minutes. For how long does the father run? Where do the two cross each other?
6. The Director of Medical Services was on his annual visit to the ENT Hospital. While going through the out patients' records he came across the following data for a particular day : " Ear consultations 45; Nose 50; Throat 70; Ear and Nose 30; Nose and Throat 20; Ear and Throat 30; Ear, Nose and Throat 10; Total patients 100." Then he came to the conclusion that the records were bogus. Was he right?
7. Amongst Ram, Sham and Gobind are a doctor, a lawyer and a police officer. They are married to Radha, Gita and Sita (not in order). Each of the wives have a profession. Gobind's wife is an artist. Ram is not married to Gita. The lawyer's wife is a teacher. Radha is married to the police officer. Sita is an expert cook. Who's who?
8. What should come next?
1, 2, 4, 10, 16, 40, 64,
Questions 9-12 are based on the following :
Three adults – Roberto, Sarah and Vicky – will be traveling in a van with five children – Freddy, Hillary, Jonathan, Lupe, and Marta. The van has a driver’s seat and one passenger seat in the front, and two benches behind the front seats, one beach behind the other. Each bench has room for exactly three people. Everyone must sit in a seat or on a bench, and seating is subject to the following restrictions: An adult must sit on each bench.
Either Roberto or Sarah must sit in the driver’s seat.
Jonathan must sit immediately beside Marta.
9. Of the following, who can sit in the front passenger seat ?
(a) Jonathan (b) Lupe (c) Roberto (d) Sarah (e) Vicky
10. Which of the following groups of three can sit together on a bench?
(a) Freddy, Jonathan and Marta (b) Freddy, Jonathan and Vicky
(c) Freddy, Sarah and Vicky (d) Hillary, Lupe and Sarah
(e) Lupe, Marta and Roberto
11. If Freddy sits immediately beside Vicky, which of the following cannot be true ?
a. Jonathan sits immediately beside Sarah
b. Lupe sits immediately beside Vicky
c. Hillary sits in the front passenger seat
d. Freddy sits on the same bench as Hillary
e. Hillary sits on the same bench as Roberto
12. If Sarah sits on a bench that is behind where Jonathan is sitting, which of the following must be true ?
a. Hillary sits in a seat or on a bench that is in front of where Marta is sitting
b. Lupe sits in a seat or on a bench that is in front of where Freddy is sitting
c. Freddy sits on the same bench as Hillary
d. Lupe sits on the same bench as Sarah
e. Marta sits on the same bench as Vicky
13. Make six squares of the same size using twelve match-sticks. (Hint : You will need an adhesive to arrange the required figure)
14. A farmer has two rectangular fields. The larger field has twice the length and 4 times the width of the smaller field. If the smaller field has area K, then the are of the larger field is greater than the area of the smaller field by what amount?
(a) 6K (b) 8K (c) 12K (d) 7K
15. Nine equal circles are enclosed in a square whose area is 36sq units. Find the area of each circle.
16. There are 9 cards. Arrange them in a 3*3 matrix. Cards are of 4 colors. They are red, yellow, blue, green. Conditions for arrangement: one red card must be in first row or second row. 2 green cards should be in 3rd column. Yellow cards must be in the 3 corners only. Two blue cards must be in the 2nd row. At least one green card in each row.
17. Is z less than w? z and w are real numbers.
(I) z2 = 25
(II) w = 9
To answer the question,
a) Either I or II is sufficient
b) Both I and II are sufficient but neither of them is alone sufficient
c) I & II are sufficient
d) Both are not sufficient
18. A speaks truth 70% of the time; B speaks truth 80% of the time. What is the probability that both are contradicting each other?
19. In a family 7 children don't eat spinach, 6 don't eat carrot, 5 don't eat beans, 4 don't eat spinach & carrots, 3 don't eat carrot & beans, 2 don't eat beans & spinach. One doesn't eat all 3. Find the no. of children.
20. Anna, Bena, Catherina and Diana are at their monthly business meeting. Their occupations are author, biologist, chemist and doctor, but not necessarily in that order. Diana just told the neighbour, who is a biologist that Catherina was on her way with doughnuts. Anna is sitting across from the doctor and next to the chemist. The doctor was thinking that Bena was a good name for parent's to choose, but didn't say anything. What is each person's occupation?
Java Basics
1.The Java interpreter is used for the execution of the source code.
True
False
Ans: a.
2) On successful compilation a file with the class extension is created.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
3) The Java source code can be created in a Notepad editor.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
4) The Java Program is enclosed in a class definition.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
5) What declarations are required for every Java application?
Ans: A class and the main( ) method declarations.
6) What are the two parts in executing a Java program and their purposes?
Ans: Two parts in executing a Java program are:
Java Compiler and Java Interpreter.
The Java Compiler is used for compilation and the Java Interpreter is used for execution of the application.
7) What are the three OOPs principles and define them?
Ans : Encapsulation, Inheritance and Polymorphism are the three OOPs
Principles.
Encapsulation:
Is the Mechanism that binds together code and the data it manipulates, and keeps both safe from outside interference and misuse.
Inheritance:
Is the process by which one object acquires the properties of another object.
Polymorphism:
Is a feature that allows one interface to be used for a general class of actions.
8) What is a compilation unit?
Ans : Java source code file.
9) What output is displayed as the result of executing the following statement?
System.out.println("// Looks like a comment.");
// Looks like a comment
The statement results in a compilation error
Looks like a comment
No output is displayed
Ans : a.
10) In order for a source code file, containing the public class Test, to successfully compile, which of the following must be true?
It must have a package statement
It must be named Test.java
It must import java.lang
It must declare a public class named Test
Ans : b
11) What are identifiers and what is naming convention?
Ans : Identifiers are used for class names, method names and variable names. An identifier may be any descriptive sequence of upper case & lower case letters,numbers or underscore or dollar sign and must not begin with numbers.
12) What is the return type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : void
13) What is the argument type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : string array.
14) Which characters are as first characters of an identifier?
Ans : A – Z, a – z, _ ,$
15) What are different comments?
Ans : 1) // -- single line comment
2) /* --
*/ multiple line comment
3) /** --
*/ documentation
16) What is the difference between constructor method and method?
Ans : Constructor will be automatically invoked when an object is created. Whereas method has to be call explicitly.
17) What is the use of bin and lib in JDK?
Ans : Bin contains all tools such as javac, applet viewer, awt tool etc., whereas Lib
contains all packages and variables.
Data types,variables and Arrays
1) What is meant by variable?
Ans: Variables are locations in memory that can hold values. Before assigning any value to a variable, it must be declared.
2) What are the kinds of variables in Java? What are their uses?
Ans: Java has three kinds of variables namely, the instance variable, the local variable and the class variable.
Local variables are used inside blocks as counters or in methods as temporary variables and are used to store information needed by a single method.
Instance variables are used to define attributes or the state of a particular object and are used to store information needed by multiple methods in the objects.
Class variables are global to a class and to all the instances of the class and are useful for communicating between different objects of all the same class or keeping track of global states.
3) How are the variables declared?
Ans: Variables can be declared anywhere in the method definition and can be initialized during their declaration.They are commonly declared before usage at the beginning of the definition.
Variables with the same data type can be declared together. Local variables must be given a value before usage.
4) What are variable types?
Ans: Variable types can be any data type that java supports, which includes the eight primitive data types, the name of a class or interface and an array.
5) How do you assign values to variables?
Ans: Values are assigned to variables using the assignment operator =.
6) What is a literal? How many types of literals are there?
Ans: A literal represents a value of a certain type where the type describes how that value behaves.
There are different types of literals namely number literals, character literals,
boolean literals, string literals,etc.
7) What is an array?
Ans: An array is an object that stores a list of items.
8) How do you declare an array?
Ans: Array variable indicates the type of object that the array holds.
Ex: int arr[];
9) Java supports multidimensional arrays.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
10) An array of arrays can be created.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
11) What is a string?
Ans: A combination of characters is called as string.
12) Strings are instances of the class String.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
13) When a string literal is used in the program, Java automatically creates instances of the string class.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
14) Which operator is to create and concatenate string?
Ans: Addition operator(+).
15) Which of the following declare an array of string objects?
String[ ] s;
String [ ]s:
String[ s]:
String s[ ]:
Ans : a, b and d
16) What is the value of a[3] as the result of the following array declaration?
1
2
3
4
Ans : d
17) Which of the following are primitive types?
byte
String
integer
Float
Ans : a.
18) What is the range of the char type?
0 to 216
0 to 215
0 to 216-1
0 to 215-1
Ans. d
19) What are primitive data types?
Ans : byte, short, int, long
float, double
boolean
char
20) What are default values of different primitive types?
Ans : int - 0
short - 0
byte - 0
long - 0 l
float - 0.0 f
double - 0.0 d
boolean - false
char - null
21) Converting of primitive types to objects can be explicitly.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
22) How do we change the values of the elements of the array?
Ans : The array subscript expression can be used to change the values of the elements of the array.
23) What is final varaible?
Ans : If a variable is declared as final variable, then you can not change its value. It becomes constant.
24) What is static variable?
Ans : Static variables are shared by all instances of a class.
Operators
1) What are operators and what are the various types of operators available in Java?
Ans: Operators are special symbols used in expressions.
The following are the types of operators:
Arithmetic operators,
Assignment operators,
Increment & Decrement operators,
Logical operators,
Biwise operators,
Comparison/Relational operators and
Conditional operators
2) The ++ operator is used for incrementing and the -- operator is used for
decrementing.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) Comparison/Logical operators are used for testing and magnitude.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) Character literals are stored as unicode characters.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) What are the Logical operators?
Ans: OR(|), AND(&), XOR(^) AND NOT(~).
6) What is the % operator?
Ans : % operator is the modulo operator or reminder operator. It returns the reminder of dividing the first operand by second operand.
7) What is the value of 111 % 13?
3
5
7
9
Ans : c.
8) Is &&= a valid operator?
Ans : No.
9) Can a double value be cast to a byte?
Ans : Yes
10) Can a byte object be cast to a double value ?
Ans : No. An object cannot be cast to a primitive value.
11) What are order of precedence and associativity?
Ans : Order of precedence the order in which operators are evaluated in expressions.
Associativity determines whether an expression is evaluated left-right or right-left.
12) Which Java operator is right associativity?
Ans : = operator.
13) What is the difference between prefix and postfix of -- and ++ operators?
Ans : The prefix form returns the increment or decrement operation and returns the value of the increment or decrement operation.
The postfix form returns the current value of all of the expression and then
performs the increment or decrement operation on that value.
14) What is the result of expression 5.45 + "3,2"?
The double value 8.6
The string ""8.6"
The long value 8.
The String "5.453.2"
Ans : d
15) What are the values of x and y ?
x = 5; y = ++x;
Ans : x = 6; y = 6
16) What are the values of x and z?
x = 5; z = x++;
Ans : x = 6; z = 5
Control Statements
1) What are the programming constructs?
Ans: a) Sequential
b) Selection -- if and switch statements
c) Iteration -- for loop, while loop and do-while loop
2) class conditional {
public static void main(String args[]) {
int i = 20;
int j = 55;
int z = 0;
z = i < j ? i : j; // ternary operator
System.out.println("The value assigned is " + z);
}
}
What is output of the above program?
Ans: The value assigned is 20
3) The switch statement does not require a break.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
4) The conditional operator is otherwise known as the ternary operator.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) The while loop repeats a set of code while the condition is false.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
6) The do-while loop repeats a set of code atleast once before the condition is tested.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
7) What are difference between break and continue?
Ans: The break keyword halts the execution of the current loop and forces control out of the loop.
The continue is similar to break, except that instead of halting the execution of the loop, it starts the next iteration.
8) The for loop repeats a set of statements a certain number of times until a condition is matched.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) Can a for statement loop indefintely?
Ans : Yes.
10) What is the difference between while statement and a do statement/
Ans : A while statement checks at the beginning of a loop to see whether the next loop iteration should occur.
A do statement checks at the end of a loop to see whether the next iteration of a loop should occur. The do statement will always execute the body of a loop at least once.
Introduction to Classes and Methods
1) Which is used to get the value of the instance variables?
Ans: Dot notation.
2) The new operator creates a single instance named class and returns a
reference to that object.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) A class is a template for multiple objects with similar features.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) What is mean by garbage collection?
Ans: When an object is no longer referred to by any variable, Java automatically
reclaims memory used by that object. This is known as garbage collection.
5) What are methods and how are they defined?
Ans: Methods are functions that operate on instances of classes in which they are defined.Objects can communicate with each other using methods and can call methods in other classes.
Method definition has four parts. They are name of the method, type of object or primitive type the method returns, a list of parameters and the body of the method.
A method's signature is a combination of the first three parts mentioned above.
6) What is calling method?
Ans: Calling methods are similar to calling or referring to an instance variable. These methods are accessed using dot notation.
Ex: obj.methodname(param1,param2)
7) Which method is used to determine the class of an object?
Ans: getClass( ) method can be used to find out what class the belongs to. This class is defined in the object class and is available to all objects.
8) All the classes in java.lang package are automatically imported when
a program is compiled.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) How can class be imported to a program?
Ans: To import a class, the import keyword should be used as shown.;
import classname;
10) How can class be imported from a package to a program?
Ans: import java . packagename . classname (or) import java.package name.*;
11) What is a constructor?
Ans: A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is
initialized when created.
12) Which keyword is used to create an instance of a class?
Ans: new.
13) Which method is used to garbage collect an object?
Ans: finalize ().
14) Constructors can be overloaded like regular methods.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
15) What is casting?
Ans: Casting is bused to convert the value of one type to another.
16) Casting between primitive types allows conversion of one primitive type to another.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
17) Casting occurs commonly between numeric types.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
18) Boolean values can be cast into any other primitive type.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
19) Casting does not affect the original object or value.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
20) Which cast must be used to convert a larger value into a smaller one?
Ans: Explicit cast.
21) Which cast must be used to cast an object to another class?
Ans: Specific cast.
22) Which of the following features are common to both Java & C++?
A.The class declaration
b.The access modifiers
c.The encapsulation of data & methods with in objects
d.The use of pointers
Ans: a,b,c.
23) Which of the following statements accurately describe the use of access modifiers within a class definition?
a.They can be applied to both data & methods
b.They must precede a class's data variables or methods
c.They can follow a class's data variables or methods
d.They can appear in any order
e.They must be applied to data variables first and then to methods
Ans: a,b,d.
24) Suppose a given instance variable has been declared private.
Can this instance variable be manipulated by methods out side its class?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
25) Which of the following statements can be used to describe a public method?
a.It is accessible to all other classes in the hierarchy
b.It is accessablde only to subclasses of its parent class
c.It represents the public interface of its class
d.The only way to gain access to this method is by calling one of the public class
methods
Ans: a,c.
26) Which of the following types of class members can be part of the internal part of a class?
a.Public instance variables
b.Private instance variables
c.Public methods
d.Private methods
Ans: b,d.
27) You would use the ____ operator to create a single instance of a named class.
a.new
b.dot
Ans: a.
28) Which of the following statements correctly describes the relation between an object and the instance variable it stores?
a.Each new object has its own distinctive set of instance variables
b.Each object has a copy of the instance variables of its class
c.the instance variable of each object are seperate from the variables of other objects
d.The instance variables of each object are stored together with the variables of other objects
Ans: a,b,c.
29) If no input parameters are specified in a method declaration then the declaration will include __.
a.an empty set of parantheses
b.the term void
Ans: a.
30) What are the functions of the dot(.) operator?
a.It enables you to access instance variables of any objects within a class
b.It enables you to store values in instance variables of an object
c.It is used to call object methods
d.It is to create a new object
Ans: a,b,c.
31) Which of the following can be referenced by this variable?
a.The instance variables of a class only
b.The methods of a class only
c.The instance variables and methods of a class
Ans: c.
32) The this reference is used in conjunction with ___methods.
a.static
b.non-static
Ans: b.
33) Which of the following operators are used in conjunction with the this and super references?
a.The new operator
b.The instanceof operator
c.The dot operator
Ans: c.
34) A constructor is automatically called when an object is instantiated
a. true
b. false
Ans: a.
35) When may a constructor be called without specifying arguments?
a. When the default constructor is not called
b. When the name of the constructor differs from that of the class
c. When there are no constructors for the class
Ans: c.
36) Each class in java can have a finalizer method
a. true
b.false
Ans: a.
37) When an object is referenced, does this mean that it has been identified by the finalizer method for garbage collection?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
38) Because finalize () belongs to the java.lang.Object class, it is present in all ___.
a.objects
b.classes
c.methods
Ans: b.
39) Identify the true statements about finalization.
a.A class may have only one finalize method
b.Finalizers are mostly used with simple classes
c.Finalizer overloading is not allowed
Ans: a,c.
40) When you write finalize() method for your class, you are overriding a finalizer
inherited from a super class.
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
41) Java memory management mechanism garbage collects objects which are no longer referenced
a true
b.false
Ans: a.
42) are objects referenced by a variable candidates for garbage collection when the variable goes out of scope?
a yes
b. no
Ans: a.
43) Java's garbage collector runs as a ___ priority thread waiting for __priority threads to relinquish the processor.
a.high
b.low
Ans: a,b.
44) The garbage collector will run immediately when the system is out of memory
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
45) You can explicitly drop a object reference by setting the value of a variable whose data type is a reference type to ___
Ans: null
46) When might your program wish to run the garbage collecter?
a. before it enters a compute-intense section of code
b. before it enters a memory-intense section of code
c. before objects are finalized
d. when it knows there will be some idle time
Ans: a,b,d
47) For externalizable objects the class is solely responsible for the external format of its contents
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
48) When an object is stored, are all of the objects that are reachable from that object stored as well?
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
49) The default__ of objects protects private and trancient data, and supports the __ of the classes
a.evolution
b.encoding
Ans: b,a.
50) Which are keywords in Java?
a) NULL
b) sizeof
c) friend
d) extends
e) synchronized
Ans : d and e
51) When must the main class and the file name coincide?
Ans :When class is declared public.
52) What are different modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default, static, trancient, volatile, final, abstract.
53) What are access modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default.
54) What is meant by "Passing by value" and " Passing by reference"?
Ans : objects – pass by referrence
Methods - pass by value
55) Is a class a subclass of itself?
Ans : A class is a subclass itself.
56) What modifiers may be used with top-level class?
Ans : public, abstract, final.
57) What is an example of polymorphism?
Inner class
Anonymous classes
Method overloading
Method overriding
Ans : c
Packages and interface
1) What are packages ? what is use of packages ?
Ans :The package statement defines a name space in which classes are stored.If you omit the package, the classes are put into the default package.
Signature... package pkg;
Use: * It specifies to which package the classes defined in a file belongs to. * Package is both naming and a visibility control mechanism.
2) What is difference between importing "java.applet.Applet" and "java.applet.*;" ?
Ans :"java.applet.Applet" will import only the class Applet from the package java.applet
Where as "java.applet.*" will import all the classes from java.applet package.
3) What do you understand by package access specifier?
Ans : public: Anything declared as public can be accessed from anywhere
private: Anything declared in the private can’t be seen outside of its class.
default: It is visible to subclasses as well as to other classes in the same package.
4) What is interface? What is use of interface?
Ans : It is similar to class which may contain method’s signature only but not bodies.
Methods declared in interface are abstract methods. We can implement many interfaces on a class which support the multiple inheritance.
5) Is it is necessary to implement all methods in an interface?
Ans : Yes. All the methods have to be implemented.
6) Which is the default access modifier for an interface method?
Ans : public.
7) Can we define a variable in an interface ?and what type it should be ?
Ans : Yes we can define a variable in an interface. They are implicitly final and static.
8) What is difference between interface and an abstract class?
Ans : All the methods declared inside an Interface are abstract. Where as abstract class must have at least one abstract method and others may be concrete or abstract.
In Interface we need not use the keyword abstract for the methods.
9) By default, all program import the java.lang package.
True/False
Ans : True
10) Java compiler stores the .class files in the path specified in CLASSPATH
environmental variable.
True/False
Ans : False
11) User-defined package can also be imported just like the standard packages.
True/False
Ans : True
12) When a program does not want to handle exception, the ______class is used.
Ans : Throws
13) The main subclass of the Exception class is _______ class.
Ans : RuntimeException
14) Only subclasses of ______class may be caught or thrown.
Ans : Throwable
15) Any user-defined exception class is a subclass of the _____ class.
Ans : Exception
16) The catch clause of the user-defined exception class should ______ its
Base class catch clause.
Ans : Exception
17) A _______ is used to separate the hierarchy of the class while declaring an
Import statement.
Ans : Package
18) All standard classes of Java are included within a package called _____.
Ans : java.lang
19) All the classes in a package can be simultaneously imported using ____.
Ans : *
20) Can you define a variable inside an Interface. If no, why? If yes, how?
Ans.: YES. final and static
21) How many concrete classes can you have inside an interface?
Ans.: None
22) Can you extend an interface?
Ans.: Yes
23) Is it necessary to implement all the methods of an interface while implementing the interface?
Ans.: No
24) If you do not implement all the methods of an interface while implementing , what specifier should you use for the class ?
Ans.: abstract
25) How do you achieve multiple inheritance in Java?
Ans: Using interfaces.
26) How to declare an interface example?
Ans : access class classname implements interface.
27) Can you achieve multiple interface through interface?
a)True
b) false
Ans : a.
28) Can variables be declared in an interface ? If so, what are the modifiers?
Ans : Yes. final and static are the modifiers can be declared in an interface.
29) What are the possible access modifiers when implementing interface methods?
Ans : public.
30) Can anonymous classes be implemented an interface?
Ans : Yes.
31) Interfaces can’t be extended.
a)True
b)False
Ans : b.
32) Name interfaces without a method?
Ans : Serializable, Cloneble & Remote.
33) Is it possible to use few methods of an interface in a class ? If so, how?
Ans : Yes. Declare the class as abstract.
Exception Handling
1) What is the difference between ‘throw’ and ‘throws’ ?And it’s application?
Ans : Exceptions that are thrown by java runtime systems can be handled by Try and catch blocks. With throw exception we can handle the exceptions thrown by the program itself. If a method is capable of causing an exception that it does not
handle, it must specify this behavior so the callers of the method can guard
against that exception.
2) What is the difference between ‘Exception’ and ‘error’ in java?
Ans : Exception and Error are the subclasses of the Throwable class. Exception class is used for exceptional conditions that user program should catch. With exception class we can subclass to create our own custom exception.
Error defines exceptions that are not excepted to be caught by you program. Example is Stack Overflow.
3) What is ‘Resource leak’?
Ans : Freeing up other resources that might have been allocated at the beginning of a method.
4)What is the ‘finally’ block?
Ans : Finally block will execute whether or not an exception is thrown. If an exception is thrown, the finally block will execute even if no catch statement match the exception. Any time a method is about to return to the caller from inside try/catch block, via an uncaught exception or an explicit return statement, the finally clause is also execute.
5) Can we have catch block with out try block? If so when?
Ans : No. Try/Catch or Try/finally form a unit.
6) What is the difference between the following statements?
Catch (Exception e),
Catch (Error err),
Catch (Throwable t)
Ans :
7) What will happen to the Exception object after exception handling?
Ans : It will go for Garbage Collector. And frees the memory.
8) How many Exceptions we can define in ‘throws’ clause?
Ans : We can define multiple exceptions in throws clause.
Signature is..
type method-name (parameter-list) throws exception-list
9) The finally block is executed when an exception is thrown, even if no catch matches it.
True/False
Ans : True
10) The subclass exception should precede the base class exception when used within the catch clause.
True/False
Ans : True
11) Exceptions can be caught or rethrown to a calling method.
True/False
Ans : True
12) The statements following the throw keyword in a program are not executed.
True/False
Ans : True
13) The toString ( ) method in the user-defined exception class is overridden.
True/False
Ans : True
MULTI THREADING
1) What are the two types of multitasking?
Ans : 1.process-based
2.Thread-based
2) What are the two ways to create the thread?
Ans : 1.by implementing Runnable
2.by extending Thread
3) What is the signature of the constructor of a thread class?
Ans : Thread(Runnable threadob,String threadName)
4) What are all the methods available in the Runnable Interface?
Ans : run()
5) What is the data type for the method isAlive() and this method is
available in which class?
Ans : boolean, Thread
6) What are all the methods available in the Thread class?
Ans : 1.isAlive()
2.join()
3.resume()
4.suspend()
5.stop()
6.start()
7.sleep()
8.destroy()
7) What are all the methods used for Inter Thread communication and what is the class in which these methods are defined?
Ans :1. wait(),notify() & notifyall()
2. Object class
8) What is the mechanisam defind by java for the Resources to be used by only one Thread at a time?
Ans : Synchronisation
9) What is the procedure to own the moniter by many threads?
Ans : not possible
10) What is the unit for 1000 in the below statement?
ob.sleep(1000)
Ans : long milliseconds
11) What is the data type for the parameter of the sleep() method?
Ans : long
12) What are all the values for the following level?
max-priority
min-priority
normal-priority
Ans : 10,1,5
13) What is the method available for setting the priority?
Ans : setPriority()
14) What is the default thread at the time of starting the program?
Ans : main thread
15) The word synchronized can be used with only a method.
True/ False
Ans : False
16) Which priority Thread can prompt the lower primary Thread?
Ans : Higher Priority
17) How many threads at a time can access a monitor?
Ans : one
18) What are all the four states associated in the thread?
Ans : 1. new 2. runnable 3. blocked 4. dead
19) The suspend()method is used to teriminate a thread?
True /False
Ans : False
20) The run() method should necessary exists in clases created as subclass of thread?
True /False
Ans : True
21) When two threads are waiting on each other and can't proceed the programe is said to be in a deadlock?
True/False
Ans : True
22) Which method waits for the thread to die ?
Ans : join() method
23) Which of the following is true?
1) wait(),notify(),notifyall() are defined as final & can be called only from with in a synchronized method
2) Among wait(),notify(),notifyall() the wait() method only throws IOException
3) wait(),notify(),notifyall() & sleep() are methods of object class
1
2
3
1 & 2
1,2 & 3
Ans : D
24) Garbage collector thread belongs to which priority?
Ans : low-priority
25) What is meant by timeslicing or time sharing?
Ans : Timeslicing is the method of allocating CPU time to individual threads in a priority schedule.
26) What is meant by daemon thread? In java runtime, what is it's role?
Ans : Daemon thread is a low priority thread which runs intermittently in the background doing the garbage collection operation for the java runtime system.
Inheritance
1) What is the difference between superclass & subclass?
Ans : A super class is a class that is inherited whereas subclass is a class that does the inheriting.
2) Which keyword is used to inherit a class?
Ans : extends
3) Subclasses methods can access superclass members/ attributes at all times?
True/False
Ans : False
4) When can subclasses not access superclass members?
Ans : When superclass is declared as private.
5) Which class does begin Java class hierarchy?
Ans : Object class
6) Object class is a superclass of all other classes?
True/False
Ans : True
7) Java supports multiple inheritance?
True/False
Ans : False
8) What is inheritance?
Ans : Deriving an object from an existing class. In the other words, Inheritance is the process of inheriting all the features from a class
9) What are the advantages of inheritance?
Ans : Reusability of code and accessibility of variables and methods of the superclass by subclasses.
10) Which method is used to call the constructors of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super(argument)
11) Which is used to execute any method of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super.method-name(arguments)
12) Which methods are used to destroy the objects created by the constructor methods?
Ans : finalize()
13) What are abstract classes?
Ans : Abstract classes are those for which instances can’t be created.
14) What must a class do to implement an interface?
Ans: It must provide all of the methods in the interface and identify the interface in its implements clause.
15) Which methods in the Object class are declared as final?
Ans : getClass(), notify(), notifyAll(), and wait()
16) Final methods can be overridden.
True/False
Ans : False
17) Declaration of methods as final results in faster execution of the program?
True/False
Ans: True
18) Final variables should be declared in the beginning?
True/False
Ans : True
19) Can we declare variable inside a method as final variables? Why?
Ans : Cannot because, local variable cannot be declared as final variables.
20) Can an abstract class may be final?
Ans : An abstract class may not be declared as final.
21) Does a class inherit the constructors of it's super class?
Ans: A class does not inherit constructors from any of it's super classes.
22) What restrictions are placed on method overloading?
Ans: Two methods may not have the same name and argument list but different return types.
23) What restrictions are placed on method overriding?
Ans : Overridden methods must have the same name , argument list , and return type. The overriding method may not limit the access of the method it overridees.The overriding method may not throw any exceptions that may not be thrown by the overridden method.
24) What modifiers may be used with an inner class that is a member of an outer class?
Ans : a (non-local) inner class may be declared as public, protected, private, static, final or abstract.
25) How this() is used with constructors?
Ans: this() is used to invoke a constructor of the same class
26) How super() used with constructors?
Ans : super() is used to invoke a super class constructor
27) Which of the following statements correctly describes an interface?
a)It's a concrete class
b)It's a superclass
c)It's a type of abstract class
Ans: c
28) An interface contains __ methods
a)Non-abstract
b)Implemented
c)unimplemented
Ans:c
STRING HANDLING
Which package does define String and StringBuffer classes?
Ans : java.lang package.
Which method can be used to obtain the length of the String?
Ans : length( ) method.
How do you concatenate Strings?
Ans : By using " + " operator.
Which method can be used to compare two strings for equality?
Ans : equals( ) method.
Which method can be used to perform a comparison between strings that ignores case differences?
Ans : equalsIgnoreCase( ) method.
What is the use of valueOf( ) method?
Ans : valueOf( ) method converts data from its internal format into a human-readable form.
What are the uses of toLowerCase( ) and toUpperCase( ) methods?
Ans : The method toLowerCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from uppercase to
lowercase.
The method toUpperCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from lowercase to
uppercase.
Which method can be used to find out the total allocated capacity of a StrinBuffer?
Ans : capacity( ) method.
Which method can be used to set the length of the buffer within a StringBuffer object?
Ans : setLength( ).
What is the difference between String and StringBuffer?
Ans : String objects are constants, whereas StringBuffer objects are not.
String class supports constant strings, whereas StringBuffer class supports growable, modifiable strings.
What are wrapper classes?
Ans : Wrapper classes are classes that allow primitive types to be accessed as objects.
Which of the following is not a wrapper class?
String
Integer
Boolean
Character
Ans : a.
What is the output of the following program?
public class Question {
public static void main(String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
String s3 = s1.concat(s2.toUpperCase( ) );
System.out.println(s1+s2+s3);
}
}
abcdefabcdef
abcabcDEFDEF
abcdefabcDEF
None of the above
ANS : c.
Which of the following methods are methods of the String class?
delete( )
append( )
reverse( )
replace( )
Ans : d.
Which of the following methods cause the String object referenced by s to be changed?
s.concat( )
s.toUpperCase( )
s.replace( )
s.valueOf( )
Ans : a and b.
String is a wrapper class?
True
False
Ans : b.
17) If you run the code below, what gets printed out?
String s=new String("Bicycle");
int iBegin=1;
char iEnd=3;
System.out.println(s.substring(iBegin,iEnd));
Bic
ic
c) icy
d) error: no method matching substring(int,char)
Ans : b.
18) Given the following declarations
String s1=new String("Hello")
String s2=new String("there");
String s3=new String();
Which of the following are legal operations?
s3=s1 + s2;
s3=s1 - s2;
c) s3=s1 & s2
d) s3=s1 && s2
Ans : a.
19) Which of the following statements are true?
The String class is implemented as a char array, elements are addressed using the stringname[] convention
b) Strings are a primitive type in Java that overloads the + operator for concatenation
c) Strings are a primitive type in Java and the StringBuffer is used as the matching wrapper type
d) The size of a string can be retrieved using the length property.
Ans : b.
EXPLORING JAVA.LANG
java.lang package is automatically imported into all programs.
True
False
Ans : a
What are the interfaces defined by java.lang?
Ans : Cloneable, Comparable and Runnable.
What are the constants defined by both Flaot and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE,
NaN,
POSITIVE_INFINITY,
NEGATIVE_INFINITY and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by Byte, Short, Integer and Long?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by both Float and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_RADIX,
MIN_RADIX,
MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What is the purpose of the Runtime class?
Ans : The purpose of the Runtime class is to provide access to the Java runtime system.
What is the purpose of the System class?
Ans : The purpose of the System class is to provide access to system resources.
Which class is extended by all other classes?
Ans : Object class is extended by all other classes.
Which class can be used to obtain design information about an object?
Ans : The Class class can be used to obtain information about an object’s design.
Which method is used to calculate the absolute value of a number?
Ans : abs( ) method.
What are E and PI?
Ans : E is the base of the natural logarithm and PI is the mathematical value pi.
Which of the following classes is used to perform basic console I/O?
System
SecurityManager
Math
Runtime
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Class class is the superclass of the Object class.
The Object class is final.
The Class class can be used to load other classes.
The ClassLoader class can be used to load other classes.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following methods are methods of the Math class?
absolute( )
log( )
cosine( )
sine( )
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true about the Error and Exception classes?
Both classes extend Throwable.
The Error class is final and the Exception class is not.
The Exception class is final and the Error is not.
Both classes implement Throwable.
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Void class extends the Class class.
The Float class extends the Double class.
The System class extends the Runtime class.
The Integer class extends the Number class.
Ans : d.
17) Which of the following will output -4.0
System.out.println(Math.floor(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.round(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.ceil(-4.7));
d) System.out.println(Math.Min(-4.7));
Ans : c.
18) Which of the following are valid statements
a) public class MyCalc extends Math
b) Math.max(s);
c) Math.round(9.99,1);
d) Math.mod(4,10);
e) None of the above.
Ans : e.
19) What will happen if you attempt to compile and run the following code?
Integer ten=new Integer(10);
Long nine=new Long (9);
System.out.println(ten + nine);
int i=1;
System.out.println(i + ten);
19 followed by 20
19 followed by 11
Error: Can't convert java lang Integer
d) 10 followed by 1
Ans : c.
INPUT / OUTPUT : EXPLORING JAVA.IO
What is meant by Stream and what are the types of Streams and classes of the Streams?
Ans : A Stream is an abstraction that either produces or consumes information.
There are two types of Streams. They are:
Byte Streams : Byte Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of bytes.
Character Streams : Character Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of characters.
Byte Stream classes : Byte Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are:InputStream and OutputStream.
Character Stream classes : Character Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are : Reader and Writer.
Which of the following statements are true?
UTF characters are all 8-bits.
UTF characters are all 16-bits.
UTF characters are all 24-bits.
Unicode characters are all 16-bits.
Bytecode characters are all 16-bits.
Ans : d.
Which of the following statements are true?
When you construct an instance of File, if you do not use the filenaming semantics of the local machine, the constructor will throw an IOException.
When you construct an instance of File, if the corresponding file does not exist on the local file system, one will be created.
When an instance of File is garbage collected, the corresponding file on the local file system is deleted.
None of the above.
Ans : a,b and c.
The File class contains a method that changes the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : b.
It is possible to use the File class to list the contents of the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : a.
Readers have methods that can read and return floats and doubles.
True
False
Ans : b.
You execute the code below in an empty directory. What is the result?
File f1 = new File("dirname");
File f2 = new File(f1, "filename");
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory.
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory. A new file called filename is created in directory dirname.
A new directory called dirname and a new file called filename are created, both in the current working directory.
A new file called filename is created in the current working directory.
No directory is created, and no file is created.
Ans : e.
What is the difference between the Reader/Writer class hierarchy and the
InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy?
Ans : The Reader/Writer class hierarchy is character-oriented and the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy is byte-oriented.
What is an I/O filter?
Ans : An I/O filter is an object that reads from one stream and writes to another, usually altering the data in some way as it is passed from one stream to another.
What is the purpose of the File class?
Ans : The File class is used to create objects that provide access to the files and directories of a local file system.
What interface must an object implement before it can be written to a stream as an object?
Ans : An object must implement the Serializable or Externalizable interface before it can be written to a stream as an object.
What is the difference between the File and RandomAccessFile classes?
Ans : The File class encapsulates the files and directories of the local file system. The RandomAccessFile class provides the methods needed to directly access data contained in any part of a file.
What class allows you to read objects directly from a stream?
Ans : The ObjectInputStream class supports the reading of objects from input streams.
What value does read( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The read( ) method returns – 1 when it has reached the end of a file.
What value does readLine( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The readLine( ) method returns null when it has reached the end of a file.
How many bits are used to represent Unicode, ASCII, UTF-16 and UTF-8 characters?
Ans : Unicode requires 16-bits and ASCII requires 8-bits. Although the ASCII character set uses only 1-bits, it is usually represented as 8-bits. UTF-8 represents characters using 8, 16 and 18-bit patterns. UTF-16 uses 16-bit and larger bit patterns.
Which of the following are true?
The InputStream and OutputStream classes are byte-oriented.
The ObjectInputStream and ObjectOutputStream do not support serialized object input and output.
The Reader and Writer classes are character-oriented.
The Reader and Writer classes are the preferred solution to serialized object output.
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are true about I/O filters?
Filters are supported on input, but not on output.
Filters are supported by the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy, but not by the Reader/Writer class hierarchy.
Filters read from one stream and write to another.
A filter may alter data that is read from one stream and written to another.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following are true?
Any Unicode character is represented using 16-bits.
7-bits are needed to represent any ASCII character.
UTF-8 characters are represented using only 8-bits.
UTF-16 characters are represented using only 16-bits.
Ans : a and b.
Which of the following are true?
The Serializable interface is used to identify objects that may be written to an output stream.
The Externalizable interface is implemented by classes that control the way in which their objects are serialized.
The Serializable interface extends the Externalizable interface.
The Externalizable interface extends the Serializable interface.
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true about the File class?
A File object can be used to change the current working directory.
A File object can be used to access the files in the current directory.
When a File object is created, a corresponding directory or file is created in the local file system.
File objects are used to access files and directories on the local file system.
File objects can be garbage collected.
When a File object is garbage collected, the corresponding file or directory is deleted.
Ans : b, d and e.
How do you create a Reader object from an InputStream object?
Use the static createReader( ) method of InputStream class.
Use the static createReader( ) method of Reader class.
Create an InputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the InputStreamReader constructor.
Create an OutputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the OutputStreamReader constructor.
Ans : c.
Which of the following are true?
Writer classes can be used to write characters to output streams using different character encodings.
Writer classes can be used to write Unicode characters to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of the values of any Java primitive type to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of objects to output streams.
Ans : a and b.
The isFile( ) method returns a boolean value depending on whether the file object is a file or a directory.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
Reading or writing can be done even after closing the input/output source.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The ________ method helps in clearing the buffer.
Ans : flush( ).
The System.err method is used to print error message.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What is meant by StreamTokenizer?
Ans : StreamTokenizer breaks up InputStream into tokens that are delimited by sets of characters.
It has the constructor : StreamTokenizer(Reader inStream).
Here inStream must be some form of Reader.
What is Serialization and deserialization?
Ans : Serialization is the process of writing the state of an object to a byte stream.
Deserialization is the process of restoring these objects.
30) Which of the following can you perform using the File class?
a) Change the current directory
b) Return the name of the parent directory
c) Delete a file
d) Find if a file contains text or binary information
Ans : b and c.
31)How can you change the current working directory using an instance of the File class called FileName?
FileName.chdir("DirName").
FileName.cd("DirName").
FileName.cwd("DirName").
The File class does not support directly changing the current directory.
Ans : d.
EVENT HANDLING
The event delegation model, introduced in release 1.1 of the JDK, is fully compatible with the
event model.
True
False
Ans : b.
A component subclass that has executed enableEvents( ) to enable processing of a certain kind of event cannot also use an adapter as a listener for the same kind of event.
True
False
Ans : b.
What is the highest-level event class of the event-delegation model?
Ans : The java.util.eventObject class is the highest-level class in the event-delegation hierarchy.
What interface is extended by AWT event listeners?
Ans : All AWT event listeners extend the java.util.EventListener interface.
What class is the top of the AWT event hierarchy?
Ans : The java.awt.AWTEvent class is the highest-level class in the AWT event class hierarchy.
What event results from the clicking of a button?
Ans : The ActionEvent event is generated as the result of the clicking of a button.
What is the relationship between an event-listener interface and an event-adapter class?
Ans : An event-listener interface defines the methods that must be implemented by an event
handler for a particular kind of event.
An event adapter provides a default implementation of an event-listener interface.
In which package are most of the AWT events that support the event-delegation model defined?
Ans : Most of the AWT–related events of the event-delegation model are defined in the
java.awt.event package. The AWTEvent class is defined in the java.awt package.
What is the advantage of the event-delegation model over the earlier event-inheritance model?
Ans : The event-delegation has two advantages over the event-inheritance model. They are :
It enables event handling by objects other than the ones that generate the events. This
allows a clean separation between a component’s design and its use.
It performs much better in applications where many events are generated. This
performance improvement is due to the fact that the event-delegation model does not
have to repeatedly process unhandled events, as is the case of the event-inheritance
model.
What is the purpose of the enableEvents( ) method?
Ans :The enableEvents( ) method is used to enable an event for a particular object.
Which of the following are true?
The event-inheritance model has replaced the event-delegation model.
The event-inheritance model is more efficient than the event-delegation model.
The event-delegation model uses event listeners to define the methods of event-handling classes.
The event-delegation model uses the handleEvent( ) method to support event handling.
Ans : c.
Which of the following is the highest class in the event-delegation model?
java.util.EventListener
java.util.EventObject
java.awt.AWTEvent
java.awt.event.AWTEvent
Ans : b.
When two or more objects are added as listeners for the same event, which listener is first invoked to handle the event?
The first object that was added as listener.
The last object that was added as listener.
There is no way to determine which listener will be invoked first.
It is impossible to have more than one listener for a given event.
Ans : c.
Which of the following components generate action events?
Buttons
Labels
Check boxes
Windows
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
A TextField object may generate an ActionEvent.
A TextArea object may generate an ActionEvent.
A Button object may generate an ActionEvent.
A MenuItem object may generate an ActionEvent.
Ans : a,c and d.
Which of the following are true?
The MouseListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseMotionListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseClickListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The ActionListener interface defines methods for handling the clicking of a button.
Ans : a and d.
Suppose that you want to have an object eh handle the TextEvent of a TextArea object t. How should you add eh as the event handler for t?
t.addTextListener(eh);
eh.addTextListener(t);
addTextListener(eh.t);
addTextListener(t,eh);
Ans : a.
What is the preferred way to handle an object’s events in Java 2?
Override the object’s handleEvent( ) method.
Add one or more event listeners to handle the events.
Have the object override its processEvent( ) methods.
Have the object override its dispatchEvent( ) methods.
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true?
A component may handle its own events by adding itself as an event listener.
A component may handle its own events by overriding its event-dispatching method.
A component may not handle oits own events.
A component may handle its own events only if it implements the handleEvent( ) method.
Ans : a and b.
APPLETS
What is an Applet? Should applets have constructors?
Ans : Applet is a dynamic and interactive program that runs inside a Web page
displayed by a Java capable browser. We don’t have the concept of Constructors in Applets.
How do we read number information from my applet’s parameters, given that Applet’s getParameter() method returns a string?
Ans : Use the parseInt() method in the Integer Class, the Float(String) constructor in the
Class Float, or the Double(String) constructor in the class Double.
How can I arrange for different applets on a web page to communicate with each other?
Ans : Name your applets inside the Applet tag and invoke AppletContext’s getApplet()
method in your applet code to obtain references to the other applets on the page.
How do I select a URL from my Applet and send the browser to that page?
Ans : Ask the applet for its applet context and invoke showDocument() on that context object.
Eg. URL targetURL;
String URLString
AppletContext context = getAppletContext();
try{
targetUR L = new URL(URLString);
} catch (Malformed URLException e){
// Code for recover from the exception
}
context. showDocument (targetURL);
Can applets on different pages communicate with each other?
Ans : No. Not Directly. The applets will exchange the information at one meeting place
either on the local file system or at remote system.
How do Applets differ from Applications?
Ans : Appln: Stand Alone
Applet: Needs no explicit installation on local m/c.
Appln: Execution starts with main() method.
Applet: Execution starts with init() method.
Appln: May or may not be a GUI
Applet: Must run within a GUI (Using AWT)
How do I determine the width and height of my application?
Ans : Use the getSize() method, which the Applet class inherits from the Component
class in the Java.awt package. The getSize() method returns the size of the applet as
a Dimension object, from which you extract separate width, height fields.
Eg. Dimension dim = getSize ();
int appletwidth = dim.width ();
8) What is AppletStub Interface?
Ans : The applet stub interface provides the means by which an applet and the browser communicate. Your code will not typically implement this interface.
It is essential to have both the .java file and the .html file of an applet in the same
directory.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The tag contains two attributes namely _________ and _______.
Ans : Name , value.
Passing values to parameters is done in the _________ file of an applet.
Ans : .html.
12) What tags are mandatory when creating HTML to display an applet
name, height, width
code, name
codebase, height, width
d) code, height, width
Ans : d.
Applet’s getParameter( ) method can be used to get parameter values.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the Applet’s Life Cycle methods? Explain them?
Ans : init( ) method - Can be called when an applet is first loaded.
start( ) method - Can be called each time an applet is started.
paint( ) method - Can be called when the applet is minimized or refreshed.
stop( ) method - Can be called when the browser moves off the applet’s page.
destroy( ) method - Can be called when the browser is finished with the applet.
What are the Applet’s information methods?
Ans : getAppletInfo( ) method : Returns a string describing the applet, its author ,copy
right information, etc.
getParameterInfo( ) method : Returns an array of string describing the applet’s parameters.
All Applets are subclasses of Applet.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
All Applets must import java.applet and java.awt.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the steps involved in Applet development?
Ans : a) Edit a Java source file,
b) Compile your program and
c) Execute the appletviewer, specifying the name of your applet’s source file.
Applets are executed by the console based Java run-time interpreter.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
Which classes and interfaces does Applet class consist?
Ans : Applet class consists of a single class, the Applet class and three interfaces: AppletContext,
AppletStub and AudioClip.
What is the sequence for calling the methods by AWT for applets?
Ans : When an applet begins, the AWT calls the following methods, in this sequence.
init( )
start( )
paint( )
When an applet is terminated, the following sequence of method cals takes place :
stop( )
destroy( )
Which method is used to output a string to an applet?
Ans : drawString ( ) method.
Every color is created from an RGB value.
True.
False
Ans : a.
AWT : WINDOWS, GRAPHICS AND FONTS
How would you set the color of a graphics context called g to cyan?
g.setColor(Color.cyan);
g.setCurrentColor(cyan);
g.setColor("Color.cyan");
g.setColor("cyan’);
g.setColor(new Color(cyan));
Ans : a.
The code below draws a line. What color is the line?
g.setColor(Color.red.green.yellow.red.cyan);
g.drawLine(0, 0, 100,100);
Red
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Ans : d.
What does the following code draw?
g.setColor(Color.black);
g.drawLine(10, 10, 10, 50);
g.setColor(Color.RED);
g.drawRect(100, 100, 150, 150);
A red vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A red vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 100 pixel
Ans : b.
Which of the statements below are true?
A polyline is always filled.
b) A polyline can not be filled.
c) A polygon is always filled.
d) A polygon is always closed
e) A polygon may be filled or not filled
Ans : b, d and e.
What code would you use to construct a 24-point bold serif font?
new Font(Font.SERIF, 24,Font.BOLD);
new Font("SERIF", 24, BOLD");
new Font("BOLD ", 24,Font.SERIF);
new Font("SERIF", Font.BOLD,24);
new Font(Font.SERIF, "BOLD", 24);
Ans : d.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
The string "question #6", with its top-left corner at 10,0
A little squiggle coming down from the top of the component, a little way in from the left edge
Ans : b.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
A circle at (100, 100) with radius of 44
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 100
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 44
The code does not compile
Ans : d.
8)What is relationship between the Canvas class and the Graphics class?
Ans : A Canvas object provides access to a Graphics object via its paint( ) method.
What are the Component subclasses that support painting.
Ans : The Canvas, Frame, Panel and Applet classes support painting.
What is the difference between the paint( ) and repaint( ) method?
Ans : The paint( ) method supports painting via a Graphics object. The repaint( ) method is used
to cause paint( ) to be invoked by the AWT painting method.
What is the difference between the Font and FontMetrics classes?
Ans : The FontMetrics class is used to define implementation-specific properties, such as ascent
and descent, of a Font object.
Which of the following are passed as an argument to the paint( ) method?
A Canvas object
A Graphics object
An Image object
A paint object
Ans : b.
Which of the following methods are invoked by the AWT to support paint and repaint operations?
paint( )
repaint( )
draw( )
redraw( )
Ans : a.
Which of the following classes have a paint( ) method?
Canvas
Image
Frame
Graphics
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are methods of the Graphics class?
drawRect( )
drawImage( )
drawPoint( )
drawString( )
Ans : a, b and d.
Which Font attributes are available through the FontMetrics class?
ascent
leading
case
height
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true?
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been minimized and then maximized.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been covered and then uncovered.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when application data is changed.
The AWT does not support repainting operations.
Ans : a and b.
Which method is used to size a graphics object to fit the current size of the window?
Ans : getSize( ) method.
What are the methods to be used to set foreground and background colors?
Ans : setForeground( ) and setBackground( ) methods.
19) You have created a simple Frame and overridden the paint method as follows
public void paint(Graphics g){
g.drawString("Dolly",50,10);
}
What will be the result when you attempt to compile and run the program?
The string "Dolly" will be displayed at the centre of the frame
b) An error at compilation complaining at the signature of the paint method
c) The lower part of the word Dolly will be seen at the top of the form, with the top hidden.
d) The string "Dolly" will be shown at the bottom of the form
Ans : c.
20) Where g is a graphics instance what will the following code draw on the screen.
g.fillArc(45,90,50,50,90,180);
a) An arc bounded by a box of height 45, width 90 with a centre point of 50,50, starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
b) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a centre point of 45,90 starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees clockwise.
c) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a top left at coordinates of 45,
90, starting at 90 degrees and traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
d) An arc starting at 45 degrees, traversing through 90 degrees clockwise bounded by a
box of height 50, width 50 with a centre point of 90, 180.
Ans : c.
21) Given the following code
import java.awt.*;
public class SetF extends Frame{
public static void main(String argv[]){
SetF s = new SetF();
s.setSize(300,200);
s.setVisible(true);
}
}
How could you set the frame surface color to pink
a)s.setBackground(Color.pink);
b)s.setColor(PINK);
c)s.Background(pink);
d)s.color=Color.pink
Ans : a.
AWT: CONTROLS, LAYOUT MANAGERS AND MENUS
What is meant by Controls and what are different types of controls?
Ans : Controls are componenets that allow a user to interact with your application.
The AWT supports the following types of controls:
Labels
Push buttons
Check boxes
Choice lists
Lists
Scroll bars
Text components
These controls are subclasses of Component.
You want to construct a text area that is 80 character-widths wide and 10 character-heights tall. What code do you use?
new TextArea(80, 10)
new TextArea(10, 80)
Ans: b.
A text field has a variable-width font. It is constructed by calling new
TextField("iiiii"). What happens if you change the contents of the text field to
"wwwww"? (Bear in mind that is one of the narrowest characters, and w is one of the widest.)
The text field becomes wider.
The text field becomes narrower.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the ß and à keys.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the text field’s horizontal scroll bar.
Ans : c.
The CheckboxGroup class is a subclass of the Component class.
True
False
Ans : b.
5) What are the immediate super classes of the following classes?
a) Container class
b) MenuComponent class
c) Dialog class
d) Applet class
e) Menu class
Ans : a) Container - Component
b) MenuComponent - Object
c) Dialog - Window
d) Applet - Panel
e) Menu - MenuItem
6) What are the SubClass of Textcomponent Class?
Ans : TextField and TextArea
7) Which method of the component class is used to set the position and the size of a component?
Ans : setBounds()
8) Which TextComponent method is used to set a TextComponent to the read-only state?
Ans : setEditable()
9) How can the Checkbox class be used to create a radio button?
Ans : By associating Checkbox objects with a CheckboxGroup.
10) What Checkbox method allows you to tell if a Checkbox is checked?
Ans : getState()
11) Which Component method is used to access a component's immediate Container?
getVisible()
getImmediate
getParent()
getContainer
Ans : c.
12) What methods are used to get and set the text label displayed by a Button object?
Ans : getLabel( ) and setLabel( )
13) What is the difference between a Choice and a List?
Ans : A Choice is displayed in a compact form that requires you to pull it down to see the list of available choices. Only one item may be selected from a Choice.
A List may be displayed in such a way that several List items are visible. A List supports the selection of one or more List items.
14) Which Container method is used to cause a container to be laid out and redisplayed?
Ans : validate( )
15) What is the difference between a Scollbar and a Scrollpane?
Ans : A Scrollbar is a Component, but not a Container.
A Scrollpane is a Container and handles its own events and performs its own
scrolling.
16) Which Component subclass is used for drawing and painting?
Ans : Canvas.
17) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Component?
Button
Label
CheckboxMenuItem
Toolbar
Frame
Ans : a, b and e.
18) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Container?
Frame
TextArea
MenuBar
FileDialog
Applet
Ans : a,d and e.
19) Which method is used to set the text of a Label object?
setText( )
setLabel( )
setTextLabel( )
setLabelText( )
Ans : a.
20) Which constructor creates a TextArea with 10 rows and 20 columns?
new TextArea(10, 20)
new TextArea(20, 10)
new TextArea(new Rows(10), new columns(20))
new TextArea(200)
Ans : a.
(Usage is TextArea(rows, columns)
21) Which of the following creates a List with 5 visible items and multiple selection enabled?
new List(5, true)
new List(true, 5)
new List(5, false)
new List(false,5)
Ans : a.
[Usage is List(rows, multipleMode)]
22) Which are true about the Container class?
The validate( ) method is used to cause a Container to be laid out and redisplayed.
The add( ) method is used to add a Component to a Container.
The getBorder( ) method returns information about a Container’s insets.
The getComponent( ) method is used to access a Component that is contained in a Container.
Ans : a, b and d.
23) Suppose a Panel is added to a Frame and a Button is added to the Panel. If the Frame’s font is set to 12-point TimesRoman, the Panel’s font is set to 10-point TimesRoman, and the Button’s font is not set, what font will be used to dispaly the Button’s label?
12-point TimesRoman
11-point TimesRoman
10-point TimesRoman
9-point TimesRoman
Ans : c.
A Frame’s background color is set to Color.Yellow, and a Button’s background color is to Color.Blue. Suppose the Button is added to a Panel, which is added to the Frame. What background color will be used with the Panel?
Colr.Yellow
Color.Blue
Color.Green
Color.White
Ans : a.
25) Which method will cause a Frame to be displayed?
show( )
setVisible( )
display( )
displayFrame( )
Ans : a and b.
26) All the componenet classes and container classes are derived from _________ class.
Ans : Object.
27) Which method of the container class can be used to add components to a Panel.
Ans : add ( ) method.
28) What are the subclasses of the Container class?
Ans : The Container class has three major subclasses. They are :
Window
Panel
ScrollPane
29) The Choice component allows multiple selection.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
30) The List component does not generate any events.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
31) Which components are used to get text input from the user.
Ans : TextField and TextArea.
32) Which object is needed to group Checkboxes to make them exclusive?
Ans : CheckboxGroup.
33) Which of the following components allow multiple selections?
Non-exclusive Checkboxes.
Radio buttons.
Choice.
List.
Ans : a and d.
34) What are the types of Checkboxes and what is the difference between them?
Ans : Java supports two types of Checkboxes. They are : Exclusive and Non-exclusive.
In case of exclusive Checkboxes, only one among a group of items can be selected at a time. I f an item from the group is selected, the checkbox currently checked is deselected and the new selection is highlighted. The exclusive Checkboxes are also called as Radio buttons.
The non-exclusive checkboxes are not grouped together and each one can be selected independent of the other.
35) What is a Layout Manager and what are the different Layout Managers available in java.awt and what is the default Layout manager for the panal and the panal subclasses?
Ans: A layout Manager is an object that is used to organize components in a container.
The different layouts available in java.awt are :
FlowLayout, BorderLayout, CardLayout, GridLayout and GridBag Layout.
The default Layout Manager of Panal and Panal sub classes is FlowLayout".
36) Can I exert control over the size and placement of components in my interface?
Ans : Yes.
myPanal.setLayout(null);
myPanal.setbounds(20,20,200,200);
37) Can I add the same component to more than one container?
Ans : No. Adding a component to a container automatically removes it from any previous parent(container).
38) How do I specify where a window is to be placed?
Ans : Use setBounds, setSize, or setLocation methods to implement this.
setBounds(int x, int y, int width, int height)
setBounds(Rectangle r)
setSize(int width, int height)
setSize(Dimension d)
setLocation(int x, int y)
setLocation(Point p)
39) How can we create a borderless window?
Ans : Create an instance of the Window class, give it a size, and show it on the screen.
eg. Frame aFrame = ......
Window aWindow = new Window(aFrame);
aWindow.setLayout(new FlowLayout());
aWindow.add(new Button("Press Me"));
aWindow.getBounds(50,50,200,200);
aWindow.show();
40) Can I create a non-resizable windows? If so, how?
Ans: Yes. By using setResizable() method in class Frame.
41) What is the default Layout Manager for the Window and Window subclasses (Frame,Dialog)?
Ans : BorderLayout().
42) How are the elements of different layouts organized?
Ans : FlowLayout : The elements of a FlowLayout are organized in a top to bottom, left to right fashion.
BorderLayout : The elements of a BorderLayout are organized at the
borders (North, South, East and West) and the center of a
container.
CardLayout : The elements of a CardLayout are stacked, one on top of the other, like a deck of cards.
GridLayout : The elements of a GridLayout are of equal size and are laid out using the square of a grid.
GridBagLayout : The elements of a GridBagLayout are organized according to a grid.However, the elements are of different sizes and may occupy
more than one row or column of the grid. In addition, the rows and columns may have different sizes.
43) Which containers use a BorderLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Window, Frame and Dialog classes use a BorderLayout as their default layout.
44) Which containers use a FlowLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Panel and the Applet classes use the FlowLayout as their default layout.
45) What is the preferred size of a component?
Ans : The preferred size of a component size that will allow the component to display normally.
46) Which method is method to set the layout of a container?
startLayout( )
initLayout( )
layoutContainer( )
setLayout( )
Ans : d.
47) Which method returns the preferred size of a component?
getPreferredSize( )
getPreferred( )
getRequiredSize( )
getLayout( )
Ans : a.
48) Which layout should you use to organize the components of a container in a
tabular form?
CardLayout
BorederLayout
FlowLayout
GridLayout
Ans : d.
An application has a frame that uses a Border layout manager. Why is it probably not a good idea to put a vertical scroll bar at North in the frame?
The scroll bar’s height would be its preferred height, which is not likely to be enough.
The scroll bar’s width would be the entire width of the frame, which would be much wider than necessary.
Both a and b.
Neither a nor b. There is no problem with the layout as described.
Ans : c.
What is the default layouts for a applet, a frame and a panel?
Ans : For an applet and a panel, Flow layout is the default layout, whereas Border layout is default layout for a frame.
If a frame uses a Grid layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : a.
If a frame uses its default layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : b.
With a Border layout manager, the component at Center gets all the space that is left over, after the components at North and South have been considered.
True
False
Ans : b.
An Applet has its Layout Manager set to the default of FlowLayout. What code would be the correct to change to another Layout Manager?
setLayoutManager(new GridLayout());
setLayout(new GridLayout(2,2));
c) setGridLayout(2,2,))
d setBorderLayout();
Ans : b.
55) How do you indicate where a component will be positioned using Flowlayout?
a) North, South,East,West
b) Assign a row/column grid reference
c) Pass a X/Y percentage parameter to the add method
d) Do nothing, the FlowLayout will position the component
Ans :d.
56) How do you change the current layout manager for a container?
a) Use the setLayout method
b) Once created you cannot change the current layout manager of a component
c) Use the setLayoutManager method
d) Use the updateLayout method
Ans :a.
57)When using the GridBagLayout manager, each new component requires a new instance of the GridBagConstraints class. Is this statement true or false?
a) true
b) false
Ans : b.
58) Which of the following statements are true?
a)The default layout manager for an Applet is FlowLayout
b) The default layout manager for an application is FlowLayout
c) A layout manager must be assigned to an Applet before the setSize method is called
d) The FlowLayout manager attempts to honor the preferred size of any components
Ans : a and d.
59) Which method does display the messages whenever there is an item selection or deselection of the CheckboxMenuItem menu?
Ans : itemStateChanged method.
60) Which is a dual state menu item?
Ans : CheckboxMenuItem.
61) Which method can be used to enable/diable a checkbox menu item?
Ans : setState(boolean).
Which of the following may a menu contain?
A separator
A check box
A menu
A button
A panel
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following may contain a menu bar?
A panel
A frame
An applet
A menu bar
A menu
Ans : b
64) What is the difference between a MenuItem and a CheckboxMenuItem?
Ans : The CheckboxMenuItem class extends the MenuItem class to support a menu item
that may be checked or unchecked.
65) Which of the following are true?
A Dialog can have a MenuBar.
MenuItem extends Menu.
A MenuItem can be added to a Menu.
A Menu can be added to a Menu.
Ans : c and d.
Which colour is used to indicate instance methods in the standard "javadoc" format documentation:
1) blue
2) red
3) purple
4) orange
Answer : 2
explain
In JDK 1.1 the variabels, methods and constructors are colour coded to simplifytheir identification.
endExplain
What is the correct ordering for the import, class and package declarations when found in a single file?
1) package, import, class
2) class, import, package
3) import, package, class
4) package, class, import
Answer : 1
explain
This is my explanation for question 2
endExplain
Which methods can be legally applied to a string object?
(Multiple)
1) equals(String)
2) equals(Object)
3) trim()
4) round()
5) toString()
Answer : 1,2,3,5
What is the parameter specification for the public static void main method?
(multiple)
1) String args []
2) String [] args
3) Strings args []
4) String args
Answer : 1,2
What does the zeroth element of the string array passed to the public static void main method contain?
(multiple)
1) The name of the program
2) The number of arguments
3) The first argument if one is present
Answer : 3
Which of the following are Java keywords?
(multiple)
1) goto
2) malloc
3) extends
4) FALSE
Answer : 3
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
int age;
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 4
Which of these is the correct format to use to create the literal char value a?
(multiple)
1) 'a'
2) "a"
3) new Character(a)
4) \000a
Answer : 1
What is the legal range of a byte integral type?
1) 0 - 65, 535
2) (-128) - 127
3) (-32,768) - 32,767
4) (-256) - 255
Answer : 2
Which of the following is illegal:
1) int i = 32;
2) float f = 45.0;
3) double d = 45.0;
Answer 2
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
static int age;
public static void main (String args []) {
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 2
Which of the following are correct?
(multiple)
1) 128 >> 1 gives 64
2) 128 >>> 1 gives 64
3) 128 >> 1 gives -64
4) 128 >>> 1 gives -64
Answer : 1
Which of the following return true?
(multiple)
1) "john" == new String("john")
2) "john".equals("john")
3) "john" = "john"
4) "john".equals(new Button("john"))
Answer : 2
Which of the following do not lead to a runtime error?
(multiple)
1) "john" + " was " + " here"
2) "john" + 3
3) 3 + 5
4) 5 + 5.5
answer 1,2,3,4
Which of the following are so called "short circuit" logical operators?
(multiple)
1) &
2) ||
3) &&
4) |
Answer : 2,3
Which of the following are acceptable?
(multiple)
1) Object o = new Button("A");
2) Boolean flag = true;
3) Panel p = new Frame();
4) Frame f = new Panel();
5) Panel p = new Applet();
Answer : 1,5
What is the result of compiling and running the following code:
public class Test {
static int total = 10;
public static void main (String args []) {
new Test();
}
public Test () {
System.out.println("In test");
System.out.println(this);
int temp = this.total;
if (temp > 5) {
System.out.println(temp);
}
}
}
(multiple)
1) The class will not compile
2) The compiler reports and error at line 2
3) The compiler reports an error at line 9
4) The value 10 is one of the elements printed to the standard output
5) The class compiles but generates a runtime error
Answer : 4
Which of the following is correct:
1) String temp [] = new String {"j" "a" "z"};
2) String temp [] = { "j " " b" "c"};
3) String temp = {"a", "b", "c"};
4) String temp [] = {"a", "b", "c"};
Answer 4
What is the correct declaration of an abstract method that is intended to be public:
1) public abstract void add();
2) public abstract void add() {}
3) public abstract add();
4) public virtual add();
Answer : 1
Under what situations do you obtain a default constructor?
1) When you define any class
2) When the class has no other constructors
3) When you define at least one constructor
Answer : 2
Which of the following can be used to define a constructor for this class, given the following code:
public class Test {
...
}
1) public void Test() {...}
2) public Test() {...}
3) public static Test() {...}
4) public static void Test() {...}
Answer : 2
Which of the following are acceptable to the Java compiler:
(multiple)
1) if (2 == 3) System.out.println("Hi");
2) if (2 = 3) System.out.println("Hi");
3) if (true) System.out.println("Hi");
4) if (2 != 3) System.out.println("Hi");
5) if (aString.equals("hello")) System.out.println("Hi");
Answer : 1,3,4,5
Assuming a method contains code which may raise an Exception (but not a RuntimeException), what is the correct way for a method to indicate that it expects the caller to handle that exception:
1) throw Exception
2) throws Exception
3) new Exception
4) Don't need to specify anything
Answer : 2
What is the result of executing the following code, using the parameters 4 and 0:
public void divide(int a, int b) {
try {
int c = a / b;
} catch (Exception e) {
System.out.print("Exception ");
} finally {
System.out.println("Finally");
}
1) Prints out: Exception Finally
2) Prints out: Finally
3) Prints out: Exception
4) No output
Answer : 1
Which of the following is a legal return type of a method overloading the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) void
2) int
3) Can be anything
Answer : 3
Which of the following statements is correct for a method which is overriding the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) the overriding method must return void
2) the overriding method must return int
3) the overriding method can return whatever it likes
Answer : 1
Given the following classes defined in separate files, what will be the effect of compiling and running this class Test?
class Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Vehicle: drive");
}
}
class Car extends Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Car: drive");
}
}
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
Vehicle v;
Car c;
v = new Vehicle();
c = new Car();
v.drive();
c.drive();
v = c;
v.drive();
}
}
1) Generates a Compiler error on the statement v= c;
2) Generates runtime error on the statement v= c;
3) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Car: drive
4) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Vehicle: drive
Answer : 3
Where in a constructor, can you place a call to a constructor defined in the super class?
1) Anywhere
2) The first statement in the constructor
3) The last statement in the constructor
4) You can't call super in a constructor
Answer : 2
Which variables can an inner class access from the class which encapsulates it?
(multiple)
1) All static variables
2) All final variables
3) All instance variables
4) Only final instance variables
5) Only final static variables
Answer : 1,2,3
What class must an inner class extend:
1) The top level class
2) The Object class
3) Any class or interface
4) It must extend an interface
Answer 3
In the following code, which is the earliest statement, where the object originally held in e, may be garbage collected:
1. public class Test {
2. public static void main (String args []) {
3. Employee e = new Employee("Bob", 48);
4. e.calculatePay();
5. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
6. e = null;
7. e = new Employee("Denise", 36);
8. e.calculatePay();
9. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
10. }
11. }
1) Line 10
2) Line 11
3) Line 7
4) Line 8
5) Never
Answer : 3
What is the name of the interface that can be used to define a class that can execute within its own thread?
1) Runnable
2) Run
3) Threadable
4) Thread
5) Executable
Answer : 1
What is the name of the method used to schedule a thread for execution?
1) init();
2) start();
3) run();
4) resume();
5) sleep();
Answer : 2
Which methods may cause a thread to stop executing?
(multiple)
1) sleep();
2) stop();
3) yield();
4) wait();
5) notify();
6) notifyAll()
7) synchronized()
Answer : 1,2,3,4
Which of the following would create a text field able to display 10 characters (assuming a fixed size font) displaying the initial string "hello":
1) new TextField("hello", 10);
2) new TextField("hello");
3) new textField(10);
4) new TextField();
Answer : 1
Which of the following methods are defined on the Graphics class:
(multiple)
1) drawLine(int, int, int, int)
2) drawImage(Image, int, int, ImageObserver)
3) drawString(String, int, int)
4) add(Component);
5) setVisible(boolean);
6) setLayout(Object);
Answer : 1,2,3
Which of the following layout managers honours the preferred size of a component:
(multiple)
1) CardLayout
2) FlowLayout
3) BorderLayout
4) GridLayout
Answer : 2
Given the following code what is the effect of a being 5:
public class Test {
public void add(int a) {
loop: for (int i = 1; i < 3; i++){
for (int j = 1; j < 3; j++) {
if (a == 5) {
break loop;
}
System.out.println(i * j);
}
}
}
}
1) Generate a runtime error
2) Throw an ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException
3) Print the values: 1, 2, 2, 4
4) Produces no output
Answer : 4
What is the effect of issuing a wait() method on an object
1) If a notify() method has already been sent to that object then it has no effect
2) The object issuing the call to wait() will halt until another object sends a notify() or notifyAll() method
3) An exception will be raised
4) The object issuing the call to wait() will be automatically synchronized with any other objects using the receiving object.
Answer : 2
The layout of a container can be altered using which of the following methods:
(multiple)
1) setLayout(aLayoutManager);
2) addLayout(aLayoutManager);
3) layout(aLayoutManager);
4) setLayoutManager(aLayoutManager);
Answer : 1
Using a FlowLayout manager, which is the correct way to add elements to a container:
1) add(component);
2) add("Center", component);
3) add(x, y, component);
4) set(component);
Answer : 1
Given that a Button can generate an ActionEvent which listener would you expect to have to implement, in a class which would handle this event?
1) FocusListener
2) ComponentListener
3) WindowListener
4) ActionListener
5) ItemListener
Answer : 4
Which of the following, are valid return types, for listener methods:
1) boolean
2) the type of event handled
3) void
4) Component
Answer : 3
Assuming we have a class which implements the ActionListener interface, which method should be used to register this with a Button?
1) addListener(*);
2) addActionListener(*);
3) addButtonListener(*);
4) setListener(*);
Answer : 2
In order to cause the paint(Graphics) method to execute, which of the following is the most appropriate method to call:
1) paint()
2) repaint()
3) paint(Graphics)
4) update(Graphics)
5) None - you should never cause paint(Graphics) to execute
Answer : 2
Which of the following illustrates the correct way to pass a parameter into an applet:
1)
True
False
Ans: a.
2) On successful compilation a file with the class extension is created.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
3) The Java source code can be created in a Notepad editor.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
4) The Java Program is enclosed in a class definition.
a) True
b) False
Ans: a.
5) What declarations are required for every Java application?
Ans: A class and the main( ) method declarations.
6) What are the two parts in executing a Java program and their purposes?
Ans: Two parts in executing a Java program are:
Java Compiler and Java Interpreter.
The Java Compiler is used for compilation and the Java Interpreter is used for execution of the application.
7) What are the three OOPs principles and define them?
Ans : Encapsulation, Inheritance and Polymorphism are the three OOPs
Principles.
Encapsulation:
Is the Mechanism that binds together code and the data it manipulates, and keeps both safe from outside interference and misuse.
Inheritance:
Is the process by which one object acquires the properties of another object.
Polymorphism:
Is a feature that allows one interface to be used for a general class of actions.
8) What is a compilation unit?
Ans : Java source code file.
9) What output is displayed as the result of executing the following statement?
System.out.println("// Looks like a comment.");
// Looks like a comment
The statement results in a compilation error
Looks like a comment
No output is displayed
Ans : a.
10) In order for a source code file, containing the public class Test, to successfully compile, which of the following must be true?
It must have a package statement
It must be named Test.java
It must import java.lang
It must declare a public class named Test
Ans : b
11) What are identifiers and what is naming convention?
Ans : Identifiers are used for class names, method names and variable names. An identifier may be any descriptive sequence of upper case & lower case letters,numbers or underscore or dollar sign and must not begin with numbers.
12) What is the return type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : void
13) What is the argument type of program’s main( ) method?
Ans : string array.
14) Which characters are as first characters of an identifier?
Ans : A – Z, a – z, _ ,$
15) What are different comments?
Ans : 1) // -- single line comment
2) /* --
*/ multiple line comment
3) /** --
*/ documentation
16) What is the difference between constructor method and method?
Ans : Constructor will be automatically invoked when an object is created. Whereas method has to be call explicitly.
17) What is the use of bin and lib in JDK?
Ans : Bin contains all tools such as javac, applet viewer, awt tool etc., whereas Lib
contains all packages and variables.
Data types,variables and Arrays
1) What is meant by variable?
Ans: Variables are locations in memory that can hold values. Before assigning any value to a variable, it must be declared.
2) What are the kinds of variables in Java? What are their uses?
Ans: Java has three kinds of variables namely, the instance variable, the local variable and the class variable.
Local variables are used inside blocks as counters or in methods as temporary variables and are used to store information needed by a single method.
Instance variables are used to define attributes or the state of a particular object and are used to store information needed by multiple methods in the objects.
Class variables are global to a class and to all the instances of the class and are useful for communicating between different objects of all the same class or keeping track of global states.
3) How are the variables declared?
Ans: Variables can be declared anywhere in the method definition and can be initialized during their declaration.They are commonly declared before usage at the beginning of the definition.
Variables with the same data type can be declared together. Local variables must be given a value before usage.
4) What are variable types?
Ans: Variable types can be any data type that java supports, which includes the eight primitive data types, the name of a class or interface and an array.
5) How do you assign values to variables?
Ans: Values are assigned to variables using the assignment operator =.
6) What is a literal? How many types of literals are there?
Ans: A literal represents a value of a certain type where the type describes how that value behaves.
There are different types of literals namely number literals, character literals,
boolean literals, string literals,etc.
7) What is an array?
Ans: An array is an object that stores a list of items.
8) How do you declare an array?
Ans: Array variable indicates the type of object that the array holds.
Ex: int arr[];
9) Java supports multidimensional arrays.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
10) An array of arrays can be created.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
11) What is a string?
Ans: A combination of characters is called as string.
12) Strings are instances of the class String.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
13) When a string literal is used in the program, Java automatically creates instances of the string class.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
14) Which operator is to create and concatenate string?
Ans: Addition operator(+).
15) Which of the following declare an array of string objects?
String[ ] s;
String [ ]s:
String[ s]:
String s[ ]:
Ans : a, b and d
16) What is the value of a[3] as the result of the following array declaration?
1
2
3
4
Ans : d
17) Which of the following are primitive types?
byte
String
integer
Float
Ans : a.
18) What is the range of the char type?
0 to 216
0 to 215
0 to 216-1
0 to 215-1
Ans. d
19) What are primitive data types?
Ans : byte, short, int, long
float, double
boolean
char
20) What are default values of different primitive types?
Ans : int - 0
short - 0
byte - 0
long - 0 l
float - 0.0 f
double - 0.0 d
boolean - false
char - null
21) Converting of primitive types to objects can be explicitly.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
22) How do we change the values of the elements of the array?
Ans : The array subscript expression can be used to change the values of the elements of the array.
23) What is final varaible?
Ans : If a variable is declared as final variable, then you can not change its value. It becomes constant.
24) What is static variable?
Ans : Static variables are shared by all instances of a class.
Operators
1) What are operators and what are the various types of operators available in Java?
Ans: Operators are special symbols used in expressions.
The following are the types of operators:
Arithmetic operators,
Assignment operators,
Increment & Decrement operators,
Logical operators,
Biwise operators,
Comparison/Relational operators and
Conditional operators
2) The ++ operator is used for incrementing and the -- operator is used for
decrementing.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) Comparison/Logical operators are used for testing and magnitude.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) Character literals are stored as unicode characters.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) What are the Logical operators?
Ans: OR(|), AND(&), XOR(^) AND NOT(~).
6) What is the % operator?
Ans : % operator is the modulo operator or reminder operator. It returns the reminder of dividing the first operand by second operand.
7) What is the value of 111 % 13?
3
5
7
9
Ans : c.
8) Is &&= a valid operator?
Ans : No.
9) Can a double value be cast to a byte?
Ans : Yes
10) Can a byte object be cast to a double value ?
Ans : No. An object cannot be cast to a primitive value.
11) What are order of precedence and associativity?
Ans : Order of precedence the order in which operators are evaluated in expressions.
Associativity determines whether an expression is evaluated left-right or right-left.
12) Which Java operator is right associativity?
Ans : = operator.
13) What is the difference between prefix and postfix of -- and ++ operators?
Ans : The prefix form returns the increment or decrement operation and returns the value of the increment or decrement operation.
The postfix form returns the current value of all of the expression and then
performs the increment or decrement operation on that value.
14) What is the result of expression 5.45 + "3,2"?
The double value 8.6
The string ""8.6"
The long value 8.
The String "5.453.2"
Ans : d
15) What are the values of x and y ?
x = 5; y = ++x;
Ans : x = 6; y = 6
16) What are the values of x and z?
x = 5; z = x++;
Ans : x = 6; z = 5
Control Statements
1) What are the programming constructs?
Ans: a) Sequential
b) Selection -- if and switch statements
c) Iteration -- for loop, while loop and do-while loop
2) class conditional {
public static void main(String args[]) {
int i = 20;
int j = 55;
int z = 0;
z = i < j ? i : j; // ternary operator
System.out.println("The value assigned is " + z);
}
}
What is output of the above program?
Ans: The value assigned is 20
3) The switch statement does not require a break.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
4) The conditional operator is otherwise known as the ternary operator.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
5) The while loop repeats a set of code while the condition is false.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
6) The do-while loop repeats a set of code atleast once before the condition is tested.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
7) What are difference between break and continue?
Ans: The break keyword halts the execution of the current loop and forces control out of the loop.
The continue is similar to break, except that instead of halting the execution of the loop, it starts the next iteration.
8) The for loop repeats a set of statements a certain number of times until a condition is matched.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) Can a for statement loop indefintely?
Ans : Yes.
10) What is the difference between while statement and a do statement/
Ans : A while statement checks at the beginning of a loop to see whether the next loop iteration should occur.
A do statement checks at the end of a loop to see whether the next iteration of a loop should occur. The do statement will always execute the body of a loop at least once.
Introduction to Classes and Methods
1) Which is used to get the value of the instance variables?
Ans: Dot notation.
2) The new operator creates a single instance named class and returns a
reference to that object.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
3) A class is a template for multiple objects with similar features.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
4) What is mean by garbage collection?
Ans: When an object is no longer referred to by any variable, Java automatically
reclaims memory used by that object. This is known as garbage collection.
5) What are methods and how are they defined?
Ans: Methods are functions that operate on instances of classes in which they are defined.Objects can communicate with each other using methods and can call methods in other classes.
Method definition has four parts. They are name of the method, type of object or primitive type the method returns, a list of parameters and the body of the method.
A method's signature is a combination of the first three parts mentioned above.
6) What is calling method?
Ans: Calling methods are similar to calling or referring to an instance variable. These methods are accessed using dot notation.
Ex: obj.methodname(param1,param2)
7) Which method is used to determine the class of an object?
Ans: getClass( ) method can be used to find out what class the belongs to. This class is defined in the object class and is available to all objects.
8) All the classes in java.lang package are automatically imported when
a program is compiled.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
9) How can class be imported to a program?
Ans: To import a class, the import keyword should be used as shown.;
import classname;
10) How can class be imported from a package to a program?
Ans: import java . packagename . classname (or) import java.package name.*;
11) What is a constructor?
Ans: A constructor is a special kind of method that determines how an object is
initialized when created.
12) Which keyword is used to create an instance of a class?
Ans: new.
13) Which method is used to garbage collect an object?
Ans: finalize ().
14) Constructors can be overloaded like regular methods.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
15) What is casting?
Ans: Casting is bused to convert the value of one type to another.
16) Casting between primitive types allows conversion of one primitive type to another.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
17) Casting occurs commonly between numeric types.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
18) Boolean values can be cast into any other primitive type.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
19) Casting does not affect the original object or value.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
20) Which cast must be used to convert a larger value into a smaller one?
Ans: Explicit cast.
21) Which cast must be used to cast an object to another class?
Ans: Specific cast.
22) Which of the following features are common to both Java & C++?
A.The class declaration
b.The access modifiers
c.The encapsulation of data & methods with in objects
d.The use of pointers
Ans: a,b,c.
23) Which of the following statements accurately describe the use of access modifiers within a class definition?
a.They can be applied to both data & methods
b.They must precede a class's data variables or methods
c.They can follow a class's data variables or methods
d.They can appear in any order
e.They must be applied to data variables first and then to methods
Ans: a,b,d.
24) Suppose a given instance variable has been declared private.
Can this instance variable be manipulated by methods out side its class?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
25) Which of the following statements can be used to describe a public method?
a.It is accessible to all other classes in the hierarchy
b.It is accessablde only to subclasses of its parent class
c.It represents the public interface of its class
d.The only way to gain access to this method is by calling one of the public class
methods
Ans: a,c.
26) Which of the following types of class members can be part of the internal part of a class?
a.Public instance variables
b.Private instance variables
c.Public methods
d.Private methods
Ans: b,d.
27) You would use the ____ operator to create a single instance of a named class.
a.new
b.dot
Ans: a.
28) Which of the following statements correctly describes the relation between an object and the instance variable it stores?
a.Each new object has its own distinctive set of instance variables
b.Each object has a copy of the instance variables of its class
c.the instance variable of each object are seperate from the variables of other objects
d.The instance variables of each object are stored together with the variables of other objects
Ans: a,b,c.
29) If no input parameters are specified in a method declaration then the declaration will include __.
a.an empty set of parantheses
b.the term void
Ans: a.
30) What are the functions of the dot(.) operator?
a.It enables you to access instance variables of any objects within a class
b.It enables you to store values in instance variables of an object
c.It is used to call object methods
d.It is to create a new object
Ans: a,b,c.
31) Which of the following can be referenced by this variable?
a.The instance variables of a class only
b.The methods of a class only
c.The instance variables and methods of a class
Ans: c.
32) The this reference is used in conjunction with ___methods.
a.static
b.non-static
Ans: b.
33) Which of the following operators are used in conjunction with the this and super references?
a.The new operator
b.The instanceof operator
c.The dot operator
Ans: c.
34) A constructor is automatically called when an object is instantiated
a. true
b. false
Ans: a.
35) When may a constructor be called without specifying arguments?
a. When the default constructor is not called
b. When the name of the constructor differs from that of the class
c. When there are no constructors for the class
Ans: c.
36) Each class in java can have a finalizer method
a. true
b.false
Ans: a.
37) When an object is referenced, does this mean that it has been identified by the finalizer method for garbage collection?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.
38) Because finalize () belongs to the java.lang.Object class, it is present in all ___.
a.objects
b.classes
c.methods
Ans: b.
39) Identify the true statements about finalization.
a.A class may have only one finalize method
b.Finalizers are mostly used with simple classes
c.Finalizer overloading is not allowed
Ans: a,c.
40) When you write finalize() method for your class, you are overriding a finalizer
inherited from a super class.
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
41) Java memory management mechanism garbage collects objects which are no longer referenced
a true
b.false
Ans: a.
42) are objects referenced by a variable candidates for garbage collection when the variable goes out of scope?
a yes
b. no
Ans: a.
43) Java's garbage collector runs as a ___ priority thread waiting for __priority threads to relinquish the processor.
a.high
b.low
Ans: a,b.
44) The garbage collector will run immediately when the system is out of memory
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.
45) You can explicitly drop a object reference by setting the value of a variable whose data type is a reference type to ___
Ans: null
46) When might your program wish to run the garbage collecter?
a. before it enters a compute-intense section of code
b. before it enters a memory-intense section of code
c. before objects are finalized
d. when it knows there will be some idle time
Ans: a,b,d
47) For externalizable objects the class is solely responsible for the external format of its contents
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
48) When an object is stored, are all of the objects that are reachable from that object stored as well?
a.true
b.false
Ans: a
49) The default__ of objects protects private and trancient data, and supports the __ of the classes
a.evolution
b.encoding
Ans: b,a.
50) Which are keywords in Java?
a) NULL
b) sizeof
c) friend
d) extends
e) synchronized
Ans : d and e
51) When must the main class and the file name coincide?
Ans :When class is declared public.
52) What are different modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default, static, trancient, volatile, final, abstract.
53) What are access modifiers?
Ans : public, private, protected, default.
54) What is meant by "Passing by value" and " Passing by reference"?
Ans : objects – pass by referrence
Methods - pass by value
55) Is a class a subclass of itself?
Ans : A class is a subclass itself.
56) What modifiers may be used with top-level class?
Ans : public, abstract, final.
57) What is an example of polymorphism?
Inner class
Anonymous classes
Method overloading
Method overriding
Ans : c
Packages and interface
1) What are packages ? what is use of packages ?
Ans :The package statement defines a name space in which classes are stored.If you omit the package, the classes are put into the default package.
Signature... package pkg;
Use: * It specifies to which package the classes defined in a file belongs to. * Package is both naming and a visibility control mechanism.
2) What is difference between importing "java.applet.Applet" and "java.applet.*;" ?
Ans :"java.applet.Applet" will import only the class Applet from the package java.applet
Where as "java.applet.*" will import all the classes from java.applet package.
3) What do you understand by package access specifier?
Ans : public: Anything declared as public can be accessed from anywhere
private: Anything declared in the private can’t be seen outside of its class.
default: It is visible to subclasses as well as to other classes in the same package.
4) What is interface? What is use of interface?
Ans : It is similar to class which may contain method’s signature only but not bodies.
Methods declared in interface are abstract methods. We can implement many interfaces on a class which support the multiple inheritance.
5) Is it is necessary to implement all methods in an interface?
Ans : Yes. All the methods have to be implemented.
6) Which is the default access modifier for an interface method?
Ans : public.
7) Can we define a variable in an interface ?and what type it should be ?
Ans : Yes we can define a variable in an interface. They are implicitly final and static.
8) What is difference between interface and an abstract class?
Ans : All the methods declared inside an Interface are abstract. Where as abstract class must have at least one abstract method and others may be concrete or abstract.
In Interface we need not use the keyword abstract for the methods.
9) By default, all program import the java.lang package.
True/False
Ans : True
10) Java compiler stores the .class files in the path specified in CLASSPATH
environmental variable.
True/False
Ans : False
11) User-defined package can also be imported just like the standard packages.
True/False
Ans : True
12) When a program does not want to handle exception, the ______class is used.
Ans : Throws
13) The main subclass of the Exception class is _______ class.
Ans : RuntimeException
14) Only subclasses of ______class may be caught or thrown.
Ans : Throwable
15) Any user-defined exception class is a subclass of the _____ class.
Ans : Exception
16) The catch clause of the user-defined exception class should ______ its
Base class catch clause.
Ans : Exception
17) A _______ is used to separate the hierarchy of the class while declaring an
Import statement.
Ans : Package
18) All standard classes of Java are included within a package called _____.
Ans : java.lang
19) All the classes in a package can be simultaneously imported using ____.
Ans : *
20) Can you define a variable inside an Interface. If no, why? If yes, how?
Ans.: YES. final and static
21) How many concrete classes can you have inside an interface?
Ans.: None
22) Can you extend an interface?
Ans.: Yes
23) Is it necessary to implement all the methods of an interface while implementing the interface?
Ans.: No
24) If you do not implement all the methods of an interface while implementing , what specifier should you use for the class ?
Ans.: abstract
25) How do you achieve multiple inheritance in Java?
Ans: Using interfaces.
26) How to declare an interface example?
Ans : access class classname implements interface.
27) Can you achieve multiple interface through interface?
a)True
b) false
Ans : a.
28) Can variables be declared in an interface ? If so, what are the modifiers?
Ans : Yes. final and static are the modifiers can be declared in an interface.
29) What are the possible access modifiers when implementing interface methods?
Ans : public.
30) Can anonymous classes be implemented an interface?
Ans : Yes.
31) Interfaces can’t be extended.
a)True
b)False
Ans : b.
32) Name interfaces without a method?
Ans : Serializable, Cloneble & Remote.
33) Is it possible to use few methods of an interface in a class ? If so, how?
Ans : Yes. Declare the class as abstract.
Exception Handling
1) What is the difference between ‘throw’ and ‘throws’ ?And it’s application?
Ans : Exceptions that are thrown by java runtime systems can be handled by Try and catch blocks. With throw exception we can handle the exceptions thrown by the program itself. If a method is capable of causing an exception that it does not
handle, it must specify this behavior so the callers of the method can guard
against that exception.
2) What is the difference between ‘Exception’ and ‘error’ in java?
Ans : Exception and Error are the subclasses of the Throwable class. Exception class is used for exceptional conditions that user program should catch. With exception class we can subclass to create our own custom exception.
Error defines exceptions that are not excepted to be caught by you program. Example is Stack Overflow.
3) What is ‘Resource leak’?
Ans : Freeing up other resources that might have been allocated at the beginning of a method.
4)What is the ‘finally’ block?
Ans : Finally block will execute whether or not an exception is thrown. If an exception is thrown, the finally block will execute even if no catch statement match the exception. Any time a method is about to return to the caller from inside try/catch block, via an uncaught exception or an explicit return statement, the finally clause is also execute.
5) Can we have catch block with out try block? If so when?
Ans : No. Try/Catch or Try/finally form a unit.
6) What is the difference between the following statements?
Catch (Exception e),
Catch (Error err),
Catch (Throwable t)
Ans :
7) What will happen to the Exception object after exception handling?
Ans : It will go for Garbage Collector. And frees the memory.
8) How many Exceptions we can define in ‘throws’ clause?
Ans : We can define multiple exceptions in throws clause.
Signature is..
type method-name (parameter-list) throws exception-list
9) The finally block is executed when an exception is thrown, even if no catch matches it.
True/False
Ans : True
10) The subclass exception should precede the base class exception when used within the catch clause.
True/False
Ans : True
11) Exceptions can be caught or rethrown to a calling method.
True/False
Ans : True
12) The statements following the throw keyword in a program are not executed.
True/False
Ans : True
13) The toString ( ) method in the user-defined exception class is overridden.
True/False
Ans : True
MULTI THREADING
1) What are the two types of multitasking?
Ans : 1.process-based
2.Thread-based
2) What are the two ways to create the thread?
Ans : 1.by implementing Runnable
2.by extending Thread
3) What is the signature of the constructor of a thread class?
Ans : Thread(Runnable threadob,String threadName)
4) What are all the methods available in the Runnable Interface?
Ans : run()
5) What is the data type for the method isAlive() and this method is
available in which class?
Ans : boolean, Thread
6) What are all the methods available in the Thread class?
Ans : 1.isAlive()
2.join()
3.resume()
4.suspend()
5.stop()
6.start()
7.sleep()
8.destroy()
7) What are all the methods used for Inter Thread communication and what is the class in which these methods are defined?
Ans :1. wait(),notify() & notifyall()
2. Object class
8) What is the mechanisam defind by java for the Resources to be used by only one Thread at a time?
Ans : Synchronisation
9) What is the procedure to own the moniter by many threads?
Ans : not possible
10) What is the unit for 1000 in the below statement?
ob.sleep(1000)
Ans : long milliseconds
11) What is the data type for the parameter of the sleep() method?
Ans : long
12) What are all the values for the following level?
max-priority
min-priority
normal-priority
Ans : 10,1,5
13) What is the method available for setting the priority?
Ans : setPriority()
14) What is the default thread at the time of starting the program?
Ans : main thread
15) The word synchronized can be used with only a method.
True/ False
Ans : False
16) Which priority Thread can prompt the lower primary Thread?
Ans : Higher Priority
17) How many threads at a time can access a monitor?
Ans : one
18) What are all the four states associated in the thread?
Ans : 1. new 2. runnable 3. blocked 4. dead
19) The suspend()method is used to teriminate a thread?
True /False
Ans : False
20) The run() method should necessary exists in clases created as subclass of thread?
True /False
Ans : True
21) When two threads are waiting on each other and can't proceed the programe is said to be in a deadlock?
True/False
Ans : True
22) Which method waits for the thread to die ?
Ans : join() method
23) Which of the following is true?
1) wait(),notify(),notifyall() are defined as final & can be called only from with in a synchronized method
2) Among wait(),notify(),notifyall() the wait() method only throws IOException
3) wait(),notify(),notifyall() & sleep() are methods of object class
1
2
3
1 & 2
1,2 & 3
Ans : D
24) Garbage collector thread belongs to which priority?
Ans : low-priority
25) What is meant by timeslicing or time sharing?
Ans : Timeslicing is the method of allocating CPU time to individual threads in a priority schedule.
26) What is meant by daemon thread? In java runtime, what is it's role?
Ans : Daemon thread is a low priority thread which runs intermittently in the background doing the garbage collection operation for the java runtime system.
Inheritance
1) What is the difference between superclass & subclass?
Ans : A super class is a class that is inherited whereas subclass is a class that does the inheriting.
2) Which keyword is used to inherit a class?
Ans : extends
3) Subclasses methods can access superclass members/ attributes at all times?
True/False
Ans : False
4) When can subclasses not access superclass members?
Ans : When superclass is declared as private.
5) Which class does begin Java class hierarchy?
Ans : Object class
6) Object class is a superclass of all other classes?
True/False
Ans : True
7) Java supports multiple inheritance?
True/False
Ans : False
8) What is inheritance?
Ans : Deriving an object from an existing class. In the other words, Inheritance is the process of inheriting all the features from a class
9) What are the advantages of inheritance?
Ans : Reusability of code and accessibility of variables and methods of the superclass by subclasses.
10) Which method is used to call the constructors of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super(argument)
11) Which is used to execute any method of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super.method-name(arguments)
12) Which methods are used to destroy the objects created by the constructor methods?
Ans : finalize()
13) What are abstract classes?
Ans : Abstract classes are those for which instances can’t be created.
14) What must a class do to implement an interface?
Ans: It must provide all of the methods in the interface and identify the interface in its implements clause.
15) Which methods in the Object class are declared as final?
Ans : getClass(), notify(), notifyAll(), and wait()
16) Final methods can be overridden.
True/False
Ans : False
17) Declaration of methods as final results in faster execution of the program?
True/False
Ans: True
18) Final variables should be declared in the beginning?
True/False
Ans : True
19) Can we declare variable inside a method as final variables? Why?
Ans : Cannot because, local variable cannot be declared as final variables.
20) Can an abstract class may be final?
Ans : An abstract class may not be declared as final.
21) Does a class inherit the constructors of it's super class?
Ans: A class does not inherit constructors from any of it's super classes.
22) What restrictions are placed on method overloading?
Ans: Two methods may not have the same name and argument list but different return types.
23) What restrictions are placed on method overriding?
Ans : Overridden methods must have the same name , argument list , and return type. The overriding method may not limit the access of the method it overridees.The overriding method may not throw any exceptions that may not be thrown by the overridden method.
24) What modifiers may be used with an inner class that is a member of an outer class?
Ans : a (non-local) inner class may be declared as public, protected, private, static, final or abstract.
25) How this() is used with constructors?
Ans: this() is used to invoke a constructor of the same class
26) How super() used with constructors?
Ans : super() is used to invoke a super class constructor
27) Which of the following statements correctly describes an interface?
a)It's a concrete class
b)It's a superclass
c)It's a type of abstract class
Ans: c
28) An interface contains __ methods
a)Non-abstract
b)Implemented
c)unimplemented
Ans:c
STRING HANDLING
Which package does define String and StringBuffer classes?
Ans : java.lang package.
Which method can be used to obtain the length of the String?
Ans : length( ) method.
How do you concatenate Strings?
Ans : By using " + " operator.
Which method can be used to compare two strings for equality?
Ans : equals( ) method.
Which method can be used to perform a comparison between strings that ignores case differences?
Ans : equalsIgnoreCase( ) method.
What is the use of valueOf( ) method?
Ans : valueOf( ) method converts data from its internal format into a human-readable form.
What are the uses of toLowerCase( ) and toUpperCase( ) methods?
Ans : The method toLowerCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from uppercase to
lowercase.
The method toUpperCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from lowercase to
uppercase.
Which method can be used to find out the total allocated capacity of a StrinBuffer?
Ans : capacity( ) method.
Which method can be used to set the length of the buffer within a StringBuffer object?
Ans : setLength( ).
What is the difference between String and StringBuffer?
Ans : String objects are constants, whereas StringBuffer objects are not.
String class supports constant strings, whereas StringBuffer class supports growable, modifiable strings.
What are wrapper classes?
Ans : Wrapper classes are classes that allow primitive types to be accessed as objects.
Which of the following is not a wrapper class?
String
Integer
Boolean
Character
Ans : a.
What is the output of the following program?
public class Question {
public static void main(String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
String s3 = s1.concat(s2.toUpperCase( ) );
System.out.println(s1+s2+s3);
}
}
abcdefabcdef
abcabcDEFDEF
abcdefabcDEF
None of the above
ANS : c.
Which of the following methods are methods of the String class?
delete( )
append( )
reverse( )
replace( )
Ans : d.
Which of the following methods cause the String object referenced by s to be changed?
s.concat( )
s.toUpperCase( )
s.replace( )
s.valueOf( )
Ans : a and b.
String is a wrapper class?
True
False
Ans : b.
17) If you run the code below, what gets printed out?
String s=new String("Bicycle");
int iBegin=1;
char iEnd=3;
System.out.println(s.substring(iBegin,iEnd));
Bic
ic
c) icy
d) error: no method matching substring(int,char)
Ans : b.
18) Given the following declarations
String s1=new String("Hello")
String s2=new String("there");
String s3=new String();
Which of the following are legal operations?
s3=s1 + s2;
s3=s1 - s2;
c) s3=s1 & s2
d) s3=s1 && s2
Ans : a.
19) Which of the following statements are true?
The String class is implemented as a char array, elements are addressed using the stringname[] convention
b) Strings are a primitive type in Java that overloads the + operator for concatenation
c) Strings are a primitive type in Java and the StringBuffer is used as the matching wrapper type
d) The size of a string can be retrieved using the length property.
Ans : b.
EXPLORING JAVA.LANG
java.lang package is automatically imported into all programs.
True
False
Ans : a
What are the interfaces defined by java.lang?
Ans : Cloneable, Comparable and Runnable.
What are the constants defined by both Flaot and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE,
NaN,
POSITIVE_INFINITY,
NEGATIVE_INFINITY and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by Byte, Short, Integer and Long?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What are the constants defined by both Float and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_RADIX,
MIN_RADIX,
MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.
What is the purpose of the Runtime class?
Ans : The purpose of the Runtime class is to provide access to the Java runtime system.
What is the purpose of the System class?
Ans : The purpose of the System class is to provide access to system resources.
Which class is extended by all other classes?
Ans : Object class is extended by all other classes.
Which class can be used to obtain design information about an object?
Ans : The Class class can be used to obtain information about an object’s design.
Which method is used to calculate the absolute value of a number?
Ans : abs( ) method.
What are E and PI?
Ans : E is the base of the natural logarithm and PI is the mathematical value pi.
Which of the following classes is used to perform basic console I/O?
System
SecurityManager
Math
Runtime
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Class class is the superclass of the Object class.
The Object class is final.
The Class class can be used to load other classes.
The ClassLoader class can be used to load other classes.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following methods are methods of the Math class?
absolute( )
log( )
cosine( )
sine( )
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true about the Error and Exception classes?
Both classes extend Throwable.
The Error class is final and the Exception class is not.
The Exception class is final and the Error is not.
Both classes implement Throwable.
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
The Void class extends the Class class.
The Float class extends the Double class.
The System class extends the Runtime class.
The Integer class extends the Number class.
Ans : d.
17) Which of the following will output -4.0
System.out.println(Math.floor(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.round(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.ceil(-4.7));
d) System.out.println(Math.Min(-4.7));
Ans : c.
18) Which of the following are valid statements
a) public class MyCalc extends Math
b) Math.max(s);
c) Math.round(9.99,1);
d) Math.mod(4,10);
e) None of the above.
Ans : e.
19) What will happen if you attempt to compile and run the following code?
Integer ten=new Integer(10);
Long nine=new Long (9);
System.out.println(ten + nine);
int i=1;
System.out.println(i + ten);
19 followed by 20
19 followed by 11
Error: Can't convert java lang Integer
d) 10 followed by 1
Ans : c.
INPUT / OUTPUT : EXPLORING JAVA.IO
What is meant by Stream and what are the types of Streams and classes of the Streams?
Ans : A Stream is an abstraction that either produces or consumes information.
There are two types of Streams. They are:
Byte Streams : Byte Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of bytes.
Character Streams : Character Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of characters.
Byte Stream classes : Byte Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are:InputStream and OutputStream.
Character Stream classes : Character Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are : Reader and Writer.
Which of the following statements are true?
UTF characters are all 8-bits.
UTF characters are all 16-bits.
UTF characters are all 24-bits.
Unicode characters are all 16-bits.
Bytecode characters are all 16-bits.
Ans : d.
Which of the following statements are true?
When you construct an instance of File, if you do not use the filenaming semantics of the local machine, the constructor will throw an IOException.
When you construct an instance of File, if the corresponding file does not exist on the local file system, one will be created.
When an instance of File is garbage collected, the corresponding file on the local file system is deleted.
None of the above.
Ans : a,b and c.
The File class contains a method that changes the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : b.
It is possible to use the File class to list the contents of the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : a.
Readers have methods that can read and return floats and doubles.
True
False
Ans : b.
You execute the code below in an empty directory. What is the result?
File f1 = new File("dirname");
File f2 = new File(f1, "filename");
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory.
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory. A new file called filename is created in directory dirname.
A new directory called dirname and a new file called filename are created, both in the current working directory.
A new file called filename is created in the current working directory.
No directory is created, and no file is created.
Ans : e.
What is the difference between the Reader/Writer class hierarchy and the
InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy?
Ans : The Reader/Writer class hierarchy is character-oriented and the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy is byte-oriented.
What is an I/O filter?
Ans : An I/O filter is an object that reads from one stream and writes to another, usually altering the data in some way as it is passed from one stream to another.
What is the purpose of the File class?
Ans : The File class is used to create objects that provide access to the files and directories of a local file system.
What interface must an object implement before it can be written to a stream as an object?
Ans : An object must implement the Serializable or Externalizable interface before it can be written to a stream as an object.
What is the difference between the File and RandomAccessFile classes?
Ans : The File class encapsulates the files and directories of the local file system. The RandomAccessFile class provides the methods needed to directly access data contained in any part of a file.
What class allows you to read objects directly from a stream?
Ans : The ObjectInputStream class supports the reading of objects from input streams.
What value does read( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The read( ) method returns – 1 when it has reached the end of a file.
What value does readLine( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The readLine( ) method returns null when it has reached the end of a file.
How many bits are used to represent Unicode, ASCII, UTF-16 and UTF-8 characters?
Ans : Unicode requires 16-bits and ASCII requires 8-bits. Although the ASCII character set uses only 1-bits, it is usually represented as 8-bits. UTF-8 represents characters using 8, 16 and 18-bit patterns. UTF-16 uses 16-bit and larger bit patterns.
Which of the following are true?
The InputStream and OutputStream classes are byte-oriented.
The ObjectInputStream and ObjectOutputStream do not support serialized object input and output.
The Reader and Writer classes are character-oriented.
The Reader and Writer classes are the preferred solution to serialized object output.
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are true about I/O filters?
Filters are supported on input, but not on output.
Filters are supported by the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy, but not by the Reader/Writer class hierarchy.
Filters read from one stream and write to another.
A filter may alter data that is read from one stream and written to another.
Ans : c and d.
Which of the following are true?
Any Unicode character is represented using 16-bits.
7-bits are needed to represent any ASCII character.
UTF-8 characters are represented using only 8-bits.
UTF-16 characters are represented using only 16-bits.
Ans : a and b.
Which of the following are true?
The Serializable interface is used to identify objects that may be written to an output stream.
The Externalizable interface is implemented by classes that control the way in which their objects are serialized.
The Serializable interface extends the Externalizable interface.
The Externalizable interface extends the Serializable interface.
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true about the File class?
A File object can be used to change the current working directory.
A File object can be used to access the files in the current directory.
When a File object is created, a corresponding directory or file is created in the local file system.
File objects are used to access files and directories on the local file system.
File objects can be garbage collected.
When a File object is garbage collected, the corresponding file or directory is deleted.
Ans : b, d and e.
How do you create a Reader object from an InputStream object?
Use the static createReader( ) method of InputStream class.
Use the static createReader( ) method of Reader class.
Create an InputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the InputStreamReader constructor.
Create an OutputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the OutputStreamReader constructor.
Ans : c.
Which of the following are true?
Writer classes can be used to write characters to output streams using different character encodings.
Writer classes can be used to write Unicode characters to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of the values of any Java primitive type to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of objects to output streams.
Ans : a and b.
The isFile( ) method returns a boolean value depending on whether the file object is a file or a directory.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
Reading or writing can be done even after closing the input/output source.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The ________ method helps in clearing the buffer.
Ans : flush( ).
The System.err method is used to print error message.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What is meant by StreamTokenizer?
Ans : StreamTokenizer breaks up InputStream into tokens that are delimited by sets of characters.
It has the constructor : StreamTokenizer(Reader inStream).
Here inStream must be some form of Reader.
What is Serialization and deserialization?
Ans : Serialization is the process of writing the state of an object to a byte stream.
Deserialization is the process of restoring these objects.
30) Which of the following can you perform using the File class?
a) Change the current directory
b) Return the name of the parent directory
c) Delete a file
d) Find if a file contains text or binary information
Ans : b and c.
31)How can you change the current working directory using an instance of the File class called FileName?
FileName.chdir("DirName").
FileName.cd("DirName").
FileName.cwd("DirName").
The File class does not support directly changing the current directory.
Ans : d.
EVENT HANDLING
The event delegation model, introduced in release 1.1 of the JDK, is fully compatible with the
event model.
True
False
Ans : b.
A component subclass that has executed enableEvents( ) to enable processing of a certain kind of event cannot also use an adapter as a listener for the same kind of event.
True
False
Ans : b.
What is the highest-level event class of the event-delegation model?
Ans : The java.util.eventObject class is the highest-level class in the event-delegation hierarchy.
What interface is extended by AWT event listeners?
Ans : All AWT event listeners extend the java.util.EventListener interface.
What class is the top of the AWT event hierarchy?
Ans : The java.awt.AWTEvent class is the highest-level class in the AWT event class hierarchy.
What event results from the clicking of a button?
Ans : The ActionEvent event is generated as the result of the clicking of a button.
What is the relationship between an event-listener interface and an event-adapter class?
Ans : An event-listener interface defines the methods that must be implemented by an event
handler for a particular kind of event.
An event adapter provides a default implementation of an event-listener interface.
In which package are most of the AWT events that support the event-delegation model defined?
Ans : Most of the AWT–related events of the event-delegation model are defined in the
java.awt.event package. The AWTEvent class is defined in the java.awt package.
What is the advantage of the event-delegation model over the earlier event-inheritance model?
Ans : The event-delegation has two advantages over the event-inheritance model. They are :
It enables event handling by objects other than the ones that generate the events. This
allows a clean separation between a component’s design and its use.
It performs much better in applications where many events are generated. This
performance improvement is due to the fact that the event-delegation model does not
have to repeatedly process unhandled events, as is the case of the event-inheritance
model.
What is the purpose of the enableEvents( ) method?
Ans :The enableEvents( ) method is used to enable an event for a particular object.
Which of the following are true?
The event-inheritance model has replaced the event-delegation model.
The event-inheritance model is more efficient than the event-delegation model.
The event-delegation model uses event listeners to define the methods of event-handling classes.
The event-delegation model uses the handleEvent( ) method to support event handling.
Ans : c.
Which of the following is the highest class in the event-delegation model?
java.util.EventListener
java.util.EventObject
java.awt.AWTEvent
java.awt.event.AWTEvent
Ans : b.
When two or more objects are added as listeners for the same event, which listener is first invoked to handle the event?
The first object that was added as listener.
The last object that was added as listener.
There is no way to determine which listener will be invoked first.
It is impossible to have more than one listener for a given event.
Ans : c.
Which of the following components generate action events?
Buttons
Labels
Check boxes
Windows
Ans : a.
Which of the following are true?
A TextField object may generate an ActionEvent.
A TextArea object may generate an ActionEvent.
A Button object may generate an ActionEvent.
A MenuItem object may generate an ActionEvent.
Ans : a,c and d.
Which of the following are true?
The MouseListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseMotionListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseClickListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The ActionListener interface defines methods for handling the clicking of a button.
Ans : a and d.
Suppose that you want to have an object eh handle the TextEvent of a TextArea object t. How should you add eh as the event handler for t?
t.addTextListener(eh);
eh.addTextListener(t);
addTextListener(eh.t);
addTextListener(t,eh);
Ans : a.
What is the preferred way to handle an object’s events in Java 2?
Override the object’s handleEvent( ) method.
Add one or more event listeners to handle the events.
Have the object override its processEvent( ) methods.
Have the object override its dispatchEvent( ) methods.
Ans : b.
Which of the following are true?
A component may handle its own events by adding itself as an event listener.
A component may handle its own events by overriding its event-dispatching method.
A component may not handle oits own events.
A component may handle its own events only if it implements the handleEvent( ) method.
Ans : a and b.
APPLETS
What is an Applet? Should applets have constructors?
Ans : Applet is a dynamic and interactive program that runs inside a Web page
displayed by a Java capable browser. We don’t have the concept of Constructors in Applets.
How do we read number information from my applet’s parameters, given that Applet’s getParameter() method returns a string?
Ans : Use the parseInt() method in the Integer Class, the Float(String) constructor in the
Class Float, or the Double(String) constructor in the class Double.
How can I arrange for different applets on a web page to communicate with each other?
Ans : Name your applets inside the Applet tag and invoke AppletContext’s getApplet()
method in your applet code to obtain references to the other applets on the page.
How do I select a URL from my Applet and send the browser to that page?
Ans : Ask the applet for its applet context and invoke showDocument() on that context object.
Eg. URL targetURL;
String URLString
AppletContext context = getAppletContext();
try{
targetUR L = new URL(URLString);
} catch (Malformed URLException e){
// Code for recover from the exception
}
context. showDocument (targetURL);
Can applets on different pages communicate with each other?
Ans : No. Not Directly. The applets will exchange the information at one meeting place
either on the local file system or at remote system.
How do Applets differ from Applications?
Ans : Appln: Stand Alone
Applet: Needs no explicit installation on local m/c.
Appln: Execution starts with main() method.
Applet: Execution starts with init() method.
Appln: May or may not be a GUI
Applet: Must run within a GUI (Using AWT)
How do I determine the width and height of my application?
Ans : Use the getSize() method, which the Applet class inherits from the Component
class in the Java.awt package. The getSize() method returns the size of the applet as
a Dimension object, from which you extract separate width, height fields.
Eg. Dimension dim = getSize ();
int appletwidth = dim.width ();
8) What is AppletStub Interface?
Ans : The applet stub interface provides the means by which an applet and the browser communicate. Your code will not typically implement this interface.
It is essential to have both the .java file and the .html file of an applet in the same
directory.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
The tag contains two attributes namely _________ and _______.
Ans : Name , value.
Passing values to parameters is done in the _________ file of an applet.
Ans : .html.
12) What tags are mandatory when creating HTML to display an applet
name, height, width
code, name
codebase, height, width
d) code, height, width
Ans : d.
Applet’s getParameter( ) method can be used to get parameter values.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the Applet’s Life Cycle methods? Explain them?
Ans : init( ) method - Can be called when an applet is first loaded.
start( ) method - Can be called each time an applet is started.
paint( ) method - Can be called when the applet is minimized or refreshed.
stop( ) method - Can be called when the browser moves off the applet’s page.
destroy( ) method - Can be called when the browser is finished with the applet.
What are the Applet’s information methods?
Ans : getAppletInfo( ) method : Returns a string describing the applet, its author ,copy
right information, etc.
getParameterInfo( ) method : Returns an array of string describing the applet’s parameters.
All Applets are subclasses of Applet.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
All Applets must import java.applet and java.awt.
True.
False.
Ans : a.
What are the steps involved in Applet development?
Ans : a) Edit a Java source file,
b) Compile your program and
c) Execute the appletviewer, specifying the name of your applet’s source file.
Applets are executed by the console based Java run-time interpreter.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
Which classes and interfaces does Applet class consist?
Ans : Applet class consists of a single class, the Applet class and three interfaces: AppletContext,
AppletStub and AudioClip.
What is the sequence for calling the methods by AWT for applets?
Ans : When an applet begins, the AWT calls the following methods, in this sequence.
init( )
start( )
paint( )
When an applet is terminated, the following sequence of method cals takes place :
stop( )
destroy( )
Which method is used to output a string to an applet?
Ans : drawString ( ) method.
Every color is created from an RGB value.
True.
False
Ans : a.
AWT : WINDOWS, GRAPHICS AND FONTS
How would you set the color of a graphics context called g to cyan?
g.setColor(Color.cyan);
g.setCurrentColor(cyan);
g.setColor("Color.cyan");
g.setColor("cyan’);
g.setColor(new Color(cyan));
Ans : a.
The code below draws a line. What color is the line?
g.setColor(Color.red.green.yellow.red.cyan);
g.drawLine(0, 0, 100,100);
Red
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Ans : d.
What does the following code draw?
g.setColor(Color.black);
g.drawLine(10, 10, 10, 50);
g.setColor(Color.RED);
g.drawRect(100, 100, 150, 150);
A red vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A red vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 100 pixel
Ans : b.
Which of the statements below are true?
A polyline is always filled.
b) A polyline can not be filled.
c) A polygon is always filled.
d) A polygon is always closed
e) A polygon may be filled or not filled
Ans : b, d and e.
What code would you use to construct a 24-point bold serif font?
new Font(Font.SERIF, 24,Font.BOLD);
new Font("SERIF", 24, BOLD");
new Font("BOLD ", 24,Font.SERIF);
new Font("SERIF", Font.BOLD,24);
new Font(Font.SERIF, "BOLD", 24);
Ans : d.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
The string "question #6", with its top-left corner at 10,0
A little squiggle coming down from the top of the component, a little way in from the left edge
Ans : b.
What does the following paint( ) method draw?
Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
A circle at (100, 100) with radius of 44
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 100
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 44
The code does not compile
Ans : d.
8)What is relationship between the Canvas class and the Graphics class?
Ans : A Canvas object provides access to a Graphics object via its paint( ) method.
What are the Component subclasses that support painting.
Ans : The Canvas, Frame, Panel and Applet classes support painting.
What is the difference between the paint( ) and repaint( ) method?
Ans : The paint( ) method supports painting via a Graphics object. The repaint( ) method is used
to cause paint( ) to be invoked by the AWT painting method.
What is the difference between the Font and FontMetrics classes?
Ans : The FontMetrics class is used to define implementation-specific properties, such as ascent
and descent, of a Font object.
Which of the following are passed as an argument to the paint( ) method?
A Canvas object
A Graphics object
An Image object
A paint object
Ans : b.
Which of the following methods are invoked by the AWT to support paint and repaint operations?
paint( )
repaint( )
draw( )
redraw( )
Ans : a.
Which of the following classes have a paint( ) method?
Canvas
Image
Frame
Graphics
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following are methods of the Graphics class?
drawRect( )
drawImage( )
drawPoint( )
drawString( )
Ans : a, b and d.
Which Font attributes are available through the FontMetrics class?
ascent
leading
case
height
Ans : a, b and d.
Which of the following are true?
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been minimized and then maximized.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been covered and then uncovered.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when application data is changed.
The AWT does not support repainting operations.
Ans : a and b.
Which method is used to size a graphics object to fit the current size of the window?
Ans : getSize( ) method.
What are the methods to be used to set foreground and background colors?
Ans : setForeground( ) and setBackground( ) methods.
19) You have created a simple Frame and overridden the paint method as follows
public void paint(Graphics g){
g.drawString("Dolly",50,10);
}
What will be the result when you attempt to compile and run the program?
The string "Dolly" will be displayed at the centre of the frame
b) An error at compilation complaining at the signature of the paint method
c) The lower part of the word Dolly will be seen at the top of the form, with the top hidden.
d) The string "Dolly" will be shown at the bottom of the form
Ans : c.
20) Where g is a graphics instance what will the following code draw on the screen.
g.fillArc(45,90,50,50,90,180);
a) An arc bounded by a box of height 45, width 90 with a centre point of 50,50, starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
b) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a centre point of 45,90 starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees clockwise.
c) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a top left at coordinates of 45,
90, starting at 90 degrees and traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
d) An arc starting at 45 degrees, traversing through 90 degrees clockwise bounded by a
box of height 50, width 50 with a centre point of 90, 180.
Ans : c.
21) Given the following code
import java.awt.*;
public class SetF extends Frame{
public static void main(String argv[]){
SetF s = new SetF();
s.setSize(300,200);
s.setVisible(true);
}
}
How could you set the frame surface color to pink
a)s.setBackground(Color.pink);
b)s.setColor(PINK);
c)s.Background(pink);
d)s.color=Color.pink
Ans : a.
AWT: CONTROLS, LAYOUT MANAGERS AND MENUS
What is meant by Controls and what are different types of controls?
Ans : Controls are componenets that allow a user to interact with your application.
The AWT supports the following types of controls:
Labels
Push buttons
Check boxes
Choice lists
Lists
Scroll bars
Text components
These controls are subclasses of Component.
You want to construct a text area that is 80 character-widths wide and 10 character-heights tall. What code do you use?
new TextArea(80, 10)
new TextArea(10, 80)
Ans: b.
A text field has a variable-width font. It is constructed by calling new
TextField("iiiii"). What happens if you change the contents of the text field to
"wwwww"? (Bear in mind that is one of the narrowest characters, and w is one of the widest.)
The text field becomes wider.
The text field becomes narrower.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the ß and à keys.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the text field’s horizontal scroll bar.
Ans : c.
The CheckboxGroup class is a subclass of the Component class.
True
False
Ans : b.
5) What are the immediate super classes of the following classes?
a) Container class
b) MenuComponent class
c) Dialog class
d) Applet class
e) Menu class
Ans : a) Container - Component
b) MenuComponent - Object
c) Dialog - Window
d) Applet - Panel
e) Menu - MenuItem
6) What are the SubClass of Textcomponent Class?
Ans : TextField and TextArea
7) Which method of the component class is used to set the position and the size of a component?
Ans : setBounds()
8) Which TextComponent method is used to set a TextComponent to the read-only state?
Ans : setEditable()
9) How can the Checkbox class be used to create a radio button?
Ans : By associating Checkbox objects with a CheckboxGroup.
10) What Checkbox method allows you to tell if a Checkbox is checked?
Ans : getState()
11) Which Component method is used to access a component's immediate Container?
getVisible()
getImmediate
getParent()
getContainer
Ans : c.
12) What methods are used to get and set the text label displayed by a Button object?
Ans : getLabel( ) and setLabel( )
13) What is the difference between a Choice and a List?
Ans : A Choice is displayed in a compact form that requires you to pull it down to see the list of available choices. Only one item may be selected from a Choice.
A List may be displayed in such a way that several List items are visible. A List supports the selection of one or more List items.
14) Which Container method is used to cause a container to be laid out and redisplayed?
Ans : validate( )
15) What is the difference between a Scollbar and a Scrollpane?
Ans : A Scrollbar is a Component, but not a Container.
A Scrollpane is a Container and handles its own events and performs its own
scrolling.
16) Which Component subclass is used for drawing and painting?
Ans : Canvas.
17) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Component?
Button
Label
CheckboxMenuItem
Toolbar
Frame
Ans : a, b and e.
18) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Container?
Frame
TextArea
MenuBar
FileDialog
Applet
Ans : a,d and e.
19) Which method is used to set the text of a Label object?
setText( )
setLabel( )
setTextLabel( )
setLabelText( )
Ans : a.
20) Which constructor creates a TextArea with 10 rows and 20 columns?
new TextArea(10, 20)
new TextArea(20, 10)
new TextArea(new Rows(10), new columns(20))
new TextArea(200)
Ans : a.
(Usage is TextArea(rows, columns)
21) Which of the following creates a List with 5 visible items and multiple selection enabled?
new List(5, true)
new List(true, 5)
new List(5, false)
new List(false,5)
Ans : a.
[Usage is List(rows, multipleMode)]
22) Which are true about the Container class?
The validate( ) method is used to cause a Container to be laid out and redisplayed.
The add( ) method is used to add a Component to a Container.
The getBorder( ) method returns information about a Container’s insets.
The getComponent( ) method is used to access a Component that is contained in a Container.
Ans : a, b and d.
23) Suppose a Panel is added to a Frame and a Button is added to the Panel. If the Frame’s font is set to 12-point TimesRoman, the Panel’s font is set to 10-point TimesRoman, and the Button’s font is not set, what font will be used to dispaly the Button’s label?
12-point TimesRoman
11-point TimesRoman
10-point TimesRoman
9-point TimesRoman
Ans : c.
A Frame’s background color is set to Color.Yellow, and a Button’s background color is to Color.Blue. Suppose the Button is added to a Panel, which is added to the Frame. What background color will be used with the Panel?
Colr.Yellow
Color.Blue
Color.Green
Color.White
Ans : a.
25) Which method will cause a Frame to be displayed?
show( )
setVisible( )
display( )
displayFrame( )
Ans : a and b.
26) All the componenet classes and container classes are derived from _________ class.
Ans : Object.
27) Which method of the container class can be used to add components to a Panel.
Ans : add ( ) method.
28) What are the subclasses of the Container class?
Ans : The Container class has three major subclasses. They are :
Window
Panel
ScrollPane
29) The Choice component allows multiple selection.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
30) The List component does not generate any events.
True.
False.
Ans : b.
31) Which components are used to get text input from the user.
Ans : TextField and TextArea.
32) Which object is needed to group Checkboxes to make them exclusive?
Ans : CheckboxGroup.
33) Which of the following components allow multiple selections?
Non-exclusive Checkboxes.
Radio buttons.
Choice.
List.
Ans : a and d.
34) What are the types of Checkboxes and what is the difference between them?
Ans : Java supports two types of Checkboxes. They are : Exclusive and Non-exclusive.
In case of exclusive Checkboxes, only one among a group of items can be selected at a time. I f an item from the group is selected, the checkbox currently checked is deselected and the new selection is highlighted. The exclusive Checkboxes are also called as Radio buttons.
The non-exclusive checkboxes are not grouped together and each one can be selected independent of the other.
35) What is a Layout Manager and what are the different Layout Managers available in java.awt and what is the default Layout manager for the panal and the panal subclasses?
Ans: A layout Manager is an object that is used to organize components in a container.
The different layouts available in java.awt are :
FlowLayout, BorderLayout, CardLayout, GridLayout and GridBag Layout.
The default Layout Manager of Panal and Panal sub classes is FlowLayout".
36) Can I exert control over the size and placement of components in my interface?
Ans : Yes.
myPanal.setLayout(null);
myPanal.setbounds(20,20,200,200);
37) Can I add the same component to more than one container?
Ans : No. Adding a component to a container automatically removes it from any previous parent(container).
38) How do I specify where a window is to be placed?
Ans : Use setBounds, setSize, or setLocation methods to implement this.
setBounds(int x, int y, int width, int height)
setBounds(Rectangle r)
setSize(int width, int height)
setSize(Dimension d)
setLocation(int x, int y)
setLocation(Point p)
39) How can we create a borderless window?
Ans : Create an instance of the Window class, give it a size, and show it on the screen.
eg. Frame aFrame = ......
Window aWindow = new Window(aFrame);
aWindow.setLayout(new FlowLayout());
aWindow.add(new Button("Press Me"));
aWindow.getBounds(50,50,200,200);
aWindow.show();
40) Can I create a non-resizable windows? If so, how?
Ans: Yes. By using setResizable() method in class Frame.
41) What is the default Layout Manager for the Window and Window subclasses (Frame,Dialog)?
Ans : BorderLayout().
42) How are the elements of different layouts organized?
Ans : FlowLayout : The elements of a FlowLayout are organized in a top to bottom, left to right fashion.
BorderLayout : The elements of a BorderLayout are organized at the
borders (North, South, East and West) and the center of a
container.
CardLayout : The elements of a CardLayout are stacked, one on top of the other, like a deck of cards.
GridLayout : The elements of a GridLayout are of equal size and are laid out using the square of a grid.
GridBagLayout : The elements of a GridBagLayout are organized according to a grid.However, the elements are of different sizes and may occupy
more than one row or column of the grid. In addition, the rows and columns may have different sizes.
43) Which containers use a BorderLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Window, Frame and Dialog classes use a BorderLayout as their default layout.
44) Which containers use a FlowLayout as their default layout?
Ans : The Panel and the Applet classes use the FlowLayout as their default layout.
45) What is the preferred size of a component?
Ans : The preferred size of a component size that will allow the component to display normally.
46) Which method is method to set the layout of a container?
startLayout( )
initLayout( )
layoutContainer( )
setLayout( )
Ans : d.
47) Which method returns the preferred size of a component?
getPreferredSize( )
getPreferred( )
getRequiredSize( )
getLayout( )
Ans : a.
48) Which layout should you use to organize the components of a container in a
tabular form?
CardLayout
BorederLayout
FlowLayout
GridLayout
Ans : d.
An application has a frame that uses a Border layout manager. Why is it probably not a good idea to put a vertical scroll bar at North in the frame?
The scroll bar’s height would be its preferred height, which is not likely to be enough.
The scroll bar’s width would be the entire width of the frame, which would be much wider than necessary.
Both a and b.
Neither a nor b. There is no problem with the layout as described.
Ans : c.
What is the default layouts for a applet, a frame and a panel?
Ans : For an applet and a panel, Flow layout is the default layout, whereas Border layout is default layout for a frame.
If a frame uses a Grid layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : a.
If a frame uses its default layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : b.
With a Border layout manager, the component at Center gets all the space that is left over, after the components at North and South have been considered.
True
False
Ans : b.
An Applet has its Layout Manager set to the default of FlowLayout. What code would be the correct to change to another Layout Manager?
setLayoutManager(new GridLayout());
setLayout(new GridLayout(2,2));
c) setGridLayout(2,2,))
d setBorderLayout();
Ans : b.
55) How do you indicate where a component will be positioned using Flowlayout?
a) North, South,East,West
b) Assign a row/column grid reference
c) Pass a X/Y percentage parameter to the add method
d) Do nothing, the FlowLayout will position the component
Ans :d.
56) How do you change the current layout manager for a container?
a) Use the setLayout method
b) Once created you cannot change the current layout manager of a component
c) Use the setLayoutManager method
d) Use the updateLayout method
Ans :a.
57)When using the GridBagLayout manager, each new component requires a new instance of the GridBagConstraints class. Is this statement true or false?
a) true
b) false
Ans : b.
58) Which of the following statements are true?
a)The default layout manager for an Applet is FlowLayout
b) The default layout manager for an application is FlowLayout
c) A layout manager must be assigned to an Applet before the setSize method is called
d) The FlowLayout manager attempts to honor the preferred size of any components
Ans : a and d.
59) Which method does display the messages whenever there is an item selection or deselection of the CheckboxMenuItem menu?
Ans : itemStateChanged method.
60) Which is a dual state menu item?
Ans : CheckboxMenuItem.
61) Which method can be used to enable/diable a checkbox menu item?
Ans : setState(boolean).
Which of the following may a menu contain?
A separator
A check box
A menu
A button
A panel
Ans : a and c.
Which of the following may contain a menu bar?
A panel
A frame
An applet
A menu bar
A menu
Ans : b
64) What is the difference between a MenuItem and a CheckboxMenuItem?
Ans : The CheckboxMenuItem class extends the MenuItem class to support a menu item
that may be checked or unchecked.
65) Which of the following are true?
A Dialog can have a MenuBar.
MenuItem extends Menu.
A MenuItem can be added to a Menu.
A Menu can be added to a Menu.
Ans : c and d.
Which colour is used to indicate instance methods in the standard "javadoc" format documentation:
1) blue
2) red
3) purple
4) orange
Answer : 2
explain
In JDK 1.1 the variabels, methods and constructors are colour coded to simplifytheir identification.
endExplain
What is the correct ordering for the import, class and package declarations when found in a single file?
1) package, import, class
2) class, import, package
3) import, package, class
4) package, class, import
Answer : 1
explain
This is my explanation for question 2
endExplain
Which methods can be legally applied to a string object?
(Multiple)
1) equals(String)
2) equals(Object)
3) trim()
4) round()
5) toString()
Answer : 1,2,3,5
What is the parameter specification for the public static void main method?
(multiple)
1) String args []
2) String [] args
3) Strings args []
4) String args
Answer : 1,2
What does the zeroth element of the string array passed to the public static void main method contain?
(multiple)
1) The name of the program
2) The number of arguments
3) The first argument if one is present
Answer : 3
Which of the following are Java keywords?
(multiple)
1) goto
2) malloc
3) extends
4) FALSE
Answer : 3
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
int age;
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 4
Which of these is the correct format to use to create the literal char value a?
(multiple)
1) 'a'
2) "a"
3) new Character(a)
4) \000a
Answer : 1
What is the legal range of a byte integral type?
1) 0 - 65, 535
2) (-128) - 127
3) (-32,768) - 32,767
4) (-256) - 255
Answer : 2
Which of the following is illegal:
1) int i = 32;
2) float f = 45.0;
3) double d = 45.0;
Answer 2
What will be the result of compiling the following code:
public class Test {
static int age;
public static void main (String args []) {
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 2
Which of the following are correct?
(multiple)
1) 128 >> 1 gives 64
2) 128 >>> 1 gives 64
3) 128 >> 1 gives -64
4) 128 >>> 1 gives -64
Answer : 1
Which of the following return true?
(multiple)
1) "john" == new String("john")
2) "john".equals("john")
3) "john" = "john"
4) "john".equals(new Button("john"))
Answer : 2
Which of the following do not lead to a runtime error?
(multiple)
1) "john" + " was " + " here"
2) "john" + 3
3) 3 + 5
4) 5 + 5.5
answer 1,2,3,4
Which of the following are so called "short circuit" logical operators?
(multiple)
1) &
2) ||
3) &&
4) |
Answer : 2,3
Which of the following are acceptable?
(multiple)
1) Object o = new Button("A");
2) Boolean flag = true;
3) Panel p = new Frame();
4) Frame f = new Panel();
5) Panel p = new Applet();
Answer : 1,5
What is the result of compiling and running the following code:
public class Test {
static int total = 10;
public static void main (String args []) {
new Test();
}
public Test () {
System.out.println("In test");
System.out.println(this);
int temp = this.total;
if (temp > 5) {
System.out.println(temp);
}
}
}
(multiple)
1) The class will not compile
2) The compiler reports and error at line 2
3) The compiler reports an error at line 9
4) The value 10 is one of the elements printed to the standard output
5) The class compiles but generates a runtime error
Answer : 4
Which of the following is correct:
1) String temp [] = new String {"j" "a" "z"};
2) String temp [] = { "j " " b" "c"};
3) String temp = {"a", "b", "c"};
4) String temp [] = {"a", "b", "c"};
Answer 4
What is the correct declaration of an abstract method that is intended to be public:
1) public abstract void add();
2) public abstract void add() {}
3) public abstract add();
4) public virtual add();
Answer : 1
Under what situations do you obtain a default constructor?
1) When you define any class
2) When the class has no other constructors
3) When you define at least one constructor
Answer : 2
Which of the following can be used to define a constructor for this class, given the following code:
public class Test {
...
}
1) public void Test() {...}
2) public Test() {...}
3) public static Test() {...}
4) public static void Test() {...}
Answer : 2
Which of the following are acceptable to the Java compiler:
(multiple)
1) if (2 == 3) System.out.println("Hi");
2) if (2 = 3) System.out.println("Hi");
3) if (true) System.out.println("Hi");
4) if (2 != 3) System.out.println("Hi");
5) if (aString.equals("hello")) System.out.println("Hi");
Answer : 1,3,4,5
Assuming a method contains code which may raise an Exception (but not a RuntimeException), what is the correct way for a method to indicate that it expects the caller to handle that exception:
1) throw Exception
2) throws Exception
3) new Exception
4) Don't need to specify anything
Answer : 2
What is the result of executing the following code, using the parameters 4 and 0:
public void divide(int a, int b) {
try {
int c = a / b;
} catch (Exception e) {
System.out.print("Exception ");
} finally {
System.out.println("Finally");
}
1) Prints out: Exception Finally
2) Prints out: Finally
3) Prints out: Exception
4) No output
Answer : 1
Which of the following is a legal return type of a method overloading the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) void
2) int
3) Can be anything
Answer : 3
Which of the following statements is correct for a method which is overriding the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) the overriding method must return void
2) the overriding method must return int
3) the overriding method can return whatever it likes
Answer : 1
Given the following classes defined in separate files, what will be the effect of compiling and running this class Test?
class Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Vehicle: drive");
}
}
class Car extends Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Car: drive");
}
}
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
Vehicle v;
Car c;
v = new Vehicle();
c = new Car();
v.drive();
c.drive();
v = c;
v.drive();
}
}
1) Generates a Compiler error on the statement v= c;
2) Generates runtime error on the statement v= c;
3) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Car: drive
4) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Vehicle: drive
Answer : 3
Where in a constructor, can you place a call to a constructor defined in the super class?
1) Anywhere
2) The first statement in the constructor
3) The last statement in the constructor
4) You can't call super in a constructor
Answer : 2
Which variables can an inner class access from the class which encapsulates it?
(multiple)
1) All static variables
2) All final variables
3) All instance variables
4) Only final instance variables
5) Only final static variables
Answer : 1,2,3
What class must an inner class extend:
1) The top level class
2) The Object class
3) Any class or interface
4) It must extend an interface
Answer 3
In the following code, which is the earliest statement, where the object originally held in e, may be garbage collected:
1. public class Test {
2. public static void main (String args []) {
3. Employee e = new Employee("Bob", 48);
4. e.calculatePay();
5. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
6. e = null;
7. e = new Employee("Denise", 36);
8. e.calculatePay();
9. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
10. }
11. }
1) Line 10
2) Line 11
3) Line 7
4) Line 8
5) Never
Answer : 3
What is the name of the interface that can be used to define a class that can execute within its own thread?
1) Runnable
2) Run
3) Threadable
4) Thread
5) Executable
Answer : 1
What is the name of the method used to schedule a thread for execution?
1) init();
2) start();
3) run();
4) resume();
5) sleep();
Answer : 2
Which methods may cause a thread to stop executing?
(multiple)
1) sleep();
2) stop();
3) yield();
4) wait();
5) notify();
6) notifyAll()
7) synchronized()
Answer : 1,2,3,4
Which of the following would create a text field able to display 10 characters (assuming a fixed size font) displaying the initial string "hello":
1) new TextField("hello", 10);
2) new TextField("hello");
3) new textField(10);
4) new TextField();
Answer : 1
Which of the following methods are defined on the Graphics class:
(multiple)
1) drawLine(int, int, int, int)
2) drawImage(Image, int, int, ImageObserver)
3) drawString(String, int, int)
4) add(Component);
5) setVisible(boolean);
6) setLayout(Object);
Answer : 1,2,3
Which of the following layout managers honours the preferred size of a component:
(multiple)
1) CardLayout
2) FlowLayout
3) BorderLayout
4) GridLayout
Answer : 2
Given the following code what is the effect of a being 5:
public class Test {
public void add(int a) {
loop: for (int i = 1; i < 3; i++){
for (int j = 1; j < 3; j++) {
if (a == 5) {
break loop;
}
System.out.println(i * j);
}
}
}
}
1) Generate a runtime error
2) Throw an ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException
3) Print the values: 1, 2, 2, 4
4) Produces no output
Answer : 4
What is the effect of issuing a wait() method on an object
1) If a notify() method has already been sent to that object then it has no effect
2) The object issuing the call to wait() will halt until another object sends a notify() or notifyAll() method
3) An exception will be raised
4) The object issuing the call to wait() will be automatically synchronized with any other objects using the receiving object.
Answer : 2
The layout of a container can be altered using which of the following methods:
(multiple)
1) setLayout(aLayoutManager);
2) addLayout(aLayoutManager);
3) layout(aLayoutManager);
4) setLayoutManager(aLayoutManager);
Answer : 1
Using a FlowLayout manager, which is the correct way to add elements to a container:
1) add(component);
2) add("Center", component);
3) add(x, y, component);
4) set(component);
Answer : 1
Given that a Button can generate an ActionEvent which listener would you expect to have to implement, in a class which would handle this event?
1) FocusListener
2) ComponentListener
3) WindowListener
4) ActionListener
5) ItemListener
Answer : 4
Which of the following, are valid return types, for listener methods:
1) boolean
2) the type of event handled
3) void
4) Component
Answer : 3
Assuming we have a class which implements the ActionListener interface, which method should be used to register this with a Button?
1) addListener(*);
2) addActionListener(*);
3) addButtonListener(*);
4) setListener(*);
Answer : 2
In order to cause the paint(Graphics) method to execute, which of the following is the most appropriate method to call:
1) paint()
2) repaint()
3) paint(Graphics)
4) update(Graphics)
5) None - you should never cause paint(Graphics) to execute
Answer : 2
Which of the following illustrates the correct way to pass a parameter into an applet:
1)
C/C++ FAQS
Note : All the programs are tested under Turbo C/C++ compilers.
It is assumed that,
Ø Programs run under DOS environment,
Ø The underlying machine is an x86 system,
Ø Program is compiled using Turbo C/C++ compiler.
The program output may depend on the information based on this assumptions (for example sizeof(int) == 2 may be assumed).
Predict the output or error(s) for the following:
1. void main()
{
int const * p=5;
printf("%d",++(*p));
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Cannot modify a constant value.
Explanation:
p is a pointer to a "constant integer". But we tried to change the value of the "constant integer".
2. main()
{
char s[ ]="man";
int i;
for(i=0;s[ i ];i++)
printf("\n%c%c%c%c",s[ i ],*(s+i),*(i+s),i[s]);
}
Answer:
mmmm
aaaa
nnnn
Explanation:
s[i], *(i+s), *(s+i), i[s] are all different ways of expressing the same idea. Generally array name is the base address for that array. Here s is the base address. i is the index number/displacement from the base address. So, indirecting it with * is same as s[i]. i[s] may be surprising. But in the case of C it is same as s[i].
3. main()
{
float me = 1.1;
double you = 1.1;
if(me==you)
printf("I love U");
else
printf("I hate U");
}
Answer:
I hate U
Explanation:
For floating point numbers (float, double, long double) the values cannot be predicted exactly. Depending on the number of bytes, the precession with of the value represented varies. Float takes 4 bytes and long double takes 10 bytes. So float stores 0.9 with less precision than long double.
Rule of Thumb:
Never compare or at-least be cautious when using floating point numbers with relational operators (== , >, <, <=, >=,!= ) .
4. main()
{
static int var = 5;
printf("%d ",var--);
if(var)
main();
}
Answer:
5 4 3 2 1
Explanation:
When static storage class is given, it is initialized once. The change in the value of a static variable is retained even between the function calls. Main is also treated like any other ordinary function, which can be called recursively.
5. main()
{
int c[ ]={2.8,3.4,4,6.7,5};
int j,*p=c,*q=c;
for(j=0;j<5;j++) {
printf(" %d ",*c);
++q; }
for(j=0;j<5;j++){
printf(" %d ",*p);
++p; }
}
Answer:
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 6 5
Explanation:
Initially pointer c is assigned to both p and q. In the first loop, since only q is incremented and not c , the value 2 will be printed 5 times. In second loop p itself is incremented. So the values 2 3 4 6 5 will be printed.
6. main()
{
extern int i;
i=20;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
Linker Error : Undefined symbol '_i'
Explanation:
extern storage class in the following declaration,
extern int i;
specifies to the compiler that the memory for i is allocated in some other program and that address will be given to the current program at the time of linking. But linker finds that no other variable of name i is available in any other program with memory space allocated for it. Hence a linker error has occurred .
7. main()
{
int i=-1,j=-1,k=0,l=2,m;
m=i++&&j++&&k++||l++;
printf("%d %d %d %d %d",i,j,k,l,m);
}
Answer:
0 0 1 3 1
Explanation :
Logical operations always give a result of 1 or 0 . And also the logical AND (&&) operator has higher priority over the logical OR (||) operator. So the expression ‘i++ && j++ && k++’ is executed first. The result of this expression is 0 (-1 && -1 && 0 = 0). Now the expression is 0 || 2 which evaluates to 1 (because OR operator always gives 1 except for ‘0 || 0’ combination- for which it gives 0). So the value of m is 1. The values of other variables are also incremented by 1.
8. main()
{
char *p;
printf("%d %d ",sizeof(*p),sizeof(p));
}
Answer:
1 2
Explanation:
The sizeof() operator gives the number of bytes taken by its operand. P is a character pointer, which needs one byte for storing its value (a character). Hence sizeof(*p) gives a value of 1. Since it needs two bytes to store the address of the character pointer sizeof(p) gives 2.
9. main()
{
int i=3;
switch(i)
{
default:printf("zero");
case 1: printf("one");
break;
case 2:printf("two");
break;
case 3: printf("three");
break;
}
}
Answer :
three
Explanation :
The default case can be placed anywhere inside the loop. It is executed only when all other cases doesn't match.
10. main()
{
printf("%x",-1<<4);
}
Answer:
fff0
Explanation :
-1 is internally represented as all 1's. When left shifted four times the least significant 4 bits are filled with 0's.The %x format specifier specifies that the integer value be printed as a hexadecimal value.
11. main()
{
char string[]="Hello World";
display(string);
}
void display(char *string)
{
printf("%s",string);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error : Type mismatch in redeclaration of function display
Explanation :
In third line, when the function display is encountered, the compiler doesn't know anything about the function display. It assumes the arguments and return types to be integers, (which is the default type). When it sees the actual function display, the arguments and type contradicts with what it has assumed previously. Hence a compile time error occurs.
12. main()
{
int c=- -2;
printf("c=%d",c);
}
Answer:
c=2;
Explanation:
Here unary minus (or negation) operator is used twice. Same maths rules applies, ie. minus * minus= plus.
Note:
However you cannot give like --2. Because -- operator can only be applied to variables as a decrement operator (eg., i--). 2 is a constant and not a variable.
13. #define int char
main()
{
int i=65;
printf("sizeof(i)=%d",sizeof(i));
}
Answer:
sizeof(i)=1
Explanation:
Since the #define replaces the string int by the macro char
14. main()
{
int i=10;
i=!i>14;
Printf ("i=%d",i);
}
Answer:
i=0
Explanation:
In the expression !i>14 , NOT (!) operator has more precedence than ‘ >’ symbol. ! is a unary logical operator. !i (!10) is 0 (not of true is false). 0>14 is false (zero).
15. #include
main()
{
char s[]={'a','b','c','\n','c','\0'};
char *p,*str,*str1;
p=&s[3];
str=p;
str1=s;
printf("%d",++*p + ++*str1-32);
}
Answer:
77
Explanation:
p is pointing to character '\n'. str1 is pointing to character 'a' ++*p. "p is pointing to '\n' and that is incremented by one." the ASCII value of '\n' is 10, which is then incremented to 11. The value of ++*p is 11. ++*str1, str1 is pointing to 'a' that is incremented by 1 and it becomes 'b'. ASCII value of 'b' is 98.
Now performing (11 + 98 – 32), we get 77("M");
So we get the output 77 :: "M" (Ascii is 77).
16. #include
main()
{
int a[2][2][2] = { {10,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8} };
int *p,*q;
p=&a[2][2][2];
*q=***a;
printf("%d----%d",*p,*q);
}
Answer:
SomeGarbageValue---1
Explanation:
p=&a[2][2][2] you declare only two 2D arrays, but you are trying to access the third 2D(which you are not declared) it will print garbage values. *q=***a starting address of a is assigned integer pointer. Now q is pointing to starting address of a. If you print *q, it will print first element of 3D array.
17. #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x=3;
char name[]="hello";
};
struct xx *s;
printf("%d",s->x);
printf("%s",s->name);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
You should not initialize variables in declaration
18. #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x;
struct yy
{
char s;
struct xx *p;
};
struct yy *q;
};
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
The structure yy is nested within structure xx. Hence, the elements are of yy are to be accessed through the instance of structure xx, which needs an instance of yy to be known. If the instance is created after defining the structure the compiler will not know about the instance relative to xx. Hence for nested structure yy you have to declare member.
19. main()
{
printf("\nab");
printf("\bsi");
printf("\rha");
}
Answer:
hai
Explanation:
\n - newline
\b - backspace
\r - linefeed
20. main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d%d%d%d%d%d",i++,i--,++i,--i,i);
}
Answer:
45545
Explanation:
The arguments in a function call are pushed into the stack from left to right. The evaluation is by popping out from the stack. and the evaluation is from right to left, hence the result.
21. #define square(x) x*x
main()
{
int i;
i = 64/square(4);
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
64
Explanation:
the macro call square(4) will substituted by 4*4 so the expression becomes i = 64/4*4 . Since / and * has equal priority the expression will be evaluated as (64/4)*4 i.e. 16*4 = 64
22. main()
{
char *p="hai friends",*p1;
p1=p;
while(*p!='\0') ++*p++;
printf("%s %s",p,p1);
}
Answer:
ibj!gsjfoet
Explanation:
++*p++ will be parse in the given order
Ø *p that is value at the location currently pointed by p will be taken
Ø ++*p the retrieved value will be incremented
Ø when ; is encountered the location will be incremented that is p++ will be executed
Hence, in the while loop initial value pointed by p is ‘h’, which is changed to ‘i’ by executing ++*p and pointer moves to point, ‘a’ which is similarly changed to ‘b’ and so on. Similarly blank space is converted to ‘!’. Thus, we obtain value in p becomes “ibj!gsjfoet” and since p reaches ‘\0’ and p1 points to p thus p1doesnot print anything.
23. #include
#define a 10
main()
{
#define a 50
printf("%d",a);
}
Answer:
50
Explanation:
The preprocessor directives can be redefined anywhere in the program. So the most recently assigned value will be taken.
24. #define clrscr() 100
main()
{
clrscr();
printf("%d\n",clrscr());
}
Answer:
100
Explanation:
Preprocessor executes as a seperate pass before the execution of the compiler. So textual replacement of clrscr() to 100 occurs.The input program to compiler looks like this :
main()
{
100;
printf("%d\n",100);
}
Note:
100; is an executable statement but with no action. So it doesn't give any problem
25. main()
{
printf("%p",main);
}
Answer:
Some address will be printed.
Explanation:
Function names are just addresses (just like array names are addresses).
main() is also a function. So the address of function main will be printed. %p in printf specifies that the argument is an address. They are printed as hexadecimal numbers.
27) main()
{
clrscr();
}
clrscr();
Answer:
No output/error
Explanation:
The first clrscr() occurs inside a function. So it becomes a function call. In the second clrscr(); is a function declaration (because it is not inside any function).
28) enum colors {BLACK,BLUE,GREEN}
main()
{
printf("%d..%d..%d",BLACK,BLUE,GREEN);
return(1);
}
Answer:
0..1..2
Explanation:
enum assigns numbers starting from 0, if not explicitly defined.
29) void main()
{
char far *farther,*farthest;
printf("%d..%d",sizeof(farther),sizeof(farthest));
}
Answer:
4..2
Explanation:
the second pointer is of char type and not a far pointer
30) main()
{
int i=400,j=300;
printf("%d..%d");
}
Answer:
400..300
Explanation:
printf takes the values of the first two assignments of the program. Any number of printf's may be given. All of them take only the first two values. If more number of assignments given in the program,then printf will take garbage values.
31) main()
{
char *p;
p="Hello";
printf("%c\n",*&*p);
}
Answer:
H
Explanation:
* is a dereference operator & is a reference operator. They can be applied any number of times provided it is meaningful. Here p points to the first character in the string "Hello". *p dereferences it and so its value is H. Again & references it to an address and * dereferences it to the value H.
32) main()
{
int i=1;
while (i<=5)
{
printf("%d",i);
if (i>2)
goto here;
i++;
}
}
fun()
{
here:
printf("PP");
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Undefined label 'here' in function main
Explanation:
Labels have functions scope, in other words The scope of the labels is limited to functions . The label 'here' is available in function fun() Hence it is not visible in function main.
33) main()
{
static char names[5][20]={"pascal","ada","cobol","fortran","perl"};
int i;
char *t;
t=names[3];
names[3]=names[4];
names[4]=t;
for (i=0;i<=4;i++)
printf("%s",names[i]);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Lvalue required in function main
Explanation:
Array names are pointer constants. So it cannot be modified.
34) void main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d",i++ + ++i);
}
Answer:
Output Cannot be predicted exactly.
Explanation:
Side effects are involved in the evaluation of i
35) void main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d",i+++++i);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
The expression i+++++i is parsed as i ++ ++ + i which is an illegal combination of operators.
36) #include
main()
{
int i=1,j=2;
switch(i)
{
case 1: printf("GOOD");
break;
case j: printf("BAD");
break;
}
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: Constant expression required in function main.
Explanation:
The case statement can have only constant expressions (this implies that we cannot use variable names directly so an error).
Note:
Enumerated types can be used in case statements.
37) main()
{
int i;
printf("%d",scanf("%d",&i)); // value 10 is given as input here
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
Scanf returns number of items successfully read and not 1/0. Here 10 is given as input which should have been scanned successfully. So number of items read is 1.
38) #define f(g,g2) g##g2
main()
{
int var12=100;
printf("%d",f(var,12));
}
Answer:
100
39) main()
{
int i=0;
for(;i++;printf("%d",i)) ;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
before entering into the for loop the checking condition is "evaluated". Here it evaluates to 0 (false) and comes out of the loop, and i is incremented (note the semicolon after the for loop).
40) #include
main()
{
char s[]={'a','b','c','\n','c','\0'};
char *p,*str,*str1;
p=&s[3];
str=p;
str1=s;
printf("%d",++*p + ++*str1-32);
}
Answer:
M
Explanation:
p is pointing to character '\n'.str1 is pointing to character 'a' ++*p meAnswer:"p is pointing to '\n' and that is incremented by one." the ASCII value of '\n' is 10. then it is incremented to 11. the value of ++*p is 11. ++*str1 meAnswer:"str1 is pointing to 'a' that is incremented by 1 and it becomes 'b'. ASCII value of 'b' is 98. both 11 and 98 is added and result is subtracted from 32.
i.e. (11+98-32)=77("M");
41) #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x=3;
char name[]="hello";
};
struct xx *s=malloc(sizeof(struct xx));
printf("%d",s->x);
printf("%s",s->name);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
Initialization should not be done for structure members inside the structure declaration
42) #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x;
struct yy
{
char s;
struct xx *p;
};
struct yy *q;
};
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
in the end of nested structure yy a member have to be declared.
43) main()
{
extern int i;
i=20;
printf("%d",sizeof(i));
}
Answer:
Linker error: undefined symbol '_i'.
Explanation:
extern declaration specifies that the variable i is defined somewhere else. The compiler passes the external variable to be resolved by the linker. So compiler doesn't find an error. During linking the linker searches for the definition of i. Since it is not found the linker flags an error.
44) main()
{
printf("%d", out);
}
int out=100;
Answer:
Compiler error: undefined symbol out in function main.
Explanation:
The rule is that a variable is available for use from the point of declaration. Even though a is a global variable, it is not available for main. Hence an error.
45) main()
{
extern out;
printf("%d", out);
}
int out=100;
Answer:
100
Explanation:
This is the correct way of writing the previous program.
46) main()
{
show();
}
void show()
{
printf("I'm the greatest");
}
Answer:
Compier error: Type mismatch in redeclaration of show.
Explanation:
When the compiler sees the function show it doesn't know anything about it. So the default return type (ie, int) is assumed. But when compiler sees the actual definition of show mismatch occurs since it is declared as void. Hence the error.
The solutions are as follows:
1. declare void show() in main() .
2. define show() before main().
3. declare extern void show() before the use of show().
47) main( )
{
int a[2][3][2] = {{{2,4},{7,8},{3,4}},{{2,2},{2,3},{3,4}}};
printf(“%u %u %u %d \n”,a,*a,**a,***a);
printf(“%u %u %u %d \n”,a+1,*a+1,**a+1,***a+1);
}
Answer:
100, 100, 100, 2
114, 104, 102, 3
Explanation:
The given array is a 3-D one. It can also be viewed as a 1-D array.
2 4 7 8 3 4 2 2 2 3 3 4
100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122
thus, for the first printf statement a, *a, **a give address of first element . since the indirection ***a gives the value. Hence, the first line of the output.
for the second printf a+1 increases in the third dimension thus points to value at 114, *a+1 increments in second dimension thus points to 104, **a +1 increments the first dimension thus points to 102 and ***a+1 first gets the value at first location and then increments it by 1. Hence, the output.
48) main( )
{
int a[ ] = {10,20,30,40,50},j,*p;
for(j=0; j<5; j++)
{
printf(“%d” ,*a);
a++;
}
p = a;
for(j=0; j<5; j++)
{
printf(“%d ” ,*p);
p++;
}
}
Answer:
Compiler error: lvalue required.
Explanation:
Error is in line with statement a++. The operand must be an lvalue and may be of any of scalar type for the any operator, array name only when subscripted is an lvalue. Simply array name is a non-modifiable lvalue.
49) main( )
{
static int a[ ] = {0,1,2,3,4};
int *p[ ] = {a,a+1,a+2,a+3,a+4};
int **ptr = p;
ptr++;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
*ptr++;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
*++ptr;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
++*ptr;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
}
Answer:
111
222
333
344
Explanation:
Let us consider the array and the two pointers with some address
a
0 1 2 3 4
100 102 104 106 108
p
100 102 104 106 108
1000 1002 1004 1006 1008
ptr
1000
2000
After execution of the instruction ptr++ value in ptr becomes 1002, if scaling factor for integer is 2 bytes. Now ptr – p is value in ptr – starting location of array p, (1002 – 1000) / (scaling factor) = 1, *ptr – a = value at address pointed by ptr – starting value of array a, 1002 has a value 102 so the value is (102 – 100)/(scaling factor) = 1, **ptr is the value stored in the location pointed by the pointer of ptr = value pointed by value pointed by 1002 = value pointed by 102 = 1. Hence the output of the firs printf is 1, 1, 1.
After execution of *ptr++ increments value of the value in ptr by scaling factor, so it becomes1004. Hence, the outputs for the second printf are ptr – p = 2, *ptr – a = 2, **ptr = 2.
After execution of *++ptr increments value of the value in ptr by scaling factor, so it becomes1004. Hence, the outputs for the third printf are ptr – p = 3, *ptr – a = 3, **ptr = 3.
After execution of ++*ptr value in ptr remains the same, the value pointed by the value is incremented by the scaling factor. So the value in array p at location 1006 changes from 106 10 108,. Hence, the outputs for the fourth printf are ptr – p = 1006 – 1000 = 3, *ptr – a = 108 – 100 = 4, **ptr = 4.
50) main( )
{
char *q;
int j;
for (j=0; j<3; j++) scanf(“%s” ,(q+j));
for (j=0; j<3; j++) printf(“%c” ,*(q+j));
for (j=0; j<3; j++) printf(“%s” ,(q+j));
}
Explanation:
Here we have only one pointer to type char and since we take input in the same pointer thus we keep writing over in the same location, each time shifting the pointer value by 1. Suppose the inputs are MOUSE, TRACK and VIRTUAL. Then for the first input suppose the pointer starts at location 100 then the input one is stored as
M O U S E \0
When the second input is given the pointer is incremented as j value becomes 1, so the input is filled in memory starting from 101.
M T R A C K \0
The third input starts filling from the location 102
M T V I R T U A L \0
This is the final value stored .
The first printf prints the values at the position q, q+1 and q+2 = M T V
The second printf prints three strings starting from locations q, q+1, q+2
i.e MTVIRTUAL, TVIRTUAL and VIRTUAL.
51) main( )
{
void *vp;
char ch = ‘g’, *cp = “goofy”;
int j = 20;
vp = &ch;
printf(“%c”, *(char *)vp);
vp = &j;
printf(“%d”,*(int *)vp);
vp = cp;
printf(“%s”,(char *)vp + 3);
}
Answer:
g20fy
Explanation:
Since a void pointer is used it can be type casted to any other type pointer. vp = &ch stores address of char ch and the next statement prints the value stored in vp after type casting it to the proper data type pointer. the output is ‘g’. Similarly the output from second printf is ‘20’. The third printf statement type casts it to print the string from the 4th value hence the output is ‘fy’.
52) main ( )
{
static char *s[ ] = {“black”, “white”, “yellow”, “violet”};
char **ptr[ ] = {s+3, s+2, s+1, s}, ***p;
p = ptr;
**++p;
printf(“%s”,*--*++p + 3);
}
Answer:
ck
Explanation:
In this problem we have an array of char pointers pointing to start of 4 strings. Then we have ptr which is a pointer to a pointer of type char and a variable p which is a pointer to a pointer to a pointer of type char. p hold the initial value of ptr, i.e. p = s+3. The next statement increment value in p by 1 , thus now value of p = s+2. In the printf statement the expression is evaluated *++p causes gets value s+1 then the pre decrement is executed and we get s+1 – 1 = s . the indirection operator now gets the value from the array of s and adds 3 to the starting address. The string is printed starting from this position. Thus, the output is ‘ck’.
53) main()
{
int i, n;
char *x = “girl”;
n = strlen(x);
*x = x[n];
for(i=0; i
printf(“%s\n”,x);
x++;
}
}
Answer:
(blank space)
irl
rl
l
Explanation:
Here a string (a pointer to char) is initialized with a value “girl”. The strlen function returns the length of the string, thus n has a value 4. The next statement assigns value at the nth location (‘\0’) to the first location. Now the string becomes “\0irl” . Now the printf statement prints the string after each iteration it increments it starting position. Loop starts from 0 to 4. The first time x[0] = ‘\0’ hence it prints nothing and pointer value is incremented. The second time it prints from x[1] i.e “irl” and the third time it prints “rl” and the last time it prints “l” and the loop terminates.
54) int i,j;
for(i=0;i<=10;i++)
{
j+=5;
assert(i<5);
}
Answer:
Runtime error: Abnormal program termination.
assert failed (i<5),,
Explanation:
asserts are used during debugging to make sure that certain conditions are satisfied. If assertion fails, the program will terminate reporting the same. After debugging use,
#undef NDEBUG
and this will disable all the assertions from the source code. Assertion
is a good debugging tool to make use of.
55) main()
{
int i=-1;
+i;
printf("i = %d, +i = %d \n",i,+i);
}
Answer:
i = -1, +i = -1
Explanation:
Unary + is the only dummy operator in C. Where-ever it comes you can just ignore it just because it has no effect in the expressions (hence the name dummy operator).
56) What are the files which are automatically opened when a C file is executed?
Answer:
stdin, stdout, stderr (standard input,standard output,standard error).
57) what will be the position of the file marker?
a: fseek(ptr,0,SEEK_SET);
b: fseek(ptr,0,SEEK_CUR);
Answer :
a: The SEEK_SET sets the file position marker to the starting of the file.
b: The SEEK_CUR sets the file position marker to the current position
of the file.
58) main()
{
char name[10],s[12];
scanf(" \"%[^\"]\"",s);
}
How scanf will execute?
Answer:
First it checks for the leading white space and discards it.Then it matches with a quotation mark and then it reads all character upto another quotation mark.
59) What is the problem with the following code segment?
while ((fgets(receiving array,50,file_ptr)) != EOF)
;
Answer & Explanation:
fgets returns a pointer. So the correct end of file check is checking for != NULL.
60) main()
{
main();
}
Answer:
Runtime error : Stack overflow.
Explanation:
main function calls itself again and again. Each time the function is called its return address is stored in the call stack. Since there is no condition to terminate the function call, the call stack overflows at runtime. So it terminates the program and results in an error.
61) main()
{
char *cptr,c;
void *vptr,v;
c=10; v=0;
cptr=&c; vptr=&v;
printf("%c%v",c,v);
}
Answer:
Compiler error (at line number 4): size of v is Unknown.
Explanation:
You can create a variable of type void * but not of type void, since void is an empty type. In the second line you are creating variable vptr of type void * and v
It is assumed that,
Ø Programs run under DOS environment,
Ø The underlying machine is an x86 system,
Ø Program is compiled using Turbo C/C++ compiler.
The program output may depend on the information based on this assumptions (for example sizeof(int) == 2 may be assumed).
Predict the output or error(s) for the following:
1. void main()
{
int const * p=5;
printf("%d",++(*p));
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Cannot modify a constant value.
Explanation:
p is a pointer to a "constant integer". But we tried to change the value of the "constant integer".
2. main()
{
char s[ ]="man";
int i;
for(i=0;s[ i ];i++)
printf("\n%c%c%c%c",s[ i ],*(s+i),*(i+s),i[s]);
}
Answer:
mmmm
aaaa
nnnn
Explanation:
s[i], *(i+s), *(s+i), i[s] are all different ways of expressing the same idea. Generally array name is the base address for that array. Here s is the base address. i is the index number/displacement from the base address. So, indirecting it with * is same as s[i]. i[s] may be surprising. But in the case of C it is same as s[i].
3. main()
{
float me = 1.1;
double you = 1.1;
if(me==you)
printf("I love U");
else
printf("I hate U");
}
Answer:
I hate U
Explanation:
For floating point numbers (float, double, long double) the values cannot be predicted exactly. Depending on the number of bytes, the precession with of the value represented varies. Float takes 4 bytes and long double takes 10 bytes. So float stores 0.9 with less precision than long double.
Rule of Thumb:
Never compare or at-least be cautious when using floating point numbers with relational operators (== , >, <, <=, >=,!= ) .
4. main()
{
static int var = 5;
printf("%d ",var--);
if(var)
main();
}
Answer:
5 4 3 2 1
Explanation:
When static storage class is given, it is initialized once. The change in the value of a static variable is retained even between the function calls. Main is also treated like any other ordinary function, which can be called recursively.
5. main()
{
int c[ ]={2.8,3.4,4,6.7,5};
int j,*p=c,*q=c;
for(j=0;j<5;j++) {
printf(" %d ",*c);
++q; }
for(j=0;j<5;j++){
printf(" %d ",*p);
++p; }
}
Answer:
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 6 5
Explanation:
Initially pointer c is assigned to both p and q. In the first loop, since only q is incremented and not c , the value 2 will be printed 5 times. In second loop p itself is incremented. So the values 2 3 4 6 5 will be printed.
6. main()
{
extern int i;
i=20;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
Linker Error : Undefined symbol '_i'
Explanation:
extern storage class in the following declaration,
extern int i;
specifies to the compiler that the memory for i is allocated in some other program and that address will be given to the current program at the time of linking. But linker finds that no other variable of name i is available in any other program with memory space allocated for it. Hence a linker error has occurred .
7. main()
{
int i=-1,j=-1,k=0,l=2,m;
m=i++&&j++&&k++||l++;
printf("%d %d %d %d %d",i,j,k,l,m);
}
Answer:
0 0 1 3 1
Explanation :
Logical operations always give a result of 1 or 0 . And also the logical AND (&&) operator has higher priority over the logical OR (||) operator. So the expression ‘i++ && j++ && k++’ is executed first. The result of this expression is 0 (-1 && -1 && 0 = 0). Now the expression is 0 || 2 which evaluates to 1 (because OR operator always gives 1 except for ‘0 || 0’ combination- for which it gives 0). So the value of m is 1. The values of other variables are also incremented by 1.
8. main()
{
char *p;
printf("%d %d ",sizeof(*p),sizeof(p));
}
Answer:
1 2
Explanation:
The sizeof() operator gives the number of bytes taken by its operand. P is a character pointer, which needs one byte for storing its value (a character). Hence sizeof(*p) gives a value of 1. Since it needs two bytes to store the address of the character pointer sizeof(p) gives 2.
9. main()
{
int i=3;
switch(i)
{
default:printf("zero");
case 1: printf("one");
break;
case 2:printf("two");
break;
case 3: printf("three");
break;
}
}
Answer :
three
Explanation :
The default case can be placed anywhere inside the loop. It is executed only when all other cases doesn't match.
10. main()
{
printf("%x",-1<<4);
}
Answer:
fff0
Explanation :
-1 is internally represented as all 1's. When left shifted four times the least significant 4 bits are filled with 0's.The %x format specifier specifies that the integer value be printed as a hexadecimal value.
11. main()
{
char string[]="Hello World";
display(string);
}
void display(char *string)
{
printf("%s",string);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error : Type mismatch in redeclaration of function display
Explanation :
In third line, when the function display is encountered, the compiler doesn't know anything about the function display. It assumes the arguments and return types to be integers, (which is the default type). When it sees the actual function display, the arguments and type contradicts with what it has assumed previously. Hence a compile time error occurs.
12. main()
{
int c=- -2;
printf("c=%d",c);
}
Answer:
c=2;
Explanation:
Here unary minus (or negation) operator is used twice. Same maths rules applies, ie. minus * minus= plus.
Note:
However you cannot give like --2. Because -- operator can only be applied to variables as a decrement operator (eg., i--). 2 is a constant and not a variable.
13. #define int char
main()
{
int i=65;
printf("sizeof(i)=%d",sizeof(i));
}
Answer:
sizeof(i)=1
Explanation:
Since the #define replaces the string int by the macro char
14. main()
{
int i=10;
i=!i>14;
Printf ("i=%d",i);
}
Answer:
i=0
Explanation:
In the expression !i>14 , NOT (!) operator has more precedence than ‘ >’ symbol. ! is a unary logical operator. !i (!10) is 0 (not of true is false). 0>14 is false (zero).
15. #include
main()
{
char s[]={'a','b','c','\n','c','\0'};
char *p,*str,*str1;
p=&s[3];
str=p;
str1=s;
printf("%d",++*p + ++*str1-32);
}
Answer:
77
Explanation:
p is pointing to character '\n'. str1 is pointing to character 'a' ++*p. "p is pointing to '\n' and that is incremented by one." the ASCII value of '\n' is 10, which is then incremented to 11. The value of ++*p is 11. ++*str1, str1 is pointing to 'a' that is incremented by 1 and it becomes 'b'. ASCII value of 'b' is 98.
Now performing (11 + 98 – 32), we get 77("M");
So we get the output 77 :: "M" (Ascii is 77).
16. #include
main()
{
int a[2][2][2] = { {10,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8} };
int *p,*q;
p=&a[2][2][2];
*q=***a;
printf("%d----%d",*p,*q);
}
Answer:
SomeGarbageValue---1
Explanation:
p=&a[2][2][2] you declare only two 2D arrays, but you are trying to access the third 2D(which you are not declared) it will print garbage values. *q=***a starting address of a is assigned integer pointer. Now q is pointing to starting address of a. If you print *q, it will print first element of 3D array.
17. #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x=3;
char name[]="hello";
};
struct xx *s;
printf("%d",s->x);
printf("%s",s->name);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
You should not initialize variables in declaration
18. #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x;
struct yy
{
char s;
struct xx *p;
};
struct yy *q;
};
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
The structure yy is nested within structure xx. Hence, the elements are of yy are to be accessed through the instance of structure xx, which needs an instance of yy to be known. If the instance is created after defining the structure the compiler will not know about the instance relative to xx. Hence for nested structure yy you have to declare member.
19. main()
{
printf("\nab");
printf("\bsi");
printf("\rha");
}
Answer:
hai
Explanation:
\n - newline
\b - backspace
\r - linefeed
20. main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d%d%d%d%d%d",i++,i--,++i,--i,i);
}
Answer:
45545
Explanation:
The arguments in a function call are pushed into the stack from left to right. The evaluation is by popping out from the stack. and the evaluation is from right to left, hence the result.
21. #define square(x) x*x
main()
{
int i;
i = 64/square(4);
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
64
Explanation:
the macro call square(4) will substituted by 4*4 so the expression becomes i = 64/4*4 . Since / and * has equal priority the expression will be evaluated as (64/4)*4 i.e. 16*4 = 64
22. main()
{
char *p="hai friends",*p1;
p1=p;
while(*p!='\0') ++*p++;
printf("%s %s",p,p1);
}
Answer:
ibj!gsjfoet
Explanation:
++*p++ will be parse in the given order
Ø *p that is value at the location currently pointed by p will be taken
Ø ++*p the retrieved value will be incremented
Ø when ; is encountered the location will be incremented that is p++ will be executed
Hence, in the while loop initial value pointed by p is ‘h’, which is changed to ‘i’ by executing ++*p and pointer moves to point, ‘a’ which is similarly changed to ‘b’ and so on. Similarly blank space is converted to ‘!’. Thus, we obtain value in p becomes “ibj!gsjfoet” and since p reaches ‘\0’ and p1 points to p thus p1doesnot print anything.
23. #include
#define a 10
main()
{
#define a 50
printf("%d",a);
}
Answer:
50
Explanation:
The preprocessor directives can be redefined anywhere in the program. So the most recently assigned value will be taken.
24. #define clrscr() 100
main()
{
clrscr();
printf("%d\n",clrscr());
}
Answer:
100
Explanation:
Preprocessor executes as a seperate pass before the execution of the compiler. So textual replacement of clrscr() to 100 occurs.The input program to compiler looks like this :
main()
{
100;
printf("%d\n",100);
}
Note:
100; is an executable statement but with no action. So it doesn't give any problem
25. main()
{
printf("%p",main);
}
Answer:
Some address will be printed.
Explanation:
Function names are just addresses (just like array names are addresses).
main() is also a function. So the address of function main will be printed. %p in printf specifies that the argument is an address. They are printed as hexadecimal numbers.
27) main()
{
clrscr();
}
clrscr();
Answer:
No output/error
Explanation:
The first clrscr() occurs inside a function. So it becomes a function call. In the second clrscr(); is a function declaration (because it is not inside any function).
28) enum colors {BLACK,BLUE,GREEN}
main()
{
printf("%d..%d..%d",BLACK,BLUE,GREEN);
return(1);
}
Answer:
0..1..2
Explanation:
enum assigns numbers starting from 0, if not explicitly defined.
29) void main()
{
char far *farther,*farthest;
printf("%d..%d",sizeof(farther),sizeof(farthest));
}
Answer:
4..2
Explanation:
the second pointer is of char type and not a far pointer
30) main()
{
int i=400,j=300;
printf("%d..%d");
}
Answer:
400..300
Explanation:
printf takes the values of the first two assignments of the program. Any number of printf's may be given. All of them take only the first two values. If more number of assignments given in the program,then printf will take garbage values.
31) main()
{
char *p;
p="Hello";
printf("%c\n",*&*p);
}
Answer:
H
Explanation:
* is a dereference operator & is a reference operator. They can be applied any number of times provided it is meaningful. Here p points to the first character in the string "Hello". *p dereferences it and so its value is H. Again & references it to an address and * dereferences it to the value H.
32) main()
{
int i=1;
while (i<=5)
{
printf("%d",i);
if (i>2)
goto here;
i++;
}
}
fun()
{
here:
printf("PP");
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Undefined label 'here' in function main
Explanation:
Labels have functions scope, in other words The scope of the labels is limited to functions . The label 'here' is available in function fun() Hence it is not visible in function main.
33) main()
{
static char names[5][20]={"pascal","ada","cobol","fortran","perl"};
int i;
char *t;
t=names[3];
names[3]=names[4];
names[4]=t;
for (i=0;i<=4;i++)
printf("%s",names[i]);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Lvalue required in function main
Explanation:
Array names are pointer constants. So it cannot be modified.
34) void main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d",i++ + ++i);
}
Answer:
Output Cannot be predicted exactly.
Explanation:
Side effects are involved in the evaluation of i
35) void main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d",i+++++i);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
The expression i+++++i is parsed as i ++ ++ + i which is an illegal combination of operators.
36) #include
main()
{
int i=1,j=2;
switch(i)
{
case 1: printf("GOOD");
break;
case j: printf("BAD");
break;
}
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: Constant expression required in function main.
Explanation:
The case statement can have only constant expressions (this implies that we cannot use variable names directly so an error).
Note:
Enumerated types can be used in case statements.
37) main()
{
int i;
printf("%d",scanf("%d",&i)); // value 10 is given as input here
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
Scanf returns number of items successfully read and not 1/0. Here 10 is given as input which should have been scanned successfully. So number of items read is 1.
38) #define f(g,g2) g##g2
main()
{
int var12=100;
printf("%d",f(var,12));
}
Answer:
100
39) main()
{
int i=0;
for(;i++;printf("%d",i)) ;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
before entering into the for loop the checking condition is "evaluated". Here it evaluates to 0 (false) and comes out of the loop, and i is incremented (note the semicolon after the for loop).
40) #include
main()
{
char s[]={'a','b','c','\n','c','\0'};
char *p,*str,*str1;
p=&s[3];
str=p;
str1=s;
printf("%d",++*p + ++*str1-32);
}
Answer:
M
Explanation:
p is pointing to character '\n'.str1 is pointing to character 'a' ++*p meAnswer:"p is pointing to '\n' and that is incremented by one." the ASCII value of '\n' is 10. then it is incremented to 11. the value of ++*p is 11. ++*str1 meAnswer:"str1 is pointing to 'a' that is incremented by 1 and it becomes 'b'. ASCII value of 'b' is 98. both 11 and 98 is added and result is subtracted from 32.
i.e. (11+98-32)=77("M");
41) #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x=3;
char name[]="hello";
};
struct xx *s=malloc(sizeof(struct xx));
printf("%d",s->x);
printf("%s",s->name);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
Initialization should not be done for structure members inside the structure declaration
42) #include
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x;
struct yy
{
char s;
struct xx *p;
};
struct yy *q;
};
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
in the end of nested structure yy a member have to be declared.
43) main()
{
extern int i;
i=20;
printf("%d",sizeof(i));
}
Answer:
Linker error: undefined symbol '_i'.
Explanation:
extern declaration specifies that the variable i is defined somewhere else. The compiler passes the external variable to be resolved by the linker. So compiler doesn't find an error. During linking the linker searches for the definition of i. Since it is not found the linker flags an error.
44) main()
{
printf("%d", out);
}
int out=100;
Answer:
Compiler error: undefined symbol out in function main.
Explanation:
The rule is that a variable is available for use from the point of declaration. Even though a is a global variable, it is not available for main. Hence an error.
45) main()
{
extern out;
printf("%d", out);
}
int out=100;
Answer:
100
Explanation:
This is the correct way of writing the previous program.
46) main()
{
show();
}
void show()
{
printf("I'm the greatest");
}
Answer:
Compier error: Type mismatch in redeclaration of show.
Explanation:
When the compiler sees the function show it doesn't know anything about it. So the default return type (ie, int) is assumed. But when compiler sees the actual definition of show mismatch occurs since it is declared as void. Hence the error.
The solutions are as follows:
1. declare void show() in main() .
2. define show() before main().
3. declare extern void show() before the use of show().
47) main( )
{
int a[2][3][2] = {{{2,4},{7,8},{3,4}},{{2,2},{2,3},{3,4}}};
printf(“%u %u %u %d \n”,a,*a,**a,***a);
printf(“%u %u %u %d \n”,a+1,*a+1,**a+1,***a+1);
}
Answer:
100, 100, 100, 2
114, 104, 102, 3
Explanation:
The given array is a 3-D one. It can also be viewed as a 1-D array.
2 4 7 8 3 4 2 2 2 3 3 4
100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122
thus, for the first printf statement a, *a, **a give address of first element . since the indirection ***a gives the value. Hence, the first line of the output.
for the second printf a+1 increases in the third dimension thus points to value at 114, *a+1 increments in second dimension thus points to 104, **a +1 increments the first dimension thus points to 102 and ***a+1 first gets the value at first location and then increments it by 1. Hence, the output.
48) main( )
{
int a[ ] = {10,20,30,40,50},j,*p;
for(j=0; j<5; j++)
{
printf(“%d” ,*a);
a++;
}
p = a;
for(j=0; j<5; j++)
{
printf(“%d ” ,*p);
p++;
}
}
Answer:
Compiler error: lvalue required.
Explanation:
Error is in line with statement a++. The operand must be an lvalue and may be of any of scalar type for the any operator, array name only when subscripted is an lvalue. Simply array name is a non-modifiable lvalue.
49) main( )
{
static int a[ ] = {0,1,2,3,4};
int *p[ ] = {a,a+1,a+2,a+3,a+4};
int **ptr = p;
ptr++;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
*ptr++;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
*++ptr;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
++*ptr;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
}
Answer:
111
222
333
344
Explanation:
Let us consider the array and the two pointers with some address
a
0 1 2 3 4
100 102 104 106 108
p
100 102 104 106 108
1000 1002 1004 1006 1008
ptr
1000
2000
After execution of the instruction ptr++ value in ptr becomes 1002, if scaling factor for integer is 2 bytes. Now ptr – p is value in ptr – starting location of array p, (1002 – 1000) / (scaling factor) = 1, *ptr – a = value at address pointed by ptr – starting value of array a, 1002 has a value 102 so the value is (102 – 100)/(scaling factor) = 1, **ptr is the value stored in the location pointed by the pointer of ptr = value pointed by value pointed by 1002 = value pointed by 102 = 1. Hence the output of the firs printf is 1, 1, 1.
After execution of *ptr++ increments value of the value in ptr by scaling factor, so it becomes1004. Hence, the outputs for the second printf are ptr – p = 2, *ptr – a = 2, **ptr = 2.
After execution of *++ptr increments value of the value in ptr by scaling factor, so it becomes1004. Hence, the outputs for the third printf are ptr – p = 3, *ptr – a = 3, **ptr = 3.
After execution of ++*ptr value in ptr remains the same, the value pointed by the value is incremented by the scaling factor. So the value in array p at location 1006 changes from 106 10 108,. Hence, the outputs for the fourth printf are ptr – p = 1006 – 1000 = 3, *ptr – a = 108 – 100 = 4, **ptr = 4.
50) main( )
{
char *q;
int j;
for (j=0; j<3; j++) scanf(“%s” ,(q+j));
for (j=0; j<3; j++) printf(“%c” ,*(q+j));
for (j=0; j<3; j++) printf(“%s” ,(q+j));
}
Explanation:
Here we have only one pointer to type char and since we take input in the same pointer thus we keep writing over in the same location, each time shifting the pointer value by 1. Suppose the inputs are MOUSE, TRACK and VIRTUAL. Then for the first input suppose the pointer starts at location 100 then the input one is stored as
M O U S E \0
When the second input is given the pointer is incremented as j value becomes 1, so the input is filled in memory starting from 101.
M T R A C K \0
The third input starts filling from the location 102
M T V I R T U A L \0
This is the final value stored .
The first printf prints the values at the position q, q+1 and q+2 = M T V
The second printf prints three strings starting from locations q, q+1, q+2
i.e MTVIRTUAL, TVIRTUAL and VIRTUAL.
51) main( )
{
void *vp;
char ch = ‘g’, *cp = “goofy”;
int j = 20;
vp = &ch;
printf(“%c”, *(char *)vp);
vp = &j;
printf(“%d”,*(int *)vp);
vp = cp;
printf(“%s”,(char *)vp + 3);
}
Answer:
g20fy
Explanation:
Since a void pointer is used it can be type casted to any other type pointer. vp = &ch stores address of char ch and the next statement prints the value stored in vp after type casting it to the proper data type pointer. the output is ‘g’. Similarly the output from second printf is ‘20’. The third printf statement type casts it to print the string from the 4th value hence the output is ‘fy’.
52) main ( )
{
static char *s[ ] = {“black”, “white”, “yellow”, “violet”};
char **ptr[ ] = {s+3, s+2, s+1, s}, ***p;
p = ptr;
**++p;
printf(“%s”,*--*++p + 3);
}
Answer:
ck
Explanation:
In this problem we have an array of char pointers pointing to start of 4 strings. Then we have ptr which is a pointer to a pointer of type char and a variable p which is a pointer to a pointer to a pointer of type char. p hold the initial value of ptr, i.e. p = s+3. The next statement increment value in p by 1 , thus now value of p = s+2. In the printf statement the expression is evaluated *++p causes gets value s+1 then the pre decrement is executed and we get s+1 – 1 = s . the indirection operator now gets the value from the array of s and adds 3 to the starting address. The string is printed starting from this position. Thus, the output is ‘ck’.
53) main()
{
int i, n;
char *x = “girl”;
n = strlen(x);
*x = x[n];
for(i=0; i
printf(“%s\n”,x);
x++;
}
}
Answer:
(blank space)
irl
rl
l
Explanation:
Here a string (a pointer to char) is initialized with a value “girl”. The strlen function returns the length of the string, thus n has a value 4. The next statement assigns value at the nth location (‘\0’) to the first location. Now the string becomes “\0irl” . Now the printf statement prints the string after each iteration it increments it starting position. Loop starts from 0 to 4. The first time x[0] = ‘\0’ hence it prints nothing and pointer value is incremented. The second time it prints from x[1] i.e “irl” and the third time it prints “rl” and the last time it prints “l” and the loop terminates.
54) int i,j;
for(i=0;i<=10;i++)
{
j+=5;
assert(i<5);
}
Answer:
Runtime error: Abnormal program termination.
assert failed (i<5),
Explanation:
asserts are used during debugging to make sure that certain conditions are satisfied. If assertion fails, the program will terminate reporting the same. After debugging use,
#undef NDEBUG
and this will disable all the assertions from the source code. Assertion
is a good debugging tool to make use of.
55) main()
{
int i=-1;
+i;
printf("i = %d, +i = %d \n",i,+i);
}
Answer:
i = -1, +i = -1
Explanation:
Unary + is the only dummy operator in C. Where-ever it comes you can just ignore it just because it has no effect in the expressions (hence the name dummy operator).
56) What are the files which are automatically opened when a C file is executed?
Answer:
stdin, stdout, stderr (standard input,standard output,standard error).
57) what will be the position of the file marker?
a: fseek(ptr,0,SEEK_SET);
b: fseek(ptr,0,SEEK_CUR);
Answer :
a: The SEEK_SET sets the file position marker to the starting of the file.
b: The SEEK_CUR sets the file position marker to the current position
of the file.
58) main()
{
char name[10],s[12];
scanf(" \"%[^\"]\"",s);
}
How scanf will execute?
Answer:
First it checks for the leading white space and discards it.Then it matches with a quotation mark and then it reads all character upto another quotation mark.
59) What is the problem with the following code segment?
while ((fgets(receiving array,50,file_ptr)) != EOF)
;
Answer & Explanation:
fgets returns a pointer. So the correct end of file check is checking for != NULL.
60) main()
{
main();
}
Answer:
Runtime error : Stack overflow.
Explanation:
main function calls itself again and again. Each time the function is called its return address is stored in the call stack. Since there is no condition to terminate the function call, the call stack overflows at runtime. So it terminates the program and results in an error.
61) main()
{
char *cptr,c;
void *vptr,v;
c=10; v=0;
cptr=&c; vptr=&v;
printf("%c%v",c,v);
}
Answer:
Compiler error (at line number 4): size of v is Unknown.
Explanation:
You can create a variable of type void * but not of type void, since void is an empty type. In the second line you are creating variable vptr of type void * and v